Section 3 Bop Chap.09 Hvac System (new).pdf
This document was uploaded by user and they confirmed that they have the permission to share it. If you are author or own the copyright of this book, please report to us by using this DMCA report form. Report DMCA
Overview
Download & View Section 3 Bop Chap.09 Hvac System (new).pdf as PDF for free.
More details
- Words: 49,273
- Pages: 207
SARULLA GEOTHERMAL POWER PROJECT Operation and Maintenance Manual Section 3 Balance of Plant
Chapter 9
HVAC System
Volume II – Supplier’s O&M Manual Chapter 9 HVAC System
INDEX
1. PRECISION SPLIT AIR CONDITIONER & SPLIT AIR CONDITIONER(FLOOR TYPE)
2. SPLIT AIR CONDITIONER(WALL TYPE, CEILING TYPE)
3. AIR FILTER UNIT
4. VENTILATION FAN
5. ELECTRIC WATER HEATER
SARULLA GEOTHERMAL POWER PROJECT
1. PRECISION SPLIT AIR CONDITIONER & SPLIT AIR CONDITIONER(FLOOR TYPE)
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
INSTALLATION, OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR PRECISION AIR CONDITIONING UNIT & AIR CONDITIONING UNIT KITURAMI BUMYANG AIR CONDITIONING CO., LTD. ALL RIGHIT RESERVED.
1
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
TABLE OF CONTENTS 1.
INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................. 4
1.1.
OFFLOADING ................................................................................................................................................................... 4
1.2.
UNIT PROTECTION........................................................................................................................................................ 5
1.3.
UNIT STORAGE ............................................................................................................................................................... 5
1.4.
HANDLING ......................................................................................................................................................................... 5
2.
INSTALLATION................................................................................................... 8
2.1.
GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................................................... 8
2.2.
LOCATION.......................................................................................................................................................................... 8
2.3.
IMPORTANT CONSIDERATION ............................................................................................................................. 10
2.4.
SECTION-TO-SECTION JOINTS (IF NECESSARY) ...................................................................................... 10
2.5.
VIBRATION PROOF ..................................................................................................................................................... 10
2.6.
WEATHERPROOF UNITS ......................................................................................................................................... 11
2.7.
DUCTWORK CONNECTIONS ................................................................................................................................. 12
2.8.
PIPEWORK CONNECTIONS .................................................................................................................................... 12
2.9.
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS ................................................................................................................................ 16
2.10.
FINAL INSPECTION ..................................................................................................................................................... 18
3.
OPERATION...................................................................................................... 19
3.1.
GENERAL ......................................................................................................................................................................... 19
3.2.
CHECK OF SAFETY DEVICES ............................................................................................................................... 20
3.3.
OPERATING START .................................................................................................................................................... 20
3.4.
STOP, PAUSE AND RESTART AFTER LONG-TERM STOP .................................................................... 20
3.5.
HOW TO USE MICOM AND SET PROGRAMS (FOR SAC) ....................................................................... 21
3.5.4.
OPERATION DATA SETTING ................................................................................................................................. 27
4.
MAINTENANCE ................................................................................................ 34
4.1.
GENERAL ......................................................................................................................................................................... 34
4.2.
FANS ................................................................................................................................................................................... 34
2
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
4.3.
MOTORS ........................................................................................................................................................................... 37
4.4.
BEARINGS ....................................................................................................................................................................... 38
4.5.
FILTERS ............................................................................................................................................................................ 39
4.6.
COILS ................................................................................................................................................................................. 40
4.7.
HUMIDIFIERS .................................................................................................................................................................. 40
4.8.
DRAIN PAN ...................................................................................................................................................................... 40
4.9.
LEGIONELLA CHECK ................................................................................................................................................. 41
4.10.
ELECTRIC HEATERS .................................................................................................................................................. 41
4.11.
REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS ................................................................................................................................... 41
5.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE............................................................................ 45
5.1.
Routine maintenance ................................................................................................................................................. 45
5.2.
After 48 hours of operation ..................................................................................................................................... 46
5.3.
Weekly ................................................................................................................................................................................ 46
5.4.
Monthly .............................................................................................................................................................................. 46
5.5.
6 Monthly .......................................................................................................................................................................... 47
5.6.
Yearly .................................................................................................................................................................................. 47
6.
TROUBLE SHOOTING ..................................................................................... 48
6.1.
GENERAL FAULTS ...................................................................................................................................................... 48
6.2.
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM FAULTS................................................................................................................... 49
6.3.
PROBLEMS AND CAUSES ESPECIALLY IN CONDENSING PARTS(Compressor) .................... 50
3
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
1. INTRODUCTION WARNING Contains Refrigerant under Pressure! System contains oil and refrigerant under high pressure. Recover refrigerant to relieve pressure before opening the system. See unit nameplate for refrigerant type. Do not use non-approved refrigerants, refrigerant substitutes, or refrigerant additives. Failure to follow proper procedures or the use of non-approved refrigerants, refrigerant substitutes, or refrigerant additives could result in death or serious injury or equipment damage
WARNING Hazardous Voltage w/Capacitors! Disconnect all electric power, including remote disconnects and discharge all motor start/run capacitors before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout procedures to ensure the power cannot be inadvertently energized. Verify with an appropriate voltmeter that all capacitors have discharged. Failure to disconnect power and discharge capacitors before servicing could result in death or serious injury. 1.1. OFFLOADING The simplest method of offloading is by forklift truck. If this is not possible, unit sections should be lifted by crane, utilizing the lifting holes or lugs provided in the structural base frame. These are provided for the facility of inserting lifting shackles and nylon, web type slings. Kiturami-Bumyang Limited should be notified of the method of offloading in advance, as this affects the way in which the unit sections are loaded onto the delivery vehicle. 1) Keep sections upright – DO NOT TILT. 2) Timber packs should be utilized to avoid abrasion. Spacer bars should also be fitted, where necessary, to prevent the slings from slipping. 3) Where sections are fitted with a roof, additional timber packing must be utilized to ensure that the slings do not bear on the roof structure and that all forces are transferred to the section framework. Failure to utilize additional timber packing will result in damage to the roof.
4
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. INSTRUCTION
4) Ensure that sections are offloaded onto a prepared, flat sound base in an upright and level position. 5) To prevent damage it is recommended that the recipient obtain expert advice from a craneage specialist. 6) All lifting equipment is to be supplied by others 7) Avoid unnecessary jarring or rough handling. It is important not to drop the units as this may result in permanent damage to the internal components. 1.2. UNIT PROTECTION Unless otherwise specified, unit sections will be delivered to site covered in “shrink wrap” polythene, which should provide a more than adequate level of protection against inclement weather. Should alternative methods of unit protection be required, (i.e. timber or flame retardant materials), Kiturami-Bumyang Limited should be notified of the specific requirements at the pre-contract stage. The removal and disposal of all protective coverings is the responsibility of others.
WARNING Sharp edges and coil surfaces can cause personal injury. Wear protective gear and avoid contact with them. 1.3. UNIT STORAGE If the unit is not to be installed immediately, it should be stored in a clean, dry area. If stored externally, it should be adequately protected from the weather. During the storage period, it is advisable to slacken the drive belts and to rotate the fan shaft two or three turns every week. Before the unit is put into operation, the grease in the bearings should be checked for oxidation, a condition that is indicated by the grease hardening and taking on the appearance of varnish. Fan and motor pulleys should be checked periodically for rust and sprayed with penetrating oil as a rust preventative. In addition all dampers should be rotated and lubricated as necessary. 1.4. HANDLING Be careful to avoid rough handling of the unit. Do not push or pull the unit from anything other than the base.
5
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. INSTRUCTION
Block the pushing vehicle away from the unit to prevent damage to the sheet-metal cabinet and end frame. To alleviate the risk of damage, consideration should be given to using the services of Kiturami-Bumyang or a plant movement specialist when moving unit sections into their final position. The preferred method is by forklift or hand pump trucks with timber packing to avoid abrasion. Mechanical skates, rollers, pinch bars and jacks may also be utilized as necessary, but due care should always be taken to avoid damage to the unit sections and finishes. To lift the unit, lifting slots are provided in the base of the unit. Arrange spreader bars and cables to prevent damage to the condenser coils or cabinet (Fig. 1)
Forks to extend full width/length
(Fig.2 ) If necessary, 2 fork-lift should be used
(Fig. 3)
6
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. INSTRUCTION
7
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. INSTALLATION
2. INSTALLATION 2.1. GENERAL Units should be installed in accordance with good engineering practice and stand upright and level. The floor, foundation or supporting steelwork should be rigid, flat and level. The structure should be capable of supporting the weight of the unit including water or Steam in the coils. Kiturami-Bumyang Limited are not responsible for the coordination of the supporting steelwork, concrete plinths or the like. 2.2. LOCATION The unit should be located away from building flue stacks or exhaust ventilators to prevent possible reintroduction of contaminated air through the outside air intake. Ensure that provision has been made in the location of the unit to allow for the removal of all plant items for service and maintenance purposes. Sufficient room should be allowed for access to :
Fans & motors
Compressors
Electric heater batteries
Filters (bags, auto-rolls and panels)
Coils and evaporative humidifiers, including their removal for long term maintenance
Spray nozzles and pumps for spray coil modules
Heat exchangers
2.2.1. Especially for condensing unit (ACCU)
Avoid a high ambient temperature and install the unit in a place well ventilated.
Wind direction and longitudinal direction of the unit shall be parallel to minimize the negative influence to the performance. If the influence due to the wind is serious, a windscreen is recommended.
Low humidity
Avoid dusty place
Locate at a well-lighted place for easy inspection
If the space of the outdoor unit is smaller than the figure below, the discharged air may be bypassed affecting the performance
8
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. INSTALLATION
CAUTION If a sufficient space is not ensured, do not install the unit in a place deeper than the height of the unit. When locating the unit beside the higher wall than the unit height, the side space which is the sum of service space and 0.5 times of additional height should be procured. (Side space = 600 + additional height x 0.5) NO obstacles before the discharge of fans If MCCB is not applied to the unit, shut off switch is recommended to cut off the
1250
supply power at site.
600
1250
625
1250
1000
600
1250
1000
9
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. INSTALLATION
< Clearance in series installation>
2.3. IMPORTANT CONSIDERATION Sufficient clearance for U-traps on condensate drain and overflow connections should also be considered by the purchaser. 2.4. SECTION-TO-SECTION JOINTS (IF NECESSARY) Ensure that section or section assemblies are positioned in their proper sequence and that the unit handing and reference is correct. Sections should be accurately aligned and abutted prior to bolting together using the fixings and gaskets provided. All units have a corner gusset for bolting the sections together. On larger units an intermediate joining bracket is added. Incorrect installation will result in air leakage, air blow marks to the unit casings and unacceptable noise. It is recommended that a mastic seal be applied to the joint following assembly. 2.5. VIBRATION PROOF 2.5.1. VIBRATION PRO OF RUBBER PAD (STANDARD)
To prevent conveyance of the vibration of condensing unit to buildings, a vibration proof pad shall be installed as the figure below. Locate the unit on a proper place and anchor the unit tightly after drilling. When you anchor with a bolt and nut, give a gap to absorb the vibration.
10
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. INSTALLATION
Install a flexible tube during water piping and cable duct construction to prevent conveyance of the vibration.
2.5.2. VIBRATION PRO OF SPRING (OPTION)
If the unit is installed in the place that has a probability of vibration conveyance, installation of vibration proof spring is recommended.
During initial installation, put a shim or block, concerning variable spring height.
Remove the shim or block and adjust the height after completion of piping, wiring, refrigerant charging work etc.
2.6. WEATHERPROOF UNITS Units or assemblies are weatherproofed in the factory. Prior to final assembly of sectionalized units, the rubber gasket supplied should be fitted between the section-tosection joints . A suitable outer sealant should then be applied, followed by the fixing of roof strips, supplied loose, to ensure a fully weatherproof seal.
11
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. INSTALLATION
2.7. DUCTWORK CONNECTIONS Ductwork may be connected direct to the air handling unit, with the exception of units where external spring isolators require a flexible connection allowing a movement of 25 mm in any direction. Ductwork, steelwork and any other services should not be supported off the unit. 2.8. PIPEWORK CONNECTIONS 2.8.1. Genral Pipework should be connected in accordance with good engineering practice, and particular care taken when connection is made to screwed fittings on the unit. All pipework must be adequately supported to ensure that no additional load is borne by the unit. 2.8.2. Coil Connections Allowance for expansion and contraction should be made when making connections to coils. The bulb of the thermostatic expansion valve for direct expansion coils should be securely fitted to the suction line prior to any equalizing connection. 2.8.3. Condensate Drain Connections All condensate drain connections must be correctly trapped. Incorrect trapping can result in flooding within the unit and consequent flooding of the immediate area. Drain lines should be a minimum of the same size as the drain pan connection. They should pitch downwards continuously, with a minimum fall of 10mm per meter, to a tundish or other form of air break. There must always be an air break. All drain lines should be insulated where passing through any space where damage from condensation drip might occur. Fittings with cleanout plugs should be used at each change of direction in the drain line. Recommended condensate trap arrangements are shown in the diagrams. Condensate Drain Connections Draw-through, Negative Pressure:
12
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. INSTALLATION
Condensate Drain Connection Draw-through, Negative Pressure : "S" trap arrangement
MSP = Maximum suction pressure (Pa)
(Base on "dirty' filter condition)
X = (MSP / 10) + 50 (mm)
Draw-through, Positive Pressure : Running trap arrangement
MDP = Maximum discharge pressure (Pa)
(Base on "dirty' filter condition) X = 50 mm (minimum) Y = (MDP / 10) + 50 (mm)
Y = X / 2 (minimum) For Example if MSP = 500 Pa For Example if MSP = 1800 Pa
X = 50 mm
2.8.4. Especially for condensing unit (ACCU) A) LIQUID LINE
The liquid line should be protected from a heat source around by reducing the tube length to the minimum
If the tube length is long or the ambient temperature exceeds 40 ℃, liquid refrigerant evaporates (flash gas) and then the performance extremely decreases. Therefore perform the piping work with attention.
If several units more than one are installed, the piping work shall be performed with appropriate method using manifold, header or using both simultaneously.
13
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. INSTALLATION
1) INDOOR UNIT INSTALLED HIGHER THAN THE CONDENSING UNIT
To prevent high pressure drop caused on the liquid tube, the vertical length of the tube should not exceed 10m.
The pressure drop may be reduced by applying one step bigger tube than the liquid tube for normal condition.
2) INDOOR UNIT INSTALLED ON THE SAME LEVEL OF CONDENSING UNIT
To prevent the inflow of the refrigerant liquid into the evaporator during the unit shut off, a reverse roof shall be installed 2~3m higher than outlet of the condensing unit.
3) INDOOR UNIT INSTALLED LOWER THAN CONDENSING UNIT
To prevent the inflow of the refrigerant liquid into the evaporator during the unit shut off, a reverse roof shall be installed 3m higher than outlet of the condensing unit.
The pressure drop shall be reduced by applying one step bigger liquid tubes.
B) SUCTION LINE(GAS LINE)
A proper velocity (horizontal piping : more than 3.5 m/s / vertical piping : more than 6.0 m/s) shall be necessary to ensure that lubricant melted in the refrigerant gas returns to the compressor.
Install the horizontal piping higher than the unit cooler for preventing the reverse flow of the lubricant except during pump down.
If the horizontal is long, a proper incline (about 5/1,000) shall be necessary to ensure the lubricant return.
Construct the piping not to cause serious pressure drop and noise.
Do not construct a trap at inlet of the condensing unit since it causes a liquid compression.
To prevent high pressure drop caused on the liquid tube, the vertical length of the tube shall be at most 10m.
The pressure drop may be reduced by applying one step bigger tube than the liquid tube for normal condition.
To prevent the inflow of the refrigerant liquid into the evaporator during the unit shut off, a reverse roof shall be installed 2~3m higher than outlet of the
14
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. INSTALLATION
condensing unit. 1) INDOOR UNIT INSTALLED HIGHER THAN THE CONDENSING UNIT
To prevent the inflow of the refrigerant liquid into the evaporator during the unit shut off, a reverse roof shall be installed at least 1m higher than outlet of the unit cooler.
2) INDOOR UNIT INSTALLED ON THE SAME LEVEL OF CONDENSING UNIT
To prevent the inflow of the refrigerant liquid into the evaporator during the unit shut off, a reverse roof shall be installed at least 1m higher than outlet of the unit cooler.
3) INDOOR UNIT INSTALLED LOWER THAN CONDENSING UNIT
Make a minimum trap at the outlet of the unit cooler since a huge trap causes oil hammer.
If the vertical length of the piping is long, make a trap at most 10 long to prevent m trap.
2.8.5. Refrigerant piping work only for Split Type
The refrigerant piping shall be of simple and strait structure.
The piping shall be designed with the consideration of piping expansion/contraction and vibration.
A structure that helps oil return.
The liquid piping should be protected from a heat source around by reducing the tube length to the minimum. If the tube length is long or the ambient temperature exceeds 40 ℃, liquid refrigerant evaporates (flash gas) and then the performance extremely decreases. Therefore perform the piping work with attention.
Generally, the installation method of the air-cooled condensing unit is sorted as the following.
15
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. INSTALLATION
(A)
(B)
A) OUTDOOR UNIT INSTALLED HIGHER THAN INDOOR UNIT 1) When the elevation difference between the outdoor and indoor unit is more than 2.5m, a trap should be installed and the piping should be inclined toward the condenser (downwardly). 2) The elevation difference should not exceed 10m to prevent the oil return problem and noise. B) OUTDOOR UNIT INSTALLED HIGHER THAN INDOOR UNIT 1) The indoor unit should be installed within 8m above from the outdoor unit. If the elevation difference exceeds the limit (8m), a special heat exchanger should be applied because the refrigerant evaporates. 2) Locate the receiver tank beside the indoor unit. 2.9. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS Electrical components should be connected to the supply in accordance with the Institution of Electrical Engineers (I.E.E.) Regulations and local by-laws where appropriate. In the case of three phase motors ensure that the rotation of the motor corresponds with the direction shown by the arrow on the fan frame. Be sure that the electrical connection to the fan motor is made using flexible cabling/containment materials, to permit fan belt adjustment and also to allow for movement of the antivibration mounts. If safety-isolating switches are fitted to access doors they must be
16
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. INSTALLATION
wired through the appropriate motor control circuits. Provision should be made for the installation of a fan run on control to prevent residual heat emanating from the heating plant damaging components such as the fan, motor, filters etc., when the unit is shut down. This objective may be achieved by:
A thermostat controlling the fan and ensuring that the temperature within the unit does not rise above 45°C in the event that air ceases to flow
Utilizing a delay timer
Airflow switches
WARNING Grounding Required! All field-installed wiring must be completed by qualified personnel. All field-installed wiring must comply with NEC and applicable local codes. Failure to follow these instructions could result in death or serious injuries 2.9.1. Field Power Wiring Wiring must comply with all applicable codes and ordinances. The warranty is voided if wiring is not in accordance with these specifications. An open fuse, tripped circuit breaker, or overload. Before replacing a fuse, circuit breaker or restarting a compressor or fan motor, identify the trouble and correct. According to the National Electrical Code, a disconnecting means shall be located within sight of and readily accessible from the air conditioning equipment. 2.9.2. Field Control Wiring Unit controllers are available with several control arrangements which may require low voltage field wiring. Wiring must comply with applicable codes and ordinances. The warranty is voided if wiring is not in accordance with these specifications. 2.9.3. Motor Wiring Diagrams Typical connection diagrams are shown below : -
17
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. INSTALLATION
2.10. FINAL INSPECTION After installation of the unit, a thorough inspection should be carried out. This should include inspecting the inside of the unit and removing debris and tools, which may have been left behind by on site contractors. Fan impellers, scrolls and outlets should similarly be inspected. Ensure that transit protection fittings are removed from the fan/motor base frame, all bearings are adequately greased and that all traps are primed. Replace any panels, which may have been removed and close all access doors, ensuring that the door sealing gaskets have not been damaged.
18
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. OPERATION
3. OPERATION 3.1. GENERAL The unit is supplied with access doors, which should be closed whenever the unit is in operation.
WARNING Electric shock and moving machinery hazard. Can cause severe equipment damage, personal injury, or death. Disconnect and tag out all electrical power before servicing this equipment. All start-up and service work must be performed only by trained, experienced technicians familiar with the hazards of working on this type of equipment. Note that the motor and drive are designed to operate against a given system resistance. If the system is not complete or access doors and panels are open, the motor rating will be exceeded and damage to the motor may occur. Do not operate fan motors in an overload amperage condition. Commissioning & Start-up Checklist
Unit received undamaged.
Equipment received as ordered.
Unit positioned and assembled in accordance with installation instructions.
Fan base shipping restraints removed.
Anti-vibration mounts adjusted.
Check electrical supply voltage.
Check tightness of all electrical connections.
Check alignment of fan and motor pulleys.
Check taper lock bushes are tight.
Check fan belt tension.
Check any additional bearings and couplings where fitted.
Manually rotate fan impellers and motors to ensure freedom of movement.
Check and prime condensate drain traps.
Check all filters are fitted.
Energise momentarily to check correct fan rotation.
Check that all control system components, such as fan run on timers, airflow switches, etc., are wired correctly.
19
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. OPERATION
Check control damper operation
Check that ductwork is complete and that any fire dampers installed downstream of the fan are open.
Check access panels, doors are fitted and secure.
Check all shaft bearings and belt tension after 24 hours of operation
Check fan motor current draw
Check tightness of all electrical connections.
Review the equipment and service literature, the sequences of operation, and the wiring diagrams to become familiar with the functions and purposes of the controls and devices.
3.2. CHECK OF SAFETY DEVICES 1) Check the set of the pressure switch, freezing protection switch, EOCR,
fusible plug, overheat protector of discharge gas etc. 2) Check the set of return value. (High/low pressure switch, EOCR is manually
returned and the others are returns to normal operation automatically if the caused of problem is removed.)
3.3. OPERATING START 1) Supply power to the units 2) Check the select switch position at Auto/Manual. If there is no select switch,
consider as Auto(control in HCP, units run with remote signal). 3) If there is RUN switch like as S/A FAN RUN, push the switch on. 4) Start units using MICOM 5) For manual running is possible also using MICOM. 6) Check if an abnormal sound or vibration is occurred while running. 7) Check all status lamps are turned on correctly and any alarm lamp is turned on. 8) Check the voltage and current. 9) Check if the safety devices operate properly. 10) Check the operation condition 30 minutes later after starting the operation. 3.4. STOP, PAUSE AND RESTART AFTER LONG-TERM STOP 3.4.1. STOP. Stop the unit by HCP remote signal, by using MICOM or by pressing “OFF” or “STOP” button if it is.
20
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. OPERATION
Stop running by pressing a stop(or off) button. After a complete stop of PAC running. 3.4.2. PAUSE
When the condensing unit is paused for a long time, the piping and the unit should not stored under pressing. Because it causes unnecessary loading to the unit and the refrigerant may be leaked out. Therefore, for the long term of operation pause, the managements below are required. 1) Pump down the refrigerant into the condenser or receiver tank 2) Pay attention to maintain the low pressure above 50 kPa. Because, if the internal pressure of the unit is lower than the atmospheric pressure, the air enter into the unit though any leak. 3) Close all the openings completely after the pump down. Pay attention to
prevent liquid seal. 4) Cut off the power supply. 5) Check if there is a leak in the piping system, and repair damaged part. 3.4.3. RESTART AFTER LONG-TERM STOP
When operate the unit after long term of shut down or repair, find the leakage on each part and repair. And check the contamination of evaporator and clean it if necessary 3.5. HOW TO USE MICOM AND SET PROGRAMS (FOR SAC) 3.5.1. DDC-400R MICOM CONTROLLER
Out View of Micom Controller DDC-400R(Body) & Display(SM-4000T)
< Main Body (DDC-400R) >
21
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. OPERATION
< Display (SM-4000T) >
COM Input/Output Specification THIS IO SPEC. is MICOM Maker’s Standard. So check wiring diagram in product or submitted documents
DO output Output (220VAC)
DI input PORT
Input (Powerless)
PORT
DO1
FAN (INDOOR)
DI1
REMOTE ON/OFF
DO2
CDU1 COOLING
DI2
HARON
22
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. OPERATION
DO3
CDU1 HEATING
DI3
FAN
DO4
CDU2 COOLING
DI4
FAN O.C
DO5
CDU2 HEATING
DI5
CDU1
DO6
RH1
DI6
CDU2
DO7
RH2
DI7
RH
DO8
RH3
DI8
WATER LEAKAGE
DO9
RH4
DI9
WATER LEVEL1
DO10
OP. Status
DI10
WATER LEVEL2
DO11
DO12
HH
DO13
WATER SUPP.
DO14
WATER DRAIN.
D15
TOTAL ALARM
Explanation about display
23
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. OPERATION
3.5.2. SCREEN DISPLAY FLOW CHART
24
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. OPERATION
3.5.3. MONITOR SETTING
1). Monitor setting Item
Range
Initial Value
Function
※Set the Function of a monitor. (Access method: Press "-"(decrease) Key for 5 second on the controller.) Set the Backlight ON time on the LCD screen
Always ON/ 1)Backlight
Always OFF/
Always On: The monitor backlight is always turned on.
60sec
1~360sec
Always Off: The monitor backlight is always turned off. Set to time: The backlight is turned on as much as setting time. If touch the monitor, a backlight is turned on again.
2)Language
한국어/English
한국어
Set the language to be displayed on the monitor.
2). Humidifier status => Function of operating manually that water drain or water supply. (It will be displayed only when set to "Electrode bar humidifier".) (Access method : Press "UP"key when controller is operated. If controller doesn't have any input for 2 min, screen will be changed to operating information.) 1) Humidifier OP: Display the current of humidifier when a electrode bar humidifier is operating. 2) Manual water supply: Can be controlled manually solenoid valve of water supply. 1)Humidifier OP. 0.0A
ON: Solenoid valve ON.(Active when press "Increase")
2)Humidifier Reset +>
OFF:Solenoid valve OFF.(Active when press "Decrease")
3)Manual water supp. Off->
3) Manual water drain : Can be controlled manually solenoid valve of water drain.
4)Manual water drain Off->
ON: Solenoid valve ON.(Active when press "Increase") OFF:Solenoid valve OFF.(Active when press "Decrease")
※ If use manual supply/drain, it will be turned off after supply/drain operating for 3 min.
3). Operation Status => Check the output status of the controller when the controller is operating. (Access method: Press "+>"(Increase) key on main screen, then operation status will be displayed on the monitor.)
25
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. OPERATION
[Operation Status] 1)Thermohygrostat +> unit
Check the current operation status of the controller.
2)Outdoor unit 1
+>
3)Outdoor unit 2
+>
4). Alarm History=> Check the history of alarm on the controller. (Access method: Press "HELP ALARM"key for about 5 second on the controller and then the messages of alarms and the times of occurrence of alarms will be displayed. To delete the history of occurred alarms, Select the Selection bar after that press "HELP ALARM"key for about 5 second then appears the message asked to whether to delete. [Alarm Status] No Alarm! [Alarm History] 1)Water supply CHK 00 / 00 . 00 : 00 2)FAN 00 / 00 . 00 : 00
Press "ALARM" key for about 5 second when operating or standby states, and the
[Alarm Status]
"Alarm History" screen will be displayed.
No Alarm! [Alarm History] 1)Water supply CHK 00 / 00 . 00 : 00 2)FAN 00 / 00 . 00 : 00
5). Present time display=> Check the current time on the controller. (Access method: Press "DOWN" Key on main screen.)
26
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. OPERATION
[Present time] JAN 1st Press "DOWN" key on main screen, "Present time" will be displayed. SUN 2014 00 : 00 : 00
3.5.4. OPERATION DATA SETTING
Item
Range
Initial value
Function
1). Data setting => Set the setting value of temperature/humidity on the controller. 1)Temp
-20.0℃
set
~80.0℃
25.0℃
2)Humi set 0.0% ~ 100% 50.0%
Set the value to control for the temperature on the room. Set the value to control for the humidity on the room. Set the operating point and the stop point of each step when the system operates as the cooling drift.
3)Cooling No use, drift
0.1℃~9.9℃
(Current Temp ≧ Setting Temp +Cooling Drift×1) → Cooling 1 Step 1.0℃
Operation (Current Temp ≧ Setting Temp +Cooling Drift×2) → Cooling 2 Step Operation ※If set to "No use", Cooling operation does not run. Set the operating point and the stop point of each step when the system operates as the Heating drift.
4)Heating No use, drift
0.1℃~9.9℃
(Current Temp ≦ Setting Temp - Heating Drift×1) → Heating 1 Step 1.0℃
Operation (Current Temp ≦ Setting Temp - Heating Drift×2) → Heating 2 Step Operation ※If set to "No use", Heating operation does not run. Set the operating point and the stop point of each step when the
5)Humidify No use, drift
0.1%~9.9%
system operates as the Humidify drift. 3.0%
(Current Humidity ≦ Setting Humidity - (Humidify Drift)) → Humidify Operation ※If set to "No use", Humidify operation does not run.
27
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. OPERATION
Set the operating point and the stop point of each step when the system operates as the Dehumidify drift. 6)Dehumi No use, drift
0.1%~9.9%
(Current Humidity ≧ Setting Humidity + (Dehumidify Drift × 1)) → 3.0%
Dehumidify 1 Step Operation (Current Humidity ≧ Setting Humidity + (Dehumidify Drift × 2)) → Dehumidify 2 Step Operation ※If set to "No use", Dehumidify operation does not run.
3.5.5. ENGINEER MODE 1). General setting => Set about times of operating and stop of each cycles when the controller operates. Setting the delay time of recovery of the controller when outage or restart. No Use: Enter Standby mode and equipment is stopped 1)Outage recov. (recovery)
No use, 1~250sec
when outage recovery. 5sec
Set to time : Delay while setting time when outage recovery. ※ When there are several devices at one place, the outage recovery time can be differentially applied. Then, when the system operates again after recovery from outage, it can be protected from overloading operation. When the system stops operating, all outputs are stopped in order. The fan operates while the stop
2)Stop
No use,
delay
1~250sec
delay time and then over the stop delay time then the system 60sec
is stopped. ※ When cooling/heating operation, this acts to prevent occurrence of condensate water or discharge latent heat. Even though the system is set to cooling mode, cooling is
3)CDU
No use,
delay
1~250sec
5sec
delayed as much as setting time and then cooling step is enabled. Applied also to delay time between cooling steps. Even though the system is set to Heating mode, heating is
4)Heat
No use,
delay
1~250sec
5sec
delayed as much as setting time and then heating step is enabled. Applied also to delay time between heating steps.
28
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. OPERATION
5)CDU step 6)Heat step
1~2 step
2step
1~4 step
4step
Set to cooling/heating operation step. 1~2 Step : The controller operates by setting step. Set to heating operation step with heating output(RH1~4). 1~4 Step : The controller operates by setting step. Set the way of cooling/heating operation as be set to CDU step. Serial: Power Cooling/heating on/off in regular order according to setting CDU steps.
7)CDU alt.
Integrate/ Serial
Integrate
Integrate: Compare the operation integrated time of each equipment according to setting CDU steps and then operate the equipment ascending from the low integrated time. When the controller stops, compare the operation integrated time and then stop the equipment descending from the high integrated time Set the way of heating operation as be set to Heat step. Serial: Power heating on/off in regular order according to setting Heat steps.
8)Heat alt.
Integrate/ Serial
Integrate: Compare the operation integrated time of each Integrate equipment according to setting Heat steps and then operate the equipment ascending from the low integrated time. When the controller stops, compare the operation integrated time and then stop the equipment descending from the high integrated time
9)Humid with cool
Set whether to use humidify on cooling operation. ON/OFF
11)Dehumid off
- ON : Use humidify operation on cooling operation. - OFF: Does not use humidify on cooling operation.
10)Humidify Elec.bar/ method
OFF
FAN -20.0℃~80.0℃
Elec.bar Set the humidify method.
10.0℃
If the current temperature falls lower than "Dehumid off" value, then dehumidification operation is stopped. Set the control method of CDU.
12)OP.
Remote/
method
Output
Remote
-Remote : Control the CDU by communication. ※Even if set 'remote', output also work. -Output : Control the CDU by output.
29
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. OPERATION
13)OP. mode
Set the operation mode of the Heatpump.
C.temp/ Cooling/
C.temp
Heating
-C.temp : Controller operates by setting temp. -Cooling : Controller operated by cooling mode. -Heating : Controller operated by heating mode.
2). Sensor Calibration=> Calibration a temperature, a humidity, a current value when the displayed value differ from actual value. Calibration the current temperature value when the displayed temp differ from actual temp. 1)Temp
-20.0℃~20.0℃
0.0℃
Ex)when actual temperature is 20.0℃ and displayed temperature is 18.0℃. If set this value to 2.0℃, then the displayed temperature is changed from 18.0 to 20.0℃. Calibration the current Humidity value when the displayed Humidity differ from actual Humidity.
2)Humi
-20.0%~20.0%
0.0%
Ex)when actual Humidity is 45.0% and displayed Humidity is 43.0%. If set this value to 2.0%, then the displayed temperature is changed from 43.0% to 45.0%. Calibration the sensor current value when the displayed current differ from actual current.
3)Current
-20.0A~20.0A
0.0℃
Ex)when actual current is 10.0A and displayed current is 8.0A. If set this value to 2.0A, then the displayed current is changed from 8.0A to 10.0A.
3). Alarm setting => Set the time of input to occur alarm on the controller. Set the sensing time to occur Remote alarm, whether input is 1)Remote
No use / 1~250sec
2sec
sensed depending on input contact setting. When "No Use" is set, an alarm is not checked. Set the sensing time to occur Haron alarm, whether input is
2)Haron
No use / 1~250sec
2sec
sensed depending on input contact setting. When "No Use" is set, an alarm is not checked.
30
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. OPERATION
Set the sensing time to occur FAN alarm, whether input is 3)Fan
No
use
/
1~250sec
5sec
sensed depending on input contact setting after FAN output. When "No Use" is set, an alarm is not checked. Set the sensing time to occur FAN Over current alarm,
4)FanOCR
No use /
1sec
1~250sec
whether input is sensed depending on input contact setting after FAN output. When "No Use" is set, an alarm is not checked. Set the sensing time to occur Remote alarm, whether input is
5)CDU
No use /
5sec
1~250sec
sensed depending on input contact setting. When "No Use" is set, an alarm is not checked. Set the sensing time to occur RH alarm, whether input is
6)RH
No use /
5sec
1~250sec
sensed depending on input contact setting after RH output. When "No Use" is set, an alarm is not checked.
7)WL
Set the sensing time to occur Water leakage alarm, whether
No use /
5sec
1~250sec
input is sensed depending on input contact setting. When "No Use" is set, an alarm is not checked. Set the temp level to occur high temp alarm if current temp rises to the upper limit temp
8)High
No
use
Temp
20.0~80.0℃
/
-
No use
by defects on equipment or compressor. (High temp alarm → Current temp≧ High temp alarm ) ※Alarm is cleared if current temp falls to 1℃ less than upper limit. Set the temp level to occur low temp alarm if current temp falls to the lower limit temp
9)Low
No use /
Temp
-20.0~80.0℃
No use
by defects on equipment or compressor. (Low temp alarm → Current temp≦ Low temp alarm ) ※Alarm is cleared if current temp rises 1℃ more than lower limit. Set the humidity level to occur high humidity alarm if current
10)High
No
use
Humid
0.0~100.0%
/
No use
humidity rises to the upper limit by defects on equipment. High humidity alarm → Current humidity ≦ High humidity
31
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. OPERATION
alarm ) ※Alarm is cleared if current humidity falls 5% less than upper limit. Set the humidity level to occur low humidity alarm if current humidity falls to the 11)Low
No
use
Humid
0.0~100.0%
/
lower limit by defects on equipment. No use
(Low humidity alarm → Current humidity ≦ Low humidity alarm ) ※Alarm is cleared if current humidity rises 5% more than lower limit.
4). Input contact Setting => Set the sensing signal of the controller operation state according to site conditions. Set the Remote, Haron, FAN, FAN OCR, CDU, RH, WL input contact.
1) ~ 7) Each Input N.C/N.O
N.C
Contact
※ N.O (Normal Open):No input when normal time.(Magnet “A"contact) N.C
(Normal
Close):No
input
when
a
contact
closed.(Magnet “B"contact)
5). Electrode bar Setting=> Set about humidifier when electrode bar is used. 1)Setting
220V/380V/440V/
Volt
460V/480V
2)Setting Volume 3)Drain time
380V
Set the supplied voltage at the humidifier.
3~42Kg/h
8Kg/h
Set the volume of the humidifier.
7~15T
10T
Set the water drain time hourly depending on water quality.
6). Time setting => Check and modify current time on the controller.
Check the time of occurrence alarm while controller operates normally or by schedule. 20YY / MM / DD / HH / MM / SS / 000(Day of a week)
is
32
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. OPERATION
7). OP.time integration => Check the time of operation about each output on controller. FAN, CDU1~2, HH
Check the time of operation about each ports. ※If you want to delete the OP. time then press 'HELP ALARM' key for 5 sec. The message will be displayed. Then press 'UP'key for cancel or press 'DOWN'key for delete.
8). Output test => Check output ports by each output of the controller Each output on the Controller
Enable you to manually perform I/O test at each output port of the controller. (Select desired output port and press Increase(+) key, and output will power on. At this state, press Decrease (-), and output will power off.) When alarm input exists and is sensed, OK is displayed. When there is no input, Alarm is displayed.) AO output can be manually tested.
33
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. MAINTENANCE
4. MAINTENANCE 4.1. GENERAL A system of planned, regular maintenance will return dividends by averting possible costly repairs and unexpected periods of down time. It is the owner’s responsibly to provide the necessary maintenance of the air-handling unit. If system failure occurs due to improper maintenance during the warranty period, Kiturami-Bumyang Limited will not be liable for any costs incurred to return the unit to satisfactory operation. The unit must be manually isolated from the electrical supply and a period of 5 minutes allowed elapsing before any access door is opened for the purpose of general maintenance. 4.2. FANS Units are generally fitted with belt driven, centrifugal fans, with the motor and drive gear located in the airstreams. Dependant upon the design criteria, other fan types and drive arrangements may be supplied. These include direct drive, axial, plug and duplex fans. Refer to the general arrangement drawings for details of the type of fan and drive fitted. Additionally, each fan has its own identification plate, giving details of the manufacturer, fan size, serial number and type. Specialized and major servicing, such as the replacement of a damaged fan impellor, is beyond the scope of this manual. If it should become necessary, please refer to the fan manufacturer’s literature, which, if not included with this manual, can be supplied upon request. As a general rule, fans should be inspected at least twice a year. Any unusual noise or vibration when the fan is running should be immediately investigated and remedied, as this usually an indication of wear or imbalance in the fan system. Prior to carrying out any work on a fan it is imperative that:
The power supply to the motor is switched off at the safety-isolating switch.
A period of at least 5 minutes is allowed for the fan impellor to come to rest.
Precautions are taken to prevent the accidental, uncontrolled running of the fan during the maintenance work.
WARNING Rotating Components! Disconnect all electric power, including remote disconnects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/ tag out procedures to ensure the equipment cannot be inadvertently energized. Secure drive sheaves to ensure rotor cannot freewheel. Failure to secure drive sheaves or
34
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. MAINTENANCE
Disconnect power before servicing could result in death or serious injury. 4.2.1. Genral fan maintenance (Common to all fan types) Access to the fan section is normally gained by removing the quick release panel to the side of the unit. Inspect the fan blades and remove any build up of dust by lightly brushing, using compressed air or a vacuum cleaner. If the impellor is coated with greasy dirt, it can be washed with a mild detergent or solvent. Gentle handling is essential. 4.2.2. Direct drive fans Direct drive fans eliminate the need for belts or pulleys as the motor is directly connected to the impellor. Where fitted to direct drive fans, the “rubber tire” type coupling connecting the motor and fan shaft should be visually inspected for signs of wear and replaced as necessary. 4.2.3. Drive gear (Belt driven fans) Ensure that the motor and fan pulleys are aligned and taper lock bushes are tight. The V-belt drives should be checked for wear and tensioned to comply with the appropriate motor manufacturers instructions. Replacement belts should be of the same specification and matching length as those originally supplied. Where multiple belts are fitted, always replace all belts as a set. Used belts will always be longer due to stretching. 4.2.4. Belt Tensioning The high performance of modern belts, particularly wedge, cannot be achieved without correct tensioning. Incorrectly tensioned belts can substantially shorten belt life and overload fan and motor bearings shortening their life expectancy. Over tightened belts can result in failure of the fan and motor shafts and bearings, and can cause nuisance tripping of the motor overload. To check for correct tension proceed as follows: 1) Measure the span length. 2) At the centre of the span apply a force at right angles to the belt to deflect one belt 16mm per meter of span length. 3) Compare this force with value in the Tensioning Forces table.
35
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. MAINTENANCE
If the measured force falls within the values given the drive tension should be satisfactory. A measured force below the lower value indicates under tensioning. A new drive should be tensioned to the higher value to allow for the normal drop in tension during the running-in period. After the drive has been running for few hours the tension should be checked and re-adjusted to the higher value. The drive should be subsequently tensioned at regular maintenance intervals. Make adequate provision for tensioning the belts during their life. The minimum take-up allowance is given in the table opposite. We recommend that a belt tension indicator be purchased.
Tensioning Forces Table
Force required to deflect belt 16mm per meter of span
Belt Small pulley diameter (mm)
Newton (N)
Kilogram-force (Kgf)
SPZ
56 to 95 100 to 140
13 to 20 20 to 25
1.3 to 2.0 2.0 to 2.5
SPA
80 to 132 140 to 200
25 to 35 35 to 45
2.5 to 3.6 3.6 to 4.6
SPB
112 to 224 236 to 315
45 to 65 65 to 85
4.6 to 6.6 6.6 to 8.7
SPC
224 to 355 375 to 560
85 to 115 115 to 150
8.7 to 11.7 11.7 to 15.3
Z
56 to 100
5 to 7.5
0.5 to 0.8
A
80 to 140
10 to 15
1.0 to 1.5
B
125 to 200
20 to 30
2.0 to 3.1
C
200 to 400
40 to 60
4.1 to 6.1
Section
36
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. MAINTENANCE
4.2.5. Alignment Good alignment of pulleys is important. Poor alignment will result in belt flank wear.
4.3. MOTORS Check all motor wiring before starting up. The cables should be capable of carrying the full load current of the motor (see motor nameplate) without producing over-heating or an undue voltage drop under starting conditions. Terminal screws and fixing bolts should be tight. Ensure the starter is compatible with the motor. Ensure the motor can be isolated from the mains. Remove the fan cover and ensure that all air-inlet holes are unobstructed. Clean any buildup of dirt and fluff from behind the fan and along the ribs of the frame. Motors fitted with ball and roller bearings are dispatched with the bearing
37
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. MAINTENANCE
housings correctly filled with grease, which under normal conditions is sufficient to last at least two years. The annular clearance between the shaft and bearing covers is very small so that the bearing housing can retain the grease and keep out dust and dirt. Should the grease melt for any reason, leakage will occur but, provided that the correct quantity of the correct grease is used, no trouble should be experienced. Bearing lubrication can be conveniently carried out when the motor is stripped for periodic cleaning and inspection on a routine basis. Over lubricating bearings, particularly on high-speed motors, causes the bearing to run extremely hot and the grease to become thin and leak out. BP Energrease LS3 is recommended for the majority of applications as its lubricating properties are retained over a wide temperature range (-20°C to +120°C). Any other good grade of lithium base grease with an i.p. penetration 185/250 may be used, such as Shell Alvaniar 3. If there is any doubt as to whether the old and the new grease will mix it is recommended that the old grease is cleaned out and the bearing recharged with new grease so that the complete assembly including caps, is approximately 50% full with the grease in close contact with the race, and not merely smeared inside the bearing cover. BP Aeroshell No. 5 should be used for low ambient temperatures down to – 40°C. 4.3.1. Rotation It is essential that the direction of rotation of the driving motor be checked. This check should be a visual one of the direction of rotation of the free shaft with the motor finally connected to the supply. Reversal of rotation can easily be carried out by changing over any two supply leads at the starter. Where an inverter is fitted, the connections must be reversed between the inverter and motor. 4.4. BEARINGS “Sealed-for-life” fan and motor bearings are generally fitted as standard and consequently maintenance is not required. Other bearings should be regularly checked and re-packed with lithium based grease Shell Alvaniar R3 Lithium +180°C, C3 as necessary. Fan bearings are “lifelong” lubricated for 20,000 or 40,000 hours of operation. However, in heavy-duty operational conditions, maintenance intervals are to be established by the operator. If no greasing intervals are specified, they lie nominally above 8,000 operating hours. Hence re-greasing must take place at least once yearly. Depending upon operating conditions, it may become necessary to re-grease several times, as determined by the operator. For motor bearings, please refer to the details as explained in the adjacent motor section. It may be more economical to replace motors
38
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. MAINTENANCE
of small size that develop faults rather than to try to change bearings. 4.5. FILTERS Filters should be inspected at monthly intervals under normal conditions or as indicated by manometer reading, where fitted. For typical dirty pressure drops, please refer to the general assembly drawings or the appropriate catalogue. As a general guide panel filters would not normally exceed 100Pa and bag filters would not normally exceed 250Pa. 4.5.1. Throwaway Filters To replace throwaway filters, install new filters with the directional arrows pointing in the direction of airflow. Note: Bag and cartridge filters must have an airtight seal to prevent air bypass. If using other than Bumyang-supplied filters, apply foam gasketing to the vertical edges of the filter. 4.5.2. Permanent Filters To clean permanent filters : 1) Disconnect all electrical power to the unit. 2) Wash the filter under a stream of water to remove dirt and lint. 3) Remove oil from the filter with a wash of mild alkali solution. 4) Rinse the filter in clean, hot water and allow to dry. 5) Allow to drain and dry for about 12 hours. 6) Reinstall the filter. Note: It may be preferable to keep extra, clean filters to replace the dirty filters to minimize unit downtime for filter maintenance. 4.5.3. Cartridge or Bag Filters To replace cartridge or bag filters: 1) Disconnect all electrical power to the unit. 2) Remove the dirty filters and block-offs from their installed position. 3) Keeping the new bag filters folded, slide each filter into the filter rack, pushing them tightly against the unit. Note: The pleats should be in the vertical position
39
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. MAINTENANCE
4) If using the optional pre-filters, replace them on the appropriate filter rack. 5) Close and secure the access door. If the door can be closed without compressing the filter, adjust the block-off by loosening its screws and position it to provide an airtight seal.
4.6. COILS Coils should be inspected every three months to ensure that there is no build-up of dirt between the fins. Any dirt found should be removed by using a high-pressure air or steam jet. Inspect and remedy any coil connection leaks. Alternatively the coil can be washed down with a mild solution of detergent and water, after which he coil should be thoroughly rinsed with clean water. To clean refrigerant coils: 1) Disconnect all electrical power to the unit 2) Wearing the appropriate personal protective equipment, use a soft brush to remove loose debris from both sides of the coil. 3) Install a block-off to prevent spray from going through the coil and into a dry section of the unit and/or system ductwork. 4) Mix a high-quality coil cleaning detergent with water according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Note: If the detergent is strongly alkaline after mixing (PH 8.5 or higher), it must contain an inhibitor. Follow the cleaning solution manufacturer’s instructions regarding the use of the product. 4.7. HUMIDIFIERS Check and maintain any water treatment that may be appropriate. Clean any sediment from the drain tray and connections and also clean and repair any areas of corrosion. 4.8. DRAIN PAN The condensate drain pan and drain line must be checked to assure the condensate drains as designed. This inspection should occur a minimum of every six months or more often as dictated by operating experience. If evidence of standing water or condensate overflow exists, identify and remedy the cause immediately.
40
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. MAINTENANCE
4.9. LEGIONELLA CHECK At three monthly intervals take dip slide samples of cooling coil, exhaust heat recovery coil and humidifier condensate drip tray water and send for analysis. At three monthly intervals also take dip slide samples of evaporative humidifier / cooler drains / water reservoirs under the requirements of the legislation in relation to the Control of Bacteria in Water Systems. If results are positive disinfect all associated components of the air handling unit including all drain trays, wash down sections and condensate trap arrangements. 4.10. ELECTRIC HEATERS In correctly filtered systems, no maintenance is required other than periodic checking of the fasteners and electrical connections for security. If nuisance tripping of an electric heater occurs, the most likely cause is low air velocity over the heater elements. This may be due to dirty filters, too low a speed setting or user adjustment to dampers remote from the unit. Ensure that the thermal cut out switch is sound and operating correctly. 4.11. REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS All work on refrigeration systems should be carried out by an approved and qualified refrigeration service engineer.
CAUTION Refrigeration systems contain gas at high pressure. Due care should be taken when connecting or disconnecting any components or gauge sets. Do not use a naked flame if refrigerant gas is present in any appreciable quantity in the local area. Dirt should not be allowed to accumulate on the condenser coils or other parts in the condenser air circuit. Clean as often as necessary with a brush, vacuum cleaner attachment or other suitable means. Condenser fan motors are generally equipped with factory lubricated, sealed bearings and do not require any maintenance. A filter-drier is installed in the liquid line of every system to prevent damage from dirt and moisture. When replacing a filter-drier do not allow it to be exposed to the atmosphere for an extended period of time, as once it absorbs moisture from the atmosphere, it loses its effectiveness.
41
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. MAINTENANCE
4.11.1. Refrigeration Shut down Periods In the event of a shut down of the unit for more than three weeks we recommend the following actions: Shut down procedure
Pump down the compressor.
Shut the compressor service valves.
Isolate the compressor by its fuses, circuit breakers or local isolators.
Start-up procedure
Restore power to unit.
Open all service valves.
CAUTION! Where fitted, ensure compressor crankcase heaters are on for at least 24 hours prior to starting the compressor.
Switch the compressor on and check refrigeration circuit readings.
NOTE! Never remove a cap from an access port unless the valve is fully backseated with its valve stem in the maximum counter-clockwise position as the refrigerant charge will be lost. ALWAYS USE A REFRIGERATION VALVE WRENCH TO OPEN AND CLOSE SERVICE VALVES. 4.11.2. Compressor Motor Burnout (Clean-up Procedure) When a hermetic motor burns out, the stator winding decomposes forming carbon, water and acid, which contaminate the refrigerant systems. These contaminants must be removed from the system to prevent repeat motor failures. Determine the cause of the burnout and make any necessary corrections.
Check control panel for blown fuses, welded starter contacts, welded overload contacts or burned out heater elements.
Check compressor terminal plate for burned or damaged terminals and insulation, and shorted or grounded terminals.
Check wiring for loose power connections.
Check for high or low voltage.
Close compressor suction and discharge service valves and bleed refrigerant from compressor. Save remaining refrigerant in system. Remove the suction and discharge shut-off valve bolts and all other connections. Remove the damaged compressor and replace with a new compressor.
42
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. MAINTENANCE
On severe motor burnouts, be sure that the shut-off valves and suction or discharge lines are not contaminated. If they are, they should be thoroughly cleaned or replaced before being connected to the replacement compressor. Install a new liquid line filter-drier. Evacuate and dehydrate the replacement compressor and check to see that the oil is at the correct level. Place compressor in operation and, after a period of four hours, check the compressor oil for discoloration and/or acidity. If the oil shows signs of contamination, replace the oil charge and filter driers. Check the oil daily for discoloration and acidity. If the oil remains clean and acid-free, the system is clean. If the oil shows signs of contamination change both the oil and the filter-drier. Repeat this procedure until the system is clean. 4.11.3. PUMP DOWN When the unit is taken out form the factory or shut off in off season or during repair, perform pump down work that gathers all refrigerant and send to the condenser (or receiver tank). At this work, handle the valves of inlet and outlet with attention and perform it as the following.
PUMP DOWN PROCEDURE PROCEDURE
1. Adjust the low pressure switch not to operate
2. Operating the unit
INSTRUCTION ① Cut off the power supply ② Connect the alligator clips to the low pressure switch as the figure. Supply the power ① Remove the cap of stop valve of receiver
3. Close the stop valve of tank outlet. receiver tank outlet
② Turn the stop valve stem clockwise to close tightly.
4. Gather the refrigerant in checking the pressure of compound gauge
① Shut off the compressor when the pressure is down to 0 ~ 50 kPa.
REMARKS
43
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. MAINTENANCE
5. Close the inlet stop valve ① Close the inlet stop valve of receiver tank of receiver tank.
when the compressor stops.
① When the refrigerant in the lubrication oil 6. Observe the increase in evaporates, the pressure increases more pressure
of
the
low than 50 kPa in the compound gauge.
pressure compound gauge ② In case of halt in operation, if the for a moment.
pressure of the compound gauge is under
Check
if
there
is
the
refrigerant in the oil. Prevent air inflow
100 kPa, stop the pump down.
7. Gather the refrigerant again when the pressure is above 80kPa.
① close the inlet valve of the receiver tank. ② Repeat the processes 3∼5th. ③ Stop when the pressure increase is 20 ∼50 kPa.
Increase
in
pressure
should be within 20∼50 kPa.
① Close the outlet valve of receiver tank Indicates “UNDER PUMP 8. Finishing
with the cap.
DOWN” in front of the unit
② Cut off the power supply.
for safety.
44
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
5. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Check last maintenance report and intervening service reports. Pay particular attention to items mentioned in the latter.
WARNING Hazardous Service Procedures! The maintenance and troubleshooting procedures recommended in this section of the manualcould result in exposure to electrical, mechanical or other potential safety hazards. Always refer to the safety warnings provided throughout this manual concerning these procedures. When possible, disconnect all electrical power including remote disconnect and discharge all energy storing devices such as capacitors before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvertently energized. When necessary to work with live electrical components, have a qualified licensed electrician or other individual who has been trained in handling live electrical components perform these tasks. Failure to follow all of the recommended safety warnings provided, could result in death or serious injury.
WARNING Rotating Components! Disconnect all electric power, including remote disconnects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvertently energized. Secure drive sheaves to ensure rotor cannot freewheel. Failure to secure drive sheaves or disconnect power before servicing could result in death or serious injury.
5.1. Routine maintenance
Generally clean the unit. Maintain all surfaces as necessary treating any areas of corrosion.
Clean drain trays and repair any areas of corrosion.
Check all access doors for leakage and adjust locks if necessary. Replace any gasket materials if required, especially on filter modules.
45
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Assess the fan and motor bearings. Check for evidence of wear or overheating.
Check the air filter differential pressure. If the differential pressure is over than 350Pa, Clean or replace the pre & medium air filter. It makes refrigeration machine trouble.
5.2. After 48 hours of operation
Belts have acquired their permanent set. Readjust but do not over tighten.
5.3. Weekly
Observe unit weekly for any change in running condition and unusual noise.
5.4. Monthly
Clean or replace air filters if clogged or dirty; coat permanent filters with oil after cleaning; and, change bag filters when pressure drop is 250Pa.
Relubricate fan bearings if necessary.
Check all electrical connections and components for signs of overheating or arcing.
Check cleanliness of fin coil banks and heat exchangers. Clean as necessary with soft brush or vacuum.
Check fin coil banks and heat exchangers for signs of contamination. Disinfect as necessary.
Check fan belt tension and pulley/belt wear. Use tensioning tables.
Check drain trays for cleanliness. Wash with diluted disinfectant solution and rinse.
Clean unit casing and action any rust spots.
Where fitted, filter manometer gauges should be checked, topped up with manometer fluid and zeroed as necessary.
Check evaporating and condensing temperatures and suction and discharge pressures.
Check refrigerant charge level. If short of refrigerant check for leaks, repair and recharge.
Carry out routine leak test with suitable leak detector with special reference to all screwed joints and valves.
Check all pipe work for signs of chafing or damage.
Check compressor currents.
Check all capillary lines for signs of chafing or fatigue.
Check operation of safety pressure switches.
46
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
5.5. 6 Monthly
Check fan bearing grease line connections. Lines should be tight to the bearings.
Check bearing and motor bracket bolt torque and bearing setscrew torque.
Align fan and motor sheaves. Tighten sheave set screws to the proper torque.
Inspect and clean drain pans.
Tighten electrical connections.
Lubricate locks and hinges and adjust as required.
Check control damper blades for freedom of movement.
Clean and lubricate damper blade bearings.
Check operation of damper actuators and linkages through a complete operating cycle. Adjust as necessary.
5.6. Yearly
Inspect the unit casing for corrosion. If damage is found, clean and repaint the surface with a rust resistant primer.
Clean the fan wheels and fan shaft.
Inspect and clean drain pans.
Check damper linkages, set screws, and blade adjustment. Clean, but do not lubricate, the nylon damper rod bushings.
Clean damper operators.
Inspect electrical components and insulation.
Inspect wiring for damage.
Check all earth connections.
Tighten all electrical terminals within unit, motors, heaters, compressors etc.
Rotate the fan wheel and check for obstructions in the fan housing. The wheel should not rub on the fan housing. Adjust the center if necessary and tighten wheel set screws to the proper torque.
Lubricate motor bearings in accordance with motor manufacturer’s recommendations. This may only need to be done every 2 to 3 years.
Check condition of gasketing and insulation around unit, door and dampers.
Inspect coil and vacuum coil faces to remove dust.
Inspect for corrosion and treat with rust inhibitor prior to touching up with paint.
Examine flex connections for cracks or leaks. Repair or replace damaged material.
47
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd.
48
TROUBLE SHOOTING
6. TROUBLE SHOOTING The troubles occurring in operation is usually caused by a complex reason. Hence, when adjusting the operation or trouble examination, the related situation of the complex reason should be considered 6.1. GENERAL FAULTS Symptoms
Possible Causes
Checks & Corrections
Main or local isolation off
Check all isolators from mains to unit
Unit not operating
Unit not operating Power on
Fuse(s) failed
Check all fuses in mains Replace blown fuses after correcting fault
Unit not switched on
Switch on
External interlock fault
Investigate and correct
Notes
Check for loose wires
Do not link out without customers written consent Control MCB tripped Loose wire in control circuit
Re-set MCB after investigating and correcting fault Investigate and tighten wires
Fan motor overload tripped
Re-set after investigating power wiring and MCB. If it trips again, check motor and contactor
Disconnect motor from wiring to check winding
Motor runs but no volume
Belts broken/drive pulleys loose
Check drive belts and pulley security
Replace damaged belts
Water evident inside AHU casing
Insufficient depth of condensate trap
Check static differential pressure at component and rectify trap depth to suit
Ensure multiple drain traps are individually trapped. Drain traps must not be connected to each other.
Blocked filters affecting water seal in trap AHU performance may be above design creating high air velocity through cooling coil and moisture carry over
Change filters Re-check AHU performance and adjust as necessary
Check also for damper malfunction on air inlet Also ensure that the BMS control system, where fitted, has been set up and is operating correctly
Humidification system may be over humidifying resulting in excessive moisture
Investigate and if necessary re-commission the humidification system
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd.
49
TROUBLE SHOOTING
Motors constantly trip out and running at excessive current
System design over volume or pulleys incorrectly selected
Isolate unit and refer to Kiturami-Bumyang Limited for advice
6.2. REFRIGERATION SYSTEM FAULTS Symptoms
Possible Causes
Checks & Corrections
Notes
Compressor not operating
No power Internal klixon tripped Low pressure switch tripped Motor burn out
Fuses/Circuit breaker Loss of refrigerant Overload Too frequent cycling Loss of refrigerant Solenoid valve shut Low evaporator airflow Insulation check Replace compressor
Check for loose wires Disconnect compressor to check wiring
Noisy compressor
Loss of oil Liquid entering compressor Broken valves
Check for signs of leak Expansion valve stuck open Replace compressor
Low evaporating pressure
Low evaporator airflow Dirty evaporator Expansion valve fails to shut
Check and correct Clean Replace and re-set
Shortage of refrigerant Low head pressure
Leak on pipework or components Air on condenser coil too cold
High condensing pressure
Low condenser airflow Dirty condenser System over-charged Noncondensable gases in system
Condenser fan failed Clean Remove excess refrigerant Evacuate and re-charge system
Compressor short cycles
Shortage of refrigerant Blocked filter drier
Re-charge to design Replace
Low evaporating airflow
Check operation of fan Check air filters
Faulty expansion valve
Evaporating pressure too high
Broken or damaged compressor valves Expansion valve too far open Over-charged with refrigerant
Discard the excess refrigerant safely and in accordance with bylaws.
Replace and adjust superheat Replace compressor Readjust as necessary Reduce charge to correct level
Discard the excess refrigerant safely and in accordance with bylaws
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. TROUBLE SHOOTING Compressor running hot
Broken suction or discharge valve Compressor ratio too high High suction temperature
Check and change as necessary Check setting of high and low pressure switches and check that all evaporator and condenser fans are operating properly Reduce suction temperature by TXV adjustment or provide desuperheating
6.3. PROBLEMS AND CAUSES ESPECIALLY IN CONDENSING PARTS(Compressor) PROBLEMS
PROBLEM CAUSES 1. Cut off of Control circuit fuse 2. Interlock relay open
3. Operate phase reversal protector 4. Improper DOCR setting ampere 5. Magnetic contactor failure Compressor does 6. Freezing prevention device cutoff not run 7. Improper thermistor temperature setting 8. Running of compressor protection device
REMEDY / CORRECTIVE AICTION 1. Check and replace 2. Check the chilled water pump and condenser fan motor 3. Correct the power supply wiring 4. Correct or replace 5. Replace 6. load at chilled water side 7. Correct 8. Unload on the evaporator side Charge the lubricant if the oil level is low 9. Repair
9. Motor failure 1. Low air flow of condenser. 1. Repair ·Condenser fan motor failure ·Condenser fan failure(but motor running) Sudden trip of the 2. Cleaning the cooling fins 2. Contaminated cooling fin of the compressor due to condenser high pressure 3. Expel the refrigerant 3. Refrigerant over charging 4. Open the valve 4. Discharge stop valve of the compressor closed 5. Purge the uncondensed gas 5. Air / Moisture in the refrigerant system. 1. Debris stuck in the strainer 2. Lack of the refrigerant 3. Leakage of the safety valve Sudden trip of the 4. Expansion valve freezing compressor due to low pressure. 5. Insufficient running of the expansion valve 6. No load on the evaporator
1. Clean 2. Additional charging after vacuum test 3. Repair or replace 4. Adjust the expansion valve, replace filter core 5. Adjust the temperature sensor or replace the valve 6. Loading
50
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd.
51
TROUBLE SHOOTING
The compressor does not stop automatically
1. Lack of the refrigerant 2. The solenoid valve not closed. 3. Improper temperature controller or control logic failure
High discharge pressure
1. Air/ uncondensed gas in the refrigerant 1. Purge the uncondensed gas system 2. Insufficient air flow of condenser 2. Check the condenser 3. Too much refrigerant 3. Refrigerant return 4. Contaminated fins of the condenser 4. Clean coil
Low discharge pressure
1. The liquid refrigerant inflows into the compressor (liquid compression) 2. A leak in the piping system of discharge part
1. Adjust the temperature sensor and replace if there is any leakage 2. Adjust or replace after a leak test
1. The expansion valve widely opened.
1. Check the temperature sensor position and adjust or replace. Adjust the opening of expansion valve 2. Reduce the load such as amount of cold wind or chilled water
High suction pressure
Low suction pressure
2. Over loaded
1. Clogging or debris stuck in the filter or drier 2. Lack of the refrigerant 3. Unable to adjust the expansion valve or a damaged temperature sensor 4. Expansion valve freezing or debris clogged
1. Charging the refrigerant after a leak test 2. Repair or replace 3. Adjust or replace after checking
1. Clean 2. Refrigerant charging 3. Adjust the opening size or replace damaged parts 4. Remove frosts or clean
1. Display “Under Repair” in front of the condensing unit to prevent an accident. 2. Pump down should be done before repair to prevent the refrigerant to be exposed to the air.
SARULLA GEOTHERMAL POWER PROJECT
2. SPLIT AIR CONDITIONERR (WALL TYPE, CEILING TYPE)
AR✴✴FSSSBWK AR✴✴JVFN✴✴ Series Series AR✴✴FSSSCUR Series
Penyejuk Udara Air Conditioner
Petunjuk danmanual Pemasangan userPenggunaan & installation
This manual is made with 100% recycled paper. Panduan ini dibuat dengan 100% kertas daur ulang.
imagine the possibilities Thank for atas purchasing this Samsung product. Terimayou kasih pembelian produk Samsung. To receive more complete service, please register your product at
www.samsung.com/register
SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 1
2/16/2015 10:28:31 AM
Fitur penyejuk udara baru Anda Pendinginan 2-langkah Fungsi pendinginan 2-langkah akan dengan cepat mendinginkan ruang untuk mencapai suhu yang diinginkan lalu akan menyesuaikan kecepatan kipas dan arah aliran udara secara otomatis untuk membantu Anda tetap nyaman dan menyegarkan.
Pendinginan yang cepat Jika Anda menginginkan udara yang kuat dan dingin, cukup pilih fungsi Fast (Cepat)! Itu akan membuat Anda mendapatkan udara terkuat!
Pendinginan yang nyaman Jika Anda menginginkan udara yang nyaman dan menyegarkan, fungsi Comfort (Nyaman) akan menyebarkan udara dingin langsung ke Anda, sehingga Anda dapat tetap nyaman.
Single User (Satu Pengguna) Gunakan fungsi Single User (Satu Pengguna) jika Anda sendirian di rumah. Fungsi Single User (Satu Pengguna) akan meminimalkan konsumsi energi dengan teknologi inverter dan mengurangi tagihan listrik Anda dengan menyesuaikan kapasitas operasi maksimum kompresor.
Filter yang Ringkas Tidak perlu melepas kisi-kisi sebelum memisahkan filter dari penyejuk udara! Karena itu, filter dapat dibersihkan dengan mudah, lebih sering! Pembersihan filter yang kerap akan mencegah debu masuk ke dalam produk atau tertimbun di filter.
Fungsi
(tidur nyenyak)
Fungsi (tidur nyenyak) akan memungkinkan Anda merasakan tidur di malam hari yang nyenyak dan lelap dengan menyesuaikan suhu, kecepatan kipas dan arah aliran udara.
Smart Install (Penginstalan Cerdas) Saat instalasi selesai, produk Anda akan memeriksa sendiri melalui operasi uji coba untuk memeriksa apakah telah diinstal dengan benar.
Instalasi yang Mudah Begitu mudah diinstal! Anda dapat dengan mudah menggantung produk di dinding dan menyambungkan pipa dan kabel dengan membuka penutupnya di bagian bawah produk. Kini Anda tidak perlu memiringkan produk untuk menyambung pipa dan kabel! Cara Membuang Produk Ini Dengan Benar (Limbah Peralatan Listrik & Elektronik) (Berlaku di negara-negara dengan sistem pengumpulan terpisah) Tanda ini pada produk, aksesori, atau literaturnya menunjukkan bahwa produk dan akseseori elektroniknya (mis. pengisi daya, headset, kabel USB) tidak boleh dibuang bersama limbah rumah tangga lainnya di akhir masa pakainya. Untuk mencegah kemungkinan bahaya pada lingkungan atau kesehatan manusia dari pembuangan limbah yang tidak terkontrol, pisahkan item ini dari jenis limbah lainnya dan daur ulang secara bertanggung jawab untuk mendorong penggunaan kembali sumber daya bahan secara berkelanjutan. Pengguna rumah tangga harus menghubungi pengecer tempat mereka membeli produk ini, atau dinas pemerintah setempat, untuk rincian tempat dan cara membawa item ini untuk didaur ulang secara ramah lingkungan. Pengguna bisnis harus menghubungi pemasok mereka dan memeriksa persyaratan dan ketentuan kontrak pembelian produk ini. Produk ini dan aksesori elektroniknya tidak boleh dicampur dengan limbah komersial lainnya untuk dibuang.
Indonesian-2 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 2
2/16/2015 10:28:32 AM
Daftar Isi Persiapan Tindakan pencegahan demi keselamatan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Periksa sebelum menggunakan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Fungsi dasar Memeriksa nama komponen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Memeriksa pengontrol jarak jauh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Fungsi dasar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Menyesuaikan arah aliran udara. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Pengaturan waktu Mengatur Timer Aktif/Mati . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Mode (tidur nyenyak) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Opsi Fungsi 2-Step cooling (Pendinginan 2 langkah). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Menggunakan fungsi Fast (Cepat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Menggunakan fungsi Comfort (Nyaman). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Menggunakan fungsi Single User (Satu Pengguna) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Menggunakan fungsi Quiet (Senyap). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Pengaturan Menggunakan fungsi Auto Clean (Pembersihan Otomatis) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Mengatur suara Bib . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Lain-lain Membersihkan penyejuk udara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Merawat penyejuk udara. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Pemecahan masalah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Instalasi Peringatan keselamatan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Memilih lokasi instalasi. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Aksesori. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Mengencangkan pelat instalasi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Membongkar/Merakit panel Penutup untuk instalasi unit dalam ruang . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Menyambungkan kabel rakitan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Menginstal dan menyambungkan pipa rakitan unit dalam ruang. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Evakuasi indoor unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Memotong atau memperpanjang pipa. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Menginstal dan menyambungkan selang penguras unit dalam ruang . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Mengubah arah selang penguras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Evakuasi pipa konektor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Melakukan uji kebocoran gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Mengencangkan unit dalam ruang di tempatnya. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Mengencangkan unit luar ruang di tempatnya . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Mode Smart Install (Penginstalan Cerdas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Operasi periksa dan uji coba terakhir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Prosedur pompa turun (saat melepas produk) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Cara menyambungkan kabel daya perpanjangan Anda. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Indonesian-3 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 3
2/16/2015 10:28:32 AM
Tindakan pencegahan demi keselamatan
Sebelum menggunakan AC baru, baca buku petunjuk ini dengan seksama untuk memastikan bahwa Anda tahu cara aman dan efisien mengoperasikan fitur yang luas dan fungsi alat baru Anda. Karena instruksi operasi berikut meliputi berbagai model, karakteristik AC anda mungkin berbeda sedikit dari yang dijelaskan dalam manual ini. Jika Anda memiliki pertanyaan, call center menghubungi Dealer Anda atau mencari bantuan dan informasi online di www.samsung.com. Simbol keselamatan yang penting dan pencegahannya:
PERINGATAN PERHATIAN
Bahaya atau praktek yang tidak aman yang dapat mengakibatkan cedera parah atau kematian. Bahaya atau praktek yang tidak aman yang dapat mengakibatkan cedera ringan atau kerusakan properti.
Ikuti Petunjuk. Matikan pasokan listrik Jangan dicoba. TIDAK membongkar. Pastikan mesin digrounding untuk mencegah sengatan listrik.
UNTUK INSTALASI
PERINGATAN
Hubungkan kabel daya ke stopkontak di dinding dengan spesifikasi sesuai kekuatan produk atau lebih tinggi dan menggunakan socket untuk alat ini saja. Selain itu, jangan menggunakan kabel sambungan. Memperpanjang kabel listrik dapat menyebabkan sengatan listrik atau kebakaran. Jangan menggunakan transformator listrik. Ini dapat menyebabkan sengatan listrik atau kebakaran. Jika kondisi tegangan /frekuensi arus pengenal berbeda, dapat menyebabkan kebakaran. Instalasi alat ini harus dilakukan oleh teknisi yang memenuhi syarat atau perusahaan jasa. Gagal melakukan demikian dapat berakibat sengatan listrik, api, ledakan, masalah dengan produk, atau cedera dan dapat juga membatalkan garansi pada produk yang diinstal. Instal Sakelar Isolasi di samping Penyejuk Udara (tapi bukan di panel Penyejuk Udara) dan pemutus sirkuit yang ditujukan untuk penyejuk udara. Kegagalan untuk melakukannya dapat menyebabkan sengatan listrik atau kebakaran. Perbaiki unit outdoor tegas sehingga bagian listrik dari unit outdoor tidak terkena. Indonesian-4 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 4
2/16/2015 10:28:32 AM
UNTUK INSTALASI
01 PENYIAPAN
Gagal melakukan demikian dapat berakibat sengatan listrik, api, ledakan, masalah dengan produk. Jangan memasang alat ini di dekat pemanas, bahan mudah terbakar. Jangan memasang alat ini di lokasi lembab, berminyak, atau berdebu , di lokasi yang terkena sinar matahari langsung dan air (air hujan). Jangan memasang alat ini di lokasi di mana gas dapat bocor. Hal ini dapat menyebabkan sengatan listrik atau kebakaran. Jangan pernah memasang unit outdoor di lokasi seperti pada dinding luar tinggi di mana itu bisa jatuh. Jika unit outdoor jatuh, mungkin mengakibatkan cedera, kematian atau kerusakan properti. Alat ini harus ground dengan benar. Jangan memasang ground ke pipa gas, pipa air plastik, atau saluran telepon. Kegagalan untuk melakukan hal tersebut dapat mengakibatkan sengatan listrik, api, dan kebakaran. Disarankan untuk menggunakan stop kontak yang terletak di bagian bawah (lantai).
PERHATIAN
Memasang mesin Anda pada tingkat dan lantai keras yang dapat menahan beratnya. Kegagalan untuk melakukannya dapat mengakibatkan getaran yang abnormal, kebisingan, atau masalahdengan produk. Memasang selang pembuangan dengan baik sehingga air dibuang dengan benar. Gagal melakukan demikian dapat berakibat melubernya air dan kerusakan properti. Hindari menambahkan buangan ke pipa limbah karena bau tidak sedap dapat timbul di masa mendatang. Saat memasang unit outdoor, pastikan dapat terhubung dengan selang pembuangan sehingga pembuangan dilakukan dengan benar. Air yang dihasilkan selama operasi pemanasan oleh unit outdoor dapat meluap dan mengakibatkan kerusakan harta benda. Secara khusus, di musim dingin, jika balok es jatuh, mungkin mengakibatkan cedera, kematian atau kerusakan properti.
UNTUK SUMBER LISTRIK
PERINGATAN
Apabila“circuit breaker”rusak, hubungi pusat servis terdekat. Jangan menarik atau membengkokkan kabel power. Jangan memutar atau mengikat kabel power, Jangan mengkaitkan kabel power dengan benda metalik, menaruh benda berat diatas kabel power, jangan memasukkan kabel power diantara Indonesian-5 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 5
2/16/2015 10:28:32 AM
Tindakan pencegahan demi keselamatan benda lainnya, atau memaksakan kabel power kedalam ruang diantara produk produk appliance lainnya. Hal ini dapat menyebabkan sengatan listrik atau kebakaran.
UNTUK SUMBER LISTRIK
PERHATIAN
Ketika tidak menggunakan pendingin udara untuk jangka waktu yang panjang atau pada saat ada guntur / badai petir, padamkan listrik pada pemutus sirkuit. Kegagalan untuk melakukannya dapat menyebabkan sengatan listrik atau kebakaran.
UNTUK DIGUNAKAN
PERINGATAN
Jika alat kebanjiran, silahkan hubungi pusat layanan terdekat. Kegagalan untuk melakukannya dapat menyebabkan sengatan listrik atau kebakaran. Jika produk appliance mengeluarkan bunyi aneh, bau terbakar atau asap, matikan pasokan listrik secepatnya dan hubungi pusat servis terdekat. Kegagalan untuk melakukannya dapat menyebabkan sengatan listrik atau kebakaran. Pada kasus kebocoran gas (seperti gas propana, gas LP, dll), ventilasikan ruangan secepatnya tanpa menyentuh kabel power. Jangan menyentuh appliance atau kabel power. Jangan gunakan kipas ventilasi. Sebuah percikan dapat menyebabkan ledakan atau kebakaran. Untuk menginstal ulang AC, silahkan hubungi pusat layanan terdekat. Kegagalan untuk melakukan hal ini dapat mengakibatkan masalah dengan produk, kebocoran air, sengatan listrik, atau kebakaran. Sebuah layanan pengiriman untuk produk tidak disediakan. Jika Anda menginstal ulang produk di lokasi lain, konstruksi tambahan beban dan biaya instalasi akan dikenakan. Terutama, ketika anda ingin menginstal produk di lokasi yang tidak biasa seperti di sebuah kawasan industri atau dekat pantai di mana ia terkena garam di udara, silahkan hubungi pusat layanan terdekat. Dilarang menyentuh “circuit breaker” dengan tangan basah. Hal ini dapat menyebabkan sengatan listrik. Jangan menghidupkan AC off dengan pemutus arus ketika sedang operasi. Mematikan AC dan kemudian menyalakannya kembali dengan “circuit breaker” dapat mengakibatkan percikan api, sengatan listrik, atau kebakaran. Indonesian-6 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 6
2/16/2015 10:28:32 AM
Jangan memasukkan jari atau benda asing ke stopkontak, jika penyejuk udara beroperasi. Berhati-hatilah khusus yang anak-anak tidak melukai diri sendiri dengan memasukkan jari mereka ke dalam produk. Jangan menyentuh pengarah aliran udara dengan tangan atau jari selama operasi pemanasan. Hal ini dapat menyebabkan sengatan listrik atau luka bakar. Jangan memasukkan jari atau benda asing ke dalam saluran udara masuk / outlet AC. Berhati-hatilah, khususnya anak-anak untuk tidak melukai diri sendiri dengan memasukkan jari mereka ke dalam unit. Jangan menarik AC dengan kekuatan yang berlebihan. Hal ini dapat mengakibatkan kebakaran, cedera, atau masalah dengan produk.
UNTUK DIGUNAKAN
01 PENYIAPAN
Setelah membongkar AC, menyimpan semua bahan kemasan baik dari jangkauan anak-anak, sebagai bahan kemasan dapat berbahaya bagi anak-anak. Jika seorang anak tempat tas di atas kepala, ia dapat menyebabkan mati lemas.
PERINGATAN
Jangan letakkan benda dekat unit luar yang memungkinkan anak-anak untuk naik ke mesin. Hal ini dapat mengakibatkan cedera serius pada anak-anak sendiri. Jangan gunakan pendingin udara untuk jangka waktu yang lama di lokasi berventilasi buruk atau orang lemah dekat. Karena ini mungkin berbahaya karena kekurangan oksigen, Buka jendela setidaknya satu jam sekali. Jika terdapat benda asing yang masuk kedalam appliance seperti misalnya air, harap langsung matikan pasokan listrik dan hubungi pusat servis terdekat. Kegagalan untuk melakukannya dapat menyebabkan sengatan listrik atau kebakaran. Jangan mencoba untuk memperbaiki, membongkar, atau memodi kasi alat sendiri. Jangan menggunakan sekering (seperti tembaga, kawat baja, dll) selain sekering standar. Kegagalan untuk melakukannya dapat menyebabkan sengatan listrik, kebakaran, masalah dengan produk, atau. Indonesian-7 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 7
2/16/2015 10:28:33 AM
Tindakan pencegahan demi keselamatan UNTUK DIGUNAKAN
PERHATIAN
Jangan letakkan benda atau perangkat di bawah unit indoor. Air yang menetes dari unit dalam ruang dapat berakibat api atau kerusakan properti. (peralatan listrik contoh). Periksa bahwa kerangka pemasangan unit outdoor tidak rusak minimal setahun sekali. Kegagalan untuk melakukan hal ini dapat mengakibatkan cedera, kematian atau kerusakan properti. Max saat ini diukur menurut standar IEC untuk keselamatan dan arus diukur berdasarkan standar ISO untuk efisiensi energi. Jangan berdiri di atas alat atau objek tempat (seperti cuci, lilin menyala, rokok dinyalakan, piring, bahan kimia, logam obyek, dll) pada alat. Hal ini dapat menyebabkan sengatan listrik, kebakaran, masalah dengan produk, atau cedera. Jangan mengoperasikan alat dengan tangan basah. Hal ini dapat menyebabkan sengatan listrik. Jangan menyemprot bahan volatile seperti insektisida ke permukaan alat. Selain itu berbahaya bagi manusia, juga dapat menyebabkan listrik, kebakaran shock atau masalah dengan produk. Jangan minum air dari AC. Air dapat membahayakan manusia. Jangan menerapkan dampak yang kuat untuk remote kontrol dan tidak membongkar remote kontrol. Jangan menyentuh pipa dihubungkan dengan produk. Hal ini dapat menyebabkan luka bakar atau cedera. Jangan gunakan pendingin udara untuk menjaga presisi peralatan, makanan, hewan, tumbuhan atau kosmetik, atau untuk lainnya tujuan yang tidak biasa. Hal ini dapat mengakibatkan kerusakan properti. Hindari langsung memperlihatkan manusia, hewan atau tanaman dari aliran udara dari pendingin udara untuk jangka waktu yang lama. Hal ini dapat mengakibatkan kerusakan pada manusia, hewan atau tanaman.
Indonesian-8 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 8
2/16/2015 10:28:33 AM
UNTUK MEMBERSIHKAN
01 PENYIAPAN
Alat ini tidak dimaksudkan untuk digunakan oleh orang (termasuk anakanak) dengan cacat fisik, indera atau kecakapan mental kemampuan, atau kurang pengalaman dan pengetahuan, kecuali jika mereka diberikan pengawasan atau pengarahan mengenai penggunaan alat oleh orang yang bertanggung jawab bagi keselamatan mereka. Anak kecil harus diawasi untuk memastikan mereka tidak bermain dengan alat ini.
PERINGATAN
Jangan membersihkan alat dengan menyemprotkan air langsung ke atasnya. Jangan gunakan bensin, thinner atau alkohol untuk membersihkan alat. Hal ini dapat mengakibatkan perubahan warna, deformasi, kerusakan, sengatan listrik atau kebakaran. Sebelum membersihkan atau melakukan proses perawatan, matikan pasokan listrik dan tunggu hingga kipás AC berhenti. Kegagalan untuk melakukannya dapat menyebabkan sengatan listrik atau kebakaran.
UNTUK MEMBERSIHKAN
PERINGATAN
Berhati-hatilah saat membersihkan permukaan penukar panas unit outdoor karena memiliki tepi tajam. Ini harus dilakukan oleh teknisi berkualifikasi harap hubungi petugas penginstal Anda atau pusat layanan. Jangan membersihkan bagian dalam AC sendiri. Untuk pembersihan di dalam alat, hubungi pusat layanan terdekat. Saat membersihkan saringan internal, mengacu pada deskripsi dalam 'Membersihkan AC' bagian. Kegagalan untuk melakukannya dapat mengakibatkan kerusakan, sengatan listrik atau kebakaran.
Indonesian-9 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 9
2/16/2015 10:28:33 AM
Periksa sebelum menggunakan Kisaran kerja
Tabel di bawah menunjukkan suhu dan kelembaban berkisar AC dapat dioperasikan dalam. Rujuk ke tabel untuk penggunaan yang efisien. Mode
SUHU RUANGAN
SUHU LUAR
KELEM BABAN
Pendinginan
16 ˚C~32 ˚C
16 ˚C~46 ˚C
Relative humidity 80% atau less
Dry
18 ˚C~32 ˚C
16 ˚C~46 ˚C
-
Jika AC beroperasi dalam mode pendinginan untuk jangka waktu yang panjang di wilayah kelembaban tinggi, embun dapat
terbentuk.
Memelihara AC Anda Proteksi internal melalui sistem kontrol unit Proteksi internal beroperasi jika kesalahan internal terjadi di AC.
TIPE
PENJELASAN
Terhadap udara dingin
Kipas bagian dalam akanberhenti untuk mencegah udara dingin sewaktu pompa panas (heat pump) sedang beroperasi.
Proses pemanasan (defrost) siklus
Kipas internal akan dimatikan untuk melawan udara dingin ketika heat pump bekerja. Bilah aliran udara vertikal akan ditutup selama siklus anti beku dan itu akan terbuka lagi selama operasi pemanasan setelah siklus anti beku.
Proteksi Kompresor
AC tidak langsung beroperasi untuk melindungi kompresor di unit outdoor setelah unit dinyalakan.
• J ika pompa panas yang beroperasi di modus Heat, Proses pemanasan (defrost) siklus ditekan untuk menghilangkan es dari unit outdoor yang mungkin telah disimpan pada suhu rendah. Kipas internal dimatikan secara otomatis dan restart hanya setelah siklus proses pemanasan (defrost) selesai.
Smart install (Penginstalan cerdas) Melalui fungsi Smart install (Penginstalan cerdas), teknisi penginstal dapat memeriksa apakah
instalasi dilakukan dengan benar.
Jika instalasi tidak dilakukan dengan benar, indikator kesalahan akan menyala di tampilan unit
dalam ruang. Karena itu pengguna akan tahu apakah instalasi dilakukan dengan benar atau tidak.
Indonesian-10 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 10
2/16/2015 10:28:34 AM
Memeriksa nama komponen AC Anda mungkin terlihat sedikit berbeda dari ilustrasi yang ditampilkan di atas tergantung pada model anda.
Bagian utama
Filter Udara
02 FUNGSI DASAR
Sensor Suhu Ruangan
Udara Masuk
Pengarah aliran udara (Ke atas dan ke bawah)
Pengarah aliran udara (Ke kiri dan ke kanan)
Tampilan
Indikator Operasi Indikator Timer/Auto clean Tombol Power (Daya) / Penerima pengendali jarak jauh
Indikator Single User (Satu Pengguna)
Indonesian-11 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 11
2/16/2015 10:28:35 AM
Memeriksa pengontrol jarak jauh • Arahkan remote control ke ara penerima sinyal di unit indoor. • Ketika Anda menekan tombol di remote control, Anda akan mendengar suara bib dari unit indoor dan indikator transmisi ( ) ditampilkan pada layar remote control.
Tombol pengendali jarak jauh
Ayunan udara vertikal
Mengaktifkan/Mematikan gerakan bilah aliran udara vertikal secara otomatis
Daya
Mode
Hidupkan/matikan AC
Temp (Suhu) + –
Fan (Kipas)
Menambah/Mengurangi suhu sebesar 1 ˚C.
Atur salah satu dari 5 mode pengoperasian
Mengatur kecepatan kipas
Single User (Satu Pengguna)
Options (Opsi)
Aktifkan/nonaktifkan fungsi Single User (Satu Pengguna) yang mengurangi penggunaan energi.
Memilih opsi selama operasi
Timer (Pengatur Waktu) Memilih opsi Timer
Settings (Pengaturan) Memilih pengaturan
SET
Arah < >
Mengatur/Membatalkan opsi atau pengaturan yang telah dipilih
Bergerak melewati menu Timer, Opsi, atau Pengaturan untuk melakukan pilihan
CATATAN
• Jika ingin membatalkan opsi atau pengaturan yang telah dilakukan, tekan lagi tombol Options (Opsi) atau Settings (Pengaturan), lalu tindakan yang terakhir dilakukan akan berkedip dan Anda dapat membatalkannya dengan mudah dengan menekan tombol SET ketika tindakan itu berkedip.
Indonesian-12 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 12
2/16/2015 10:28:36 AM
Memeriksa pengontrol jarak jauh Layar remote control Indikator transmisi Peringatan baterai rendah daya
Indikator pengaturan suhu/ waktu (untuk opsi Timer)
Indikator kecepatan kipas
indikator good'sleep
Indikator ayunan angin Vertikal
02 FUNGSI DASAR
Indikator mode operasi
Indikator opsi
Indikator pengaturan
HATI-HATI
• P Pastikan astikan remote control tidak terkena air. control tidak terkena air. • Fungsi berikut ditampilkan pada layar remote control tetapi tidak didukung pada model ini. - Heat mode /Virus Doctor(
) / d'light Cool / Usage / Filter Reset (Atur ulang Filter) / Display.
• S aat menonaktifkan dan mengaktifkan remote control, Timer, Options (Timer, Pilihan), dan Settings (Pengaturan) yang ditetapkan sebelum penonaktifan remote control akan dibatalkan. Namun, arah kipas tidak akan berubah.
Peringatan Baterai Rendah Daya
Memasang baterai
Ketika daya baterai hampir habis, ( ) ditampilkan pada layar remote control. Ketika ikon itu ditampilkan, gantilah baterainya. Remote control membutuhkan dua baterai 1,5 V AAA.
1. Tekan tuas seperti tanda panah di sisi belakang remote control dan tarik ke atas. 2. Pasang dua baterai AAA.
Menyimpan remote control
3. Pasang penutup dengan memasukkannya ke posisi semula.
Ketika remote control tidak digunakan dalam waktu lama, keluarkan baterai dari dalam remote control dan simpan.
CATATAN
Periksa dan cocokkan tanda “+” dan “-”. Pastikan Anda telah memasang baterai dengan posisi yang benar.
Anda akan mendengar suara klik ketika penutup terkunci dengan benar.
• S inyal mungkin tidak diterima dengan baik jika lampu neon seperti lampu neon inverter beroperasi di dalam ruang yang sama. • Jika produk listrik lain beroperasi dengan remote control, hubungi pusat pelanggan terdekat. Cara membuang baterai di dalam produk ini dengan benar
(Berlaku di negara-negara dengan sistem pengumpulan terpisah) Tanda ini pada baterai, buku petunjuk, atau kemasan menunjukkan bahwa baterai di dalam produk tidak boleh dibuang bersama limbah rumah tangga lainnya di akhir masa pakainya. Apabila ditandai, simbol kimia Hg, Cd atau Pb menunjukkan bahwa baterai mengandung merkuri, kadmium, atau timbal di atas tingkat referensi dalam Petunjuk EC 2006/66. Jika baterai tidak dibuang dengan benar, zat tersebut dapat membahayakan kesehatan manusia atau lingkungan. Untuk melindungi sumber daya alam dan mendorong penggunaan kembali bahan, pisahkan baterai dari jenis limbah lainnnya dan daur ulang melalui sistem pengembalian baterai gratis setempat Anda.
Indonesian-13 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 13
2/16/2015 10:28:37 AM
Fungsi dasar Pengoperasian dasar merupakan suatu mode pengoperasian yang dapat dipilih dengan menekan tombol Mode.
Auto (Otomatis) Pada mode Auto (Otomatis), AC akan secara otomatis mengatur suhu dan kecepatan kipas tergantung pada suhu ruangan.
Cool (Dingin) Pada mode Cool (Dingin), AC itu akan menyejukkan ruangan Anda. Anda dapat mengatur suhu dan kecepatan kipas untuk merasakan udara yang lebih dingin di tengah musim yang panas. • Apabila suhu luar ruangan lebih tinggi daripada suhu yang ditetapkan pada unit dalam-ruangan, mungkin diperlukan waktu untuk menurunkan suhu dalam ruangan ke tingkat yang diinginkan. • Mode Quiet (Senyap) membuat tenang noise pada saat mengoperasikan unit indoor dalam modus Cool.
Dry (Kering) AC pada mode Dry (Kering) bertindak sebagai dehumidifier (penghilang kelembapan) dengan menyerap uap air dari udara di dalam ruangan. Mode Dry (Kering) membuat udara terasa menyegarkan di tengah cuaca yang lembap. Untuk mengaktifkan mode Dry (Kering), aturlah suhu di remote control supaya lebih rendah daripada suhu di dalam ruangan.
Fan (Kipas) Mode Fan (Kipas) dapat dipilih untuk menyirkulasikan udara di dalam ruangan. Mode Fan (Kipas) bermanfaat untuk menyegarkan kembali udara yang sumpek di dalam ruangan.
Heat AC memanaskan udara sama baiknya dengan mendinginkan udara. Hangatkan ruangan anda dengan alat serbaguna ini di musim dingin. • Fan mungkin tidak beroperasi selama sekitar 3 ~ 5 menit di awal untuk mencegah ledakan dingin, pada saat AC dalam proses nyala. • Mode Quiet (Senyap) membuat kebisingan menjadi tenang pada saat mengoperasikan unit indoor dalam mode Heat. • Karena AC memanaskan ruangan dengan mengambil energi panas dari udara luar, kapasitas pemanasan dapat menurun ketika suhu di luar ruangan sangat rendah. Gunakan alat pemanas tambahan dalam kombinasi dengan penyejuk udara jika Anda merasa AC nya kurang panas.
CATATAN
• Hanya Pemanasan model memiliki model fungsi : AR✴✴JS✴✴ seri
Indonesian-14 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 14
2/16/2015 10:28:37 AM
Fungsi dasar untuk menghidupkan AC.
Tekan tombol
untuk mengatur mode pengoperasian.
02 FUNGSI DASAR
Tekan tombol
• Setiap kali Anda menekan tombol Mode, mode akan berubah dalam urutan Auto, Cool, Dry, Fan dan Heat.
Tekan tombol Auto (Otomatis)
Anda dapat menyesuaikan suhu yang ditetapkan dengan langkah sebesar 1 °C dalam rentang 16 °C~30 °C.
Cool (Dingin)
Anda dapat menyesuaikan suhu yang ditetapkan dengan langkah sebesar 1 °C dalam rentang 16 °C~30 °C.
Dry (Kering)
Anda dapat menyesuaikan suhu yang ditetapkan dengan langkah sebesar 1 °C dalam rentang 18 °C~30 °C.
Fan (Kipas)
Penyesuaian suhu tidak dapat dilakukan.
Heat (Panas)
Anda dapat mengatur suhu yang diinginkan oleh 1 °C dalam kisaran 16 °C~30 °C.
Tekan tombol
Auto (Otomatis) Cool (Dingin) Dry (Kering) Fan (Kipas) Heat (Panas)
CATATAN
untuk menyesuaikan suhu.
untuk mengatur kecepatan kipas yang diinginkan.
(Otomatis) (Otomatis),
(Rendah),
(Sedang),
(Tinggi),
(Turbo)
(Otomatis) (Rendah),
(Sedang),
(Otomatis),
(Rendah),
(Tinggi), (Sedang),
(Turbo) (Tinggi),
(Turbo)
• Mode Dry hanya tersedia pada mode pendinginan.
Indonesian-15 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 15
2/16/2015 10:28:38 AM
Menyesuaikan arah aliran udara Aliran udara vertikal Fungsi ini memungkinkan Anda mengatur arah aliran udara vertikal. Tekan tombol
untuk mengarahkan bilah aliran udara secara vertikal. ffUntuk menjaga arah aliran udara dengan arah yang konstan, tekan lagi tombol . Bilah aliran udara akan berhenti bergerak. ffJika Anda menyesuaikan bilah aliran udara vertikal secara manual, bilah mungkin tidak sepenuhnya menutup saat Anda menonaktifkan penyejuk udara. • M enyesuaikan arah aliran udara tidak tersedia dalam mode good'sleep (tidur nyenyak) saat sedang berada dalam mode cool (dingin). • Tapi, Anda dapat menyesuaikan arah aliran udara dalam mode good'sleep (tidur nyenyak) saat sedang berada di mode heat (panas).
Layar remote control
Aliran udara horizontal Patikan satu tuas pin pengarah yang menempel keluar dari pengarah aliran udara tidak rusak. pada posisi yang Anda inginkan.
• U ntuk menghindari risiko cedera diri, penyesuaian arah aliran udara horizontal harus di lakukan ketika unit telah di matikan sepenuhnya. Ada potensi risiko cedera diri ketika unit salah dalam penanganannya.
Indonesian-16 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 16
2/16/2015 10:28:39 AM
Mengatur Timer Aktif/Mati Mengatur Timer Aktif Ketika AC dalam keadaan mati;
Batal
ffTekan tombol Timer pilih (On) (Aktif) tekan tombol tekan tombol SET (ATUR). atur timer ke ffTekan tombol Daya ( ).
03 PENGATURAN WAKTU
1. Tekan tombol Timer untuk memilih (On) (Aktif). - Indikator (On) akan terus berkedip dan Anda dapat mengatur waktu. 2. Tekan tombol , untuk mengatur waktu. - Anda dapat mengatur waktu dalam satuan setengah jam mulai dari 30 menit (0,5 pada layar) ~ 3 jam dan satuan jam mulai dari 3~24 jam. - Waktu dapat diatur mulai dari 30 menit hingga maksimum 24 jam. 3. Tekan tombol SET untuk menyelesaikan pengaturan timer Aktif. - Indikator (On) dan waktu timer yang diatur akan ditampilkan pada layar remote control dan indikator Timer ( ) akan ditampilkan pada layar unit indoor. - Pengaturan timer On (Aktif) akan dibatalkan jika Anda tidak menekan tombol SET dalam waktu 10 detik setelah mengatur waktu. Karenanya, periksa indikator (On) di layar remote control dan indikator Timer ( ) pada layar unit indoor. atau
Layar remote control
Tersedia tambahan pilihan Pada mode On/Off timer (Sewaktu remote control sedang menyala) Anda dapat memilih dari Auto/Cool/Dry/Fan/Heat.
Anda dapat mengatur suhu dalam mode Auto/Cool/Dry/Heat.
Anda dapat menyesuaikan kecepatan kipas di Cool/Fan/Heat.
CATATAN
• Setelah pengaturan On Timer (Timer Aktif) selesai, status yang ditetapkan akan ditampilkan selama 3 detik, dan hanya indikator (On) (Aktif) yang akan tetap tampil pada remote control. • Jika Anda menekan tombol Daya pada unit indoor setelah mengatur timer Aktif dari remote control, indikator Timer di layar unit indoor akan menghilang dan timer Aktif akan dibatalkan. Walaupun timer Aktif dibatalkan, indikator (On) pada remote control akan tetap ditampilkan. • Ketika timer Aktif diatur ketika AC dalam keadaan mati, indikator Timer ( ) akan ditampilkan dan tetap aktif sampai timer Aktif dihidupkan.
Indonesian-17 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 17
2/16/2015 10:28:41 AM
Mengaktifkan/Menonaktifkan timer Mengatur timer Mati Ketika AC dalam keadaan hidup; 1. Tekan tombol Timer untuk memilih (Off) (Tidak Aktif). - Indikator (Off) akan terus berkedip dan Anda dapat mengatur waktu. 2. Tekan tombol , untuk mengatur waktu. - Anda dapat mengatur waktu dalam satuan setengah jam mulai dari 30 menit (0,5 pada layar) ~ 3 jam dan satuan jam mulai dari 3~24 jam. - Waktu dapat diatur mulai dari 30 menit hingga maksimum 24 jam. 3. Tekan tombol SET untuk menyelesaikan pengaturan timer Mati. - Indikator (Off) dan waktu timer yang diatur akan ditampilkan pada layar remote control dan indikator Timer ( ) akan ditampilkan pada layar unit indoor. - Pengaturan timer Off (Mati) akan dibatalkan jika Anda tidak menekan tombol SET dalam waktu 10 detik setelah mengatur waktu. Karenanya, periksa indikator (Off) di layar remote control dan indikator Timer ( ) pada layar unit indoor. Batal
ffTekan tombol Timer pilih (Off) (Tidak Aktif) tekan tombol atau atur timer ke tekan tombol SET (ATUR). ffTekan tombol Daya (
Layar remote control
CATATAN
).
• Timer Mati mungkin tidak berfungsi bergantung pada status On/Off unit indoor dan status On/Off di indikator pada layar remote control • Ketika timer Aktif dan fungsi diatur secara bersamaan, AC hanya akan menjalankan fungsi yang diatur belakangan. • Setelah mengatur timer, waktu yang ditentukan akan ditampilkan selama 3 detik sebelum menghilang • Apabila fungsi Timer digunakan pada mode pemanasan, AC akan bekerja sesuai mode sebelumnya. (AR✴✴JV✴✴ series)
Menggabungkan Timer Aktif dan Timer Mati Ketika AC dalam keadaan mati
Ketika AC dalam keadaan hidup
Ketika waktu yang diatur pada timer Aktif lebih singkat daripada timer Mati
Ketika waktu yang diatur pada timer Aktif lebih panjang daripada timer Mati
Contoh) timer Aktif: 3 jam, timer Mati: 5 jam Contoh) timer Aktif: 3 jam, timer Mati: 1 Jam - AC akan diaktifkan setelah 3 jam sejak saat Anda mengatur - AC akan dimatikan setelah 1 jam sejak saat Anda mengatur timer itu dan AC akan tetap menyala selama 2 jam lalu timer itu dan diaktikan setelah 2 jam sejak saat dimatikan. dimatikan secara otomatis.
• Waktu yang diatur untuk timer Aktif dan timer Mati harus berbeda. CATATAN
Indonesian-18 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 18
2/16/2015 10:28:42 AM
Mode
(tidur nyenyak)
Untuk tidur yang nyaman, AC akan beroperasi dalam 3 tahapan dalam urutan tahap Fall asleep (Tertidur) Sound sleep (Tidur pulas) Wake up (Bangun tidur). Ketika AC beroperasi dalam mode Cool (Dingin)/Heat (Panas).
- Pengaturan waktu default untuk mode (tidur nyenyak) adalah 8 jam. 3. Tekan tombol SET untuk menyelesaikan pengaturan mode (tidur nyenyak). - Indikator ( ) dan waktu yang diatur untuk mode (tidur nyenyak) akan ditampilkan pada layar remote control. - Indikator timer ( ) akan ditampilkan pada layar unit indoor. - Pengaturan mode akan dibatalkan jika Anda tidak menekan tombol SET dalam waktu 10 detik setelah mengatur waktu. Karenanya, periksa indikator ( ) di layar remote control dan indikator Timer ( ) pada layar unit indoor. Batal
ffTekan tombol Timer (Timer) pilih ( ) tekan tombol atur timer ke tekan tombol SET (ATUR).
03 PENGATURAN WAKTU
1. Tekan tombol Timer untuk memilih ( ) (good'sleep). - Indikator ( ) akan terus berkedip dan Anda dapat mengatur waktunya. 2. Tekan tombol , untuk mengatur waktu. - Anda dapat mengatur waktu dalam satuan setengah jam mulai dari 30 menit (0,5 pada layar) ~ 3 jam dan satuan jam mulai dari 3~12 jam. - Waktu dapat diatur mulai dari 30 menit hingga maksimum 12 jam.
atau
Layar remote control
Opsi tambahan tersedia pada mode Anda dapat menyesuaikan suhu yang ditetapkan dengan langkah sebesar 1 °C dalam rentang 16 °C~30 °C. Kecepatan kipas akan disesuaikan secara otomatis sesuai dengan mode . Mode pada saat operasi pemanasan sedang berjalan, anda Tetapi, apabila anda memilih dapat tetap dapat menyesuaikan kecepatan angin. Saat mode (tidur nyenyak) diaktifkan. Dalam mode Cool (Dingin): Arah aliran udara akan disesuaikan secara otomatis. Dalam mode Heat (Panas): Menyesuaikan arah aliran udara tersedia. Perubahan suhu dan kecepatan kipas pada mode
(tidur nyenyak)
• Fall asleep (Tertidur): Membantu Anda tidur dengan menurunkan suhu. • Sound sleep (Tidur pulas): Merelaksasikan tubuh Anda dan meningkatkan suhu badan Anda sedikit. • Wake up (Bangun tidur): Membangunkan Anda dari tidur nyenyak di tengah udara yang nyaman dan menyegarkan Anda.
CATATAN
• Suhu pengaturan yang disarankan adalah antara 25 °C ~ 27 °C untuk pendinginan dan 21 ˚C~23 ˚C untuk pemanasan. • Jika suhu diatur terlalu rendah, Anda dapat merasa kedinginan ketika tidur dan terkena flu. • Jam operasi optimal untuk mode adalah 8 jam. Karenanya, jika waktu yang diatur terlalu pendek atau terlalu panjang, Anda mungkin tidak merasa senyaman yang diharapkan. • Jika mode diatur lebih dari 5 jam, tahapan Wake up (Bangun tidur) akan dimulai ketika tersisa 1 jam di waktu pengoperasian dan AC akan dihentikan secara otomatis. • Ketika timer Aktif dan fungsi (tidur nyenyak) diatur secara bersamaan, AC hanya akan menjalankan fungsi yang diatur belakangan.
Indonesian-19 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 19
2/16/2015 10:28:44 AM
Fungsi 2-Step cooling (Pendinginan 2 langkah) Fungsi 2-Step Cooling (Pendinginan 2 Langkah) akan mengatur AC untuk menyejukkan ruangan secara cepat untuk mencapai suhu yang diatur ketika suhu dalam ruangan lebih tinggi daripada suhu yang diatur, lalu AC akan secara otomatis beroperasi pada mode Dry (Kering) ketika suhu dalam ruangan mencapai suhu yang diatur.
Ketika AC beroperasi dalam mode Cool (Dingin). 1. Tekan tombol Options (Opsi). 2. Tekan tombol , atau (Options)(Pilihan) hingga indikator (2-Step) (2 Langkah) mulai berkedip. 3. Tekan tombol SET untuk mengatur fungsi 2-Step Cooling (Pendinginan 2 Langkah). - (2-Step) (2 Langkah) indikator (2-Step) (2 Langkah) akan ditampilkan di layar remote control dan fungsi 2-Step Cooling (Pendinginan 2 Langkah) akan dijalankan. Batal
ffTekan tombol Options (Pilihan) tekan tombol , atau Options (Pilihan) untuk membuat indikator (2-Step) (2 Langkah) berkedip, lalu tekan tombol SET (ATUR).
Layar remote control
Indonesian-20 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 20
2/16/2015 10:28:44 AM
Menggunakan fungsi Fast (Cepat)
Anda dapat mengatur fungsi Fast (Cepat) untuk memberikan pendinginan/pemanasan cepat.
Ketika AC beroperasi dalam mode Cool (Dingin)/Heat (Panas).
Batal
CATATAN
04 OPSI
1. Tekan tombol Options (Opsi). 2. Tekan tombol , atau (Options) (Pilihan) hingga indikator (Fast) (Cepat) mulai berkedip. 3. Tekan tombol SET untuk mengatur fungsi Fast (Cepat). - (Fast) (Cepat) Indikator (Fast) (Cepat) akan ditampilkan pada layar remote control dan fungsi Fast (Cepat) akan dijalankan. ffTekan tombol Options (Pilihan) tekan tombol , atau Options (Pilihan) untuk membuat indikator (Fast) (Cepat) berkedip, lalu tekan tombol SET (ATUR). • Fungsi Fast hanya tersedia pada mode Cool (Dingin)/Heat (Panas). • Ayunan udara Vertikal dapat disesuaikan. • Suhu yang diatur dan kecepatan kipas tidak dapat disesuaikan. • Jika fungsi Fast (Cepat) dipilih ketika fungsi 2-Step Cooling (Pendinginan 2 Langkah)/Comfort (Nyaman)/Single user (Satu Pengguna)/Quiet (Hening)/ sedang aktif, fungsi terkait akan dibatalkan.
Layar remote control
Menggunakan fungsi Comfort (Nyaman) Anda dapat mengatur fungsi Comfort (Nyaman) untuk memberikan pendinginan/pemanasan ringan.
Ketika AC beroperasi dalam mode Cool (Dingin)/Heat (Panas). 1. Tekan tombol Options (Opsi). 2. Tekan tombol , atau (Options) (Pilihan) hingga indikator (Comfort) (Nyaman) mulai berkedip. 3. Tekan tombol SET untuk mengatur fungsi Comfort (Nyaman). - (Confort) (Nyaman) Indikator (Comfort) (Nyaman) akan ditampilkan pada layar remote control dan fungsi Comfort (Nyaman) akan dijalankan. Batal
CATATAN
Layar remote control
ffTekan tombol Options (Pilihan) tekan tombol , atau Options (Pilihan) untuk membuat indikator (Comfort) (Nyaman) berkedip, lalu tekan tombol SET (ATUR). • Fungsi Comfort (Nyaman) hanya tersedia pada mode Cool (Dingin)/ Heat (Panas). • Ayunan udara Vertikal dapat disesuaikan. • Suhu yang diatur dapat disesuaikan, tetapi kecepatan kipas tidak dapat disesuaikan. • Jika fungsi Comfort (Nyaman) dipilih ketika fungsi 2-Step Cooling (Pendinginan 2 Langkah)/ Fast (Cepat)/Single user (Satu Pengguna)/Quiet (Hening)/ sedang aktif, fungsi terkait akan dibatalkan.
Indonesian-21 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 21
2/16/2015 10:28:47 AM
Menggunakan fungsi Single user (Satu Pengguna) Fungsi ini akan mengurangi penggunaan energi ketika AC beroperasi dalam mode Cool (Dingin)/Heat (Panas).
Ketika AC beroperasi dalam mode Cool (Dingin)/Heat (Panas). 1. Tekan tombol Single user (Satu pengguna). - Indikator (Singel user) (Satu pengguna) akan ditampilkan di layar remote control. Kemudian, akan ditampilkan pada bagian indikator suhu yang diatur selama beberapa detik dan fungsi Single user (Satu Pengguna) and dimulai. - Ketika fungsi Single user (Satu Pengguna) dalam keadaan aktif, ayunan udara vertikal akan diaktifkan secara otomatis. - Jika suhu yang diatur saat ini lebih rendah dari 24 °C dalam mode Cool (Dingin), itu akan otomatis dinaikkan menjadi 24 °C. Batal
CATATAN
Layar remote control
ffTekan tombol Single User (Satu Pengguna) sekali lagi. • Fungsi Single user (Satu Pengguna) hanya tersedia pada mode Cool (Dingin)/Heat (Panas). • Jika fungsi Single user (Satu Pengguna) dipilih ketika fungsi 2-Step Cooling (Pendinginan 2 Langkah)/Fast (Cepat)/Comfort (Nyaman) /Quiet (Hening)/ sedang aktif, fungsi terkait akan dibatalkan. • Ayunan udara vertikal akan tetap aktif bahkan setelah fungsi Single user (Satu Pengguna) dibatalkan. • Pilih atau batalkan fungsi Single User (Satu Pengguna) dengan tombol Options (Pilihan). - Tekan tombol Options (Pilihan) tekan tombol , atau Options (Pillihan) untuk membuat indikator (Single user) (Satu pengguna) berkedip, lalu tekan tombol SET (ATUR).
Opsi tambahan tersedia pada fungsi Single user (Satu Pengguna) Anda dapat menyesuaikan suhu yang ditetapkan dengan langkah sebesar 1 °C dalam rentang 24 °C~30 °C untuk pendinginan dan 16 ˚C~30 ˚C untuk pemanasan.
(Otomatis),
(Rendah),
(Sedang),
(Tinggi),
(Turbo) dapat dipilih.
Ayunan udara Vertikal dapat dipilih.
Indonesian-22 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 22
2/16/2015 10:28:48 AM
Menggunakan fungsi Quiet (Hening)
Anda dapat mengurangi deru/suara yang dikeluarkan oleh unit indoor selama mode Cool (Dingin)/Heat (Panas).
Ketika AC beroperasi dalam mode Cool (Dingin)/Heat (Panas).
Batal
04 OPSI
1. Tekan tombol Options (Opsi). 2. Tekan tombol , atau (Options) (Pilihan) hingga indikator (Quiet) (Hening) mulai berkedip. 3. Tekan tombol SET untuk mengatur fungsi Quiet (Hening). - (Quiet) (Hening) Indikator (Quiet) (Hening) akan ditampilkan di layar remote control dan fungsi Quiet (Hening) akan dijalankan. ffTekan tombol Options (Pilihan) tekan tombol , atau Options (Pilihan) untuk membuat indikator (Quiet) (Hening) berkedip, lalu tekan tombol SET (ATUR).
Opsi tambahan tersedia pada fungsi Quiet (Hening)
Anda dapat menyesuaikan suhu yang ditetapkan dengan langkah sebesar 1 °C dalam rentang 16 °C~30 °C.
Kecepatan kipas diatur ke
Layar remote control
(Otomatis).
Ayunan udara Vertikal dapat dipilih.
CATATAN
• Fungsi Quiet (Hening) hanya tersedia pada mode Cool (Dingin)/Heat (Panas). • Jika fungsi Quiet (Hening) dipilih ketika fungsi 2-Step Cooling (Pendinginan 2 Langkah)/Fast (Cepat)/Comfort (Nyaman)/Single user (Satu Pengguna)/ sedang aktif, fungsi terkait akan dibatalkan.
Indonesian-23 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 23
2/16/2015 10:28:50 AM
Menggunakan fungsi Auto clean (Pembersihan otomatis) Fungsi Auto clean akan meminimalkan kelembapan di dalam unit indoor. Aktifkan fungsi ini untuk membantu memberi Anda udara bersih.
Ketika AC beroperasi; 1. Tekan tombol Settings (Pengaturan). 2. Tekan tombol , atau (Settings) (Pengaturan) hingga indikator (Clean) (Bersih) mulai berkedip. 3. Tekan tombol SET untuk mengatur fungsi Auto clean. - 3 detik setelah mengatur fungsi Auto clean (Pembersihan otomatis), indikator (Clean) (Bersih) di layar remote control akan menghilang dan indikator Timer ( ) akan mengaktifkan tampilan unit dalam ruangan. Fungsi Auto clean akan diaktifkan setelah AC berhenti beroperasi. - Durasi fungsi Auto clean dapat bervariasi bergantung pada mode operasi yang digunakan sebelumnya. Mode Auto(cool), Cool, Dry: 30 menit Mode Auto(heat), Heat, Fan: 15 meni Batal
Tampilan unit indoor CATATAN
ffTekan tombol Settings (Pengaturan) tekan tombol , atau Settings (Pengaturan) untuk membuat indikator (Clean) (Bersih) berkedip, lalu tekan tombol SET (ATUR). • Ketika mode operasi sudah diatur selama fungsi Auto clean diaktifkan, AC akan beroperasi pada mode operasi yang dipilih dan fungsi Auto clean akan diaktifkan kembali ketika operasi itu berhenti. • Selama fungsi auto clean (pembersihan otomatis), kipas dalam ruang akan terus berputar dan bilah aliran udara akan tetap terbuka untuk • Lampu mode auto Clean akan menyala
Mengatur suara Bib Suara bib dari unit indoor dapat dimatikan. 1. Tekan tombol Settings (Pengaturan). 2. Tekan tombol , atau (Settings) (Pengaturan) hingga indikator (Beep) (Bip) mulai berkedip. 3. Tekan tombol SET untuk mematikan suara bip. - 3 detik setelah mengatur fungsi Beep sound (Bunyi bip), indikator (Beep) (Bip) di layar remote control akan menghilang dan fungsi Beep sound (Suara bip) akan dijalankan.
Indonesian-24 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 24
2/16/2015 10:28:52 AM
Membersihkan penyejuk udara PERHATIAN
• Pastikan listrik mati dan tercabut dari sumber kontak listrik ketika membersihkan mesin pengatur suhu udara. 06 LAIN-LAIN
Membersihkan penyejuk udara
Bersihkan produk dengan kain lembab hangat.
Bersihkan debu yang menumpuk di celah produk dengan sikat lembut.
• H ubungi pusat layanan saat Anda membersihkan penukar panas pada indoor unit karena perlu dibongkar.
PERHATIAN
• Jangan bersihkan tampilan menggunakan deterjen alkalin. • Jangan gunakan asam sulfat, asam hidroklorida, pelarut organik (seperti thinner, minyak tanah dan aseton dsb.) untuk membersihkan permukaan produk atau memasang stiker di situ. Kesemuanya itu dapat merusak permukaan penyejuk udara.
Membersihkan penukar panas outdoor unit
Ketika debu terakumulasi pada penukar panas, dapat menurunkan kinerja pendingin. Oleh karena itu, bersihkan secara teratur.
Semprotkan air untuk membersihkan debu. • J ika sulit untuk membersihan penukar panas unit outdoor sendiri, kontak pusat layanan.
PERHATIAN
• Hati-hati dengan pinggiran yang tajam pada penukar panas unit outdoor.
Penukar panas (Ilustrasi ini mungkin berbeda sedikit tergantung pada model)
Indonesian-25 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 25
2/16/2015 10:28:52 AM
Membersihkan penyejuk udara Melepas filter Udara Ada lubang di sisi kanan bawah filter. Letakkan jari Anda ke dalam lubang itu agar dapat memegang filter dan pelan-pelan dorong ke atas untuk melepas pengait dari sisi bawah. Lalu, tarik ke bawah untuk melepas filter dari bodi utama.
Filter Udara
Membersihkan Filter Udara Filter udara berbasis busa yang dapat dicuci menjerat partikel besar dari udara. Filter dibersihkan dengan sebuah vakum atau dicuci dengan tangan. Lepas filter Udara dari bodi utama.
Bersihkan filter Udara dengan pembersih vakum atau sikat lembut. Jika debu terlalu tebal, bersihkan dengan air yang mengalir.
Pasang kembali filter Udara ke posisi awalnya.
Keringkan filter Udara di tempat berventilasi.
• B ersihkan filter Udara setiap 2 minggu. Periode pembersihan dapat berbeda tergantung kondisi penggunaan dan lingkungan. Di tempat yang berdebu, bersihkanlah sekali seminggu. • Jika filter Udara mengering di tempat yang terkungkung (atau lembap), bau tidak sedap dapat terbentuk. Jika ini yang terjadi, bersihkan ulang dan keringkan di tempat berventilasi baik.
Indonesian-26 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 26
2/16/2015 10:28:53 AM
Membersihkan penyejuk udara Merakit kembali filter Udara Air filter
06 LAIN-LAIN
1. Taruh filter di bagian body utama dan masukkan kait yang terdapat di bagian atas filter kedalam body utama. ➀
2. Terdapat satu kait di kedua sisi filter, tekan bagian atas filter udara secara perlahan dan masukkan kait ke bagian body utama. ➁
3. Tekan bagian bawah filter secara perlahan untuk memastikan sudah terkait dengan bagian body utama. ➂ ➃ ➄
Indonesian-27 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 27
2/16/2015 10:28:54 AM
Merawat penyejuk udara Jika AC tidak akan digunakan untuk jangka waktu yang agak lama, keringkan AC untuk menjaga dalam kondisi terbaik.
1. Keringkan AC secara menyeluruh dengan mengoperasikan mode kipás (Fan Mode) selama 3 sampai 4 jam and matikan pasokan listrik. Terdapat kemungkinan kerusakan internal apabila masih terdapat komponen yang lembap. 2. Sebelum menggunakan AC lagi, kering komponen bagian dalam AC lagi dengan menjalankan dalam modus Fan selama 3 sampai 4 jam. Hal ini membantu menghilangkan bau yang mungkin dihasilkan dari kelembaban. Pengecekan Berkala Lihat grifik berikut untuk menjaga AC dengan benar. Type
Setiap 2 Mingguw
Penjelasan Bersihkan Filter udara (1)
Indoor unit
Setiap 3 Bulan
Setiap 4 Bulan
Bersihkan Condensate dari tatakan drain (2)
Bersihkan penukar panas (2)
Bersihkan kipas silang (2)
Bersihkan condesnsate pada pipa buangan (2)
Ganti baterai remote kontrol (1)
Bersihkan penukar panas pada luar unit (2)
Outdoor unit
Setiap 1 Tahun
Bersihkan penukar panas pada bagian dalam unit (2)
Bersihkan komponen listrik dengan semprotan udara (2)
Pastikan bahwa semua komponen listrik sudah dikencangkan (2)
Bersihkan kipas (2)
Pastikan bahwa semua perakitan kipas sudah dikencangkan (2)
Bersihkan condensate pada tatakan drain (2)
: Tanda centang ini diperlukan untuk memeriksa unit / indoor outdoor secara berkala, berikut penjelasannya untuk memelihara AC dengan benar.
PERHATIAN
(1) Kegiatan yang dijelaskan harus dilakukan lebih sering jika area instalasi sangat berdebu. (2) Operasi ini harus selalu dilakukan oleh teknisi ahli. Untuk informasi lebih rinci, lihat bagian instalasi di manual.
Indonesian-28 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 28
2/16/2015 10:28:55 AM
Pemecahan masalah
AC tidak bekerja sama sekali.
• Periksa daya status dan kemudian mengoperasikan AC lagi. • Pasang atau nyalakan pemutus sirkuit dan kemudian operasikan AC lagi. • Pastikan Isolator diaktifkan • Periksa apakah Anda telah mengatur Off Timer. Mengoperasikan AC lagi dengan menekan tombol Power.
Pengaturan suhu tidak bekerja.
• Periksa apakah Anda telah memilih mode Fan /Fast mode. Dalam mode ini, suhu yang diinginkan di set ke auto dan Anda tidak dapat mengatur suhu.
Udara Dingin / hangat tidak keluar dari AC.
• Periksa apakah suhu disetel lebih tinggi (selama mode Cool) / rendah (selama mode Panas) dari suhu sekarang. Tekan Temp +atau- tombol pada remote kontrol untuk mengubah suhu yang disetel. • Periksa apakah saringan udara tersumbat oleh kotoran. Jika ada banyak debu di filter udara, pendingin (pemanasan) dapat menurunkan kinerja. Bersihkan lebih sering. • Periksa apakah unit luar ditutupi atau dipasang dekat rintangan. Ambil tutup dan jauhkan hambatan tersebut. • Periks a apakah AC beroperasi dalam mode Proses pemanasan (defrost). Ketika es terbentuk di musim din gin atau suhu luar terlalu rendah, AC beroperasi dalam mode Proses pemanasan (defrost) secara otomatis. Dalam mode Proses pemanasan (defrost), kipas berhenti dalam ruangan dan udara hangat tidak keluar. • Jika pintu atau jendela yang terbuka, dapat menyebabkan kinerja pendinginan buruk (pemanasan). Tutup pintu dan jendela. • Periksa apakah AC baru saja diaktifkan setelah menghentikan pendinginan atau pemanasan operasi. Dalam hal ini, hanya kipas akan berjalan untuk melindungi kompresor unit outdoor. • Periksa apakah panjang pipa terlalu panjang. Bila panjang pipa melebihi panjang pipa maksimum, pendinginan (pemanasan) dapat menurunkan kinerja.
06 LAIN-LAIN
Lihat tabel berikut jika AC beroperasi abnormally. Hal ini dapat menghemat waktu dan biaya yang tidak perlu. MASALAH SOLUSI
Mode. Pada mode ini, anda Pengaturan aliran • Cek apabila anda memilih tidak dapat mengatur arah aliran angin (Jika mode udara tidak bekerja. beroperasi pada mode pemanasan, anda dapat mengatur arah aliran angin”.
Indonesian-29 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 29
2/16/2015 10:28:55 AM
MASALAH
SOLUSI
Pengaturan • Periksa apakah Anda telah memilih mode Auto/Dry/Fast/ . In these mode, fan speed kecepatan fan yang kecepatan Fan tidak diinginkan di set ke auto dan Anda tidak dapat mengatur bekerja. kecepatan fan. Remote Kontrol tidak bekerja.
• Periksa apakah baterai Anda habis. • Pastikan bahwa tidak ada yang menghalangi sensor remote kontrol Anda. • Periksa bahwa ada pencahayaan aparat kuat di dekat AC. Kuat cahaya yang berasal dari lampu neon atau tanda-tanda neon dapat mengganggu gelombang listrik.
Fungsi Timer tidak bisa di set.
• Periksa apakah Anda menekan tombol SET pada remote kontrol setelah Anda mengatur waktu.
Indikator terus berkedip.
• Tekan tombol Power atau cabut steker listrik / matikan saklar daya tambahan. Jika indikator masih berkedip, hubungi pusat layanan.
Menyerap bau di ruangan selama beroperasi.
• Periksa apakah alat sedang bekerja di daerah berasap. Pertukaran udara atau mengoperasikan AC dalam mode Fan selama 1 ~ 2 jam. (Kami tidak menggunakan komponen bau di AC.) • Check the Drains (Periksa Buangan) telah menggantikan Perawatan Berkala.
Terdapat indikasi error.
• Sewaktu unit indoor menyala kedap kedip, hubungi pusat servis terdekat. Harap pastikan kode kesalahan disampaikan ke pusat layanan saat melakukan pemesanan servis melalui telepon.
Terjadi Kebisingan.
• Tergantung pada status penggunaan AC, kebisingan dapat didengar saat gerakan perubahan aliran refrigeran. Itu adalah normal.
Terdapat asap di unit outdoor.
• Mungkin bukan api tapi bisa uap yang dihasilkan oleh operasi defrost dari penukar panas unit outdoor pada saat mode Panas di musim dingin.
Air menetes dari sambungan pipa outdoor
• Air dapat dihasilkan karena perbedaan suhu. Itu adalah normal.
Indonesian-30 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 30
2/16/2015 10:28:55 AM
Peringatan keselamatan Hati-hati mengikuti tindakan yang tercantum di bawah ini karena hal ini sangat penting untuk menjamin keselamatan unit anda. • Selalu lepaskan AC dari sumber listrik sebelum melakukan perbaikan atau menyentuh komponen dalam unit. • Pastikan bahwa instalasi dan uji coba operasi yang dilakukan oleh teknisi ahli.
Informasi Umum fBacalah dengan cermat isi panduan ini sebelum memasang AC dan simpan manual di tempat yang aman agar dapat
menggunakannya sebagai referensi setelah pemasangan.
07 INSTALASI
• Pastikan bahwa AC tidak dipasang di daerah mudah diakses.
fUntuk keamanan maksimal, pemasang harus selalu hati-hati membaca peringatan berikut. fSimpan manual operasi dan pemasangan di lokasi yang aman dan jangan lupa untuk menyerahkannya kepada pemilik
baru jika AC sudah dijual atau dipindahkan.
fPanduan ini menjelaskan cara memasang unit indoor dengan sistem split dengan dua unit SAMSUNG. Produsen tidak
bertanggung jawab atas kerusakan yang timbul dari penggunaan unit-unit non compliant. Penggunaan jenis lain unit dengan sistem kontrol yang berbeda dapat merusak unit dan membatalkan garansi.
fPenyejuk udara sesuai dengan persyaratan dari Low Voltage Directive (72/23/EEC), EMC Directive (89/336/EEC) dan Instruksi
pada peralatan bertekanan (97/23/EEC).
fProdusen tidak bertanggung jawab atas kerusakan yang berasal dari perubahan yang tidak sah atau sambungan yang tidak
benar dari listrik dari ketentuan yang ditetapkan dalam table "batas Operasi", termasuk dalam manual, akan membatalkan garansi.
fAC harus digunakan hanya untuk aplikasi yang telah dirancang: unit indoor tidak cocok dipasang pada area yang
digunakan untuk pencucian.
fJangan gunakan unit jika rusak. Jika terjadi masalah, matikan unit dan lepaskan dari sumber listrik. fDalam rangka untuk mencegah kerusakan listrik, kebakaran atau cedera, selalu mematikan unit, menonaktifkan saklar
perlindungan dan kontak layanan SAMSUNG jika unit mengeluarkan asap, jika kabel listrik panas atau rusak atau jika unit ini sangat bising.
fSelalu ingat untuk memeriksa unit, sambungan listrik, tabung refrigeran dan proteksi secara teratur. Pekerjaan ini harus
dilakukan oleh teknisi ahli.
fUnit ini berisi bagian yang bergerak, yang harus selalu dijauhkan dari jangkauan anak-anak. fJangan mencoba untuk memperbaiki, memindahkan, mengubah atau memasang ulang unit. Jika dilakukan oleh personel
yang tidak sah, operasi ini mungkin menyebabkan kejutan listrik atau kebakaran.
fJangan letakkan wadah dengan cairan atau benda lainnya pada unit. fSemua bahan yang digunakan untuk pembuatan dan kemasan AC didaur ulang. fBahan pengepakan dan baterai bekas dari remote kontrol (opsional) harus dibuang sesuai dengan undang-undang. fPenyejuk udara berisi refrigerant yang harus dibuang sebagai sampah khusus. Pada akhir siklus hidupnya, AC harus dibuang
di tempat yang diijinkan atau dikembalikan ke pengecer sehingga dapat dibuang dengan benar dan aman.
Indonesian-31 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 31
2/16/2015 10:28:55 AM
Memasang Unit PENTING : Ketika memasang unit, selalu ingat untuk memasang tabung refrigeran terlebih dahulu, baru kemudian jalur listrik. Selalu lepaskan baris listrik sebelum tabung refrigerant. f Jika produk uang datang rusak, JANGAN DIPASANG dan segera laporkan kerusakan pada pengantar atau pengecer (jika pemasang atau teknisi yang berwenang telah mengambil unit dari pengecer.) f Setelah menyelesaikan pemasangan, lakukan tes fungsional dan memberikan petunjuk tentang cara mengoperasikan AC
kepada pengguna.
f Jangan gunakan AC dalam lingkungan dengan zat berbahaya atau dekat dengan peralatan yang gampang menghasilkan
api untuk menghindari terjadinya kebakaran, ledakan atau cedera.
f Untuk mencegah cedera ketika menyentuh kipas unit indoor, pasang unit indoor setidaknya 2,5 m di atas lantai.
Penyejuk udara harus digunakan hanya untuk aplikasi yang telah dirancang: unit indoor tidak cocok dipasang pada area yang digunakan untuk pencucian.
Unit kami harus dipasang sesuai dengan ruang yang ditunjukkan dalam manual instalasi untuk menjamin aksesibilitas baik dari kedua sisi atau kemampuan untuk melakukan pemeliharaan rutin dan perbaikan. Bagian unit harus dapat diakses dan dapat dibongkar dalam kondisi keselamatan yang lengkap baik untuk orang atau benda. Untuk alasan ini, di mana tidak ditunjukkan seperti yang ditunjukkan di Cara Pemasnagn, biaya yang diperlukan untuk memasang dan memperbaiki unit (dalam keselamatan, sebagaimana diwajibkan oleh peraturan yang berlaku yang berlaku) dengan sling, truk, perancah atau cara lain untuk mencapai tempat tinggi tidak termasuk dalam-garansi dan dibebankan kepada pembeli.
Jalur listrik, sekring atau pemutus sirkuit f Selalu pastikan bahwa catu daya sesuai dengan standarukeselamatan saat ini. Selalu memasang AC sesuai dengan standar
keselamatan lokal.
f Selalu pastikan koneksi grounding yang cocok tersedia.
Pastikan bahwa tegangan dan frekuensi power supply sesuai dengan spesifikasi dan bahwa daya terpassang cukup untuk memastikan pengoperasian setiap alat rumah tangga lain yang terhubung ke saluran listrik yang sama.
Selalu pastikan bahwa switch cut-off dan perlindungan sesuai kebutuhan.
Pastikan bahwa AC dihubungkan ke catu daya sesuai dengan petunjuk yang tersedia dalam diagram pengkabelan termasuk dalam manual.
Selalu pastikan bahwa sambungan listrik (kabel masuk, bagian lead perlindungan ...) sesuai dengan spesifikasi listrik dan dengan petunjuk yang diberikan didalam skema kabel. Selalu pastikan bahwa semua koneksi sesuai dengan standar yang berlaku untuk instalasi AC.
Memilih lokasi instalasi Indoor unit Untuk instalasi AC Wi-Fi, pilih unit indoor yang terletak paling dekat dengan router wireless. Pada kasus dimana sinyal WiFi melemah, Smart APP boleh untuk diskoneksi tergantung pada kekuatan sinyal WiFi. Dimana aliran udara tidak terhalang. Dimana udara dingin dapat didistribusikan ke seluruh ruangan. Pasang panjang pipa refrigeran dan perbedaan ketinggian kedua unit indoor dan outdoor seperti yang ditunjukkan Dalam diagram pemasangan. Dinding yang dapat menahan getaran dan cukup kuat untuk menahan berat produk. Tidak mendapat sinar matahari langsung. 1 m atau lebih jauh dari TV atau radio (untuk mencegah layar dari menjadi terdistorsi atau kebisingan dari yang dihasilkan). Sejauh mungkin dari lampu neon dan pijar (sehingga remote kontrol dapat dioperasikan dengan baik). Tempat di mana saringan udara bisa diganti dengan mudah. Jangan menempatkan tepat diatas peralatan elektonik lainnya, dimana apabila AC tidak diservis dapat menyebabkan kebocoran air dan merusak peralatan elektonik lainnya (misalnya komputer, TV, dll).
Indonesian-32 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 32
2/16/2015 10:28:55 AM
Memilih lokasi instalasi Unit Outdoor Tempat dimana tidak terkena angin kencang. Ventilasi yang baik dan tempat-tempat yang tidak berdebu. Jauh dari sinar matahari langsung dan hujan. f Tempat dimana tetangga tidak terganggu oleh suara operasi atau udara panas. Dinding padat atau mencegah getaran dan cukup kuat untuk menahan berat produk. Dimana tidak ada resiko kebocoran gas yang mudah terbakar. Ketika memasang unit di tempat yang tinggi pastikan untuk memperbaiki unit kaki. 3 m atau lebih jauh dari TV atau radio (untuk mencegah layar dari menjadi terdistorsi atau kebisingan dari yang dihasilkan). Pasang unit horizontal. Tempat dimana air pembuangan tidak menjadi masalah. Tempat yang tidak ada tanaman (khususnya tanaman merambat) dan di mana hewan kecil tidak dapat masuk. Unit Outdoor tidak seharusnya diletakkan di tempat dengan ketinggian melebihi 2.4 meter, atau terlalu dibawah, dengan alasan aksesibilitas servis dan OH&S.
07 INSTALASI
• Hindari tempat-tempat berikut untuk mencegah kerusakan unit - Dimana ada minyak mesin. - Lingkungan asin, seperti daerah pantai. - Apabila ada gas sulfida. - daerah lainnya dengan keadaan khusus.
100 mm atau lebih
Unit luar ruangan
125 mm atau lebih
Dinding luar Unit dalam ruangan
125 mm atau lebih
A Anda dapat memilih arah pe ngeringan (kiri atau kanan). Bungkus pipa refrigeran dan selang pembuangan dengan pad penyerap dan tape vinyl. Lihat halaman 50 untuk rincian lebih lanjut.
Potong penyekat untuk membuang air hujan
'L' m sebagai pipa panjang maksimum dan 3 m sebagai pipa panjang minimal (Ini akan mengurangi kebisingan dan getaran).
Buat U-trap (A) pada pipa (yang tersambung ke unit dalam ruangan) pada dinding luar, lalu potong bagian bawah penyekat (sekitar 10 mm) untuk mencegah air hujan masuk melalui penyekat. Namun, hati-hati agar tidak merusak pipa.
' H ' m maksimum total tinggi
' L ' m maksimum total panjang plpa
Model
Membuat setidaknya satu putaran: Ini akan mengurangi kebisingan dan getaran.
Pipe Length Pipe Height Minimum Maximum Maximum
✴✴10/13✴✴
3
15
7
✴✴18/24✴✴
3
30
15
Tampilan unit mungkin berbeda dari diagram tergantung pada model.
Indonesian-33 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 33
2/16/2015 10:28:56 AM
Persyaratan tempat untuk Unit Outdoor Saat memasang 1 unit outdoor Penjelasan Gambar Pandangan Atas
Pandangan Samping
Udara masuk. Udara keluar
Udara masuk.
Udara keluar.
,
Arah Aliran Udara.
(Unit : mm)
1500 atau lebih
Ketika 3 sisi unit outdoor yang diblokir oleh dindingl. 300 atau lebih
Bila arah udara adalah mengarah dinding.
300 atau lebih
Bila arah udara adalah sebaliknya dinding.
150 atau lebih
300 atau lebih
Bila dinding depan menghalangi dan sisi belakang outdoor unit.
300 atau lebih
1500 atau lebih
500 atau lebih
2000 atau lebih
Bagian atas dari unit outdoor dan lubang udara adalah sebaliknya dinding.
1500 atau lebih
Bagian atas dari unit outdoor dan lubang udara adalah menuju dinding.
600 atau lebih
Ketika memasang lebih dari 1 unit outdoor (Unit : mm) 300 atau lebih
Ketika 3 sisi unit outdoor yang diblokir oleh dinding. 1500 atau lebih
Bila arah udara adalah mengarah dinding.
300 atau lebih
600 atau lebih 600 atau lebih
600 atau lebih
Indonesian-34 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 34
2/16/2015 10:28:58 AM
Memilih lokasi instalasi (Unit : mm)
600 atau lebih
1500 atau 600 atau lebih lebih
3000 atau lebih
3000 atau lebih
500 atau lebih 500 atau lebih
Ketika sisi depan dan belakang unit outdoor ke dinding.
07 INSTALASI
600 atau lebih
Bila bagian atas unit outdoor dan lubang udara adalah sebaliknya dinding.
1500 atau 300 atau lebih lebih
Ketika dinding yang menghalangi depan dan sisi belakang outdoor unit.
300 atau lebih
300 atau lebih
200 atau lebih
• Jika instalasi dilakukan dalam ruang yang tidak tepat, unit dapat menghasilkan suara dan menyebabkan efek buruk pada produk. • Instalasi harus dilakukan di tingkat dan di tempat di mana getaran tidak akan menimbulkan efek apapun.
Aksesori
Aksesori berikut disertakan dengan AC : • Jumlah setiap aksesori ditunjukkan dalam tanda kurung.
Aksesoris dalam unit indoor Pemasangan Plate (1)
Pemasangan Plate (1)
Pemasangan Plate (1)
✴✴10✴✴
✴✴13/18✴✴
✴✴24✴✴
Remote kontrol (1)
Manual Penggunaan & Instalasi (1)
Pemegang Remote Kontrol (1)
M4 x 12 Paku datar (tapped screws) (2)
Sekrup Penutup
Baterai untuk Remote kontrol (2)
Aksesoris dalam unit outdoor Leg Karet (4)
Indonesian-35 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 35
2/16/2015 10:28:59 AM
• F lare Nuts melekat pada setiap ujung dari sebuah pipa evaporator atau tempat service. evaporator atau tempat service. • Pemasangan kawat kabel perakitan adalah opsional. Jika tidak diberikan, gunakan kabel standar. • Plug pembuangan air dan kaki karet hanya disertakan saat AC disediakan tanpa pipa perakitan seperti terlihat pada gambar di bawah.
Opsional Aksesoris Pipa sambungan terinsulasi,
Ø6.35 mm x 5 m (1)
Putty 100 g (1)
Pemasangan 4-Core (1) ✴✴10/13✴✴
Pipa sambungan terinsulasi,
Pipa sambungan terinsulasi,
Pipa sambungan terinsulasi,
Ø9.52 mm x 5 m (1) ✴✴10/13✴✴
Ø12.70 mm x 5 m (1) ✴✴18✴✴
Ø15.88 mm x 5 m (1) ✴✴24✴✴
Insulasi Tube busa PE T3 (1)
Selotip vinil (2)
Gantungan pipa Gantungan pipa Paku semen M4 x 24 Paku datar Pipa pembuangan air, panjang 2 m (1) (pipe clamps) A (3) (pipe clamps) B (3) (cement nails) (6) (tapped screws) (6)
Kabel listrik 3-Core (1) ✴✴18/24✴✴
Pemasangan 2-Core (1) ✴✴18/24✴✴
Pemasangan 3-Core (1) ✴✴18/24✴✴
Sumbat pengeringan (1)
• Jika aksesoris diberikan, itu akan berada dalam kotak aksesori.
Alat-alat yang dibutuhkan untuk instalasi Alat-alat Umum • Pompa Vakum (Pencegahan alir balik) • Kunci Torsi • Pemotong Pipa • Obeng • Kunci pas
• Gauge Manifold • Peluas lubang • Pembengkok Pipa • Pengebor • Kunci L
• Pencari Logam/Kayu • Water pass • Pita Ukur
Alat-alat untuk pengoperasian uji • Termometer
• Meteran Resistensi
• Elektroskop
Mengencangkan pelat instalasi
Anda dapat memilih arah selang pembuangan tergantung di mana Anda ingin menginstal unit indoor. Oleh karena itu sebelum memperbaiki piring instala si ke dinding atau bingkai jendela, Anda harus menentukan posisi dari lubang 65 mm melalui kabel, pipa dan selang lulus untuk menghubungkan unit indoor ke unit outdoor. Ketika menghadap dinding, pipa dan kabel dapat dihubungkan dari: Direction of pipe • Right (A) • Left (B) • Underside_right (C) B A • Rear_right atau left (D) D D C
• Anda dapat memasang pipa freon di sisi kiri/kanan/bawah/belakang unit dalam ruangan. • Jika arah pipa diubah dari kiri ke kanan, jangan tekuk pipa secara drastis, melainkan putar perlahan ke arah yang berlawanan seperti ditunjukkan pada gambar. Jika tidak, pipa dapat rusak selama proses tersebut berlangsung.
Indonesian-36 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 36
2/16/2015 10:29:01 AM
1. Lepas panel depan seperti dijelaskan pada halaman 38~39. 2. Lepas pelat Gantungan dari unit dalam ruang. (1) Longgarkan kedua sekrup yang memasang pelat Gantungan ke unit dalam ruang. (2) Dorong kait (di bagian bawah unit dalam ruang) ke atas untuk melepas pelat pemasangan dari kait yang menahannya. (3) Tarik pelat pemasangan untuk melepas sepenuhnya dari unit dalam ruang.
3. Tentukan posisi lubang saluran pipa dan selang seperti terlihat pada gambar dan lubang bor dengan diameter dalam dari 65 mm sehingga sedikit miring ke bawah.
B
C C
Model
A
B
C
D
10/13/18 24
36
60
65
36
33
110 110
33
C
C
D
A
D
A
D D
D
A A B B
D
Pipe hole (Ø65 mm)
Pipe hole (Ø65 mm)
C
07 INSTALASI
Sekrup Screw(M4x10)
B
C
(Unit : mm)
• P astikan untuk bor hanya satu lubang setelah memilih arah pipa
4. Memasang unit indoor. Jika Anda memasangang unit indoor di dinding (1) Memasang pelat pemasangan ke dinding memberikan beban pada berat unit indoor. • J ika Anda memasang pelat ke dinding beton menggunakan finher, pastikan bahwa jarak antara dinding dan pelat adalah kurang dari 20 mm.
Plastic Anchor < 20 mm
Wall
Jika Anda memasang unit indoor. (1) Tentukan posisi dari pojok kayu yang menempel pada bingkai jendela. (2) Pasang pjok kayu ke bingkai jendela memberikan beban pada berat unit indoor. (3) Pasang plat pemasangan ke tegak kayu menggunakan sekrup. Jika Anda mengencangkan unit dalam ruang di papan gipsum (1) Gunakan pencari logam/kayu untuk menemukan lokasi baut. (2) Pasang penggantung pelat di dua baut. • Cari tempat lainnya jika ada kurang dari dua baut, atau jarak antar baut berbeda dengan penggantung pelat. • Memasang plat pemasangan tanpa condong ke satu sisi. • P astikan bahwa dinding dapat menahan berat produk. Jika Anda menginstal produk di tempat di mana tidakcukup kuat untuk menahan berat produk, unit bisa jatuh dan menyebabkan cedera.
Memasang Baut Gantungan Gunakan 2 sekrup untuk memasang unit dalam ruang dengan pelat gantungan seperti ditampilkan pada gambar. Sekrup Screw(M4x10)
Indonesian-37 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 37
2/16/2015 10:29:03 AM
Membongkar/Merakit panel Penutup untuk instalasi unit dalam ruang Harap pindai kode QR ini untuk video terperinci mengenai instalasi unit dalam ruang. Untuk dapat memasang unit dalam ruang, Anda harus membongkar panel penutup terlebih dahulu. Harap ikuti petunjuk berikut untuk membongkar dan merakit panel penutup. Pengait (di panel penutup) bisa rusak jika Anda memberikan kekuatan yang berlebih saat Anda membongkar dan merakit panel penutup. Harap ikuti petunjuk berikut.
Melepas sekrup Panel penutup dirakit di bagian bawah unit dalam ruang (seperti yang ditunjukkan dalam ilustrasi) dan dikencangkan dengan sekrup. Lepas sekrup Penutup terlebih dahulu dan longgarkan sekrup sehingga Anda dapat membongkar panel penutup.
Sekrup Penutup
<Melepas sekrup Penutup>
Panel Penutup
<Melonggarkan sekrup>
Melepas panel Penutup (sebelum memasang unit dalam ruang) Pasang panel bawah ke bodi utama menggunakan kait samping, tengah, dan bawah seperti terlihat pada gambar. Buka dulu kunci kait samping, lalu buka kunci kait tengah dan bawah. Jumlah dan lokasi pengait mungkin berbeda tergantung kapasitas unit dalam ruang. (Lihat tabel) Periksa lokasi pengait sebelum melepas panel penutup. ffLokasi pengait di bagian tengah
Jumlah dan lokasi pengait
Bagian samping Kait tengah
Kait bawah
Kait tengah Kait bawah
Untuk lokasi kait spesifik dan kuantitas, silakan lihat untuk menutupi panel dengan menunjukkan panah berdasarkan barang fisik.
Indonesian-38 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 38
2/16/2015 10:29:17 AM
Membongkar/Merakit panel Penutup untuk instalasi unit dalam ruang ffMelepas pengait di samping
ffMelepas pengait di bagian tengah 07 INSTALASI
②
①
Peringatan (ringkih) - Pelan-pelan tekan kedua sisi panel penutup ke dalam (①) dan lepas pengait di kedua sisi (②).
Peringatan (ringkih) - Gunakan kedua tangan - Lepaskan masing-masing pengait dengan mendorongnya ke atas menurut sudut tertentu.
Merakit panel Penutup (setelah memasang unit dalam ruang) Untuk merakit panel Penutup, lakukan dengan urutan sebaliknya dari urutan pembongkaran. Gunakan kedua tangan untuk merakit dan berhati-hatilah agar tidak merusak pipa dan selang penguras. Kunci kait samping, tengah, dan bawah sesuai urutan ini.Kencangkan panel bawah dengan sekrup, lalu tutup lubang sekrup menggunakan penutupnya.
<Mengencangkan sekrup>
<Memasang sekrup Penutup>
Indonesian-39 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 39
2/16/2015 10:29:24 AM
Menyambungkan kabel rakitan Spesifikasi kabel Model
Power cable
Interconnection cable
Type GL
10/13
3G x 1.0 mm², H05VV-F
4G x 1.5 mm², H07RN-F
20 A
18/24
3G x 2.5 mm², H07RN-F
3G x 1.0 mm², H07RN-F 2 x 0.75 mm², H05RN-F
25 A
• H ubungkan kabel daya ke pemutus sirkuit bantu. Jika setiap kutub gagal untuk terhubung ke power supply, hal ini diakibatkan jarak kontak ≥ 3 mm. • Gunakan kabel pelindung (Kategori 5; kurang dari 50pF/m) untuk lokasi lingkungan yang berisik. • Kabel catu daya pada komponen peralatan untuk penggunaan luar ruangan tidak boleh lebih ringan daripada kabel fleksibel berlapis polikloroprena. (Penandaan kode IEC: 60227 IEC53/ CENELEC: H05VV-F, IEC: 60245 IEC57/CENELEC: H05RN-F, IEC: 60245 IEC66/CENELEC: H07RN-F)
Menghubungkan kabel Pekerjaan listrik. (1) Untuk pekerjaan listrik dan pembumian, ikuti ‘standar teknis pemasangan jaringan listrik’ dan ‘regulasi perkabelan’ pada Undang-undang Perusahaan Listrik. (2) Kencangkan blok terminal sekrup pada 1.2~1.8 N•m (12~18 kgf•cm). (3) Berhati-hatilah saat menyambung blok terminal dari unit dalam-ruangan.
Sebelum menyambung, pastikan bagian penyambung dari soket terminal menghadap ke atas.
Te rbalik
Soket terminal rusak
Tidak ada terminal cincin untuk membungkus kabel.
Tidak boleh ada jarak antara terminal dan sekrup ketika keduanya disambungkan. - Apabila ada jarak, dapat timbul bahaya kebakaran karena panas yang berlebihan yang muncul dari kontak listrik.
Soket terminal terbalik.
Sekrup tidak terpasang dengan benar, atau ada jarak antara sekrup dan terminal cincin.
• U ntuk kabel pada blok terminal, gunakan kabel dengan soket terminal cincin saja. Kabel biasa tanpa soket terminal cincin dapat menimbulkan bahaya kebakaran karena panas yang berlebihan yang muncul dari kontak listrik selama pekerjaan menangani kabel.
Indonesian-40 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 40
2/16/2015 10:29:25 AM
Menyambungkan kabel rakitan Bila Anda memasang AC, membuat koneksi refrigerant dan kemudian sambungan listrik. Hubungkan AC untuk sistem grounding sebelum melakukan sambungan listrik. Jika unit-dilepas, pertama putuskan kabel listrik, kemudian sambungan refrigerant.
1. Penyambungan kabel perakitan jika diperlukan. • T idak diperbolehkan untuk menyambungkan dua atau lebih kabel untuk memperpanjang jarak. Hal ini dapat menimbulkan api.
07 INSTALASI
Jika unit outdoor lebih dari 5 meter dari unit indoor, Anda harus memperpanjang kabel. Panjang maksimal kabel adalah 15(10/13) / 30(18/24) meters.
2 . Buka kisi depan. 3 . Lepaskan sekrup pengaman penutup konektor. 4 . Lewatkan kabel perakitan melalui bagian belakang unit indoor dan menghubungkan kabel perakitan ke terminal. (Lihat gambar dibawah ini sebagai referensi) • Setiap kawat dilabeli dengan jumlah terminal yang sesuai. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Hubungkan bagian ujung kabel melalui lubang 65mm yang terdapat didalam dinding. Tutup penutup konektor dengan mengencangkan sekrup dengan hati-hati. Tutup kisi-kisi depan. Lepaskan penutup papan terminal di samping unit outdoor. Sambungkan kabel ke terminal seperti yang terlihat pada gambar.
18/24
10/13 Indoor unit
1(L) 2(N) F1
Indoor unit
1(L) 2(N) F1
1(L) 2(N)
1(L) 2(N)
F1
L
N
F2
Indoor unit
F2
F1
F2
F2
Outdoor unit
F1
Outdoor unit
F2
Outdoor unit L
N
F1
F2
Wujud dari unit dapat berubah dari gambar diagram tergantung dari modelnya.
• Juga terminal sirkuler harus dicocokkan dengan ukuran sekrup di blok terminal. • Setelah menyambung kabel, pastikan angka terminal di unit dalam ruang/luar ruang cocok. • Harap pastikan kabel Daya & Komunikasi dipisah, tidak boleh dalam kabel yang sama. 10. Hubungkan konduktor grounding ke terminal grounding. 11. Tutup penutup papan terminal dengan mengencangkan sekrup dengan hati-hati. • H ubungkan kabel menurut kode warna, mengacu pada diagram pengkabelan. • Kabel listrik dan kabel interkoneksi harus dipilih sesuai dengan kation spesifik dihalaman 40.
Indonesian-41 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 41
2/16/2015 10:29:29 AM
Menginstal dan menyambungkan pipa rakitan unit dalam ruang Hubungkan unit indoor & outdoor dengan pipa tembaga yang tersedia, dengan memperhatikan unsur koneksi api (flare connections). Gunakan pipa dengan grade refrigerasi yang baik (insulated seamless refrigeration Grade pipe) yaitu jenis Cu DHP yang sesuai dengan ISO1337, tidak berkarat dan teroksidasi, dan sesuai untuk beroperasi pada tekanan operasi minimal 4200 kPA dan tekanan api minimal 20700 kPA. Pipa tembaga tipe sanitary tidak boleh dipergunakan dalam kondisi apapun. Ada 2 pipa refrigeran dengan diameter yang berbeda: • Yang kecil adalah untuk refrigeran cair • Yang besar adalah untuk refrigerant gas Sebuah pipa pendeksudah terdapat di AC. Anda mungkin butuh untuk memperpanjang pipa menggunakan pipa penghubung (opsional). Prosedur penyambungan untuk pipa refrigeran bervariasi sesuai dengan posisi keluar dari pipa ketika menghadap dinding: • Right(A) • Left(B) • Underside(C) • Rear
1. Potong bagian yang sesuai knock-out (A, B, C) pada bagian belakang ruangan unit kecuali jika Anda terhubung pipa langsung dari belakang. 2. Haluskan ujung bekas potongan. 3. Lepaskan tutup pipa dari pipa dan sambungkan ke pipa perakitan ke dan kemudian dengan kunci torsi, gunakan torsi berikut masing masing pipa. Kencangkan mur pertama dengan tangan Anda:
B
A C
Outer Diameter
N•m
Torque kgf•cm
ø6.35 mm
14~18
ø9.52 mm
34~42
140~180 350~430
ø12.70 mm
49~61
500~620
ø15.88 mm
68~82
690~830
• Jika anda ingin memperpendek atau memperpanjang pipa, lihat halaman 43~44. 4. Potong isolasi yang tersisa. 5. Jika perlu, tekuk pipa agar sesuai di bagian bawah unit indoor. Kemudian menariknya keluar melalui lubang yang sesuai. f
Pipa tidak boleh proyek dari bagian belakang unit indoor.
f
Radius pembengkokan harus 100 mm atau lebih.
6. Pass pipa melalui lubang di dinding. 7. Untuk rincian lebih lanjut tentang cara untuk terhubung ke unit outdoor dan membersihkan udara, lihat halaman 47~48. • P ipa akan diisolasi dan tetap secara permanen ke posisi setelah menyelesaikan instalasi dan uji kebocoran gas; lihat halaman 50 untuk rincian lebih lanjut. • K encangkan mur suar dengan kunci torsi sesuai dengan metode tertentu. Jika menencangkan mur terlalu kencang, flare bisa pecah dan menyebabkan kebocoran gas refrigeran. • SAMBUNGAN PIPA JANGAN DI TUTUP! Semua sambungan pipa refrigerant harus mudah diakses dan berguna
Indonesian-42 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 42
2/16/2015 10:29:31 AM
Evakuasi indoor unit Unit indoor ditiup dengan gas inert (nitrogen). Sebelum memasang unit, periksa apakah gas nitrogen mengalir keluar dari unit indoor. Jika satu hal ini tidak benar, UNIT JANGAN DIPASANG karena kebocoran mungkin berada di dalam unit indoor.
07 INSTALASI
1. Lepaskan tutup pada ujung setiap pipa. Keluarkan gas inert dari unit indoor. • U ntuk mencegah kotoran atau benda asing dari mendapatkan ke dalam pipa saat instalasi, jangan lepaskan cap sepenuhnya sampai Anda siap untuk menghubungkan pipa. • U dara yang tersisa dalam siklus pendingin, yang berisi air, dapat menyebabkan kerusakan pada kompresor. • Selalu hubungi pusat layanan atau agen pemasangan yang profesional untuk pemasangan produk.
Unscrew the caps
Pipes
Memotong atau memperpanjang pipa Panjang pipa dapat di: • Perpanjang sampai: lihat halaman 33 tabel • Dipotong sampai: lihat halaman 33 Jika Anda memerlukan pipa lebih dari 5 meter: • Anda harus menambahkan pendingin ke pipa, jika tidak, unit indoor dapat membeku. 1. Pastikan bahwa Anda memiliki semua peralatan yang diperlukan (pemotong pipa, alat untuk membesarkan lubang, alat pembakaran dan pemegang pipa). 2. Jika Anda ingin memperpendek pipa, memotongnya menggunakan pemotong pipa, memastikan bahwa tepi potongan tetap pada 90° dengan sisipipa (lihat di bawah contoh potongan pinggirnya benar dan salah). Pipe cutter
Oblique
Rough
Burr
Pipe
3. Untuk mencegah kebocoran gas, singkirkan sisa potongan menggunakan Reamer. • Pipa diarahkan ke bawah saat mengeluarkan gram untuk memastikan kotoran tidak masuk ke dalam pipa. 4. Letakkan flare sedikit ke dalam pipa dan lakukan flaringan. 90°± 2°
B
45° ± 2°
R 0.4~0.8
Pipe
Outer Diameter (D)
Depth (A)
ø6.35 mm
1.3 mm
Flaring Size (B) 8.7 - 9.1 mm
ø9.52 mm
1.8 mm
12.8 - 13.2 mm
ø12.70 mm
2.0 mm
16.2 - 16.6 mm
ø15.88 mm
2.2 mm
19.3 - 19.7 mm
Flare
Indonesian-43 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 43
2/16/2015 10:29:33 AM
Memotong atau memperpanjang pipa 5. Periksa apakah flaringan sudah benar (lihat contoh pipa tidak benar di bawah).
Correct
Inclined
Damaged Surface
Cracked
Uneven Thickness
6. Sejajarkan pipa untuk menghubungkan mereka dengan mudah. Kencangkan mur pertama dengan tangan Anda, dan kemudian dengan kunci momen,menerapkan torsi berikut: Flare nut
Indoor outlet pipe
Outer Diameter ø6.35 mm ø9.52 mm ø12.70 mm ø15.88 mm
Connecting pipe
Torque N•m 14~18 34~42 49~61 68~82
kgf•cm 140~180 350~430 500~620 690~830
• T orsi yang berlebihan dapat menyebabkan kebocoran gas. Sejajarkan pipa untuk menghubungkan mereka dengan mudah. Kencangkan mur pertama dengan tangan Anda, dan kemudian dengan kunci momen, menerapkan torsi berikut: Sambungan harus dapat diakses dan berguna. • Sistem penyangga dapat dilepas seperti yang ditunjukkan.
Sistem penyangga (dapat dilepas)
7. Rincian lebih lanjut tentang menghubungkan ke unit outdoor dan membersihkan lihat halaman 47~48. • K encangkan mur dengan kunci momen sesuai dengan metode tertentu. Jika flaring selesai-diperketat, flaring bisa pecah dan menyebabkan kebocoran gas refrigeran.
Menginstal dan menyambungkan selang penguras unit dalam ruang Saat memasang selang pembuangan untuk unit indoor, periksa apakah kondensasi pengeringan adalah cukup. Ketika melewati selang pembuangan melalui lubang 65-mm dibor di dinding, periksa hal sebagai berikut: Wall
Indoor unit Selang penguras Selang pembuangan harus TIDAK miring ke atas.
Ujung selang pembuangan harus TIDAK ditempatkan di bawah air.
Selang pembuangan tidak boleh menjadi bengkok.
Indonesian-44 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 44
2/16/2015 10:29:35 AM
Menginstal dan menyambungkan selang penguras unit dalam ruang
Simpanlah clearance minimal 5 cm antara akhir selang drain dan tanah.
Ditch Jangan menempatkan akhir selang saluran.
1) Sambungan yang benar
Selang pembuangan
07 INSTALASI
5cm less
Setelah instalasi pipa pembuangan (Selang penguras) selesai, tuangkan air ke papan pembuangan (drain pan) untuk check apakah pipa sudah kering.
2) Sambungan yang salah
Pipa
Selang pembuangan
Pipa
• Jangan ikatkan selang pembuangan ke pipa pemasangan yang dapat mengakibatkan kebocoran air. • Jika diameter selang sambungan lebih kecil dari selang pembuangan pada produk, air dapat bocor.
Pemasangan Pembuauangan 1. Jika perlu, hubungkan 2-meter selang perpanjangan ke selang pembuangan. 2. Jika menggunakan perpanjangan selang pembuangan, lindungi bagian dalam perpanjangan selang pembuangan dengan isolasi. 3. asang selang pembuangan ke lobang 1 dari 2 saluran selang, kemudian pasang ujung pembuangan dengan penjepit. • Jika Anda tidak menggunakan lubang pembuangan selang lainnya, tutup dengan sumbat karet 4. Saat memanjangkan Selang Penguras, tahan ujung Selang Penguras dan Selang Lubang selang penguras Perpanjangan, putar dan masukkan selang penguras ke selang Perpanjangan sepanjang 40~45 mm. Pastikan dua selang tersambung ketat, tidak boleh ada kebocoran air. 5. Sambungkan Selang Penguras setelah menggunakan Penyekat Busa untuk membungkus Selang Perpanjangan. lalu, gunakan isolasi Vinil untuk membungkus masing-masing sisi koneksi sepanjang 20 mm.
40~45 mm
Selang penguras
Selang penguras perpanjangan
Selang penguras
Selang penguras perpanjangan
20 mm 20 mm atau atau more more
Isolasi Vinil
Foam Insulation
Indonesian-45 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 45
2/16/2015 10:29:36 AM
Menginstal dan menyambungkan selang penguras unit dalam ruang 6. Lewatkan selang pembuangan di bawah pipa refrigeran, untuk menjaga selang pembuangan terikat. Shield 7. Lewatkan selang pembuangan melalui lubang di dinding. Periksa apakah itu miring ke bawah seperti terlihat pada gambar. 8. Check proses drainase berjalan dengan normal, dengan menggunakan Selang penguras Selang penguras perpanjangan metode drainase alami. • S elang akan tetap secara permanen ke posisi setelah menyelesaikan pemasangan dan uji kebocoran gas, lihat halaman 50 untuk rincian lebih lanjut. • P astikan arah terpasang selang pembuangan sudah benar. pemasangan yang tidak memadai dapat menyebabkan kebocoran kondensat air. • Jika selang pembuangan diarahkan di dalam ruangan, lindungi selang sehingga kondensasi menetes tidak merusak perabot atau lantai. • JANGAN PASANG KE ATAS SAMBUNGAN SELANG PEMBUANGAN! Selang pembuangan harus mudah diakses dan berfungsi.
Mengubah arah selang penguras Ubah arah hanya jika diperlukan. 1. Lepaskan tutup karet dengan tang penjepit itu. 2. Lepaskan selang pembuangan dengan menariknya dan berpaling ke kanan. 3. Masukkan selang pembuangan dengan menetapkan dengan sekrup ke dalam alur selang dan outlet tatakan pembuangan. Lubang sekrup Sekrup
Selang penguras
4. Pasang tutup karet dengan obeng dengan memutarnya ke kiri sampai menempel pas dengan akhir alur. Saluran keluar baki pembuangan Sumbat karet
5. Periksa kebocoran pada kedua sisi outlet drain. Tuang air dalam arah panah. Arah Pembuangan air
• P astikan unit indoor dalam posisi tegak lurus jika Anda menuangkan air untuk memeriksa kebocoran. Pastikan bahwa air tidak meluber ke bagian listrik.
Indonesian-46 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 46
2/16/2015 10:29:38 AM
Evakuasi pipa konektor Jangan melampiaskan R-410A ke atmosfer: merupakan gas rumah kaca fluorinated, yang tercakup dalam Protokol Kyoto, dengan Global Warming Potential (GWP) = 2088. Anda harus membersihkan udara di unit indoor dan dalam pipa. Jika udara tetap di pipa pendingin, hal itu mempengaruhi kompresor. Hal itu dapat menyebabkan penurunan kapasitas pendinginan dan kerusakan.
1. Hubungkan masing-masing pipa assembly sesuai pada unit outdoor dan mengencangkan mur.
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit Gas pipe side
2. Kencangkan mur suar pertama dengan tangan Anda, dan kemudian dengan kunci momen,menerapkan torsi berikut: • torsi yang berlebihan dapat menyebabkan kebocoran gas.
PERINGATAN
• M embuat sambungan listrik dan meninggalkan sistem ke "stand by mode". Jangan menghidupkan sistem! Hal ini diperlukan untuk operasi vakum yang lebih baik (posisi OPEN penuh Valve Ekspansi Elektronik - EEV -).
07 INSTALASI
• S aat memasang, pastikan tidak ada kebocoran. Ketika mengisi refrigerant,pertama grounding kompresor sebelum melepaskan sambungan pipa. Jika pipa refrigeran tidak terhubung dengan benar dan kompresor bekerja dengan katup servis terbuka, udara masuk ke pipa dan itu membuat tekanan dalam siklus refrigeran abnormal tinggi. Hal itu dapat menyebabkan ledakan dan cedera.
Liquid pipe side
Torque N•m kgf•cm 14~18 140~180 34~42 350~430 49~61 500~620 68~82 690~830
Outer Diameter ø6.35 mm ø9.52 mm ø12.70 mm ø15.88 mm
3. Sambungkan selang pengisian dari sisi tekanan rendah dari gauge manifold ke titik servis gas seperti terlihat pada gambar. 4. Buka katup sisi tekanan rendah dari jarum manifold berlawanan dengan arah berlawanan. 5. Bersihkan udara dalam pipa yang disambung dengan menggunakan pompa vakum selama sekitar 15 menit. f Pastikan bahwa tekanan menunjukkan -0.1MPa (-76cmHg) setelah sekitar 10 menit. Prosedur ini sangat penting untuk menghindari kebocoran gas. f Tutup katup dari sisi tekanan rendah searah jarum jam jarum manifold. f Matikan pompa vakum. f Periksa 2 menit jika ada perubahan tekanan. f Lepaskan selang dari sisi tekanan rendah gauge manifold. 6. Mengatur katup gas cair dan port layanan ke posisi terbuka.
Manifold gauge
Valve Gas service port
Liquid service port
Vacuum Pump (Backward flowing prevention)
Indonesian-47 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 47
2/16/2015 10:29:38 AM
Penambahan Refrigerant Penambahan Refrigerant sesuai tabel di bawah ini: Jika Anda menggunakan pipa yang lebih panjang dari 5 m, Refrigerant/Freon R-410A Grade A harus ditambahkan untuk setiap extra meter. Jika Anda menggunakan pipa yang lebih pendek dari 5 m, Waktu pengevakuasian normal.
Model
A
10/13
15
18/24
15
Lihat Manual Servis untuk rincian lebih lanjut. • U dara yang tersisa dalam siklus pendingin, yang berisi air, dapat menyebabkan kerusakan pada kompresor. • Selalu hubungi pusat layanan atau agen pemasangan yang profesional untuk pemasangan produk.
Evakuasi pipa konektor Pengisian refrigeran dalam kondisi cair dengan menggunakan pipa cair R-410A adalah jenis campuran refrigeran. Hal ini diperlukan untuk pengisian dalam kondisi cair. Saat pengisian refrigerant dari silinder refrigeran pada peralatan, ikuti petunjuk di bawah. 1. Sebelum pengisian, periksa apakah silinder memiliki siphon atau tidak. Ada dua cara untuk mengisi ulang refrigeran.
Silinder dengan siphon
Silinder tanpa menyedot
Siphon
f Mengisi refrigeran berdiri silinder tegak.
f Mengisi refrigeran memutar terbalik silinder bawah.
• J ika refrigeran R-410A dibebankan dengan gas, komposisi perubahan refrigeran diisi dan karakteristik peralatan bervariasi. • Selama operasi pengukuran kuantitas refrigeran ditambahkan menggunakan timbangan elektronik. Jika silinder tidak memiliki siphon, marah itu.
Indonesian-48 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 48
2/16/2015 10:29:39 AM
Melakukan uji kebocoran gas Pastikan untuk memeriksa kebocoran gas sebelum menyelesaikan proses instalasi (menghubungkan pipa perakitan dan selang antara indoor unit dan outdoor unit, isolasi kabel, selang dan pipa, dan memperbaiki unit indoor ke pelat pemasangan).
07 INSTALASI
A
D
C
B Uji komponen untuk unit luar ruang
Uji komponen untuk unit dalam ruang
Torsi pengencangan untuk tutup bodi (Lihat tabel)
Pemutar Inti pengisian
R-22: Diameter sekrup - 7/16-20UNF R-410A: Diameter sekrup - 1/2-20UNF
Sebelum memeriksa kebocoran, gunakan kunci torsi
untuk mengencangkan tutup katup servis. (Patuhi torsi pengencangan untuk setiap ukuran diameter, dan kencangkan tutup dengan kuat untuk mencegah kebocoran.) Untuk memeriksa kemungkinan kebocoran, masukkan gas pengisi ke dalam pipa yang tersambung ke unit dalam/luar ruang lalu periksa bagian sambungan unit dalam/luar ruang dengan busa sabun atau cairan untuk uji kebocoran.
Tutup bodi (N•m)
Tutup port pengisian (N•m)
ø 6.35 ø 9.52 ø12.70 ø15.88 ø19.05
20 ~ 25 20 ~ 25 25 ~ 30 30 ~ 35 35 ~ 40
10 ~ 12
Torsi pengencangan untuk tutup port pengisian (Lihat tabel) Untuk memeriksa kebocoran gas pada unit outdoor, Periksa katup A dan B menggunakan detektor kebocoran.
Torsi pengencangan
Diameter luar (mm)
( 1 N•m = 10 kgf•cm )
Untuk memeriksa kebocoran gas pada unit indoor, Periksa mur suar C dan D menggunakan detektor kebocoran Test kebocoran dengan nitrogen (sebelum katup dibuka) Dalam rangka untuk mendeteksi kebocoran refrigeran , sebelum melakukan vakum dan sirkulasi R-410A. Test Kebocoran (setelah katup pembukaan) Sebelum katup membuka, keluarkan semua nitrogen dari sistem dan lakukan vakum seperti pada halaman 47~48. Setelah membuka katup,periksa kebocoran menggunakan detektor kebocoran untuk refrigeran. Pump Down (sebelum melepaskan sambungan refrigeran untuk pemasangan unit, pemindahan atau pelepasan) Pump-down adalah operasi yang dimaksudkan untuk mengumpulkan semua sistem refrigerant dalam unit outdoor. Operasi ini harus dilakukan sebelum melepaskan tubing pendingin untuk menghindari kerugian efrigerant ke atmosfer. Mematikan katup cair dengan kunci Allen. Hidupkan sistem di dalam operasi kipas pendingin dengan kecepatan tinggi. (Compressor segera akan mulai, disediakan 3 menit berlalu sejak perhentian terakhir). Setelah 2 menit operasi, menutup katup hisap dengan kunci yang sama. Menghikan sistem off dan saklar listrick pasokan off. Putus tubing. Setelah pemutusan, melindungi katup dan berakhir tubing dari debu. Kompresor kerusakan mungkin terjadi jika berjalan pada tekanan hisap negatif.
Indonesian-49 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 49
2/16/2015 10:29:40 AM
Mengencangkan unit dalam ruang di tempatnya Lakukan pekerjaan berikut di tempat di mana uji kebocoran gas telah dilakukan sebelumnya.
Insulasi
Setelah anda memeriksa kebocoran gas dan tidak ada kebocoran pada sistem, Anda dapat menginsulasikan pipa, selang, kabel, dan menempatkan unit dalam pada plat instalasi. 1. Untuk mencegah masalah kondensasi, balut insulasi busa (seperti ditunjukkan gambar A) di komponen tanpa insulasi di ujung pipapipa.
Pipa
2. Gulung pipa, kabel perangkai, dan selang pembuangan dengan pita vinyl. 3. Letakkan gulungan tersebut (pipa, kabel perangkai, dan selang air) pada bagian bawah unit dalam dengan hati-hati sehingga tidakmenonjol dari belakang unit dalam. 4. Kaitkan unit dalam pada plat instalasi dan coba geser unit ke kanan dan kiri hingga terkunci pada tempatnya.
Plat instasi Pipa-pipa koneksi
Pita vinyl Kabel koneksi Selang air
• P astikan pipa tidak bisa bergerak saat unit dalam dipasang pada plat instalasi. 5. Balut sisa pipa dengan pita vinyl. 6. Pasang pipa di dinding menggunakan klem (opsional).
Mengencangkan unit luar ruang di tempatnya Unit luar harus dipasang pada tempat yang stabil dan kokoh untuk mencegah getaran dan kebisingan, terutama bila unit luar dipasang dekat dengan tetangga. Apabila harus dipasang di tempat yang banyak angin atau tinggi, unit luar harus dipasang apda penopang yang tepat (dinding atau lantai).
'Y' mm
'X' mm
Alas karet
1. Letakkan unit luar dengan arah aliran udara keluar seperti ditunjukkan oleh panah di bagian atas unit. 2. Pasang unit luar pada penopang yang tepat dengan menggunakan baut jangkar. 3. Apabila unit luar diletakkan di tempat dengan banyak angin, pasang plat pelindung di sekitarnya agar kipas dapat bekerja dengan baik.
Model 10 13 18 24
X 453 507 602 660
Y 254 292 310 340
• Amankan alas karet untuk menghindari timbulnya kebisingan dan getaran.
UNIT LUAR DIPASANG DI DINDING MENGGUNAKAN DUDUKAN • P astikan dinding dapat menopang berat dudukan dan unit luar; • Pasang dudukan sedekat mungkin dengan kolom; • Pasang grommet yang sesuai untuk mengurangi kebisingan dan sisa getaran yang diteruskan oleh unit luar pada dinding.
Dirancang untuk mengurangi getaran sisa dari unit luar ke dudukan. (tidak disertakan bersama produk)
Karet lunak dirancang untuk mengurangi getaran dari dudukan ke dinding. (tidak disert kan bersama produk)
Indonesian-50 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 50
2/16/2015 10:29:41 AM
Mode Smart Install (Penginstalan Cerdas) Model ini mendukung mode Smart Install (Penginstalan Cerdas) yang memeriksa status instalasi untuk menemukan apakah ada masalah terkait fungsi apa pun. Aktifkan mode Smart Install (Penginstalan Cerdas) setelah instalasi.
2. Saat penyejuk udara dalam status siaga, gunakan pengendali jarak jauh untuk memulai mode Smart Install (Penginstalan Cerdas). 1) Tekan tombol [SET], [Mode], [Power (Daya)] serentak selama 4 detik. ffMode Smart Install (Penginstalan Cerdas) dapat dioperasikan hanya dengan pengendali jarak jauh yang disediakan. ffRemote tidak dapat digunakan pada saat mode Smart Install.
07 INSTALASI
1. Periksa status instalasi penyejuk udara. 1) Periksa pasok daya, katup servis (apakah terbuka), kabel daya unit dalam ruang dan luar ruang dan jumlah bahan pendingin yang diperlukan untuk perpanjangan pipa. 2) Status indikator setelah daya teralirkan : status Standby (Siaga).
❋❋ Pengendali jarak jauh mungkin berbeda (gambar/fungsi) tergantung modelnya.
Indonesian-51 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 51
2/16/2015 10:29:42 AM
2) Mode Smart Install (Penginstalan Cerdas) sedang berlangsung • 88 (Tampilan 88) : Kemajuan akan ditampilkan dalam 0 ~ 99. • LED Display (Tampilan LED) : Indikator di tampilan unit dalam ruang akan berkedip berurutan lalu semua indikator akan berkedip. (Ini akan berulang.) TIPE
88 Display (Tampilan 88)
LED Display (Tampilan LED)
LED1 LED2 LED3
Indikator unit dalam ruang
❋❋ Tampilan mungkin berbeda tergantung modelnya. 3. Mode Smart Install (Penginstalan Cerdas) akan berakhir. 1) Mode Smart Install (Penginstalan Cerdas) akan butuh waktu sekitar 7~13 menit. (Waktu yang sebenarnya mungkin berbeda tergantung modelnya.) 2) Bila instalasi berhasil : Mode Smart Install (Penginstalan Cerdas) akan berakhir dengan suara berdering dan penyejuk udara akan berada dalam status siaga. (Pesan kesalahan tidak akan ditampilkan di indikator unit dalam ruang dan pengendali jarak jauh dan tombol di unit dalam ruang akan berfungsi normal.) 3) Bila instalasi tidak berhasil : Mode Smart Install (Penginstalan Cerdas) akan berakhir dan pesan kesalahan akan ditampilkan di tampilan unit dalam ruang. 1. Lakukan tindakan yang diperlukan saat terjadi kesalahan. - Baca manual servis untuk tindakan yang diperlukan untuk setiap kesalahan yang terjadi. 2. Gunakan produk setelah mengatasi kesalahan yang terjadi. Indikator kesalahan LED Display (Tampilan LED) Display (Tampilan [88])
LED 1
LED 2
LED 3 /
Kesalahan
Tindakan yang harus dilakukan oleh petugas penginstal
/ 1. Periksa kabel sambungan antara unit dalam dan luar Kesalahan komunikasi antara ruangan (apakah kabel daya dan kabel komunikasi unit dalam dan luar ruangan menyilang atau tidak). Kesalahan di sensor suhu dalam ruang
1. Periksa koneksi konektor
Kesalahan di penukar panas 1. Periksa koneksi konektor dalam ruang
,
Kesalahan di motor kipas dalam ruang
1. Periksa koneksi konektor 2. Buang benda asing (Periksa untuk penyebab yang menghambat motor) 1. Opsi atur ulang
Tampilan [88] dan semua kedipan lampu LED
Kesalahan EEPROM/Opsi
, 1. Periksa apakah katup servis terbuka sepenuhnya. Kesalahan karena aliran freon 2. Periksa apakah terdapat sumbatan pada pipa freon terhalang yang menghubungkan unit dalam dan luar ruangan. 3. Periksa apakah terjadi kebocoran freon.
Pola LED di atas akan ditampilkan bila terjadi kesalahan pada unit luar ruangan. Untuk rincian, periksa layar LED pada unit luar ruangan.
❋❋
: Off /
: Berkedip-kedip /
1. Periksa apakah freon tambahan dalam jumlah yang memadai telah diisi untuk pipa dengan panjang lebih Freon hampir habis dari 7,5 m. (Hanya untuk model inverter) 2. Periksa apakah terjadi kebocoran freon antara sambungan pipa dan katup.
: Aktif
Indonesian-52 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 52
2/16/2015 10:29:45 AM
Operasi periksa dan uji coba terakhir Untuk menyelesaikan instalasi, lakukan pemeriksaan berikut dan tes untuk memastikan bahwa AC beroperasi dengan benar.
1. Tekan tombol Power f
07 INSTALASI
Periksa berikut : • Kekuatan lokasi instalasi • kebenaran koneksi pipa untuk mendeteksi kebocoran gas • Sambungan kabel • Heat-tahan isolasi pipa • Pembuangan • Lakukan Grounding untuk sambungan konduktor • Operasi yang benar (ikuti langkah-langkah di bawah ini) dan peri ksa hal berikut:
Indikator lampu unit indoor. Pengarah aliran udara terbuka dan kipas bersiap untuk operasi.
2. Tekan tombol mode untuk memilih mode Cool atau Heat. f
Dalam mode Cool, gunakan Temp + atau - tombol untuk mengatur suhu pada 16 °C.
Dalam modus Heat, gunakan Temp + atau - tombol untuk mengatur suhu pada 30 °C.
• S ekitar 3~5 menit kemudian, outdoor unit akan mulai beroperasi dan udara diingin atau panas akan menyembur. • Setelah 12 menit kondisi stabil, periksa kondisi unit indoor. f
Mode Cool (cek Suhu masuk udara. unit indoor) - Suhu keluar udara: Dari 10 °C sampai 12 °C (delta T) Mode Heat (cek Suhu keluar udara. unit indoor) - Suhu masuk udara: Dari 11 °C sampai 14 °C (delta T)
Dalam Mode Heat, motor fan indoor dapat tetap mati untuk menghindari udara dingin ditiup ke tempat yang dikondisikan.
3. Tekan tombol Power Air Swing f
dan cek hal dibawah ini :
Pengarah aliran udara bekerja dengan baik.
4. Tekan tombol Power (Daya)
untuk menyetop operasi.
• K etika Anda telah menyelesaikan instalasi sukses, menyerahkan manual ini kepada pengguna untuk penyimpanan di praktis dan aman tempat.
Prosedur pompa turun (saat melepas produk) 1. Tekan tombol daya pada unit dalam /"indoor" selama 5 detik. Suara "beep" akan segera terdengar dan memberitahu bahwa produk siap untuk di jalankan. 2 . Kendurkan tudung katup pada sisi tekanan High (Tinggi) dan low (Rendah). 3 . Gunakan kunci inggris L untuk menutup katup pada sisi tekanan tinggi. 4 . Setelah sekitar 2 menit, tutup katup di bagian tekanan rendah. 5 . Hentikan pengoperasian AC dengan menekan tombol Power
pada unit indoor atau remote kontrol.
6 . Lepaskan pipa.
Indonesian-53 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 53
2/16/2015 10:29:46 AM
Cara menyambungkan kabel daya perpanjangan Anda Hal-hal yang perlu dipersiapkan (Tang pres dan isolasi tape harus dipersiapkan oleh teknisi yang memasang)
Alat Spec
Crimping pliers Selongsong penyambung (mm) MH-14
20xØ 7.0(HxOD)
Isolasi Tape
Selongsong kontraksi (mm)
Lebar 18 mm
50xØ 8.0(LxOD)
Bentuk 1. Seperti terlihat digambar, kupas lapisan kabel dari karet/kawat kabel power. - Kupas 20 mm pelapis kawat dari kabel yang sudah dipasang. • Setelah mengelupaskan pelapis kawat, kamu harus memasukan selongsong kontraksi
(Unit: mm) Kabel Power (disediakan kita)
20
20
20 60
120 180
Pelapis kawat kabel power 20
2. Masukan kedua ujung kawat dari kabel power kedalam selongsong penyambung. Selongsong penyambung 3. Dengan menggunakan Tang pres, tekan dua titik kemudian balikan dan tekan 2 titik lain di tempat yang sama. - Ukuran tang pres seharusnya 8.0. - Setelah ditekan, tarik ke dua sisi dari kawat untuk memastikan sambungannya sudah kuat.
Comp. dim.
Tekan 4 kali
5 mm
4. Bungkus sambungan tersebut dengan isolasi tape dua kali dan letakkan
Isolasi Tape
selongsong kontraksi di tengah-tengah isolasi tape. 5. Panaskan selongsong kontraksi untuk mengkontraksi sambungan tersebut.
40 mm Selongsong kontraksi
6. Setelah selongsong kontraksi selesai dikerjakan, bungkus sambungan tersebut dengan isolasi tape sampai selesai.
Isolasi Tape
• Pada saat kita menyambung kawat listrik, JANGAN menggunakan soket bulat - penyambungan kawat yang kurang baik akan menyebabkan kontak listrik atau kebakaran
Indonesian-54 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 54
2/16/2015 10:29:47 AM
Specifikasi Model (No. Registrasi) Tipe
Unit dalam ruang
Model
No. Registrasi
AR10JVFNAWKNSE
I.15.SAMSUNG97.03704.1114
AR13JVFNAWKNSE
I.15.SAMSUNG97.03704.1114
AR18JVFNAWKNSE
I.15.SAMSUNG97.03704.1114
AR24JVFNAWKNSE
I.15.SAMSUNG97.03704.1114
AR10JVFNAWKXSE Unit luar ruang
AR13JVFNAWKXSE AR18JVFNAWKXSE
-
AR24JVFNAWKXSE
SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 55
2/16/2015 10:29:48 AM
QUESTIONS OR COMMENTS? COUNTRY
CALL
OR VISIT US ONLINE AT
INDONESIA
021-56997777 08001128888
www.samsung.com/id/support
MALAYSIA
1800-88-9999 603-77137477 (Overseas contact)
www.samsung.com/my/support
PHILIPPINES
1-800-10-7267864 [PLDT] 1-800-8-7267864 [Globe landline and Mobile] 02-4222111 [Other landline]
www.samsung.com/ph/support
SINGAPORE
1800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
www.samsung.com/sg/support
TAIWAN
0800-329999
www.samsung.com/tw/support
VIETNAM
1800 588 889
www.samsung.com/vn/support
MYANMAR
+95-01-2399-888
www.samsung.com/support
Importir: PT. Samsung Electronics Indonesia Jl. Jababeka Raya Blok F 29-33 Kawasan Industri Cikarang, Cikarang Bekasi 17530 DB68-05198A-01
SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 56
2/16/2015 10:29:48 AM
Features of your new air conditioner Cool Summer Offer On those hot sweltering summer days and long restless nights, there is no better escape from the heat than the cool comforts of home. Your new air conditioner brings an end to exhausting hot summer days and lets you rest. This summer, beat the heat with your own air conditioner.
Contents Safety precautions ......................................................................... 3 Checking before use ..................................................................... 7 Viewing the parts ........................................................................... 9 Cleaning and maintaining the air conditioner .............. 10 Troubleshooting .......................................................................... 13
Cost Efficient System Your new air conditioner not only provides maximum cooling power in the summer, but can also be an efficient heating method in the winter with the advanced “Heat pump” system. This technology is up to 300% more efficient than electrical heating, so you can further reduce its running cost. Now, meet year-round needs with one air conditioner.
Look for Everywhere The elegant and harmonious design gives priority to the aesthetics of your space and complements any of your existing interior decor. With its soft color and rounded-edge shape, the new air conditioner adds class to any room. Enjoy what your air conditioner offers both functionally and esthetically.
Compact and easy-to-use cassette type Designed to be installed into most types of suspended ceiling, the cassette type air conditioner is ideal for business and commercial accommodations. Fresh cool/warm air can be provided through the controllable 1, 2 or 4 sides of the unit. All functions of the air conditioner will be controlled easily via a remote control.
Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment) (Applicable in the countries with separate collection systems) This marking on the product, accessories or literature indicates that the product and its electronic accessories (e.g. charger, headset, USB cable) should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate these items from other types of waste and recycle them responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of where and how they can take these items for environmentally safe recycling. Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product and its electronic accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal.
2
Safety precautions Before using your new air conditioner, please read this manual thoroughly to ensure that you know how to safely and efficiently operate the extensive features and functions of your new appliance.
Important safety symbols and precautions:
WARNING
Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in severe personal injury or death.
CAUTION
Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in minor personal injury or property damage. Follow directions. Do NOT attempt. Make sure the machine is grounded to prevent electric shock. Unplug the power plug from the wall socket. Do NOT disassemble.
FOR INSTALLATION
WARNING
Use the power line with the power specifications of the product or higher and use the power line for this appliance only. In addition, do not use an extension line. Extending the power line may result in electric shock or fire. Do not use an electric transformer. It may result in electric shock or fire. If the voltage/frequency/rated current condition is different, it may cause fire. The installation of this appliance must be performed by a qualified technician or service company. Failing to do so may result in electric shock, fire, explosion, problems with the product, or injury. Install a switch and circuit breaker dedicated to the air conditioner. Failing to do so may result in electric shock or fire. Fix the outdoor unit firmly so that the electric part of the outdoor unit is not exposed. Failing to do so may result in electric shock or fire. Do not install this appliance near a heater, inflammable material. Do not install this appliance in a humid, oily or dusty location, in a location exposed to direct sunlight and water (rain drops). Do not install this appliance in a location where gas may leak. This may result in electric shock or fire. Never install the outdoor unit in a location such as on a high external wall where it could fall. If the outdoor unit falls, it may result in injury, death or property damage. This appliance must be properly grounded. Do not ground the appliance to a gas pipe, plastic water pipe, or telephone line. Failure to do so may result in electric shock, fire, an explosion, or other problems with the product. Never plug the power cord into a socket that is not grounded correctly and make sure that it is in accordance with local and national codes.
3
ENGLISH
Because the following operating instructions cover various models, the characteristics of your air conditioner may differ slightly from those described in this manual. If you have any questions, call your nearest contact center or find help and information online at www.samsung.com.
Safety precautions FOR INSTALLATION
CAUTION
Install your appliance on a level and hard floor that can support its weight. Failing to do so may result in abnormal vibrations, noise, or problems with the product. Install the draining hose properly so that water is drained correctly. Failing to do so may result in water overflowing and property damage. When installing the outdoor unit, make sure to connect the draining hose so that draining is performed correctly. The water generated during the heating operation by the outdoor unit may overflow and result in property damage. In particular, in winter, if a block of ice falls, it may result in injury, death or property damage.
FOR POWER SUPPLY
WARNING
When the circuit breaker is damaged, contact your nearest service center. Do not pull or excessively bend the power line. Do not twist or tie the power line. Do not hook the power line over a metal object, place a heavy object on the power line, insert the power line between objects, or push the power line into the space behind the appliance. This may result in electric shock or fire.
FOR POWER SUPPLY
CAUTION
When not using the air conditioner for a long period of time or during a thunder/lightning storm, cut the power at the circuit breaker. Failing to do so may result in electric shock or fire.
FOR USING
WARNING
If the appliance is flooded, please contact your nearest service center. Failing to do so may result in electric shock or fire. If the appliance generates a strange noise, a burning smell or smoke, unplug the power plug immediately and contact your nearest service center. Failing to do so may result in electric shock or fire. In the event of a gas leak (such as propane gas, LP gas, etc.), ventilate immediately without touching the power line. Do not touch the appliance or power line. Do not use a ventilating fan. A spark may result in an explosion or fire. To reinstall the air conditioner, please contact your nearest service center. Failing to do so may result in problems with the product, water leakage, electric shock, or fire. A delivery service for the product is not provided. If you reinstall the product in another location, additional construction expenses and an installation fee will be charged. Especially, when you wish to install the product in an unusual location such as in an industrial area or near the seaside where it is exposed to the salt in the air, please contact your nearest service center.
4
FOR USING
WARNING ENGLISH
Do not touch the circuit breaker with wet hands. This may result in electric shock. Do not strike or pull the air conditioner with excessive force. This may result in fire, injury, or problems with the product. Do not place an object near the outdoor unit that allows children to climb onto the machine. This may result in children seriously injuring themselves. Do not turn the air conditioner off with the circuit breaker while it is operating. Turning the air conditioner off and then on again with the circuit breaker may cause a spark and result in electric shock or fire. After unpacking the air conditioner, keep all packaging materials well out of the reach of children, as packaging materials can be dangerous to children. If a child places a bag over its head, it may result in suffocation. Do not insert your fingers or foreign substances into the outlet when the air conditioner is operating or the front panel is closing. Take special care that children do not injure themselves by inserting their fingers into the product. Do not touch the front panel with your hands or fingers during the heating operation. This may result in electric shock or burns. Do not insert your fingers or foreign substances into the air inlet/outlet of the air conditioner. Take special care that children do not injure themselves by inserting their fingers into the product. Do not use this air conditioner for long periods of time in badly ventilated locations or near infirm people. Since this may be dangerous due to a lack of oxygen, open a window at least once an hour. If any foreign substance such as water has entered the appliance, cut the power by unplugging the power plug and turning the circuit breaker off and then contact your nearest service center. Failing to do so may result in electric shock or fire. Do not attempt to repair, disassemble, or modify the appliance yourself. Do not use any fuse (such as cooper, steel wire, etc.)other than the standard fuse. Failing to do so may result in electric shock, fire, problems with the product, or injury.
FOR USING
CAUTION
Do not place objects or devices under the indoor unit. Water dripping from the indoor unit may result in fire or property damage. Check that the installation frame of the outdoor unit is not broken at least once a year. Failing to do so may result in injury, death or property damage. Max current is measured according to IEC standard for safety and current is measured according to ISO standard for energy efficiency.
5
Safety precautions FOR USING
CAUTION
Do not stand on top of the appliance or place objects (such as laundry, lighted candles, lighted cigarettes, dishes, chemicals, metal objects, etc.) on the appliance. This may result in electric shock, fire, problems with the product, or injury. Do not operate the appliance with wet hands. This may result in electric shock. Do not spray volatile material such as insecticide onto the surface of the appliance. As well as being harmful to humans, it may also result in electric shock, fire or problems with the product. Do not drink the water from the air conditioner. The water may be harmful to humans. Do not apply a strong impact to the remote controller and do not disassemble the remote controller. Do not touch the pipes connected with the product. This may result in burns or injury. Do not use this air conditioner to preserve precision equipment, food, animals, plants or cosmetics, or for any other unusual purposes. This may result in property damage. Avoid directly exposing humans, animals or plants from the air flow from the air conditioner for long periods of time. This may result in harm to humans, animals or plants. This appliance is not intended for use by persons (including children) with reduced physical, sensory or mental capabilities, or lack of experience and knowledge, unless they have been given supervision or instruction concerning use of the appliance by a person responsible for their safety. Children should be supervised to ensure that they do not play with the appliance.
FOR CLEANING
WARNING
Do not clean the appliance by spraying water directly onto it. Do not use benzene, thinner or alcohol to clean the appliance. This may result in discoloration, deformation, damage, electric shock or fire. Before cleaning or performing maintenance, unplug the air conditioner from the wall socket and wait until the fan stops. Failing to do so may result in electric shock or fire.
FOR CLEANING
CAUTION
Take care when cleaning the surface of the heat exchanger of the outdoor unit since it has sharp edges. To avoid cutting your fingers, wear thick cotton gloves when cleaning it. Do not clean the inside of the air conditioner by yourself. For cleaning inside the appliance, contact your nearest service center. When cleaning the internal filter, refer to the descriptions in the ‘Cleaning and maintaining the air conditioner’ section. Failure to do may result in damage, electric shock or fire.
6
Checking before use Operation ranges
NOTE
MODE
OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE
INDOOR TEMPERATURE
COOLING
-15°C/5°F to 50°C/122°F
18°C/64°F to 32°C/90°F
HEATING
-20°C/-4°F to 24°C/75°F
27°C/81°F or less
DRYING
-15°C/5°F to 43°C/109°F
18°C/64°F to 32°C/90°F
ENGLISH
The table below indicates the temperature and humidity ranges the air conditioner can be operated within. Refer to the table for efficient use. INDOOR HUMIDITY
80% or less
• T he standardized temperature for heating is 7˚C/45˚F. If the outdoor temperature drops to 0˚C/32˚F or below, the heating capacity can be reduced depending on the temperature condition. If the cooling operation is used at over 32˚C/90˚F (indoor temperature), it does not cool at its full capacity. • The use of the air conditioner at a relative humidity above the expected one (80%) may cause the formation of condensate and the leakage of water drops on the floor.
Maintaining your air conditioner Internal protections via the unit control system This internal protection operates if an internal fault occurs in the air conditioner.
Type
NOTE
Description
Against cold air
The internal fan will be off to against cold air when the heat pump is heating.
De-ice cycle (Defrost cycle)
The internal fan will be off to against cold air when the heat pump is heating.
Anti-protection of internal battery
The compressor will be off to protect internal battery when the air conditioner operates in Cool mode.
Protect compressor
The air conditioner does not start operating immediately to protect the compressor of the outdoor unit after it has been started.
• I f the heat pump is operating in Heat mode, De-ice cycle is actuated to remove frost from an outdoor unit that may have deposited at low temperatures. The internal fan is switched off automatically and restarted only after the de-ice cycle is completed.
7
Checking before use AA Tips on using air conditioner Here are some tips that you would follow when using your air conditioner.
8
TOPIC
RECOMMENDATION
Cooling
• If current outside temperatures are much higher than the selected indoor temperature, it may take time to bring the inner temperature to the desired coolness. • Avoid drastically turning down the temperature. Energy is wasted and the room does not cool faster.
Heating
• Since the air conditioner heats the room by taking heat energy from outdoor air, the heating capacity may decrease when outdoor temperatures are extremely low. If you feel the air conditioner insufficiently heats, using an additional heating appliance in combination with the air conditioner is recommended.
Frost & De-ice
• When the air conditioner runs in Heat mode, due to temperature difference between the unit and the outside air, frost will form. If this happens: - The air conditioner stops heating. - The air conditioner will operate automatically in De-ice mode for 10 minutes. - The steam produced on the outdoor unit in De-ice mode is safe. No intervention is required; after about 10 minutes, the air conditioner operates again normally. The unit will not operate when it starts to de-ice.
Fan
• Fan may not operate for about 3~5 minutes at the beginning to prevent any cold blasts while the air conditioner is warming up.
High indoor/outdoor temperatures
• If both indoor and outdoor temperatures are high and the air conditioner is running in Heat mode, the outdoor unit’s fan and compressor may stop at times. This is normal; wait until the air conditioner turns on again.
Power failure
• If a power failure occurs during the operation of the air conditioner, the operating immediately stops and unit will be off. When power returns, the air conditioner will run automatically.
Protection mechanism
• If the air conditioner has just been turned on after operation stops or being plugged in, cool/ warm air does not come out for 3 minutes to protect the compressor of the outdoor unit.
Automatic air flow blade control
• If the air conditioner is operating in abnormal conditions (such as operating the air conditioner with windows open or when small capacity indoor unit is installed and operating in a room that is too large) indoor can become very humid when the angle of the air flow blade is small and performance of the product may decrease. When indoor humidity increases, indoor unit will automatically detect it and open the air flow blade in wider angle to make sure that performance of the product is stable.
Viewing the parts AA Main parts ENGLISH
Air flow blade
Air intake Air filter (under the grille)
Display
Indicator
Remote control sensor Filter reset indicator Timer indicator Removing frost indicator On/Off operation indicator
NOTE
• Y our air conditioner and display may look slightly different from the illustration shown above depending on your model.
9
Cleaning and maintaining the air conditioner AA Cleaning the exterior Wipe the surface of the unit with a slightly wet or dry cloth when needed. Wipe off dirt of odd-shaped area by using a soft brush.
CAUTION
10
• D o not use Benzene or Thinner. They may damage the surface of the air conditioner and can create a risk of fire.
Cleaning air filter and grille Detach the front grille.
Open the blades on the left and right side of the
Remove the safety clip first and then remove the
Samsung logo. Press both of the levers and pull the grille downward. Two safety clips are mounted to the front grille to prevent it from dropping.
hinge. Pull the green switch on the hinge part down and then press and pull the hinge part to remove the grille. (There are two hinges on the grille and you must apply this step on both of them to remove the grille.)
If you want to clean the filter only, you do not have to detach the grille. Follow step 4 and 5
Clean the grille and Air filter with a vacuum cleaner or soft brush. If dust is too heavy, then rinse it with running water and dry it in a ventilated area. For best conditions, repeat every two weeks. If the Air filter dries in a confined (or humid) area, odors
may generate. If it occurs, re-clean and dry it in a well-ventilated area.
Pull out the Air filter.
Insert the Air filter back in its original position.
Attach the front grille.
You will hear a click sound when the Air filter is
Reverse the above steps to attach the front grille.
properly placed.
NOTE
• The illustration shown above may differ from yours depending on your model. • After cleaning the filter, press the Filter Reset button on the remote control for 2 seconds to reset the filter schedule. Filter sign indicator will be on for cleaning time. • If the angle on the air flow blades has been changed by user due to opening the front grille for installation or maintenance, you must turn off the circuit breaker and turn it on again before using the air conditioner. Otherwise, angles of the each angle can be different or some of the blade may not close when the product is off.
11
ENGLISH
Open the front grille.
Cleaning and maintaining the air conditioner AA If the air conditioner will not be used for an extended period of time, dry the air conditioner to maintain it in best condition. Dry the air conditioner thoroughly by operating in Fan mode for 3 to 4 hours and disconnect the power plug.
There may be internal damage if moisture is left in components.
Before using the air conditioner again, dry the inner components of the air conditioner again by running in Fan mode for 3 to
4 hours. This helps remove odors which may have generated from dampness.
Periodical checks Refer to the following chart to maintain the air conditioner properly. Type
Description Clean the air filter (1)
Indoor unit
Monthly
Every 4 months
Once a year
Clean the condensate drain pan (2)
Thoroughly clean the heat exchanger (2)
Clean the condensate drain pipe (2)
Replace the remote control batteries (1) Clean the heat exchanger on the outside of the unit (2)
Outdoor unit
Clean the heat exchanger on the inside of the unit (2)
Clean the electric components with jets of air (2)
Verify that all the electric components are firmly tightened (2)
Clean the fan (2)
Verify that all the fan assembly is firmly tightened (2)
Clean the condensate drain pan (2)
: This check mark requires checking the indoor/outdoor unit periodically, following to the description to maintain the air conditioner properly.
NOTE
12
(1) The described operations should be performed more frequently if the area of installation is very dusty. (2) These operations must always be performed by qualified personnel. For more detailed information, see the installation part in the manual.
Troubleshooting AA Refer to the following chart if the air conditioner operates abnormally. This may save time and unnecessary expenses. SOLUTION
The air conditioner does not operate immediately after it has been restarted.
• B ecause of the protective mechanism, the appliance does not start operating immediately to keep the unit from overloading. The air conditioner will start in 3 minutes.
The air conditioner does not work at all.
• C heck that the power plug is properly connected. Insert the power plug into the wall socket correctly. • Check if the circuit breaker is switched off. • Check if there is a power failure. • Check your fuse. Make sure it is not blown out.
The temperature does not change.
• C heck if you selected Fan mode. Press the Mode button on the remote control to select another mode.
The cool (warm) air does not come out of the air conditioner.
• C heck if the set temperature is higher (lower) than the current temperature. Press the Temperature button on the remote control to change the set temperature. Press the Temperature button to decrease or increase the temperature. • Check if the air filter is blocked by dirt. Clean the air filter every two weeks. • Check if the air conditioner has just been turned on. If so, wait 3 minutes. Cool air does not come out to protect the compressor of the outdoor unit. • Check if the air conditioner is installed in a place with a direct exposure to sunlight. Hang curtains on windows to boost cooling efficiency. • Check if the cover or any obstacle is not near the outdoor unit. • Check if the refrigerant pipe is too long. • Check if the air conditioner is only available in Cool mode. • Check if the remote control is only available for cooling model.
The fan speed does not change.
• C heck if you selected Auto or Dry mode. The air conditioner automatically adjusts the fan speed to Auto in Auto/Dry mode.
Timer function does not set.
• Check if you press the Power button on the remote control after you have set the time.
Odors permeate in the room during operation.
• C heck if the appliance is running in a smoky area or if there is a smell entering from outside. Operate the air conditioner in Fan mode or open the windows to air out the room.
The air conditioner makes a bubbling sound.
• A bubbling sound may be heard when the refrigerant is circulating through the compressor. Let the air conditioner operate in a selected mode. • When you press the Power button on the remote control, noise may be heard from the drain pump inside the air conditioner.
Water is dripping from the air flow blades.
• C heck if the air conditioner has been cooling for an extended period of time with the air flow blades pointed downwards. Condensation may generate due to the difference in temperature.
Remote control is not working.
• • • •
The air conditioner does not turn on or off with the wired remote control.
• Check if you set the wired remote control for group control.
The wired remote control does not operate.
• C heck if TEST indicator is displayed on the wired remote control. If so, turn off the unit and switch off the circuit breaker. Call your nearest contact center.
The indicators of the digital display flashes.
• P ress the Power button on the remote control to turn the unit off and switch the circuit breaker off. Then, switch it on again.
Check if your batteries are depleted. Make sure batteries are correctly installed. Make sure nothing is blocking your remote control sensor. Check that there are strong lighting apparatus near the air conditioner. Strong light which comes from fluorescent bulbs or neon signs may interrupt the electric waves.
13
ENGLISH
PROBLEM
QUESTIONS OR COMMENTS? COUNTRY
CALL
OR VISIT US ONLINE AT
RUSSIA
8-800-555-55-55
www.samsung.com/ru/support
BELARUS
810-800-500-55-500
www.samsung.com/support
GEORGIA
0-800-555-555
www.samsung.com/support
ARMENIA
0-800-05-555
www.samsung.com/support
AZERBAIJAN
0-88-555-55-55
www.samsung.com/support
KAZAKHSTAN
8-10-800-500-55-500 (GSM: 7799, VIP care 7700)
www.samsung.com/support
UZBEKISTAN
8-10-800-500-55-500
www.samsung.com/support
KYRGYZSTAN
8-10-800-500-55-500
www.samsung.com/kz_ru/support
TADJIKISTAN
8-10-800-500-55-500
www.samsung.com/support
MONGOLIA
7-495-363-17-00
www.samsung.com/support
UKRAINE
0-800-502-000
www.samsung.com/ua/support (Ukrainian) www.samsung.com/ua_ru/support (Russian)
MOLDOVA
0-800-614-40
www.samsung.com/support
SPAIN
0034902172678 [HHP] 0034902167267
www.samsung.com/es/support
SOUTH AFRICA
0860 SAMSUNG (726 7864)
www.samsung.com/support
4 Way Cassette Type
Air Conditioner user manual
This manual is made with 100% recycled paper.
imagine the possibilities Thank you for purchasing this Samsung product.
DB98-32152A-03
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 32
2013-10-21 오전 9:19:18
Wired Remote Control MWR-WE10
Air Conditioner user manual
imagine the possibilities Thank you for purchasing this Samsung product.
EN ES FR IT PT DE EL NL PL HU RU AR DB98-32810A(8)
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 33
2013-10-21 오전 9:19:18
Contents Preparation
Safety Precautions ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4 Part Names ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 6
Air Conditioner
Basic Operation of Air Conditioner ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 10 Air Swing ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 12 Indoor Temperature Checking Function ................................................................................................................................................................................ 12 Quiet/Sleep Operation .................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 13 Humidifying Operation ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 14 Blade Selection .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 14 Motion Detect Sensor ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 15 Outdoor Air Intake ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 15 Auto Cleaning Function .................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 16 S-Plasma Ion ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 16 CO2/Power Consumption Check ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 17
2
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 2
2013-10-21 오전 9:18:41
Ventilator(ERV)
ENGLISH
Basic Operation of Ventilator(ERV) ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 18 Energy Saving Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 20 Clean Up ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 20 S-Plasma Ion ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 21 External Interconnection Control .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 21 Exhaust Hood Interconnection Control .................................................................................................................................................................................. 21
Advanced Instruction
Weekly Schedule Setting ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 22 Setting Holidays during the Weekly Schedule .................................................................................................................................................................... 25 Canceling a Weekly Schedule ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 26 Initializing a Weekly Schedule ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 27
Setting Additional User Functions
How to Set the Additional User Functions ............................................................................................................................................................................ 28
3
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 3
2013-10-21 오전 9:18:41
PREPARATION
Safety Precautions This content is intended to protect the user’s safety and prevent property damage. Please read it carefully for correct use of the product.
WARNING
Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in severe personal injury or death.
CAUTION
Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in minor personal injury or property damage. Follow directions.
Unplug the power plug from the wall socket.
Do NOT attempt.
Do NOT disassemble.
Make sure the machine is grounded to prevent electric shock.
FOR INSTALLATION
WARNING
The installation of this appliance must be performed by a qualified technician or service company. Failing to do so may result in electric shock, fire, explosion, problems with the product, or injury. You must connect the product with rated power upon installation. Failing to do so may result in problems with the product, electric shock, or fire. Do not install this appliance near a heater, inflammable material. Do not install this appliance in a humid, oily or dusty location, in a location exposed to direct sunlight and water (rain drops). Do not install this appliance in a location where gas may leak. This may result in electric shock or fire.
FOR INSTALLATION
CAUTION
Install the product on a hard and even place that can support its weight. If the place cannot support its weight, the product may fall down and it may cause product damage.
FOR POWER SUPPLY
WARNING
Do not bend or pull the power cord excessively. Do not twist or tie up the power cord. This may result in electric shock or fire.
4
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 4
2013-10-21 오전 9:18:42
FOR OPERATION
WARNING ENGLISH
If the appliance generates a strange noise, a burning smell or smoke, stop the operation immediately and contact your nearest service center. Failing to do so may result in electric shock or fire. To reinstall the air conditioner, please contact your nearest service center. Failing to do so may result in problems with the product, water leakage, electric shock, or fire. A delivery service for the product is not provided. If you reinstall the product in another location, additional construction expenses and an installation fee will be charged. If the malfunction diagnosis indicator appears or malfunctions, then stop operation immediately. If you detect any burning smells from the product or it malfunctions, then immediately turn off the air conditioner/ Ventilator(ERV) and power, and then contact the service center. Continuing to use the device in this state can cause electrical shock, fire, or damage to the product. If the E8 36 indicator appears, then it means that it is time to contact the service center for periodic inspection. Neglecting these periodic inspections can result in malfunctions (only applicable to GHP model). Do not attempt to repair, disassemble, or modify the appliance yourself. Failing to do so may result in electric shock, fire, problems with the product, or injury.
FOR OPERATION
CAUTION
Do not allow water to enter the product. This may result in fire or electric shock. Do not operate the appliance with wet hands. This may result in electric shock. Do not spray volatile material such as insecticide onto the surface of the appliance. As well as being harmful to humans, it may also result in electric shock, fire or problems with the product. Do not apply a strong impact to the remote controller and do not disassemble the remote controller. Do not use this product for other purposes. This product is designed to only be used as a system air conditioner. Do not press the buttons with any sharp objects. This may result in electrical shock or part damage.
FOR CLEANING
WARNING
Do not clean the appliance by spraying water directly onto it. Do not use benzene, thinner, alcohol or acetone to clean the appliance. This may result in discoloration, deformation, damage, electric shock or fire.
5
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 5
2013-10-21 오전 9:18:42
Part Names Display ④
⑤ ⑨⑩
⑪
⑫⑬
⑭
① ②
⑮
③
⑯ ⑰ ⑱
⑥ ⑦
⑧
⑳ ⑲
LED Indicator
(Green : Normal / Red : Need to be checked)
Operation On/Off button Temperature Setting Button
• Without opening the cover of your Wired Remote Controller, you can turn the air-conditioner power On/Off or set the desired temperature.
6
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 6
2013-10-21 오전 9:18:42
Classification
Schedule related information
Ventilator (ERV) related information
Commom function related information
Function
①
Displays Air conditioner operation
②
Displays Quiet/Sleep operation
③
Displays Indoor temperature/Set temperature
④
Displays discharge temperature control
⑤
Displays CO2 /power consumption
⑥
Displays AC fan speed
⑦
Displays Blade selection
⑧
Displays Air swing(Up/Dn)
⑨
Weekly schedule/Holiday setting displays
⑩
Displays Current day() or scheduled day(_)
⑪
Displays Schedule number
⑫
Displays Scheduled device selection
⑬
Displays Current time/summer time/scheduled time
⑭
Displays Ventilator(ERV) operation
⑮
Displays Clean up
⑯
Displays Ventilator(ERV) fan speed
⑰
Displays Invalid operation /Filter cleaning (filter cleaning period)
⑱
Displays Dust box cleaning alert/check/partial locking/full locking
⑲
Displays Motion detect sensor/Exhaust hood/External interconnection control/Auto clean/ Humidifying/Energy saving/Outdoor air supply intake/ Centralized control
⑳
Displays S-Plasma Ion
Displays Indoor CO2 density
Displays Indoor humidity
Displays remaining time of the auto stop time/ERV delay time - Solid : Hour unit, Blinking : Minute unit Displays Demand Response Mode during a Demand Response Event : , , (NS HHXEG/XSA)
ENGLISH
Air Conditioner Related Information
Indication
7
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 7
2013-10-21 오전 9:18:45
Part Names Buttons
⑫ ⑨ ⑧ ① ②
⑱ ⑬ ⑮ ⑳
③ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦
④ ⑪ ⑩ ⑯⑲ ⑭ Classification
Button
① ②
Mode button
Air Conditioner ④ Related Information ⑤
Function Operation On/Off button
③
⑰
Turns the air conditioner power On/Off Selects the desired air conditioner operation
Temperature setting Sets the desired temperature button Fan speed button
Changes the air conditioner’s fan speed
Air Swing button
Changes the air flow direction to move upward or downward
⑥
Temp. button
⑦
Quiet/Sleep button
⑧
Humidity button
Checks the indoor temperature Selects Quiet or Sleep operation for the air conditioner Turns the MINI AHU indoor unit humidifying function On/Off
8
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 8
2013-10-21 오전 9:18:46
Classification ⑨
Motion detect sensor Selects when no one is detected in an indoor area, when the air conditioner button needs to be turned off automatically, when the AWAY operation is set; Outdoor air intake
Select the MINI AHU indoor unit Outdoor intake function
Schedule Button
Select the schedule setting function
⑬
User Set Button
Select the detailed setting function
Navigational buttons Move between items or change the item value
⑮
Set button
Save your new settings
⑯
ESC button
Return to general mode from schedule and detailed setting screens
⑰
Delete button
⑱
Auto Clean button
Use the auto cleaning function for your air conditioner
⑲
CO2/[kWh] button
Display the amount of CO2 and the power consumption
⑳
Filter Reset button
Turn off the filter cleaning displays (filter using time reset)
Ventilator (ERV) Related Buttons
Selects a blade for individual control
⑫
⑭
Special Function Displays
Function Blade button
ENGLISH
Air Conditioner ⑩ Related Information ⑪
Button
Cancel the schedule setting
S-Plasma Ion button Choose the S-Plasma Ion function
Operation On/Off button
Mode button
Fan speed button
E.Saver button
Clean up button
Turn the Ventilator(ERV) On/Off Select the desired operation for the Ventilator(ERV) Change the fan speed for your Ventilator(ERV) Begin Energy Saving Operation Select air purification through the in/out load controls
• After cleaning the filter, please press the Filter Reset button. The lamp will turn off, and it will be turned on again upon the next cleaning period. lamp will turn • If you press a functional button not supported by the indoor unit, then the on. • If the temperature display setting is set to indoor temperature and you press the Temp. button, the lamp display will appear. (When you install the Wired Remote Controller, the setting is available.) • If you press the On/Off button when your Ventilator(ERV) is connected to a Wired Remote Controller, then the air conditioner and the Ventilator(ERV) might operate or stop at the same time or only the air conditioner might operate or stop. The factory setting is set to simultaneous operation/stop. (When you install the Wired Remote Controller, the setting is available.) • Although the air conditioner and the Ventilator(ERV) are set to simultaneous operation/stop, you can individually control the air conditioner and the Ventilator(ERV) by using another controller (e.g. wireless remote controller, central controller, S-net mini) except for a Wired Remote Controller.
9
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 9
2013-10-21 오전 9:18:48
AIR CONDITIONER
Basic Operation of Air Conditioner Basic operations can be selected after pressing the Mode button.
Auto This function allows you to automatically adjust the temperature and the fan speed to maximize your comfort. • When the indoor temperature is very high, the device will produce a strong, cold wind. When the temperature cools down, then weaker wind will be produced.
Cool This is a frequently used operation that allows you to adjust the fan speed, temperature, and wind direction the way you like. • If you select heating operation during cooling operation, then the cooling operation is canceled.
Dry This operation effectively removes all excess humidity so that you can feel refreshed during rainy days.
Fan This operation produces wind, just like a powerful fan, so that you can enjoy a refreshing breeze.
Heat This function produces warm wind so that you can use it in the fall or winter. • Immediately after starting the heating operation, the air conditioner system may stop producing any wind at all for a while to avoid generating any cold wind. • Defrost indicator (Defrost) - If you start removing frost from the outdoor unit during heating operation, the indicator will turn on. When defrosting is over, the indicator will turn off. (When the frost is being removed, the indoor unit does not generate any breeze.) • If you stop the air conditioner after the heating operation, the air conditioner will produce some wind to discharge all the heat from the indoor unit. • If you select the cooling operation during heating operation, then the heating operation is canceled.
10
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 10
2013-10-21 오전 9:18:48
ENGLISH
Press the
button to begin operating the air conditioner.
Press the
button to select the desired operation.
Press the
button to select a fan speed. Auto Cool Dry
(Auto) (Low) ,
(Medium),
(High),
(Auto)
Fan
(Low) ,
(Medium),
(High)
Heat
(Low) ,
(Medium),
(High),
Press the
(Auto)
(Auto)
button to set the desired temperature. Auto
You can adjust the desired temperature by 1°C(1°F) within a range of 18°C~30°C(65°F~86°F).
Cool Dry Fan Heat
You can adjust the desired temperature by 1°C(1°F) within a range of 18°C~30°C(65°F~86°F). You can adjust the desired temperature by 1°C(1°F) within a range of 18°C~30°C(65°F~86°F). You can’t change the desired temperature. You can adjust the desired temperature by 1°C(1°F) within a range of 16°C~30°C(61°F~86°F).
11
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 11
2013-10-21 오전 9:18:50
Air Swing This function allows you to shift the air flow direction up and down.
Press the Air Swing
button to tilt the blade up and down.
Press the Air Swing button one more time to set the air flow direction, when the blade reaches the desired position. The up/down tilting of the blade will stop in place.
• With the duct type indoor unit, the air flow direction cannot be adjusted. If you press the Air Swing button, the lamp will appear.
Indoor Temperature Checking Function This function allows you to check the current indoor temperature.
Press the Indoor Temp. button to check the current indoor temperature.
The current indoor temperature will be displayed.
3 seconds after displaying the indoor temperature, the set temperature will appear.
• Indoor unit temperature will be indicated by 0.5°C(1°F) units. • Depending on the installation location of your Wired Remote Controller, the current indoor temperature can be different. • If the temperature display setting is set to indoor temperature and you press the Temp. button, then the lamp will appear.
12
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 12
2013-10-21 오전 9:18:52
Quiet / Sleep Operation Quiet operation reduces noise of the operation and with sleeping operation you can have the air conditioner turn off automatically after six hours without stopping the operation in the middle of the night.
Press the Quiet/Sleep button to select the desired operation. ENGLISH
If the air conditioner has both quiet and sleep operation function. Auto
Quiet
Cancel is repeated.
Cool
Quiet
Sleep
Dry
Quiet
Cancel is repeated.
Fan
Restricted lamp will appear.
Heat
Quiet
Sleep
Quiet/Sleep
Quiet/Sleep
Cancel is repeated.
Cancel is repeated.
If the air conditioner has quiet operation function only. Auto
Quiet
Cancel is repeated.
Cool
Quiet
Cancel is repeated.
Dry
Quiet
Cancel is repeated.
Fan
Restricted lamp will appear.
Heat
Quiet
Cancel is repeated.
If the air conditioner has sleep operation function only. Auto
Restricted lamp will appear.
Cool
Sleep
Dry
Restricted lamp will appear.
Fan
Restricted lamp will appear.
Heat
Sleep
Cancel is repeated.
Cancel is repeated.
• If the air conditioner does not support the quiet and sleep will appear when you press Quiet/Sleep operation, button.
13
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 13
2013-10-21 오전 9:18:53
Humidifying Operation This function allows you to use the humidifying operation of MINI AHU indoor unit when the Wired Remote Controller is connected to MINI AHU indoor unit. Increase the moisture of dry indoor air and adjust the indoor humidity for a more refreshing indoor environment.
While the air conditioner is on, press the Humidity button to begin the humidifying operation. will be displayed and the humidifying operation will start.
Cancel
Press the Humidity button one more time.
• If the indoor unit is turned off or it does not support humidifying operation, and you have pressed the Humidity button, then the lamp will be displayed.
Blade Selection Select only the desired blade to set Air Swing function.
When the air conditioner is on 1. Press the Blade button to select a blade to set the wind direction. f
Each time you press the button, it will toggle between → → → → .
f
The number corresponding to the selected blade will blink.
2. Press the Air Swing
button to select the up/down direction of the selected blade.
• Depending on the individual setting, a different blade could be selected. • If the indoor unit is off or the blade selection function is not supported, and you have pressed the Blade button, then the lamp will be displayed.
14
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 14
2013-10-21 오전 9:18:54
Motion Detect Sensor Automatically turn off the power when there is nobody in the room.
Press the MDS button to use the motion detection function.
operation. Cancel
will be displayed and the motion detection function will begin
ENGLISH
Press the MDS button one more time.
When the wired remote controller is connected with a duct
will be displayed and AWAY operation will operate.
• If an indoor unit does not support MDS or AWAY operation, but you press the MDS button, the lamp will be displayed.
Outdoor Air Intake When a Wired Remote Controller is connected to the MINI AHU indoor unit, you can use Air Intake function for the MINI AHU indoor unit.
When the air conditioner is on, press the OA Intake button to select the outdoor air intake function.
Cancel
will be displayed and the function will begin operation. Press the OA Intake button one more time.
• If the indoor unit is off or the outdoor air intake function is not supported, and you have pressed the OA Intake button, then the lamp will appear.
15
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 15
2013-10-21 오전 9:18:56
Auto Cleaning Function This function will automatically clean the filter equipped inside the air conditioner.
Press the Auto Clean button to select the auto cleaning function.
Cancel
will be displayed and the auto cleaning function will start. Press the Auto Clean button one more time.
• If the indoor unit does not support the auto cleaning function, and you have pressed the Auto Clean button, then the lamp will appear. • When the auto clean function is operating arbitrarily according to the indoor unit operation, will be displayed.
S-Plasma Ion Eliminate all the viruses, fungi, and even active oxygen in your indoor air.
When the air conditioner is on, press the S-Plasma Ion
Cancel
button to select the S-Plasma Ion function.
will be displayed and the S-Plasma Ion function is activated. Press the S-Plasma Ion
button one more time.
• If the indoor unit is turned off or the S-Plasma Ion is not supported, and you have pressed the S-Plasma Ion button, then the lamp will appear. • This button may not operate in an Ventilator(ERV), but it will be displayed if the S-Plasma Ion is installed for operation in an Ventilator(ERV).
16
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 16
2013-10-21 오전 9:18:58
CO2/Power Consumption Check Displays the amount of CO2 generated to produce the power required for air conditioner operation and the amount of power consumption.
When the air conditioner is on Press the [CO2/kWh] button twice.
[Press the [CO2/kWh] button three times.
The amount of generated The power consumption is The desired temperature is displayed. displayed. CO2 is displayed.
ENGLISH
Press the [CO2/kWh] button once.
Press the [CO2/kWh] button once. • If you don't press any button for 10 seconds, the desired temperature will be displayed. • If the indoor unit is turned off or the CO2[kg]/[kWh] display is not supported, and you have pressed the CO2/[kWh] button, then the lamp will appear. Press the [CO2/kWh] button twice.
17
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 17
2013-10-21 오전 9:18:59
VENTILATOR (ERV)
Basic Operation of Ventilator(ERV) Basic operations can be selected by pressing the Mode button.
Heat-EX Energy loss is minimized by recovering energy exhausted when indoor heating or cooling.
Quiet Reduce the noise generated from Ventilator(ERV) operation.
Outing This function allows you to operate the Ventilator(ERV) while you are away from home. • If the operational status is changed by another controller, the Outing Operation is canceled.
By-Pass This activates the intake of external air so that it comes indoors.
Auto This can be automatically adjusted depending on the degree of pollution in your indoor air.
Purifier This cleans and purifies your air. • You can use this function after connecting the Ventilator(ERV) to the IAQ.
Heat-EX/Purifier This can simultaneously operate the Heat-ex mode with purifier mode.
By-Pass/Purifier This function can clean the air through an intake of fresh external air. Intake fresh air will be purified at the same time when this function is used.
Auto/Purifier This function can automatically perform Ventilator(ERV) and cleaning at the same time.
18
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 18
2013-10-21 오전 9:18:59
ENGLISH
Press the
button to begin the Ventilator(ERV) operation.
Press the
button to select the desired operation.
• The following operation can only take place if all the options for your Ventilator(ERV) are selected. (When you install the Wired Remote Controller, the setting is available.)
Press the
button to change the fan speed.
Heat-EX Quiet Outing
(High) ▷
(Turbo) ▷
(Low)
Can’t change the fan speed. (Low)
By-Pass
(High) ▷
(Turbo) ▷
(Low)
Auto
(High) ▷
(Turbo) ▷
(Low) (Auto) ▷
Purifier
(High) ▷
(Turbo) ▷
Heat-EX/Purifier
(High) ▷
(Turbo) ▷
(Low)
By-Pass/Purifier
(High) ▷
(Turbo) ▷
(Low)
Auto/Purifier
(High) ▷
(Turbo) ▷
(Low)
※ After installing a CO2 sensor in your Ventilator(ERV), you can select from (Auto)▹ (Low). (Exception : Quiet Operation, Outing Operation)
(Low)
(High) ▹
(Turbo)▹
19
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 19
2013-10-21 오전 9:19:03
Energy Saving Operation Reduce your power consumption and save money on your electric bill.
Press the E.Saver button to select Power Saving Operation. When the ventilator (ERV) and the air conditioner is connected together
This function compares the outdoor and indoor temperatures, and then automatically selects Heat-EX operation or By-Pass operation.
When the ventilator (ERV) is installed individually (Setting On/Off alternating operation)
The ventilator (ERV) will turn On and Off in Quiet (Low) mode every 30 minutes.
When the ventilator (ERV) is installed individually (Setting outdoor air cooling operation for different temperature setting)
Temperature can be adjusted with Temperature setting button.
Either Heat-EX or By-Pass mode will be selected and operate depending on the set temperature.
Cancel
Press the E.Saver button one more time. • Energy Saving Operation may not activate when central control, external control, or a exhaust hood is used. • When the Air conditioner is connected individually, Energy Saving Operation is not available.
Clean Up Prevent odor and dust from getting in to the area where you are by making the airflow input bigger than the airflow output.
When the ventilator(ERV) is on, press the Clean Up button to select the clean up function.
Cancel
is displayed and the clean up function is activated. Press the Clean Up button one more time.
• If the ventilator(ERV) is on or the clean up function is not supported, and you have pressed the Clean Up button, then the lamp will appear.
20
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 20
2013-10-21 오전 9:19:04
S-Plasma Ion Using the Virus Doctor function, you can remove virus, fungi, and even active oxygen.
If the S-Plasma Ion function is installed in your ventilator(ERV) or indoor unit, then will be displayed and the S-Plasma Ion function will begin operation. ENGLISH
External Interconnection Control
When connecting an ventilator(ERV) to the indoor unit of the air conditioner, you can turn your ventilator(ERV) on or off depending on whether the indoor unit’s on or off.
Even during the external controls, you can use your remote controller to control ventilator(ERV).
Exhaust Hood Interconnection Control
When the ventilator(ERV) or MINI AHU indoor operates in another mode, it will be indicated if the Exhaust hood interconnection is achieved. If you change operation during Exhaust hood interconnection, the newly selected operation will appear on the screen.
You cannot control the Exhaust hood with your remote controller.
21
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 21
2013-10-21 오전 9:19:05
ADVANCED INSTRUCTION
Weekly Schedule Setting You can select a day and time to start and stop operation. 1. Press the Schedule button. (weekly) will be displayed. At that time, press the [∧]/[∨] buttons to select ‘weekly’ from the option of ‘weekly’ and ‘holiday’.
f
2. Press the [＞] button and select the 'Day' for your schedule. You can press the [∧]/[∨] buttons to select a scheduled day (Sun~Sat).
f
• You can select many days for multiple schedules. In this case, you should directly move to “Schedule Device” selection without selecting a schedule number. 3. Until your reservation number is displayed, press the [＞] button to select a “Schedule Number.” f Press the [∧]/[∨] buttons to select a Schedule Number (1~6). f If no schedule is chosen, then the edge of the box for the schedule number and the schedule number will blink. • If the schedule is already set , then the square boxes surrounding the schedule number will blink. If you want to change it, then select a schedule number. 4. Press the [＞] button and select 'Schedule Device.' Press the [∧]/[∨] buttons repeatedly to select a device setting from among Air Conditioner + Ventilator(ERV), Air Conditioner, or Ventilator(ERV). f You can only select a Schedule Device that is connected. f
Refer to the table below for the setting order according to the option of schedule device. Classification Air-conditioner + Ventilator(ERV) Air-conditioner Ventilator(ERV)
Setting order 5 6 ... 15 5 6 ... 11 14 15 5 ... 8 12 ... 15
5. After pressing the [＞] button, select 'AM/PM.' Press the [∧]/[∨] buttons to select AM or PM for the time.
f
22
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 22
2013-10-21 오전 9:19:07
6. After pressing the [＞] button, select the 'Hour.' f Press the [∧]/[∨] button to select the hour setting for the time. ENGLISH
7. After pressing the [＞] button, select the 'Minute.' f Press the [∧]/[∨] button to select the minute setting for the time.
8. After pressing the [＞] button, select the “On/Off” schedule. f Press the [∧]/[∨] buttons repeatedly to select either On or Off. f If you select ’Off’, follow 14 15.
9. After pressing the [＞] button, select the Air Conditioner Related Operation Mode. You can only use this for air conditioner on-operation scheduling. f Press the [∧]/[∨] buttons repeatedly to select from (Auto)(Cool) (Dry)(Fan)(Heat) operation. Depending on the option setting, automatic or heating operation sometimes cannot be selected. (When you install the Wired Remote Controller, the setting is available.) f
10. Press the [＞] button and select the desired temperature. f You can only use this for air conditioner on-operation scheduling. f Press the [∧]/[∨] buttons repeatedly to set the temperature by 1°C(1°F). If fan operation is selected, you can’t set the desired temperature.
23
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 23
2013-10-21 오전 9:19:09
Weekly Schedule Setting 11. After pressing the [＞] button, select a fan speed. f You can only use this for air conditioner on-operation scheduling or when the operational mode is in Cool/Fan/Heat. f Press the [∧]/[∨] buttons repeatedly to toggle the fan speed in order of (Low )(Medium)(High)(Auto). If Auto operation or Dry operation is selected, then you can’t set the fan speed. 12. After pressing the [＞] button, select the ventilator(ERV) related operation mode. f You can only use this for Heat-Ex on-operation scheduling. f Press the [∧]/[∨] button, select the ERV related operation mode: (Heat EX)(Quiet)(Outing)(Bypass)(Auto)(Purifier) (Heat-Ex / Purifier)(By-Pass / Purifier)(Auto / Purifier) 13. After pressing the [＞] button, select a fan speed for ventilator(ERV). You can only use this for Heat-Ex on-operation scheduling. f Press the [∧]/[∨] buttons repeatedly to set the fan speed, in order of (High)(Turbo)(Medium). f
14. Press the Set button to complete the weekly schedules. f '_' is displayed for the selected day, and it will be saved in three seconds. [e.g. when Monday is reserved ( ) ] f If you need to make additional schedules, start again from the weekly and holiday screen. 15. Press the Esc button to exit to By-Pass mode. • If you want to cancel your weekly schedules while you are setting them, then press the Esc button. • If “centralize control” is set, then you can still set a weekly schedule, but it won’t be actually executed.
24
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 24
2013-10-21 오전 9:19:10
Setting Holidays during the Weekly Schedule You can select holidays during the weekly schedule. If you set the holiday, the set weekly schedule function will not operate. 1. Press schedule button. (schedule) will be displayed, press [∧]/[∨] button to select ‘Holiday’ from the option of ‘weekly’ and ‘holiday’.
ENGLISH
f
2. Press [＞] button and select the ‘Day’ for the holiday during the weekly schedule. f
You can select the holidays (Sun~Sat) by pressing [∧]/[∨] button. • You can select several days for multiple settings.
3. Press Set button to complete the holiday of weekly schedule setting.
4. Press the Esc button to exit to By-Pass mode. • If you want to cancel your holiday of weekly schedule while you are setting them, press the ESC button. • You can set the holidays only with the dates with weekly indicator '_'. • The weekly indicator '_' of the dates set as holidays will disappear on the display.
25
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 25
2013-10-21 오전 9:19:12
Canceling a Weekly Schedule You can cancel your weekly schedule. 1. Press the Schedule button. f
(Schedule) is displayed and (Weekly) will blink.
2. After pressing the [＞] button, select 'Day' to cancel. f
You can press the [∧]/[∨] button to select a scheduled day.
3. After pressing the [＞] button, select a 'schedule number' to cancel. f
Press the [∧]/[∨] button to select a schedule number (1~6).
4. Press Delete button to cancel the weekly schedule setting you made.
5. Press Set button to save the cancellation of your weekly schedule.
6. Press the Esc button to exit to general mode.
26
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 26
2013-10-21 오전 9:19:13
Initializing a Weekly Schedule You can initialize all the weekly schedules set in your Wired Remote Controller. 1. Press the Delete button for five seconds. f
All the weekly schedule settings will be erased. ENGLISH
• You can’t restore your old settings after deleting the weekly schedule by pressing the Delete button, so be careful when you use this function.
27
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 27
2013-10-21 오전 9:19:14
SETTING ADDITIONAL USER FUNCTIONS
How to Set the Additional User Functions SEG Used Main menu Sub-menu
12 34
56
When entering the smart tuning mode, auto fan speed will be displayed (Main menu 8).
1. If you want to set the detailed settings, press the User Set button. f
You will enter the User Set mode, and the [Main Menu] will be displayed.
2. Refer to the Wired Remote Controller’s User Set list on the next page to select the desired menu. Using the [∧]/[∨] buttons, select a main menu number and press the [＞] button to enter the sub-menu setting screen. f Using the [∧]/[∨] buttons, select a sub-menu number and press the [＞] button to enter the data setting screen. f Once you have entered the setting screen, the current setting will be displayed. f Refer to the chart for data setting. f Using the [∧]/[∨] buttons, change the settings and press the [＞] button to move to the next setting. f Press the Set button to save the setting and exit to the sub-menu setting screen. f Press the Esc button to exit to general mode. f
• While setting the data, you can use the [＞]/[＜] buttons to set the range of SEG used. • While configuring the setting, press the Esc button to exit to the sub-menu setting screen without saving the setting.
28
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 28
2013-10-21 오전 9:19:14
2
1 2 1 2
5
3 4 5
6
7 8 0
SEG Used
Default
Range
Unit
Auto stop time setting/checking 1,2 Lower Limit 1,2 Upper Limit 3,4 All locking 1 Lock of Operation 2 On/Off button Lock of operation 3 selection button Lock of temperature Lock of partial button 4 setting button Lock of fan speed 5 button Lock of schedule 6 setting button Current Temperature Setting (Year, Month, Date) 1,2/3,4/5,6 Day/AM/ Current Time Setting (Day, Hour, Minute) PM/1,2/3,4 Use of summer time 1 Summer Time Use and (Y/N) Setting Methods Summer Time 2 Application Method Summer time use (Weekly) 1,2/4 Start (? Month, ? th Sunday) Summer time use (Weekly) 1,2/4 End (? Month, ? th Sunday)
0 16(61) 30(86) 0
0~12 hours 16~30°C (61~86°F) 18~30°C (65~86°F) 0-Unlock, 1-Lock
1 hour 1°C(1°F) 1°C(1°F) -
0
0-Unlock, 1-Lock
-
0
0-Unlock, 1-Lock
-
0
0-Unlock, 1-Lock
-
0
0-Unlock, 1-Lock
-
Temp limits [°C(°F)]
3
4
Functions
Summer time use (Daily) Start (? Month, ? th Sunday) Summer time use (Daily) End (? Month, ? th Sunday) Backlight Time Setting/Checking Use of LED(Green) (Y/N) Use of LED (Red) (Y/N) Ventilator (ERV) delay Ventilator(ERV) Delay time setting/checking Application (Y/N) [When using Ventilator Delay Time (ERV) interlocking control] Smart tuning Reset to user mode defaults (except the current time)
0
0-Unlock, 1-Lock
-
10/01/01 Friday/ PM/12/00
00~99/1~12/1~31
YY,MM,DD Day, hour, minute
Sun~Sat/AM~PM/0~12/0~59
0
0-No use, 1-Use
-
0
0- Weekly,1- Daily
-
03/F 10/F
1~12th month/ 1~4,F (last week)th week 1~12 month/ 1~4,F (last week)th week
ENGLISH
Main Sub Menu menu 1
-
1,2/3,4
03/22
Jan~Dec/1~31st day
1,2/3,4
09/22
Jan~Dec/1~31st day
1,2 3 4
5 1 1
0~30 sec 0-No use, 1-Use 0-No use, 1-Use
Month, date Month, date 1 sec -
1
0
0-No use, 1-Use
-
3,4
30
30~60 minutes
1 minute
1,2
0
-2~+2
1
1
0
0-No use, 1-Reset
-
• ‘NONE’ will be displayed if the indoor unit does not support the function. In some cases, the setting may not possible or it may be not applied though it is set on the unit. • Summer time: Practice of temporarily advancing clocks during the summertime.
29
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 29
2013-10-21 오전 9:19:14
How to Set the Additional User Functions Current Time Setting (Example) 1. Press the User Set button. f
(Main Menu) will be displayed, and you can press the [∧]/[∨] buttons to select No. 4, which will set the current time.
2. Press the [＞] button to select 'Year, Month, Date' in the [Sub-menu]. f
Press the [∧]/[∨] buttons to select No. 1. You can modify the year/month/ date setting.
3. Press the [＞] button to select the 'Year'. f
Press the [∧]/[∨] buttons to select the year ('00~'99).
4. Press the [＞] button to select the 'Month'. f
Press the [∧]/[∨] buttons to select month(01~12).
5. Press the [＞] button to select the 'Date'. f
Press the [∧]/[∨] buttons to select date(01~31).
6. Press the Set button to complete your setting of 'Year, Month, Date'. f
The setting changes will be applied and you can exit to the sub-menu.
30
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 30
2013-10-21 오전 9:19:16
f
Press the [∧]/[∨] buttons to select no. 2. You can set the 'day, AM/PM, hour, minute'.
ENGLISH
7. In the sub-menu, select 'day, AM/PM, hour, minute'.
8. Press the [＞] button to select the 'Day'. f
Press the [∧]/[∨] buttons to select day (Sun~Sat).
9. Press the [＞] button to select 'AM or PM'. f
Press the [∧]/[∨] buttons to toggle between AM and PM.
10. Press the [＞] button to select the 'Hour'. f
Press the [∧]/[∨] buttons to select the hour (01~12).
11. Press the [＞] button to select the 'Minute'. f f Press the [∧]/[∨] buttons to select minute (00~59).
12. By pressing the Set button, you can complete modifying the setting for the current time. f f
The setting changes are applied and you can exit to general mode.
13. Press the Esc button to exit to general mode.
31
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 31
2013-10-21 오전 9:19:17
SARULLA GEOTHERMAL POWER PROJECT
3. AIR FILTER UNIT
Installation, Operation & Maintenance Instructions
PureAir Filtration Side Access Housing (SAH)
Pure Air Filtration, LLC 6050 Peachtree Pkwy, Suite 240-187 Norcross, GA 30092 U.S.A. Telephone: +1 (678-935-1431)
LIST OF FIGURES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 PRE-INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
TITLE
1.1 SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
1
COMMERCIAL
1.2 RECEIVING INSTRUCTIONS
2
INDUSTRIAL
1.3 INSPECTION 1.4 STORAGE 1.5 FOUNDATIONS AND CLEARANCES
2.0 BASIC DESIGN OF THE SAH
3.0 INSTALLATION 3.1 POSITIONING THE UNIT 3.2 MODULES 3.3 PARTICULATE FILTERS 3.4 POST-START INSPECTION/CHECK
4.0 MAINTENANCE 4.1 REPLACEMENT PARTS AND MATERIALS 4.2 MEDIA REPLACEMENT
5.0 SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS
6.0 ADSORBENT STAIN REMOVAL
7.0 WARRANTY INFORMATION
8.0 TROUBLE SHOOTING
9.0 SAMPLING RECORD
2
FIGURE
SAH SCHEMATIC SAH SCHEMATIC
1.0 PRE-INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
1.1 SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS •
•
•
Read this Service Manual carefully. Be thoroughly familiar with the controls and the proper use of the equipment. This manual should be retained with the unit because it contains the information necessary for proper maintenance. There is a pocket envelope provided for this purpose. Attach it permanently to the unit. Keep all nuts, bolts, and screws tight to be sure the equipment is in safe working condition.
CAUTION: •
Installer should be a trained, experienced service person.
•
Check the assembly and component weights to be sure that the rigging equipment can handle them safely.
•
Be sure that the unit is balanced well in the transporting device.
•
Always conduct a thorough check when the installation is complete.
1.2 RECEIVING INSTRUCTIONS Systems are normally shipped assembled and with motors mounted. All units are attached securely to skids. It is recommended that units be left on their skids for protection and ease of handling while transporting. Straps, rigging, slings, or hooks attached to the skits may be used, with proper care. The units are well protected with triple wall board and are secured with metal bands. Forklifts may be used under the skits, but exercise caution to prevent damage.
Upon receiving systems from PureAir, note any shipping damage, obvious or hidden, to your carrier and on your Bill of Lading. All problems should be handled between the customer and carrier. •
If the unit is to be stored before use, see Section 1.4 in this manual.
•
If the unit is to be installed immediately, be sure to check Section 3.0 in this manual.
•
To uncrate unit, cut metal bands and remove packaging.
•
For positioning and special handling, see Section 3.1 in this manual.
1.3 INSPECTION The condition of the unit upon its arrival is critical to its proper operation. Prior to start-up, inspect the unit carefully, according to the check list below. Correct any inadequacies before startup to prevent possible damage or inefficiency. Note, should there be any questions concerning the unit, refer to the numbers found on the unit identification plate, when contacting the PureAir representative. PRE-OPERATION CHECK LIST YES
NO
CONDITION
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
1. Configuration and material are as specified on the sales order form. 2. Measurements fit submittal requirements 3. Parts are all present including modules, particulate filters, media, and gage units. 4. Modules, prefilter, and final filter all fit properly
3
___
___
___
___
___
___
5. Latches hold securely and gaskets seal properly 6. Labels and serial numbers are present 7. Airflow direction is consistent with installation requirements (check labels attached to unit)
Note: Checking specific points is also imperative after the unit is started up. See section 3.4 in this manual for check list. 1.4 STORAGE The unit should be protected from the elements during storage, especially when storage time is extensive. While indoor storage is considered best, outdoor storage can be adequate when precautions are taken: OUTDOOR STORAGE PRECAUTIONS •
• • •
Cover the equipment with a tarp. Intake and discharge openings must be well covered. (Use of black plastic as a cover may cause excessive condensation and rusting.) If there is the possibility of moisture collection, allow for proper drainage. Do not place heavy equipment on top of the unit. Store PureAir media in a dry place with less than 95% relative humidity.
concrete base is best suited to the system. Concrete allows less chance for vibration than metal structures. CLEARANCE All units should be easily accessible for the required periodic maintenance. Do not block return and discharge grilles. Sufficient minimum clearances can be recommended by the local PureAir representative. 2.0 BASIC DESIGN OF THE SAH UNIT The SAH has particulate and gaseous contamination control capabilities. The unit is designed for ceiling mounting into existing ductwork. The commercial SAH unit steel with extruded aluminum track. Hinges are zinc-placed steel with brass pins. The lift and turn latches are die-cast zinc with aluminum screws. Doors are sealed with urethane foam and the unit is supported by heavy 11 gauge Uchannels which provide rigidity during shipping and installation as well as firm support for long service life. See Figure 1. Figure 1: Commercial SAH (See Number Key On Next Page)
1.5 FOUNDATION AND CLEARANCES FOUNDATIONS Some units may require new or reinforced foundations, due to their weight. Always be sure to check that the existing foundation is adequate for the unit to be installed. Units to be used indoors require particular attention to strength of foundation. In some instances, a
4
The industrial SAH unit is constructed of galvanized steel Standard equipment on this model would include a cross-broken top pan, stainless steel hinges and pins, and an industrial grade lift and turn latch with a stainless steel sealed shaft. Doors are sealed with
urethane foam and the unit is supported by heavy 11 gauge U-channel which provide rigidity during shipping and installation. See Figure 2. Figure 2: Industrial SAH (See Number Key On This Page)
contaminant gases are destroyed by the process of adsorption, absorption and oxidation in this stage. 3. FINAL FILTER- before leaving the unit, the air moves through a final filter. The final filter removes remaining contaminants, such as media dust and airborne contaminants. The options for final filters are: a high efficiency (90%) rigid-type, final filter. a medium efficiency (30%) pleated particulate filter with high surface area and good service life.
The SAH includes one or more of the following sequential components: 1. PREFILTER- as the air enters the unit it passes through a particulate filter. The prefilter collects atmospheric dust and larger particles, thereby preventing clogging of the perforated surfaces and pellet pores in the next stage of the unit. Prefilter options are: : A low efficiency (20%) particulate filter which features include a self-sealing progressive density non-woven synthetic media. : A medium efficiency (30%) pleated particulate filter with high surface area and good service life. Special Prefilters: Special high efficiency particulate filters can be specified in prefilter section of the unit. Contact the factory or your PureAir® representative for available options. 2. PureAir modeules - The air then passes through PM12, PP12, PM18 and/or PP-18, Matrix modules, containing media manufactured by PureAir. The
a high efficiency (90%) rigid-type particulate filter with self-supportive rigid cartridges. an ultra-high efficiency (99%) particulate filter housed in a wooden frame with aluminum separators. Special Final Filters: Contact your PureAir representative for pricing and sizing information. 3.0 INSTALLATION After the entire pre-operative inspection is finished (Section 1.3), complete the following sequence for installation by referring to the instructions in Section 3.1 below: 1. Remove the unit from the skid and position it in the designated operation location. 2. Fill and install the modules. See Module Filling and Media Replacement Service Guide. 3. Install the particulate filter. See section 3.3.
5
4. Start the unit. See section 3.4. 3.4 POST-START INSPECTION/CHECK 5. Perform post-start inspection check. 3.1 POSITIONING THE UNIT Review Section 1.5 in this manual for foundation and clearance instructions. The standard unit can simply be lifted from its skid and “walked” or transported by lift to its predesignated operation location (if in close proximity to the skid), according to facility safety requirements.
Before initial start-up of system, contact your local PureAir representative. Their name and phone number are attached to your system. YES
NO
CONDITION
___
___
___
___
___
___
1. Joints, seals, and gaskets do not leak. 2. Modules are completely full of media and fit properly. 3. Particulate filters have been installed.
3.2 MODULES Proper filling, installation, and maintenance of the chemical filtration media is critical to the unit’s efficient operation. The modules are designed specifically for media manufactured by PureAir and allow the media to perform to its maximum efficiency, through proper shape and bed depth. 3.3 PARTICULATE FILTERS Proper selection and installation of particulate filters for use in PureAir unit will require replacement during the normal lifetime of the equipment. Replacement items may be ordered from your local PureAir representative or from PureAir Filtration, Inc. PREFILTER: Install this filter by sliding it along the track so that airflow moves through the coarse white side first. Slide the 1” header into the provided track. Install this filter by sliding it along the track until it is completely housed within the unit. Install this filter by sliding it along the track until it is completely housed within the unit.
6
4.0 MAINTENANCE 4.1 REPLACEMENT PARTS AND MATERIALS While PureAir products are built with durability, some parts of the PureAir unit will require replacemend during the normal lifetime of the equipment. Replacement items may be ordered from your local PureAir representative or from Pure Air Filtration. Consumables: In order to maintain proper performance levels, particulate filters and PureAir media must be replaced periodically, as they have a finite life (See Sampling Procedure Service Guide.) Modules: While not considered to be a consumable item, these units are subject to physical damage in handling. Particulate Filters: To ensure proper efficiency of your system change particulate filters often. Dirty filters will inhibit proper functioning of the unit.
4.2 MEDIA REPLACEMENT If analysis reveals that it is time to replace the media, order the appropriate pounds of media required per module used in the unit. This serial number represents the components of your SAH system. 5.0 SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS
Avoid exposing the PureAir media to water or precipitation, as this dissolves permanganate content. Storage of media should be in a dry place with less than 95% relative humidity. Exposure of permanganated solution to the skin causes brown staining which is temporary and not harmful. This staining can be removed by washing in a diluted solution of water and sodium bisulfite.
DISPOSAL
EYE CONTACT
PureAir media is a non-toxic, nonflammable substance. Filtration of contaminants through PureAir media causes molecular changes to occur, and the resulting product is usually not harmful to the environment. Although special precautions are generally not required when disposing of spent media, government regulations may require specific disposal procedures if the resulting product could be harmful to the environment. Large quantities of PureAir media should not be disposed of in dumpster-like equipment because the weight of the media could cause difficulties in handling the dumpster.
If dust is exposed to the eyes or delicate membrane, flush thoroughly with water and seek treatment by a physician. Follow normal procedures for exposure to abrasive dust.
Independent laboratory analysis for Environmental Protection Agency toxicity characteristics may be required if the contaminants eliminated from your environment include heavy metals and pesticides. INHALATION A well-ventilated work area is suggested for changing the PureAir media, as dusting occurs in fresh media due to handling abrasion. Workers should avoid direct inhalation of considerable PureAir dust, as it induces squeezing. In closed, unventilated spaces, dust masks such as the 3-M No. 8500 are suggested. WATER
6.0 ADSORBENT STAIN REMOVAL The following stain removal procedure is stated here as information only, and neither PureAir , any of its subsidiaries, nor any agent or employee of PureAir make any warranty or other representation regarding the efficacy or safety of this procedure. The stain removal could cause further damage to the garment or to the item from which one may attempt to remove the stain. If the dust from PureAir 4 or 8 chemisorbant media comes in contact with organic material, there are two possible stain problems: 1. Manganese dioxide (MnO2) which is insoluble, characterized by a medium brown color, and is found in expended PureAir 4 o& r 8 media, can usually be removed by normal washing. 2. New (unused) PureAir media contains potassium permanganate (KmnO4) which is a strong oxidant and will react with and discolor any organic material with which it comes in contact. These stains, which will be brownish black in color, may be removed using a solution of sodium bisulfite in water,
7
after the garment has been removed from the person. However, if the fiber has been damaged by the permanganate, removal of the stain may make the damage more apparent. CAUTION: This procedure should start with a very weak solution, gradually increasing the strength until the stain is removed. Use of too strong a solution could conceivably cause additional fabric damage. NOTE: Sodium bisulfite gives of sulfur dioxide (SO2) gas; therefore, it must be used in a well-ventilated area.
7.0 WARRANTY INFORMATION PureAir Filtration warrants hardware equipment manufactured by PureAir to be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for one (1) year from shipment date. PureAir's obligation under this warranty shall be limited to replacing any parts
8
therof which shall be demonstrated to have been defective. THIS WARRANTY IS EXPRESSLY IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. PureAir MAKES NO WARRANTIES AS TO MERCHANTABILITY OR AS TO THE FITNESS OF THE MERCHANDISE FOR ANY PARTICULAR USE AND SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOSS OR DAMAGE, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, ARISING FROM THE USE OF SUCH MERCHANDISE OR FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. No person, firm or corporation is authorized to assume for PureAir any other liability in connection with the sale of these goods. Equipment, parts and material manufactured by others and incorporated in PUREAIR equipment are warranted by PureAir ONLY TO THE EXTENT OF THE ORIGINAL MANUFACTURERS LIABILITY TO PureAir.
8.0 TROUBLE SHOOTING SYMPTOM Particulate filters
Airflow too low
PROBLEM Heavily soiled particulate filters
CHECKS/REMEDY Were loaded modules relatively clean and dust-free when installed? Was a sacrifice final filter used during the first few minutes of operation and then replaced by the specified filters?
Dust blowing out discharge louver
Final filter not in place
Insert appropriate final filter
9.0 SAMPLE RECORD
Sampling Record/Schedule
9
Electric Grey/ ASA 70
9810-7042
TCI product 9810-7042 is a gloss grey TGIC polyester. 9000 Series TGIC Polyester Systems have a broad formulating range and can meet many decorative and functional requirements for gloss, physical properties, chemical resistance, color, and weatherability. Products in this series can be used in thick film applications. Typical uses include: aluminum extrusions, playground equipment, agricultural equipment, and machinery.
Product Characteristics: Specific Gravity
1.66 +/- 0.05
Theoretical Coverage
117 ft2/lb/mil
Optimum Storage
<80°F, <50% RH
Particle Distribution
+44 microns (325 mesh): 28-34%
Cure Schedule (Metal Temperature)
12 minutes @ 400°F 16 minutes @ 375°F 25 minutes @ 350°F
Film Thickness
2.0-4.0 mils
Gloss (60°)
ASTM D523-89
80-89%
Pencil Hardness
ASTM D3363-00
H-2H
Adhesion
ASTM D3359-02
5B
Flexibility
ASTM D522-93a
1/8 in
Direct Impact
ASTM D2794-93
160 in/lbs @ 2.0 mils
Reverse Impact
ASTM D2794-93
160 in/lbs @ 2.0 mils
Salt Spray
ASTM B117-97
1000 hrs. rating A=8, B=10
Notes: Powder shelf life can vary with different formulations. Store product in a cool, dry, well ventilated area away from heat, ignition sources, and direct sunlight. Do not expose product to damp conditions. Testing was performed on Bonderite® 1000, Parcolene®60 panels. The highest quality powder coating finish results from proper substrate surface preparation, appropriate pretreatment, effective rinse stages, proper powder coating application and sufficient temperature and dwell to ensure the powder coating is cured. Performance characteristics may be affected by operations exhibiting parameters different from the parameters utilized to generate this data, therefore we strongly recommend testing be performed utilizing substrate surface preparation, pretreatment, rinse, powder coating application and cure representative of ones operation to determine whether this product meets the desired requirements. Bonderite® and Parcolene® are registered trademarks of Henkel Surface Technologies.
SARULLA GEOTHERMAL POWER PROJECT
4. VENTILATION FAN
Installation Operation and Maintenance Manual
Centrifugal Airfoil DIDW, SISW Multi Blade DIDW, SISW Roof Ventilation Duct In-Line Wall Fan
1
Index 1
INTRODUCTION AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS.......................................................................... 4
2
PREPARATION FOR USE AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS ...................................... 4
2.1 FOUNDATION INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................... 5 2.2 DUCT INSTALLATIONS. (CENTRIFUGAL AND INDUSTRIAL PROCESS FAN) ............. 5 2.3 UNIT START-UP ......................................................................................................................................... 8 2.3.1 PRE-OPERATIONAL CONDITIONS AND SETUP................................................................ 8 2.3.2 ADDITIONAL STEPS FOR INITIAL START-UP .................................................................... 8 2.3.3 VIBRATION ........................................................................................................................................... 9 2.3.4 INSTALLATION CHECKOUT ...................................................................................................... 11
3
GENERAL THEORY OF OPERATION ............................................................................................. 13 3.1 TYPE OF FANS ......................................................................................................................................... 13
4
OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS............................................................................................................ 16 4.1 TROUBLE-SHOOTING........................................................................................................................... 16
5
MAINTERNANCE INSTRUCTIONS. ................................................................................................ 18
5.1
MOTORS ..................................................................................................................................................... 18
5.2 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE OPERATION ............................................................................ 18 5.3 BEARING LUBRICATION ..................................................................................................................... 19 5.4 BEARING INSTALLATION................................................................................................................... 21
2
5.5 V-BELT DRIVES ........................................................................................................................................ 24 5.6 STORAGE .................................................................................................................................................... 25
6
PART LIST ................................................................................................................................................... 26 6.1 CENTRIFUGAL FAN (FLOOR MOUNTED) .................................................................................. 26 6.2 CENTRIFUGAL FAN (ROOF MOUNTED) ..................................................................................... 27 6.3 CENTRIFUGAL FAN (DUCT IN LINE) ............................................................................................ 28 6.4 PROPELLER FAN (WALL MOUNTED) ........................................................................................... 29 6.5 AXIAL FAN (ROOF MOUNTED) ...................................................................................................... 30
7
MAINTENANCE LOG ............................................................................................................................ 31
3
1
INTRODUCTION AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS. Only qualified personnel should install this fan. Personnel should have clear understanding of these instructions and be aware of general safety precautions. Improper installation can result in electric shock, possible injury occurred by contacting moving parts as well as other potential hazards. Other considerations may be required if strong winds or seismic activity is present. If more information is needed, please contact a licensed professional engineer before moving forward.
2
PREPARATION FOR USE AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS This pamphlet contains not only general recommendations but also specific requirements that are applicable to the individual installation. Such requirements are outlined in federal, state and local safety code. It is necessary that users comply with these safety codes and installation instructions strictly before using. Details are as follows: • The rotation of the wheel is critical. It must be free to rotate without striking or rubbing any stationary objects. • Motor must be securely and adequately grounded. • Do not allow the power cable to kink or come in contact with oil, grease, hot surfaces or chemicals. Replace cord immediately if damaged. • Verify that the power source is compatible with the equipment. • While the fan is running, never open access doors. • The maximum operating temperature or speed for which this fan is designed must not be exceeded. Adjustments to fan speed significantly affects motor load. If the fan RPM is changed, the motor current should be checked to make sure it is not exceeding the motor nameplate amps. DANGER Always disconnect power on or near a fan before working. Lock the disconnect switch or breaker of fan to prevent accidental power up. CAUTION When servicing the fan, motor may be hot enough to cause pain or injury. Motor should cool enough before servicing. CAUTION Precaution should be taken in explosive atmospheres.
4
2.1
FOUNDATION INSTALLATION
Good installation depends on a proper foundation. Foundations should be level, rigid, and of sufficient mass for the equipment. Concrete is preferable. Its mass should be more than four times the fan weight at least. Adequately place brass steel platforms in all directions. The minimum natural frequency of any part must be at least 50% higher than the fan running speed. Locate shims on the fan support points before tightening foundation bolts. Do not distort or twist the equipment. Duct connections should be smooth and straight. Elbows and other transitions should be located at least five wheel diameters from fan inlet and outlet (see AMCA Publication 21 for further details). Flexible connections should be used at inlet and discharge. The fan should never support or restrain any duct weight or force. 2.2
DUCT INSTALLATIONS. (CENTRIFUGAL AND INDUSTRIAL PROCESS FAN)
Installations with inlet or discharge configurations that deviate from this standard may result in reduced fan performance. Restricted or unstable flow at the fan inlet can cause prerotation of incoming air or uneven loading of the fan wheel yielding large system losses and increased sound levels. Free discharge or turbulent flow in the discharge ductwork will also result in system effect losses. Refer to the following diagrams for the most efficient installation conditions. DUCT INLET INSTALLATIONS Inlet Duct Turns – In case that installation of a duct turn or elbow is too close from the fan inlet, it makes fan performance low because air is loaded unevenly into the fan wheel. To achieve high fan performance, the length between the fan inlet and turn or elbow should be at least three fan wheel diameters
. [Figure 2.1] Example of Inlet Duct Turns Inlet Spin - Inlet spin is one of factor that causes reduced fan performance. The change in fan performance is a function of the intensity of spin and not easily defined. The best solution is
5
proper duct design and airflow patterns. Turning vanes can reduce the effects of inlet spin.
[Figure 2.2] Example of Inlet Spin
Ducted Outlet Installations Discharge Duct Turns - Duct turns located near the fan discharge should always be in the direction of the fan rotation. Fan performance is reduced when duct turns are made immediately off the fan discharge. To achieve cataloged fan performance there should be at least three equivalent duct diameters of straight ductwork between the fan discharge and any duct turns.
[Figure 2.3] Example of Discharge Duct Turns
6
Non-Ducted Installations Inlet Clearance - Installation of a fan with an open inlet too close to a wall or bulkhead will cause reduced fan performance. It is desirable to have one fan wheel diameter between parallel fan units and a minimum of three-fourths of a wheel diameter between the fan inlet and the wall.
[Figure 2.4] Example of Single Fan Installation
[Figure 2.5] Example of Parallel Fan Installation Free Discharge - Free or abrupt discharge into a plenum results in low fan performance.
[Figure 2.6] Example of Free Discharge
7
2.3
UNIT START-UP 2.3.1
PRE-OPERATIONAL CONDITIONS AND SETUP
1.
Disconnect and lock-out all power switches to fan. See warning below.
2.
Check all fasteners, set screws and locking collars on the fan, bearings, drive, motor base and accessories for tightness.
3.
Rotate the fan wheel by hand and assure that all parts are not worn out.
4.
Check for bearing alignment and lubrication.
5.
Check for coupling alignment (Arr. 8 only).
6.
Check the V-belt drive for proper alignment and tension.
7.
Check all guarding (if supplied) for being securely attached and not interfering with rotating parts.
8.
Check operation of variable inlet vanes or discharge dampers (if supplied) for freedom of movement.
9.
Check all electrical connections for proper attachment.
10. Check housing and ductwork, if accessible, for obstructions and foreign material that may damage the fan wheel.
DANGER Disconnect and secure to the “Off” position all electrical power to the fan prior to inspection or servicing. Failure to comply with this safety precaution would result in serious injury or death.
2.3.2 1.
ADDITIONAL STEPS FOR INITIAL START-UP Check for proper wheel rotation by momentarily energizing the fan. Rotation is always determined by viewing the wheel from the drive side and should correspond to the rotation decal affixed to the unit. One of the most frequently encountered problems with centrifugal fans is motors which are wired to run in the wrong direction. This is especially true with 3-phase installations where the motor will run in either direction, depending on how it has been wired. To reverse rotation of a 3-phase motor, interchange any two of the three electrical leads. Single phase motors can be reversed by changing internal connections as described on the motor label or wiring diagram.
8
[Figure 2.7] Rotation of Fan (Clockwise) 2.
If the fan has inlet vanes, they should be partially closed to reduce power requirements. This is especially important if the fan is designed for a high temperature application and is being started at room temperature.
3.
Fans with multi-speed motors should be checked on low speed during initial start-up.
4.
Check for unusual noise, vibration or overheating of bearings. Refer to the “Troubleshooting” section of this manual if a problem develops.
5.
Grease may be forced out of the bearing seals during initial start-up. This is a normal self-purging feature of this type of bearing.
2.3.3
VIBRATION
Excessive vibration is the most frequent problem experienced during initial start-up.
Common Sources of Vibration 1. Wheel Unbalance 2. Drive Pulley Misalignment 3. Incorrect Belt Tension 4. Bearing / Coupling Misalignment 5. Mechanical Looseness 6. Faulty Belts 7. Drive Component Unbalance 8. Poor Inlet/Outlet Conditions 9. Foundation Stiffness Left unchecked, excessive vibration can cause a multitude of problems, including structural and/or component failure. Many of these conditions can be discovered by careful observation. Refer to the troubleshooting section of this manual for corrective actions. 9
If observation cannot locate the source of vibration, a qualified technician using vibration analysis equipment should be consulted. If the problem is wheel unbalance, in-place balancing can be done providing there is access to the fan wheel. Any correction weights added to the wheel should be welded to either the wheel back (single-plane balance) or to the wheel back and wheel cone (two-plane balance). Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co.,Ltd performs a vibration test on all centrifugal fans before shipping. Three vibration readings are taken on each bearing in the horizontal, vertical, and axial directions. The allowable maximum vibration for belt drive units is 0.15 in/sec. peak (0.08 in/sec. direct drive) velocity filter-in for rigid mount and 0.20 in/sec. peak velocity filter-in for flexible mount at the fan RPM per AMCA Standard 204. These vibration signatures are a permanent record of how the fan left the factory and are available after request. Generally, fan vibration and noise are transmitted to other parts of the building by the ductwork. To eliminate this undesirable effect, the use of heavy canvas connectors is recommended.
10
2.3.4
INSTALLATION CHECKOUT
Problem
Cause Wheel rubbing (inlet)
Adjust wheel and/or inlet cone. Tighten wheel hub or bearing collars on shaft.
V-belt drive
Tighten Sheaves on motor/fan shaft. Adjust belt tension. Align sheaves properly (see V-Belt Drives section). Replace worn belts or sheaves.
Bearings
Replace defective bearing(s). Lubricate bearings. Tighten collars and fasteners.
Wheel unbalance
Clean all dirt off wheel. Check wheel balance, rebalance in place if necessary.
Excessive Noise
Fan Low CFM
Duct system Fan
High CFM
Duct system
Fan Doesn’t Operate
Overheated Shaft Bearing
Excessive Vibration
Check wheel for correct rotation. Increase fan speed.* Check air-flow of inlet/outlet duct line. Compare real static pressure with Design pressure. Check wheel for correct rotation. Increase fan speed.* Check air-flow of inlet/outlet duct line. Compare real static pressure with Design pressure.
Duct system has more or less restriction than anticipated
Change obstructions in system. Use correction factor to adjust for temperature/altitude. Resize ductwork. Clean filters/coils. Change fan speed.*
Dirty filters
Filters need to be cleaned or replaced. To remove the existing filters, open the top hood panel(s). The filters can now be removed by lifting them vertically and out of their racking. Be sure to carefully note the quantity and size of the filters being removed as some units utilize multiple filters sizes. After the filters have been cleaned, or new filters are ready to be installed, place the filters back into the racks in the reverse order of which they were removed. When all filters are in place, close and secure the top roof panels.
Fan
Check rotation of wheel. Reduce fan speed.
Duct system
Resize ductwork. Check proper operation of face and bypass dampers. Check filters and access doors.
Electrical supply
Check fuses/circuit breakers. Check for switches turned off or disconnected. Check for correct supply voltage.
Static Pressure Wrong
High Horsepower
Corrective Action
Drive
Check for broken belts. Tighten loose pulleys.
Motor
Assure motor is correct horsepower and not tripping overload protector.
Lubrication
Check for excessive or insufficient grease in the bearings.
Mechanical
Replace damaged bearing. Relieve excessive belt tension. Align bearings. Check for bent shaft.
Belts
Adjust tightness of belts. Replacement belts should be a matched set.
System unbalance
Check alignment of shaft, motor and pulleys. Check wheel balance, rebalance if necessary.
Coupling misalignment
Check alignment between coupling, motor and fan shafts. Any adjustments should be made per coupling manufacturer’s instructions. Shim only under motor.
[Table 2.1] Check List for Installation
11
* Always check motor amps and compare to nameplate rating. Excessive fan speed may overload the motor and result in motor failure. Do not exceed the maximum cataloged RPM of the fan. NOTE: Always provide the unit model and serial numbers when requesting parts or service information.
12
3
GENERAL THEORY OF OPERATION 3.1
TYPE OF FANS Adapted with permission from 1996 ASHRAE Systems and Equipment Handbook (SI) TYPE
DESIGN
DESCRIPTION • Highest efficiency of all centrifugal fan designs.
Impeller Design
• Ten to 16 blades of airfoil contour curved away from direction of rotation. Deep blades allow for efficient expansion within blade passages
AIRFOIL
• Air leaves impeller at velocity less than tip speed. • For given duty, has highest speed of centrifugal fan designs Housing Design
• Scroll-type design for efficient conversion of velocity pressure to static pressure. • Maximum efficiency requires close clearance and alignment between wheel and inlet • Efficiency only slightly less than airfoil fan.
BACKWARDCURVED
BACKWARDINCLINED
• Ten to 16 single-thickness blades curved or inclined away from direction of rotation • Efficient for same reasons as airfoil fan.
Housing Design
Impeller Design
• Uses same housing configuration as airfoil design.
• Higher pressure characteristics than airfoil,backwardcurved, and backward-inclined fans. • Curve may have a break to left of peak pressure and fan should not be operated in this area.
RADIAL
CENTRIFUGAL FANS
Impeller Design
• Power rises continually to free delivery. Housing Design
• Scroll. Usually narrowest of all centrifugal designs. • Because wheel design is less efficient, housing dimensions are not as critical as for airfoil and backward-inclined fans.
13
FORWARD- CURVED
Impeller Design
• Flatter pressure curve and lower efficiency than the airfoil, backward-curved, and backward-inclined. • Do not rate fan in the pressure curve dip to the left of peak pressure. • Power rises continually toward free delivery. Motor Selection must take this into account.
Housing Design
• Scroll similar to and often identical to other centrifugal fan designs. • Fit between wheel and inlet not as critical as for airfoil and backward-inclined fans.
Impeller Design
• Low efficiency. • Limited to low-pressure applications. • Usually low cost impellers have two or more blades of
PROPELLER
single thickness attached to relatively small hub. • Primary energy transfer by velocity pressure. Housing Design
• Simple circular ring, orifice plate, or venturi. • Optimum design is close to blade tips and forms
Impeller Design
• Somewhat more efficient and capable of developing more useful static pressure than propeller fan.
TUBEAXIAL
• Usually has 4 to 8 blades with airfoil or single thickness cross section. • Hub usually less than transfer by velocity pressure. Housing Design
Impeller Design VANEAXIAL
AXIAL FANS
smooth airfoil into wheel.
• Cylindrical tube with close clearance to blade tips.
• Good blade design gives medium- to high-pressure capability at good efficiency. • Most efficient of these fans have airfoil blades. • Blades may have fixed, adjustable, or controllable pitch. • Hub is usually greater than half fan tip diameter.
14
Housing Design
• Cylindrical tube with close clearance to blade tips. • Guide vanes upstream or downstream from impeller increase pressure capability and efficiency.
Impeller Design
• Performance similar to backward-curved fan except capacity and pressure are lower.
CENTRIFUGAL
TUBULAR
• Lower efficiency than backward-curved fan. • Performance curve may have a dip to the left of peak pressure. Housing Design
• Cylindrical tube similar to vane axial fan, except clearance to wheel is not as close. • Air discharges radially from wheel and turns 90° to flow through guide vanes.
• Provides positive exhaust ventilation, which is an -CENTRIFUGAL-
POWER ROOF VENTILATORS
• Low-pressure exhaust systems such as general factory, kitchen, warehouse, and some commercial installations. advantage over gravity-type exhaust units. • Centrifugal units are slightly quieter than axial units.
Housing Design
• Normal housing not used, since air discharges from impeller in full circle. • Usually does not include configuration to recover velocity pressure component.
Impeller Design
• Low-pressure exhaust systems such as general factory, kitchen, warehouse, and some commercial installations. • Provides positive exhaust ventilation, which is an advantage over gravity-type exhaust units.
-AXIAL-
POWER ROOF VENTILATORS
SPECIAL DESIGN
Impeller Design
Housing Design
• Essentially a propeller fan mounted in a supporting structure • Hood protects fan from weather and acts as safety guard. • Air discharges from annular space at bottom of weather hood. [Table 3.1] Type of Fan 15
4
OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS 4.1
TROUBLE-SHOOTING
Problem
Cause
Corrective Action
Wheel rubbing (inlet)
Adjust wheel and/or inlet cone. Tighten wheel hub or bearing collars on shaft.
V-belt drive
Align sheaves properly (see V-Belt Drives section).
Excessive Noise
Tighten Sheaves on motor/fan shaft. Adjust belt tension. Replace worn belts or sheaves.
Bearings
Replace defective bearing(s). Lubricate bearings. Tighten collars and fasteners.
Wheel unbalance
Clean all dirt off wheel. Check wheel balance, rebalance in place if necessary.
Low Air Volume High Air Volume
Fan
Check wheel for correct rotation. Increase fan speed.*
Duct system
Check “DUCT INSTALLATIONS.” SECTION.
Fan
Decrease fan speed.
Duct system
Resize ductwork. Access door, filters, grilles not installed.
Dirty filters
Filters need to be cleaned or replaced. To remove the existing filters, open the top hood panel(s). The filters can now be removed by lifting them vertically and out of their racking. Be sure to carefully note the quantity
Static
and size of the filters being removed as some LSF units
Pressure
utilize multiple filters sizes. After the filters have been
Wrong
cleaned, or new filters are ready to be installed, place the filters back into the racks in the reverse order of which they were removed. When all filters are in place, close and secure the top roof panels.
High Horsepower
Fan
Check rotation of wheel. Reduce fan speed.
Duct system
Resize ductwork. Check proper operation of face and bypass dampers. Check filters and access doors.
Electrical supply Fan Doesn’t Operate
Check fuses/circuit breakers. Check for switches turned off or disconnected. Check for correct supply voltage.
Drive
Check for broken belts. Tighten loose pulleys.
Motor
Assure motor is correct horsepower and not tripping overload protector.
Overheated Shaft
Lubrication
Check for excessive or insufficient grease in the bearings.
Bearing 16
Mechanical
Replace damaged bearing. Relieve excessive belt tension. Align bearings. Check for bent shaft.
Belts
Adjust tightness of belts. Replacement belts should be a matched set.
System unbalance
Check
alignment
of
shaft,
motor
and
pulleys.
Adjustable pitch pulleys with motors over 15 hp are
Excessive
especially prone to unbalance. Check wheel balance,
Vibration
rebalance if necessary. Coupling misalignment
Check alignment between coupling, motor and fan shafts. Any adjustments should be made per coupling manufacturer’s instructions. Shim only under motor. [Table 4.1] Trouble-shooting of Fan
*Always check motor amps and compare to nameplate rating. Excessive fan speed may overload the motor and result in motor failure. Do not exceed the maximum cataloged RPM of the fan. NOTE: Always provide the unit model and serial numbers when requesting parts or service information.
17
5
MAINTERNANCE INSTRUCTIONS. Once the unit has been put into operation, a routine maintenance schedule should be set up to accomplish the following: 1. Lubrication of bearings and motor (see below). 2. Variable inlet vanes should be checked for freedom of operation and wear. 3. Wheel, housing, bolts and set screws on the entire fan should be checked for tightness. 4. Any dirt accumulation on the wheel or in the housing should be removed to prevent unbalance and possible damage. 5. Isolation bases should be checked for freedom of movement and the bolts for tightness. Springs should be checked for breaks and fatigue. Rubber isolators should be checked for deterioration. 6. Inspect fan impeller and housing looking for fatigue, corrosion, or wear. When performing any service to the fan, disconnect the electrical supply and secure fan impeller. 5.1
MOTORS
Motor maintenance is generally limited to cleaning and lubrication. Cleaning should be limited to exterior surfaces only. Removing dust and grease build up on the motor housing assists proper motor cooling. Never wash-down motor with high pressure spray. Many fractional motors are permanently lubricated for life and require no further lubrication. Motors supplied with grease fittings should be greased in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. CAUTION When operating conditions of the fan are to be changed (speed, pressure, temperature, etc.), consult with us - Kiturami Bumyang Co.,Ltd - to determine if the unit can operate safely at the new conditions. 5.2
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE OPERATION
CAUTION For operation with Variable Frequency Drive (VFD), always check motor amps when adjusting the operating frequency. Motor may be sized for the original selected operating speed under 60 Hz. Bypassing the VFD or increasing the speed from this original selection, even if less than 60 Hz, may cause motor overload or failure. Consult factory with fan serial number 18
before increasing the upper limiting frequency. Always check the fan rpm when adjusting the operating frequency. Do not exceed maximum class fan rpm of the wheel as stated on the unit identification nameplate. 5.3
BEARING LUBRICATION
The bearings for fans are carefully selected to match the maximum load and operating conditions of the specific class, arrangement, and fan size. The instructions provided in this manual and those provided by the bearing manufacturer, will minimize any bearing problems. Bearings are the most critical moving part of the fan, therefore special care is required when mounting them on the unit and maintaining them. Refer to the following chart and the manufacturer instructions for grease types and intervals for various operating conditions. Never mix greases made with different bases. This will cause a breakdown of the grease and possible failure of the bearing.
Recommended Bearing Lubrication ScheduleRelubrication Schedule in Months* Bearing Bore (Dia. mm) Fan 35 51 71 81 up to RPM ~50 ~70 ~80 ~90 91 To 300 12 12 10 10 8 600 12 12 10 10 8 900 12 10 10 9 7 1200 12 10 10 9 6 1500 12 9 9 8 6 1800 10 9 9 7 6 2100 10 8 8 6 5 2400 10 8 8 6 2600 8 7 7 5 2900 8 6 6 3200 7 5 3500 6 Number of shots**
8
10
13
15
18
[Table 5.1] Recommended Bearing Lubrication Schedule in Month related Fan PRM * Lubrication interval is based on 12 hour day operation and maximum 70℃ housing temperature. For 24 hour per day operation, the interval should be cut in half. ** Lubricant should be added with the shaft rotating and until clean grease is seen purging from the bearing. The lubrication interval may be modified based on the condition of the purged grease. If bearing is not visible to observe purged grease, lubricate with number of shots indicated for bore size.
19
• For conditions including high temperatures, moisture, dirt or excessive vibration, consult the factory for a specific lubrication interval for your application. • Lubricant should be a high quality lithium complex grease conforming to NLGI Grade 2. Factory recommends Shell Gadus S2 V100 or Mobilux EP-2. • The use of synthetic lubricants will increase lubrication intervals by approximately two times. • Storage periods of three months or longer require monthly rotation of the shaft and purging grease prior to storage and start-up.
20
5.4
BEARING INSTALLATION
[Figure 5.1] Bearing parts Diagram
Bearing and plummer blocks are highly precision parts so they must be handled very carefully to maintain their degree of precision. It should always be cleaned without any impact and any rusts.
[Figure 5.2]
[Figure 5.3]
[Figure 5.4]
1. Prepare tools for assembly, a jig, a measuring instrument, grease and a wiper. Dust or impurities should be removed from all tools. (Figure 5.2) 21
2. Check whether a shaft is bent or scratched and check the processing dimension. (Figure 5.3) 3. Clean the inner part of Plummer Block. (Figure 5.4) 4. Remove the burr of shaft seal contact part and bearing contact part, clean it and apply a little grease. 5. Check whether the surface to be mounted is flat. The Plummer Block should be well contacted. 6. Place the lower part of Plummer Block on the floor and fix the base bolts. Do not fix them tightly.
[Figure 5.5]
[Figure 5.6]
[Figure 5.7]
7. Place the bearing, adapter and each part on top of the shaft. Relative locations of parts are shown on “Figure 5.5” 8. Insert the bearing tightly to the adapter sleeve and tighten the nuts. When tightening the nuts, use a hook spanner as shown on '(Figure 5.7)' and when using a hammer to tighten them, be careful so that metallic fragments do not get into the bearing. 9. Fill the grease inside the bearing. Fill the grease in the lower part of Plummer Block.
[Figure 5.8]
[Figure 5.9]
10. Place each part that is temporarily assembled to the shaft onto the lower body of Plummer Block.
22
11. Cover the upper body part and connect the upper and lower parts with bolts as soon as possible so that foreign substances do not get in after the safe placement. (Figure 5.8) 12. Fasten the base bolts tightly. (Figure 5.9) 13. Carefully rotate the shaft and perform a running test with load if there is no abnormality.
23
5.5
V-BELT DRIVES
V-belt drives must be checked on a regular basis for wear, tension, alignment and dirt accumulation. Premature or frequent belt failures can be caused by improper belt tension, (either too loose or too tight) or misaligned sheaves. Abnormally high belt tension or drive misalignment will cause excessive bearing loads and may result in failure of the fan and/or motor bearings. Conversely, loose belts will cause squealing on start-up, excessive belt flutter, slippage, and overheated sheaves. Either excessively loose or tight belts may cause fan vibration. When replacing V-belts on multiple groove drives all belts should be changed to provide uniform drive loading. Do not pry belts on or off the sheave. Loosen belt tension until belts can be removed by simply lifting the belts off the sheaves. After replacing belts, insure that slack in each belt is on the same side of the drive. Belt dressing should never be used.
[Figure 5.10] Example of V-belt
Do not install new belts on worn sheaves. If the sheaves have grooves worn in them, they must be replaced before new belts are installed. The proper tension for operating a V-belt drive is the lowest tension at which the belts will not slip at peak load conditions. For more information about measuring belt tension, refer to KRB Product Application Guide as figure5.11. V-Belt guide Measuring Belt Tension. Check belt tension before start up and after the first 24 hours of operation. The belt tension should also be checked periodically thereafter.
24
[Figure 5.10] V-belt Applicable Guide
CAUTION Do not over-tighten belts. Excessive belt tension can lead to premature belt and/or bearing failure. 5.6
STORAGE
If the installation of the fan is delayed, please store it in a safe and dry place. Fans, especially fan & motor bearings, must be protected from moisture and vibration. Protect all machined surfaces such as shafts, couplings, and bushings. Rotate the wheel several revolutions every two weeks, stopping the wheel in a position other than its initial position. Keep the bearings fully greased by filling monthly with a grease compatible to that originally supplied. Energize fan motor once every three months. Store belts flat to keep them from warping & stretching. Fans are protected against damage during shipment. If the unit cannot be installed and operated immediately, precautions need to be taken to prevent deterioration of the unit during storage. Improper storage which results in damage to the fan will void the warranty. The user assumes responsibility of the fan and accessories while in storage. The manufacturer will not be responsible for damage during storage. These suggestions are provided solely as a convenience to the user.
25
6
PART LIST 6.1
CENTRIFUGAL FAN (FLOOR MOUNTED)
[Figure 6.1] Part List of Centrifugal Fan (Floor Mounted)
26
6.2
CENTRIFUGAL FAN (ROOF MOUNTED)
[Figure 6.2] Part List of Centrifugal Fan (Roof Mounted)
27
6.3
CENTRIFUGAL FAN (DUCT IN LINE)
[Figure 6.3] Part List of Centrifugal Fan (Duct in line)
28
6.4
PROPELLER FAN (WALL MOUNTED)
[Figure 6.4] Part List of Propeller Fan (Wall Mounted)
29
6.5
AXIAL FAN (ROOF MOUNTED)
[Figure 6.5] Part List of Axial Fan (Roof Mounted)
30
7
MAINTENANCE LOG date
/
/
Product No.
Problem
date
/
Note.
/
Product No.
Problem
date
/
Note.
/
Product No.
Problem
date
/
Note.
/
Product No.
Problem
Note.
31
date
/
/
Product No.
Problem
date
/
Note.
/
Product No.
Problem
date
/
Note.
/
Product No.
Problem
date
/
Note.
/
Product No.
Problem
Note.
32
WARRANTY Kiturami Bumyang Air conditioning Co., Ltd(KRB) warrants this equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from the shipment date. Any units or parts which prove to be defective during the warranty period will be replaced at our option when returned to our factory, transportation prepaid. Motors are warranted by the motor manufacturer for a period of one year. Should motors furnished by KRB prove defective during this period, they should be returned to the nearest authorized motor service station. KRB will not be responsible for any removal or installation costs. As a result of our commitment to continuous improvement, KRB reserves the right to change specifications without notice.
KITURAMI BUMYANG AIRCONDITIONING CO.,LTD. http://www.bac.co.kr Tel : +82 - 1600-900 Office Factory
1094, Hwagok 6-dong, Gangseo-gu, Seoul, Korea 1,
Dongsan-ri,
Chungcheongnam-do, Korea
34
Tangjeong-myeon,
Asan-si,
SARULLA GEOTHERMAL POWER PROJECT
5. ELECTRIC WATER HEATER
GB Description of water heater (see fig. 6) Capacity 10-30 L 1) Switch / Lamp cover 2) Front cover 3) Control knob 4) Inlet 5) Outlet
Capacity 50-100 L 1) Pilot light 2) Cover 3) Thermometer 4) Control knob
Technical data For technical characteristics of the appliance, please refer to the information provided on the data plate (label located near the water inlet and outlet pipes). MODEL NOMINAL WEIGHT
kg
10
15
30
50
80
100
6,7
7,5
13,0
16
21,5
25
This appliance conforms to the provisions of the EMC 89/336/CEE regulation for electromagnetic compatibility.
Warning Local regulations may provide restrictions for installation in bathrooms. Installation is at the expense of the purchaser. The construction company is not liable for damage caused by incorrect installation or failure to comply with the instructions indicated in this owner’s manual. Above all: 1) The electrical system must comply with the specifications in the relevant paragraph. 2) The safety valve supplied with the appliance must not be tampered with or replaced. 3) The installation must be carried out by qualified electrician.
Installation instructions The appliance must be installed as close as possible to the point where it is to be used to avoid heat dispersion along the piping. To facilitate maintenance operations, leave a space of 50 cm for access to the electrical parts. The wall attachment hooks must support a weight three times that of the water heater filled with water. The use of 10 mm diameter hooks is suggested. For capacity 10-30 L The range of the water-heaters includes models prepared for being fitted over or under the pont of use (wash-basin, sink). The models to be fitted under the point of use called “under sink”). Fasten the supporting bracket provided to the wall using screws and raw plugs of suitable dimensions for the type of wall. Hook the water heater to the bracket and pull it downwards to make sure it has been fastened correctly. Water connection
Connect the water heater’s inlet and outlet with pipes or fittings that are resistant to the working pressure as well as to the temperature of the hot 7
GB water that can usually reach and exceed 80° C. We therefore advise against the use of materiales that do not resist such high temperatures. Screw a “T” piece union to the water inlet pipe with the blue collar. On one side of the “T” piece union, screw a tap for emptying the appliance that can only be opened with the use of a tool (B fig. 1). On the other side of the “T” piece union screw the safety valve supplied (A fig. 1). This should be connected to the cold water network via a flexible pipe. In the case that the emptying tap should be opened, also attach a waste pipe to exit (C fig. 1). When fixing the safety valve, do not force in excessively and do not tamper with the same. The safety valve is set at about the value shown in the technical lable*. Slight dripping is normal during heating; for this very reason, we recommend you connect this drain, leaving it always open, to a drain pipe installed inclined continuosly downwards and place without condensation. If the mains pressure is very close to the valve rating, install a pressure reducing unit as far as possible from the appliance. If installing mixer units (tap fittings or shower), clear the piping from all impurities which might damage the same. “Open outlet” connection
For this type of installation it is needed to utilise suitable watertaps and carry out the connection as shown in the scheme fig. 1A. With this solution the water-heater can operate at any network pressure. The safety valve is not to be fitted.
Electrical connection
For capacity 10-30 L The feeding cable (type H 05 VV - F 3x1 diameter 8,5 mm) is to be inserted in the proper hole F fig. 3 situated in the back of the apparatus and slide it until it reaches the housing slot V fig. 5 near the thermostat. To disconnect the unit from the network use a bipolar switch conform to CEI-EN standards (contact opening at least 3 mm, better if equipped with fuses). The feeding cable is then connected to the clamps (M fig. 5). Tha appliance must be earthed and the earth cable (which must be yellowgreen and longer than that of the phases) is fixed to the terminal (T fig. 5) marked by the simbol . Before starting it working, make sure that the network tension is in compliance with the rated values of the appliance. Please notice in fig. 2C the wiring diagram of the appliance. For capacity 50-100 L The feeding cable (type HO5 V V - F 3x1.5 diameter 8,5 mm) is to be inserted in the proper housing slot near the thermostat. Depending on the model, the electric connection must be made directly to the terminals on the terminal board (Fig. 2A) or on the thermostat (Fig. 2B). To disconnect the unit from the network use a bipolar switch conform to CEI-EN standards (contact opening at least 3 mm, better if equipped with fuses). The appliance must be earthed and the earth cable (which must be yellowgreen and longer than that of the phases) is fixed to the terminal marked by the symbol . Before starting it working, make sure that the network tension is in compliance with the rated values of the appliance. Please notice in fig. 2C the wiring diagram of the appliance. If the appliance has no power supply cable, it can be connected to the mains with a rigid tube or a fixed cable.
*For Singapore models the safety valve is set at about 0,65 MPa. 8
GB Starting and testing
Before supplying the electrical power, fill the heater with water from the mains by opening the main tap of the home plant the hot water tap until there is no more air in the heater. Check for water leaks, including the flange and tighten slightly if necessary. In case of models with self locking flange make sure that the position of the flange is centred; eventually tighten with moderation the nut located at the center of the flange bracket. Press the switch to supply power to the appliance. For models which are not fitted with a switch, provide electrical power by turning the control knob according the symbols.
Adjusting the operating temperature
In models without the temperature regulation knob, the thermostat is set to maximum position; if you wish to decrease the temperature to save consumption, unplug the appliance from the mains, remove the cover and turn the thermostat knob carefully with a screwdriver in the sense indicated by the adjustment referencies + / - marked on the knob.
Maintenance instructions All repairs and maintenance work must be carried out by qualified electrician. Before calling your Technical Servicing Centre, check that the fault is not due to lack of water or power failure. Replacing parts
Disconnect the appliance from the electrical mains. Remove the cover to work on the electrical parts. To work on the thermostat remove it from the housing and disconnect it from the mains. To work on the heating element, and the anode, first empty the appliance by closing the mains tap and allow the water to flow from inside the same throught the supply pipe after having opened the emptying tap and opening the hot water tap. In the case of the models with self-locking flange, remove the nut, then the flange fixing bracket and push the flange outwards from the inside and remove it with a semi-circular movement. In the case of the other models, remove the 5 bolts and then the flange. The heating element and anode are coupled to the flange. When remounting remember to replace the flange gasket, the thermostat and the heating element into their original positions. When removing the above, we recommend replacing the flange gasket.
Periodical maintenance
To ensure the best performance from this appliance, descale the heating element once every two years. If you prefer not to use special descaling acids for this operation, simply crumble away the lime deposit without damaging the heating element. Replace the magnesium anode every two years. To do so, dismount the heating element and unscrew the anod from the support bracket.
Bipolar safety reactivation
If the water overheats, a thermal switch complying with CEI-EN regulations, interrupts the electrical circuit on both supply phases to the heating element. In this case call your Technical Servicing Centre to reactivate it.
Safety valve
In those models equipped with a safety valve with a lever, the latter can be used, by lifting it up, to: - empty out the appliance, if necessary, - check on a regular basis (every month) that the valve is operating correctly. 9
GB How to drain water out
Before removing the valve, it is important to check that the water heater has been switched off long enough for the water inside to cool down. Flush the valve with water to remove any deposit of salts. The valve can be removed and reattached by use of a wrench. PLEASE DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE WATER HEATER ON YOUR OWN. WE RECOMMEND ONLY TRAINED SERVICE TECHNICIAN/PLUMBER FOR THE TASK.
Useful information
If no hot water is supplied from the taps, check that the water and electrical connections comply to the specifications as indicated and dismount the thermostat to check the phase continuity between the terminals and the relevant fastons.If there is no continuity, probably the two-pole safety switch has been activated (see paragraph on periodic maintenance). If the appliance is heating water but the LED does not light up, the LED may be faulty. For the water heater’s galvanic protection system to function properly. The permanent hardness of the water should not be less then 12° F. During the normal functioning of the appliance, the connections could become hot.
Use instructions (user) Starting the appliance
Press the two-pole switch to switch ON the appliance, or just supply the electrical power to the appliance. The LED remains ON during heating. For models which are not fitted with a switch, provide electrical power by turning the control knob according the symbols.
Adjusting the operating temperature
In models with the temperature regulation knob, the water temperature may be adjusted by rotating the external knob connected to the thermostat. Rotate the knob according to the marking on the control panel to increase or decrease the setting temperature.
Anti-freeze function The data and specifications indicated are not binding and the Producer reserves the right to carry out any modifications that may be required without prior notice or replacement. WARNING! For those nations that have taken on European norm EN 1487:2000, the pressure safety device provided with the product does not comply with national norms. According to the norm, the device must have a maximum pressure of 0.7MPa (7 bar) and have at least: a cut-off valve, a non-return valve, a control mechanism for the nonreturn valve, a safety valve and a water pressure shut-off device. This product confirms to EU Directive 2002/96/EC. The symbol of the crossed waste paper basket on the appliance indicates that at the end of its working life the product should be disposed of separately from normal domestic household rubbish, it must be disposed of at a waste disposal centre with dedicated facilities for electric and electronic appliances or returned to the retailer when a new replacement product is purchased. The user is responsible for the disposal of the product at the end of its life at an appropriate waste disposal centre. The waste disposal centre (using special treatment and recycling processes effectively dismantles and disposes of the appliance) helps to protect the environment by recycling the material from which the product is made. For further information about waste disposal systems visit your local waste disposal centre or the retailer from which the product was purchased. 10
Chapter 9
HVAC System
Volume II – Supplier’s O&M Manual Chapter 9 HVAC System
INDEX
1. PRECISION SPLIT AIR CONDITIONER & SPLIT AIR CONDITIONER(FLOOR TYPE)
2. SPLIT AIR CONDITIONER(WALL TYPE, CEILING TYPE)
3. AIR FILTER UNIT
4. VENTILATION FAN
5. ELECTRIC WATER HEATER
SARULLA GEOTHERMAL POWER PROJECT
1. PRECISION SPLIT AIR CONDITIONER & SPLIT AIR CONDITIONER(FLOOR TYPE)
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
INSTALLATION, OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR PRECISION AIR CONDITIONING UNIT & AIR CONDITIONING UNIT KITURAMI BUMYANG AIR CONDITIONING CO., LTD. ALL RIGHIT RESERVED.
1
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
TABLE OF CONTENTS 1.
INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................. 4
1.1.
OFFLOADING ................................................................................................................................................................... 4
1.2.
UNIT PROTECTION........................................................................................................................................................ 5
1.3.
UNIT STORAGE ............................................................................................................................................................... 5
1.4.
HANDLING ......................................................................................................................................................................... 5
2.
INSTALLATION................................................................................................... 8
2.1.
GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................................................... 8
2.2.
LOCATION.......................................................................................................................................................................... 8
2.3.
IMPORTANT CONSIDERATION ............................................................................................................................. 10
2.4.
SECTION-TO-SECTION JOINTS (IF NECESSARY) ...................................................................................... 10
2.5.
VIBRATION PROOF ..................................................................................................................................................... 10
2.6.
WEATHERPROOF UNITS ......................................................................................................................................... 11
2.7.
DUCTWORK CONNECTIONS ................................................................................................................................. 12
2.8.
PIPEWORK CONNECTIONS .................................................................................................................................... 12
2.9.
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS ................................................................................................................................ 16
2.10.
FINAL INSPECTION ..................................................................................................................................................... 18
3.
OPERATION...................................................................................................... 19
3.1.
GENERAL ......................................................................................................................................................................... 19
3.2.
CHECK OF SAFETY DEVICES ............................................................................................................................... 20
3.3.
OPERATING START .................................................................................................................................................... 20
3.4.
STOP, PAUSE AND RESTART AFTER LONG-TERM STOP .................................................................... 20
3.5.
HOW TO USE MICOM AND SET PROGRAMS (FOR SAC) ....................................................................... 21
3.5.4.
OPERATION DATA SETTING ................................................................................................................................. 27
4.
MAINTENANCE ................................................................................................ 34
4.1.
GENERAL ......................................................................................................................................................................... 34
4.2.
FANS ................................................................................................................................................................................... 34
2
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
4.3.
MOTORS ........................................................................................................................................................................... 37
4.4.
BEARINGS ....................................................................................................................................................................... 38
4.5.
FILTERS ............................................................................................................................................................................ 39
4.6.
COILS ................................................................................................................................................................................. 40
4.7.
HUMIDIFIERS .................................................................................................................................................................. 40
4.8.
DRAIN PAN ...................................................................................................................................................................... 40
4.9.
LEGIONELLA CHECK ................................................................................................................................................. 41
4.10.
ELECTRIC HEATERS .................................................................................................................................................. 41
4.11.
REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS ................................................................................................................................... 41
5.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE............................................................................ 45
5.1.
Routine maintenance ................................................................................................................................................. 45
5.2.
After 48 hours of operation ..................................................................................................................................... 46
5.3.
Weekly ................................................................................................................................................................................ 46
5.4.
Monthly .............................................................................................................................................................................. 46
5.5.
6 Monthly .......................................................................................................................................................................... 47
5.6.
Yearly .................................................................................................................................................................................. 47
6.
TROUBLE SHOOTING ..................................................................................... 48
6.1.
GENERAL FAULTS ...................................................................................................................................................... 48
6.2.
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM FAULTS................................................................................................................... 49
6.3.
PROBLEMS AND CAUSES ESPECIALLY IN CONDENSING PARTS(Compressor) .................... 50
3
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
1. INTRODUCTION WARNING Contains Refrigerant under Pressure! System contains oil and refrigerant under high pressure. Recover refrigerant to relieve pressure before opening the system. See unit nameplate for refrigerant type. Do not use non-approved refrigerants, refrigerant substitutes, or refrigerant additives. Failure to follow proper procedures or the use of non-approved refrigerants, refrigerant substitutes, or refrigerant additives could result in death or serious injury or equipment damage
WARNING Hazardous Voltage w/Capacitors! Disconnect all electric power, including remote disconnects and discharge all motor start/run capacitors before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout procedures to ensure the power cannot be inadvertently energized. Verify with an appropriate voltmeter that all capacitors have discharged. Failure to disconnect power and discharge capacitors before servicing could result in death or serious injury. 1.1. OFFLOADING The simplest method of offloading is by forklift truck. If this is not possible, unit sections should be lifted by crane, utilizing the lifting holes or lugs provided in the structural base frame. These are provided for the facility of inserting lifting shackles and nylon, web type slings. Kiturami-Bumyang Limited should be notified of the method of offloading in advance, as this affects the way in which the unit sections are loaded onto the delivery vehicle. 1) Keep sections upright – DO NOT TILT. 2) Timber packs should be utilized to avoid abrasion. Spacer bars should also be fitted, where necessary, to prevent the slings from slipping. 3) Where sections are fitted with a roof, additional timber packing must be utilized to ensure that the slings do not bear on the roof structure and that all forces are transferred to the section framework. Failure to utilize additional timber packing will result in damage to the roof.
4
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. INSTRUCTION
4) Ensure that sections are offloaded onto a prepared, flat sound base in an upright and level position. 5) To prevent damage it is recommended that the recipient obtain expert advice from a craneage specialist. 6) All lifting equipment is to be supplied by others 7) Avoid unnecessary jarring or rough handling. It is important not to drop the units as this may result in permanent damage to the internal components. 1.2. UNIT PROTECTION Unless otherwise specified, unit sections will be delivered to site covered in “shrink wrap” polythene, which should provide a more than adequate level of protection against inclement weather. Should alternative methods of unit protection be required, (i.e. timber or flame retardant materials), Kiturami-Bumyang Limited should be notified of the specific requirements at the pre-contract stage. The removal and disposal of all protective coverings is the responsibility of others.
WARNING Sharp edges and coil surfaces can cause personal injury. Wear protective gear and avoid contact with them. 1.3. UNIT STORAGE If the unit is not to be installed immediately, it should be stored in a clean, dry area. If stored externally, it should be adequately protected from the weather. During the storage period, it is advisable to slacken the drive belts and to rotate the fan shaft two or three turns every week. Before the unit is put into operation, the grease in the bearings should be checked for oxidation, a condition that is indicated by the grease hardening and taking on the appearance of varnish. Fan and motor pulleys should be checked periodically for rust and sprayed with penetrating oil as a rust preventative. In addition all dampers should be rotated and lubricated as necessary. 1.4. HANDLING Be careful to avoid rough handling of the unit. Do not push or pull the unit from anything other than the base.
5
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. INSTRUCTION
Block the pushing vehicle away from the unit to prevent damage to the sheet-metal cabinet and end frame. To alleviate the risk of damage, consideration should be given to using the services of Kiturami-Bumyang or a plant movement specialist when moving unit sections into their final position. The preferred method is by forklift or hand pump trucks with timber packing to avoid abrasion. Mechanical skates, rollers, pinch bars and jacks may also be utilized as necessary, but due care should always be taken to avoid damage to the unit sections and finishes. To lift the unit, lifting slots are provided in the base of the unit. Arrange spreader bars and cables to prevent damage to the condenser coils or cabinet (Fig. 1)
Forks to extend full width/length
(Fig.2 ) If necessary, 2 fork-lift should be used
(Fig. 3)
6
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. INSTRUCTION
7
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. INSTALLATION
2. INSTALLATION 2.1. GENERAL Units should be installed in accordance with good engineering practice and stand upright and level. The floor, foundation or supporting steelwork should be rigid, flat and level. The structure should be capable of supporting the weight of the unit including water or Steam in the coils. Kiturami-Bumyang Limited are not responsible for the coordination of the supporting steelwork, concrete plinths or the like. 2.2. LOCATION The unit should be located away from building flue stacks or exhaust ventilators to prevent possible reintroduction of contaminated air through the outside air intake. Ensure that provision has been made in the location of the unit to allow for the removal of all plant items for service and maintenance purposes. Sufficient room should be allowed for access to :
Fans & motors
Compressors
Electric heater batteries
Filters (bags, auto-rolls and panels)
Coils and evaporative humidifiers, including their removal for long term maintenance
Spray nozzles and pumps for spray coil modules
Heat exchangers
2.2.1. Especially for condensing unit (ACCU)
Avoid a high ambient temperature and install the unit in a place well ventilated.
Wind direction and longitudinal direction of the unit shall be parallel to minimize the negative influence to the performance. If the influence due to the wind is serious, a windscreen is recommended.
Low humidity
Avoid dusty place
Locate at a well-lighted place for easy inspection
If the space of the outdoor unit is smaller than the figure below, the discharged air may be bypassed affecting the performance
8
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. INSTALLATION
CAUTION If a sufficient space is not ensured, do not install the unit in a place deeper than the height of the unit. When locating the unit beside the higher wall than the unit height, the side space which is the sum of service space and 0.5 times of additional height should be procured. (Side space = 600 + additional height x 0.5) NO obstacles before the discharge of fans If MCCB is not applied to the unit, shut off switch is recommended to cut off the
1250
supply power at site.
600
1250
625
1250
1000
600
1250
1000
9
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. INSTALLATION
< Clearance in series installation>
2.3. IMPORTANT CONSIDERATION Sufficient clearance for U-traps on condensate drain and overflow connections should also be considered by the purchaser. 2.4. SECTION-TO-SECTION JOINTS (IF NECESSARY) Ensure that section or section assemblies are positioned in their proper sequence and that the unit handing and reference is correct. Sections should be accurately aligned and abutted prior to bolting together using the fixings and gaskets provided. All units have a corner gusset for bolting the sections together. On larger units an intermediate joining bracket is added. Incorrect installation will result in air leakage, air blow marks to the unit casings and unacceptable noise. It is recommended that a mastic seal be applied to the joint following assembly. 2.5. VIBRATION PROOF 2.5.1. VIBRATION PRO OF RUBBER PAD (STANDARD)
To prevent conveyance of the vibration of condensing unit to buildings, a vibration proof pad shall be installed as the figure below. Locate the unit on a proper place and anchor the unit tightly after drilling. When you anchor with a bolt and nut, give a gap to absorb the vibration.
10
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. INSTALLATION
Install a flexible tube during water piping and cable duct construction to prevent conveyance of the vibration.
If the unit is installed in the place that has a probability of vibration conveyance, installation of vibration proof spring is recommended.
During initial installation, put a shim or block, concerning variable spring height.
Remove the shim or block and adjust the height after completion of piping, wiring, refrigerant charging work etc.
11
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. INSTALLATION
2.7. DUCTWORK CONNECTIONS Ductwork may be connected direct to the air handling unit, with the exception of units where external spring isolators require a flexible connection allowing a movement of 25 mm in any direction. Ductwork, steelwork and any other services should not be supported off the unit. 2.8. PIPEWORK CONNECTIONS 2.8.1. Genral Pipework should be connected in accordance with good engineering practice, and particular care taken when connection is made to screwed fittings on the unit. All pipework must be adequately supported to ensure that no additional load is borne by the unit. 2.8.2. Coil Connections Allowance for expansion and contraction should be made when making connections to coils. The bulb of the thermostatic expansion valve for direct expansion coils should be securely fitted to the suction line prior to any equalizing connection. 2.8.3. Condensate Drain Connections All condensate drain connections must be correctly trapped. Incorrect trapping can result in flooding within the unit and consequent flooding of the immediate area. Drain lines should be a minimum of the same size as the drain pan connection. They should pitch downwards continuously, with a minimum fall of 10mm per meter, to a tundish or other form of air break. There must always be an air break. All drain lines should be insulated where passing through any space where damage from condensation drip might occur. Fittings with cleanout plugs should be used at each change of direction in the drain line. Recommended condensate trap arrangements are shown in the diagrams. Condensate Drain Connections Draw-through, Negative Pressure:
12
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. INSTALLATION
Condensate Drain Connection Draw-through, Negative Pressure : "S" trap arrangement
MSP = Maximum suction pressure (Pa)
(Base on "dirty' filter condition)
X = (MSP / 10) + 50 (mm)
Draw-through, Positive Pressure : Running trap arrangement
MDP = Maximum discharge pressure (Pa)
(Base on "dirty' filter condition) X = 50 mm (minimum) Y = (MDP / 10) + 50 (mm)
Y = X / 2 (minimum) For Example if MSP = 500 Pa For Example if MSP = 1800 Pa
X = 50 mm
2.8.4. Especially for condensing unit (ACCU) A) LIQUID LINE
The liquid line should be protected from a heat source around by reducing the tube length to the minimum
If the tube length is long or the ambient temperature exceeds 40 ℃, liquid refrigerant evaporates (flash gas) and then the performance extremely decreases. Therefore perform the piping work with attention.
If several units more than one are installed, the piping work shall be performed with appropriate method using manifold, header or using both simultaneously.
13
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. INSTALLATION
1) INDOOR UNIT INSTALLED HIGHER THAN THE CONDENSING UNIT
To prevent high pressure drop caused on the liquid tube, the vertical length of the tube should not exceed 10m.
The pressure drop may be reduced by applying one step bigger tube than the liquid tube for normal condition.
2) INDOOR UNIT INSTALLED ON THE SAME LEVEL OF CONDENSING UNIT
To prevent the inflow of the refrigerant liquid into the evaporator during the unit shut off, a reverse roof shall be installed 2~3m higher than outlet of the condensing unit.
3) INDOOR UNIT INSTALLED LOWER THAN CONDENSING UNIT
To prevent the inflow of the refrigerant liquid into the evaporator during the unit shut off, a reverse roof shall be installed 3m higher than outlet of the condensing unit.
The pressure drop shall be reduced by applying one step bigger liquid tubes.
B) SUCTION LINE(GAS LINE)
A proper velocity (horizontal piping : more than 3.5 m/s / vertical piping : more than 6.0 m/s) shall be necessary to ensure that lubricant melted in the refrigerant gas returns to the compressor.
Install the horizontal piping higher than the unit cooler for preventing the reverse flow of the lubricant except during pump down.
If the horizontal is long, a proper incline (about 5/1,000) shall be necessary to ensure the lubricant return.
Construct the piping not to cause serious pressure drop and noise.
Do not construct a trap at inlet of the condensing unit since it causes a liquid compression.
To prevent high pressure drop caused on the liquid tube, the vertical length of the tube shall be at most 10m.
The pressure drop may be reduced by applying one step bigger tube than the liquid tube for normal condition.
To prevent the inflow of the refrigerant liquid into the evaporator during the unit shut off, a reverse roof shall be installed 2~3m higher than outlet of the
14
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. INSTALLATION
condensing unit. 1) INDOOR UNIT INSTALLED HIGHER THAN THE CONDENSING UNIT
To prevent the inflow of the refrigerant liquid into the evaporator during the unit shut off, a reverse roof shall be installed at least 1m higher than outlet of the unit cooler.
2) INDOOR UNIT INSTALLED ON THE SAME LEVEL OF CONDENSING UNIT
To prevent the inflow of the refrigerant liquid into the evaporator during the unit shut off, a reverse roof shall be installed at least 1m higher than outlet of the unit cooler.
3) INDOOR UNIT INSTALLED LOWER THAN CONDENSING UNIT
Make a minimum trap at the outlet of the unit cooler since a huge trap causes oil hammer.
If the vertical length of the piping is long, make a trap at most 10 long to prevent m trap.
2.8.5. Refrigerant piping work only for Split Type
The refrigerant piping shall be of simple and strait structure.
The piping shall be designed with the consideration of piping expansion/contraction and vibration.
A structure that helps oil return.
The liquid piping should be protected from a heat source around by reducing the tube length to the minimum. If the tube length is long or the ambient temperature exceeds 40 ℃, liquid refrigerant evaporates (flash gas) and then the performance extremely decreases. Therefore perform the piping work with attention.
Generally, the installation method of the air-cooled condensing unit is sorted as the following.
15
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. INSTALLATION
(A)
(B)
A) OUTDOOR UNIT INSTALLED HIGHER THAN INDOOR UNIT 1) When the elevation difference between the outdoor and indoor unit is more than 2.5m, a trap should be installed and the piping should be inclined toward the condenser (downwardly). 2) The elevation difference should not exceed 10m to prevent the oil return problem and noise. B) OUTDOOR UNIT INSTALLED HIGHER THAN INDOOR UNIT 1) The indoor unit should be installed within 8m above from the outdoor unit. If the elevation difference exceeds the limit (8m), a special heat exchanger should be applied because the refrigerant evaporates. 2) Locate the receiver tank beside the indoor unit. 2.9. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS Electrical components should be connected to the supply in accordance with the Institution of Electrical Engineers (I.E.E.) Regulations and local by-laws where appropriate. In the case of three phase motors ensure that the rotation of the motor corresponds with the direction shown by the arrow on the fan frame. Be sure that the electrical connection to the fan motor is made using flexible cabling/containment materials, to permit fan belt adjustment and also to allow for movement of the antivibration mounts. If safety-isolating switches are fitted to access doors they must be
16
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. INSTALLATION
wired through the appropriate motor control circuits. Provision should be made for the installation of a fan run on control to prevent residual heat emanating from the heating plant damaging components such as the fan, motor, filters etc., when the unit is shut down. This objective may be achieved by:
A thermostat controlling the fan and ensuring that the temperature within the unit does not rise above 45°C in the event that air ceases to flow
Utilizing a delay timer
Airflow switches
WARNING Grounding Required! All field-installed wiring must be completed by qualified personnel. All field-installed wiring must comply with NEC and applicable local codes. Failure to follow these instructions could result in death or serious injuries 2.9.1. Field Power Wiring Wiring must comply with all applicable codes and ordinances. The warranty is voided if wiring is not in accordance with these specifications. An open fuse, tripped circuit breaker, or overload. Before replacing a fuse, circuit breaker or restarting a compressor or fan motor, identify the trouble and correct. According to the National Electrical Code, a disconnecting means shall be located within sight of and readily accessible from the air conditioning equipment. 2.9.2. Field Control Wiring Unit controllers are available with several control arrangements which may require low voltage field wiring. Wiring must comply with applicable codes and ordinances. The warranty is voided if wiring is not in accordance with these specifications. 2.9.3. Motor Wiring Diagrams Typical connection diagrams are shown below : -
17
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. INSTALLATION
2.10. FINAL INSPECTION After installation of the unit, a thorough inspection should be carried out. This should include inspecting the inside of the unit and removing debris and tools, which may have been left behind by on site contractors. Fan impellers, scrolls and outlets should similarly be inspected. Ensure that transit protection fittings are removed from the fan/motor base frame, all bearings are adequately greased and that all traps are primed. Replace any panels, which may have been removed and close all access doors, ensuring that the door sealing gaskets have not been damaged.
18
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. OPERATION
3. OPERATION 3.1. GENERAL The unit is supplied with access doors, which should be closed whenever the unit is in operation.
WARNING Electric shock and moving machinery hazard. Can cause severe equipment damage, personal injury, or death. Disconnect and tag out all electrical power before servicing this equipment. All start-up and service work must be performed only by trained, experienced technicians familiar with the hazards of working on this type of equipment. Note that the motor and drive are designed to operate against a given system resistance. If the system is not complete or access doors and panels are open, the motor rating will be exceeded and damage to the motor may occur. Do not operate fan motors in an overload amperage condition. Commissioning & Start-up Checklist
Unit received undamaged.
Equipment received as ordered.
Unit positioned and assembled in accordance with installation instructions.
Fan base shipping restraints removed.
Anti-vibration mounts adjusted.
Check electrical supply voltage.
Check tightness of all electrical connections.
Check alignment of fan and motor pulleys.
Check taper lock bushes are tight.
Check fan belt tension.
Check any additional bearings and couplings where fitted.
Manually rotate fan impellers and motors to ensure freedom of movement.
Check and prime condensate drain traps.
Check all filters are fitted.
Energise momentarily to check correct fan rotation.
Check that all control system components, such as fan run on timers, airflow switches, etc., are wired correctly.
19
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. OPERATION
Check control damper operation
Check that ductwork is complete and that any fire dampers installed downstream of the fan are open.
Check access panels, doors are fitted and secure.
Check all shaft bearings and belt tension after 24 hours of operation
Check fan motor current draw
Check tightness of all electrical connections.
Review the equipment and service literature, the sequences of operation, and the wiring diagrams to become familiar with the functions and purposes of the controls and devices.
3.2. CHECK OF SAFETY DEVICES 1) Check the set of the pressure switch, freezing protection switch, EOCR,
fusible plug, overheat protector of discharge gas etc. 2) Check the set of return value. (High/low pressure switch, EOCR is manually
returned and the others are returns to normal operation automatically if the caused of problem is removed.)
3.3. OPERATING START 1) Supply power to the units 2) Check the select switch position at Auto/Manual. If there is no select switch,
consider as Auto(control in HCP, units run with remote signal). 3) If there is RUN switch like as S/A FAN RUN, push the switch on. 4) Start units using MICOM 5) For manual running is possible also using MICOM. 6) Check if an abnormal sound or vibration is occurred while running. 7) Check all status lamps are turned on correctly and any alarm lamp is turned on. 8) Check the voltage and current. 9) Check if the safety devices operate properly. 10) Check the operation condition 30 minutes later after starting the operation. 3.4. STOP, PAUSE AND RESTART AFTER LONG-TERM STOP 3.4.1. STOP. Stop the unit by HCP remote signal, by using MICOM or by pressing “OFF” or “STOP” button if it is.
20
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. OPERATION
Stop running by pressing a stop(or off) button. After a complete stop of PAC running. 3.4.2. PAUSE
When the condensing unit is paused for a long time, the piping and the unit should not stored under pressing. Because it causes unnecessary loading to the unit and the refrigerant may be leaked out. Therefore, for the long term of operation pause, the managements below are required. 1) Pump down the refrigerant into the condenser or receiver tank 2) Pay attention to maintain the low pressure above 50 kPa. Because, if the internal pressure of the unit is lower than the atmospheric pressure, the air enter into the unit though any leak. 3) Close all the openings completely after the pump down. Pay attention to
prevent liquid seal. 4) Cut off the power supply. 5) Check if there is a leak in the piping system, and repair damaged part. 3.4.3. RESTART AFTER LONG-TERM STOP
When operate the unit after long term of shut down or repair, find the leakage on each part and repair. And check the contamination of evaporator and clean it if necessary 3.5. HOW TO USE MICOM AND SET PROGRAMS (FOR SAC) 3.5.1. DDC-400R MICOM CONTROLLER
Out View of Micom Controller DDC-400R(Body) & Display(SM-4000T)
< Main Body (DDC-400R) >
21
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. OPERATION
< Display (SM-4000T) >
COM Input/Output Specification THIS IO SPEC. is MICOM Maker’s Standard. So check wiring diagram in product or submitted documents
DO output Output (220VAC)
DI input PORT
Input (Powerless)
PORT
DO1
FAN (INDOOR)
DI1
REMOTE ON/OFF
DO2
CDU1 COOLING
DI2
HARON
22
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. OPERATION
DO3
CDU1 HEATING
DI3
FAN
DO4
CDU2 COOLING
DI4
FAN O.C
DO5
CDU2 HEATING
DI5
CDU1
DO6
RH1
DI6
CDU2
DO7
RH2
DI7
RH
DO8
RH3
DI8
WATER LEAKAGE
DO9
RH4
DI9
WATER LEVEL1
DO10
OP. Status
DI10
WATER LEVEL2
DO11
DO12
HH
DO13
WATER SUPP.
DO14
WATER DRAIN.
D15
TOTAL ALARM
Explanation about display
23
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. OPERATION
3.5.2. SCREEN DISPLAY FLOW CHART
24
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. OPERATION
3.5.3. MONITOR SETTING
1). Monitor setting Item
Range
Initial Value
Function
※Set the Function of a monitor. (Access method: Press "-"(decrease) Key for 5 second on the controller.) Set the Backlight ON time on the LCD screen
Always ON/ 1)Backlight
Always OFF/
Always On: The monitor backlight is always turned on.
60sec
1~360sec
Always Off: The monitor backlight is always turned off. Set to time: The backlight is turned on as much as setting time. If touch the monitor, a backlight is turned on again.
2)Language
한국어/English
한국어
Set the language to be displayed on the monitor.
2). Humidifier status => Function of operating manually that water drain or water supply. (It will be displayed only when set to "Electrode bar humidifier".) (Access method : Press "UP"key when controller is operated. If controller doesn't have any input for 2 min, screen will be changed to operating information.) 1) Humidifier OP: Display the current of humidifier when a electrode bar humidifier is operating. 2) Manual water supply: Can be controlled manually solenoid valve of water supply. 1)Humidifier OP. 0.0A
ON: Solenoid valve ON.(Active when press "Increase")
2)Humidifier Reset +>
OFF:Solenoid valve OFF.(Active when press "Decrease")
3)Manual water supp. Off->
3) Manual water drain : Can be controlled manually solenoid valve of water drain.
4)Manual water drain Off->
ON: Solenoid valve ON.(Active when press "Increase") OFF:Solenoid valve OFF.(Active when press "Decrease")
※ If use manual supply/drain, it will be turned off after supply/drain operating for 3 min.
3). Operation Status => Check the output status of the controller when the controller is operating. (Access method: Press "+>"(Increase) key on main screen, then operation status will be displayed on the monitor.)
25
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. OPERATION
[Operation Status] 1)Thermohygrostat +> unit
Check the current operation status of the controller.
2)Outdoor unit 1
+>
3)Outdoor unit 2
+>
4). Alarm History=> Check the history of alarm on the controller. (Access method: Press "HELP ALARM"key for about 5 second on the controller and then the messages of alarms and the times of occurrence of alarms will be displayed. To delete the history of occurred alarms, Select the Selection bar after that press "HELP ALARM"key for about 5 second then appears the message asked to whether to delete. [Alarm Status] No Alarm! [Alarm History] 1)Water supply CHK 00 / 00 . 00 : 00 2)FAN 00 / 00 . 00 : 00
Press "ALARM" key for about 5 second when operating or standby states, and the
[Alarm Status]
"Alarm History" screen will be displayed.
No Alarm! [Alarm History] 1)Water supply CHK 00 / 00 . 00 : 00 2)FAN 00 / 00 . 00 : 00
5). Present time display=> Check the current time on the controller. (Access method: Press "DOWN" Key on main screen.)
26
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. OPERATION
[Present time] JAN 1st Press "DOWN" key on main screen, "Present time" will be displayed. SUN 2014 00 : 00 : 00
3.5.4. OPERATION DATA SETTING
Item
Range
Initial value
Function
1). Data setting => Set the setting value of temperature/humidity on the controller. 1)Temp
-20.0℃
set
~80.0℃
25.0℃
2)Humi set 0.0% ~ 100% 50.0%
Set the value to control for the temperature on the room. Set the value to control for the humidity on the room. Set the operating point and the stop point of each step when the system operates as the cooling drift.
3)Cooling No use, drift
0.1℃~9.9℃
(Current Temp ≧ Setting Temp +Cooling Drift×1) → Cooling 1 Step 1.0℃
Operation (Current Temp ≧ Setting Temp +Cooling Drift×2) → Cooling 2 Step Operation ※If set to "No use", Cooling operation does not run. Set the operating point and the stop point of each step when the system operates as the Heating drift.
4)Heating No use, drift
0.1℃~9.9℃
(Current Temp ≦ Setting Temp - Heating Drift×1) → Heating 1 Step 1.0℃
Operation (Current Temp ≦ Setting Temp - Heating Drift×2) → Heating 2 Step Operation ※If set to "No use", Heating operation does not run. Set the operating point and the stop point of each step when the
5)Humidify No use, drift
0.1%~9.9%
system operates as the Humidify drift. 3.0%
(Current Humidity ≦ Setting Humidity - (Humidify Drift)) → Humidify Operation ※If set to "No use", Humidify operation does not run.
27
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. OPERATION
Set the operating point and the stop point of each step when the system operates as the Dehumidify drift. 6)Dehumi No use, drift
0.1%~9.9%
(Current Humidity ≧ Setting Humidity + (Dehumidify Drift × 1)) → 3.0%
Dehumidify 1 Step Operation (Current Humidity ≧ Setting Humidity + (Dehumidify Drift × 2)) → Dehumidify 2 Step Operation ※If set to "No use", Dehumidify operation does not run.
3.5.5. ENGINEER MODE 1). General setting => Set about times of operating and stop of each cycles when the controller operates. Setting the delay time of recovery of the controller when outage or restart. No Use: Enter Standby mode and equipment is stopped 1)Outage recov. (recovery)
No use, 1~250sec
when outage recovery. 5sec
Set to time : Delay while setting time when outage recovery. ※ When there are several devices at one place, the outage recovery time can be differentially applied. Then, when the system operates again after recovery from outage, it can be protected from overloading operation. When the system stops operating, all outputs are stopped in order. The fan operates while the stop
2)Stop
No use,
delay
1~250sec
delay time and then over the stop delay time then the system 60sec
is stopped. ※ When cooling/heating operation, this acts to prevent occurrence of condensate water or discharge latent heat. Even though the system is set to cooling mode, cooling is
3)CDU
No use,
delay
1~250sec
5sec
delayed as much as setting time and then cooling step is enabled. Applied also to delay time between cooling steps. Even though the system is set to Heating mode, heating is
4)Heat
No use,
delay
1~250sec
5sec
delayed as much as setting time and then heating step is enabled. Applied also to delay time between heating steps.
28
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. OPERATION
5)CDU step 6)Heat step
1~2 step
2step
1~4 step
4step
Set to cooling/heating operation step. 1~2 Step : The controller operates by setting step. Set to heating operation step with heating output(RH1~4). 1~4 Step : The controller operates by setting step. Set the way of cooling/heating operation as be set to CDU step. Serial: Power Cooling/heating on/off in regular order according to setting CDU steps.
7)CDU alt.
Integrate/ Serial
Integrate
Integrate: Compare the operation integrated time of each equipment according to setting CDU steps and then operate the equipment ascending from the low integrated time. When the controller stops, compare the operation integrated time and then stop the equipment descending from the high integrated time Set the way of heating operation as be set to Heat step. Serial: Power heating on/off in regular order according to setting Heat steps.
8)Heat alt.
Integrate/ Serial
Integrate: Compare the operation integrated time of each Integrate equipment according to setting Heat steps and then operate the equipment ascending from the low integrated time. When the controller stops, compare the operation integrated time and then stop the equipment descending from the high integrated time
9)Humid with cool
Set whether to use humidify on cooling operation. ON/OFF
11)Dehumid off
- ON : Use humidify operation on cooling operation. - OFF: Does not use humidify on cooling operation.
10)Humidify Elec.bar/ method
OFF
FAN -20.0℃~80.0℃
Elec.bar Set the humidify method.
10.0℃
If the current temperature falls lower than "Dehumid off" value, then dehumidification operation is stopped. Set the control method of CDU.
12)OP.
Remote/
method
Output
Remote
-Remote : Control the CDU by communication. ※Even if set 'remote', output also work. -Output : Control the CDU by output.
29
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. OPERATION
13)OP. mode
Set the operation mode of the Heatpump.
C.temp/ Cooling/
C.temp
Heating
-C.temp : Controller operates by setting temp. -Cooling : Controller operated by cooling mode. -Heating : Controller operated by heating mode.
2). Sensor Calibration=> Calibration a temperature, a humidity, a current value when the displayed value differ from actual value. Calibration the current temperature value when the displayed temp differ from actual temp. 1)Temp
-20.0℃~20.0℃
0.0℃
Ex)when actual temperature is 20.0℃ and displayed temperature is 18.0℃. If set this value to 2.0℃, then the displayed temperature is changed from 18.0 to 20.0℃. Calibration the current Humidity value when the displayed Humidity differ from actual Humidity.
2)Humi
-20.0%~20.0%
0.0%
Ex)when actual Humidity is 45.0% and displayed Humidity is 43.0%. If set this value to 2.0%, then the displayed temperature is changed from 43.0% to 45.0%. Calibration the sensor current value when the displayed current differ from actual current.
3)Current
-20.0A~20.0A
0.0℃
Ex)when actual current is 10.0A and displayed current is 8.0A. If set this value to 2.0A, then the displayed current is changed from 8.0A to 10.0A.
3). Alarm setting => Set the time of input to occur alarm on the controller. Set the sensing time to occur Remote alarm, whether input is 1)Remote
No use / 1~250sec
2sec
sensed depending on input contact setting. When "No Use" is set, an alarm is not checked. Set the sensing time to occur Haron alarm, whether input is
2)Haron
No use / 1~250sec
2sec
sensed depending on input contact setting. When "No Use" is set, an alarm is not checked.
30
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. OPERATION
Set the sensing time to occur FAN alarm, whether input is 3)Fan
No
use
/
1~250sec
5sec
sensed depending on input contact setting after FAN output. When "No Use" is set, an alarm is not checked. Set the sensing time to occur FAN Over current alarm,
4)FanOCR
No use /
1sec
1~250sec
whether input is sensed depending on input contact setting after FAN output. When "No Use" is set, an alarm is not checked. Set the sensing time to occur Remote alarm, whether input is
5)CDU
No use /
5sec
1~250sec
sensed depending on input contact setting. When "No Use" is set, an alarm is not checked. Set the sensing time to occur RH alarm, whether input is
6)RH
No use /
5sec
1~250sec
sensed depending on input contact setting after RH output. When "No Use" is set, an alarm is not checked.
7)WL
Set the sensing time to occur Water leakage alarm, whether
No use /
5sec
1~250sec
input is sensed depending on input contact setting. When "No Use" is set, an alarm is not checked. Set the temp level to occur high temp alarm if current temp rises to the upper limit temp
8)High
No
use
Temp
20.0~80.0℃
/
-
No use
by defects on equipment or compressor. (High temp alarm → Current temp≧ High temp alarm ) ※Alarm is cleared if current temp falls to 1℃ less than upper limit. Set the temp level to occur low temp alarm if current temp falls to the lower limit temp
9)Low
No use /
Temp
-20.0~80.0℃
No use
by defects on equipment or compressor. (Low temp alarm → Current temp≦ Low temp alarm ) ※Alarm is cleared if current temp rises 1℃ more than lower limit. Set the humidity level to occur high humidity alarm if current
10)High
No
use
Humid
0.0~100.0%
/
No use
humidity rises to the upper limit by defects on equipment. High humidity alarm → Current humidity ≦ High humidity
31
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. OPERATION
alarm ) ※Alarm is cleared if current humidity falls 5% less than upper limit. Set the humidity level to occur low humidity alarm if current humidity falls to the 11)Low
No
use
Humid
0.0~100.0%
/
lower limit by defects on equipment. No use
(Low humidity alarm → Current humidity ≦ Low humidity alarm ) ※Alarm is cleared if current humidity rises 5% more than lower limit.
4). Input contact Setting => Set the sensing signal of the controller operation state according to site conditions. Set the Remote, Haron, FAN, FAN OCR, CDU, RH, WL input contact.
1) ~ 7) Each Input N.C/N.O
N.C
Contact
※ N.O (Normal Open):No input when normal time.(Magnet “A"contact) N.C
(Normal
Close):No
input
when
a
contact
closed.(Magnet “B"contact)
5). Electrode bar Setting=> Set about humidifier when electrode bar is used. 1)Setting
220V/380V/440V/
Volt
460V/480V
2)Setting Volume 3)Drain time
380V
Set the supplied voltage at the humidifier.
3~42Kg/h
8Kg/h
Set the volume of the humidifier.
7~15T
10T
Set the water drain time hourly depending on water quality.
6). Time setting => Check and modify current time on the controller.
Check the time of occurrence alarm while controller operates normally or by schedule. 20YY / MM / DD / HH / MM / SS / 000(Day of a week)
is
32
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. OPERATION
7). OP.time integration => Check the time of operation about each output on controller. FAN, CDU1~2, HH
Check the time of operation about each ports. ※If you want to delete the OP. time then press 'HELP ALARM' key for 5 sec. The message will be displayed. Then press 'UP'key for cancel or press 'DOWN'key for delete.
8). Output test => Check output ports by each output of the controller Each output on the Controller
Enable you to manually perform I/O test at each output port of the controller. (Select desired output port and press Increase(+) key, and output will power on. At this state, press Decrease (-), and output will power off.) When alarm input exists and is sensed, OK is displayed. When there is no input, Alarm is displayed.) AO output can be manually tested.
33
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. MAINTENANCE
4. MAINTENANCE 4.1. GENERAL A system of planned, regular maintenance will return dividends by averting possible costly repairs and unexpected periods of down time. It is the owner’s responsibly to provide the necessary maintenance of the air-handling unit. If system failure occurs due to improper maintenance during the warranty period, Kiturami-Bumyang Limited will not be liable for any costs incurred to return the unit to satisfactory operation. The unit must be manually isolated from the electrical supply and a period of 5 minutes allowed elapsing before any access door is opened for the purpose of general maintenance. 4.2. FANS Units are generally fitted with belt driven, centrifugal fans, with the motor and drive gear located in the airstreams. Dependant upon the design criteria, other fan types and drive arrangements may be supplied. These include direct drive, axial, plug and duplex fans. Refer to the general arrangement drawings for details of the type of fan and drive fitted. Additionally, each fan has its own identification plate, giving details of the manufacturer, fan size, serial number and type. Specialized and major servicing, such as the replacement of a damaged fan impellor, is beyond the scope of this manual. If it should become necessary, please refer to the fan manufacturer’s literature, which, if not included with this manual, can be supplied upon request. As a general rule, fans should be inspected at least twice a year. Any unusual noise or vibration when the fan is running should be immediately investigated and remedied, as this usually an indication of wear or imbalance in the fan system. Prior to carrying out any work on a fan it is imperative that:
The power supply to the motor is switched off at the safety-isolating switch.
A period of at least 5 minutes is allowed for the fan impellor to come to rest.
Precautions are taken to prevent the accidental, uncontrolled running of the fan during the maintenance work.
WARNING Rotating Components! Disconnect all electric power, including remote disconnects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/ tag out procedures to ensure the equipment cannot be inadvertently energized. Secure drive sheaves to ensure rotor cannot freewheel. Failure to secure drive sheaves or
34
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. MAINTENANCE
Disconnect power before servicing could result in death or serious injury. 4.2.1. Genral fan maintenance (Common to all fan types) Access to the fan section is normally gained by removing the quick release panel to the side of the unit. Inspect the fan blades and remove any build up of dust by lightly brushing, using compressed air or a vacuum cleaner. If the impellor is coated with greasy dirt, it can be washed with a mild detergent or solvent. Gentle handling is essential. 4.2.2. Direct drive fans Direct drive fans eliminate the need for belts or pulleys as the motor is directly connected to the impellor. Where fitted to direct drive fans, the “rubber tire” type coupling connecting the motor and fan shaft should be visually inspected for signs of wear and replaced as necessary. 4.2.3. Drive gear (Belt driven fans) Ensure that the motor and fan pulleys are aligned and taper lock bushes are tight. The V-belt drives should be checked for wear and tensioned to comply with the appropriate motor manufacturers instructions. Replacement belts should be of the same specification and matching length as those originally supplied. Where multiple belts are fitted, always replace all belts as a set. Used belts will always be longer due to stretching. 4.2.4. Belt Tensioning The high performance of modern belts, particularly wedge, cannot be achieved without correct tensioning. Incorrectly tensioned belts can substantially shorten belt life and overload fan and motor bearings shortening their life expectancy. Over tightened belts can result in failure of the fan and motor shafts and bearings, and can cause nuisance tripping of the motor overload. To check for correct tension proceed as follows: 1) Measure the span length. 2) At the centre of the span apply a force at right angles to the belt to deflect one belt 16mm per meter of span length. 3) Compare this force with value in the Tensioning Forces table.
35
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. MAINTENANCE
If the measured force falls within the values given the drive tension should be satisfactory. A measured force below the lower value indicates under tensioning. A new drive should be tensioned to the higher value to allow for the normal drop in tension during the running-in period. After the drive has been running for few hours the tension should be checked and re-adjusted to the higher value. The drive should be subsequently tensioned at regular maintenance intervals. Make adequate provision for tensioning the belts during their life. The minimum take-up allowance is given in the table opposite. We recommend that a belt tension indicator be purchased.
Tensioning Forces Table
Force required to deflect belt 16mm per meter of span
Belt Small pulley diameter (mm)
Newton (N)
Kilogram-force (Kgf)
SPZ
56 to 95 100 to 140
13 to 20 20 to 25
1.3 to 2.0 2.0 to 2.5
SPA
80 to 132 140 to 200
25 to 35 35 to 45
2.5 to 3.6 3.6 to 4.6
SPB
112 to 224 236 to 315
45 to 65 65 to 85
4.6 to 6.6 6.6 to 8.7
SPC
224 to 355 375 to 560
85 to 115 115 to 150
8.7 to 11.7 11.7 to 15.3
Z
56 to 100
5 to 7.5
0.5 to 0.8
A
80 to 140
10 to 15
1.0 to 1.5
B
125 to 200
20 to 30
2.0 to 3.1
C
200 to 400
40 to 60
4.1 to 6.1
Section
36
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. MAINTENANCE
4.2.5. Alignment Good alignment of pulleys is important. Poor alignment will result in belt flank wear.
4.3. MOTORS Check all motor wiring before starting up. The cables should be capable of carrying the full load current of the motor (see motor nameplate) without producing over-heating or an undue voltage drop under starting conditions. Terminal screws and fixing bolts should be tight. Ensure the starter is compatible with the motor. Ensure the motor can be isolated from the mains. Remove the fan cover and ensure that all air-inlet holes are unobstructed. Clean any buildup of dirt and fluff from behind the fan and along the ribs of the frame. Motors fitted with ball and roller bearings are dispatched with the bearing
37
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. MAINTENANCE
housings correctly filled with grease, which under normal conditions is sufficient to last at least two years. The annular clearance between the shaft and bearing covers is very small so that the bearing housing can retain the grease and keep out dust and dirt. Should the grease melt for any reason, leakage will occur but, provided that the correct quantity of the correct grease is used, no trouble should be experienced. Bearing lubrication can be conveniently carried out when the motor is stripped for periodic cleaning and inspection on a routine basis. Over lubricating bearings, particularly on high-speed motors, causes the bearing to run extremely hot and the grease to become thin and leak out. BP Energrease LS3 is recommended for the majority of applications as its lubricating properties are retained over a wide temperature range (-20°C to +120°C). Any other good grade of lithium base grease with an i.p. penetration 185/250 may be used, such as Shell Alvaniar 3. If there is any doubt as to whether the old and the new grease will mix it is recommended that the old grease is cleaned out and the bearing recharged with new grease so that the complete assembly including caps, is approximately 50% full with the grease in close contact with the race, and not merely smeared inside the bearing cover. BP Aeroshell No. 5 should be used for low ambient temperatures down to – 40°C. 4.3.1. Rotation It is essential that the direction of rotation of the driving motor be checked. This check should be a visual one of the direction of rotation of the free shaft with the motor finally connected to the supply. Reversal of rotation can easily be carried out by changing over any two supply leads at the starter. Where an inverter is fitted, the connections must be reversed between the inverter and motor. 4.4. BEARINGS “Sealed-for-life” fan and motor bearings are generally fitted as standard and consequently maintenance is not required. Other bearings should be regularly checked and re-packed with lithium based grease Shell Alvaniar R3 Lithium +180°C, C3 as necessary. Fan bearings are “lifelong” lubricated for 20,000 or 40,000 hours of operation. However, in heavy-duty operational conditions, maintenance intervals are to be established by the operator. If no greasing intervals are specified, they lie nominally above 8,000 operating hours. Hence re-greasing must take place at least once yearly. Depending upon operating conditions, it may become necessary to re-grease several times, as determined by the operator. For motor bearings, please refer to the details as explained in the adjacent motor section. It may be more economical to replace motors
38
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. MAINTENANCE
of small size that develop faults rather than to try to change bearings. 4.5. FILTERS Filters should be inspected at monthly intervals under normal conditions or as indicated by manometer reading, where fitted. For typical dirty pressure drops, please refer to the general assembly drawings or the appropriate catalogue. As a general guide panel filters would not normally exceed 100Pa and bag filters would not normally exceed 250Pa. 4.5.1. Throwaway Filters To replace throwaway filters, install new filters with the directional arrows pointing in the direction of airflow. Note: Bag and cartridge filters must have an airtight seal to prevent air bypass. If using other than Bumyang-supplied filters, apply foam gasketing to the vertical edges of the filter. 4.5.2. Permanent Filters To clean permanent filters : 1) Disconnect all electrical power to the unit. 2) Wash the filter under a stream of water to remove dirt and lint. 3) Remove oil from the filter with a wash of mild alkali solution. 4) Rinse the filter in clean, hot water and allow to dry. 5) Allow to drain and dry for about 12 hours. 6) Reinstall the filter. Note: It may be preferable to keep extra, clean filters to replace the dirty filters to minimize unit downtime for filter maintenance. 4.5.3. Cartridge or Bag Filters To replace cartridge or bag filters: 1) Disconnect all electrical power to the unit. 2) Remove the dirty filters and block-offs from their installed position. 3) Keeping the new bag filters folded, slide each filter into the filter rack, pushing them tightly against the unit. Note: The pleats should be in the vertical position
39
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. MAINTENANCE
4) If using the optional pre-filters, replace them on the appropriate filter rack. 5) Close and secure the access door. If the door can be closed without compressing the filter, adjust the block-off by loosening its screws and position it to provide an airtight seal.
4.6. COILS Coils should be inspected every three months to ensure that there is no build-up of dirt between the fins. Any dirt found should be removed by using a high-pressure air or steam jet. Inspect and remedy any coil connection leaks. Alternatively the coil can be washed down with a mild solution of detergent and water, after which he coil should be thoroughly rinsed with clean water. To clean refrigerant coils: 1) Disconnect all electrical power to the unit 2) Wearing the appropriate personal protective equipment, use a soft brush to remove loose debris from both sides of the coil. 3) Install a block-off to prevent spray from going through the coil and into a dry section of the unit and/or system ductwork. 4) Mix a high-quality coil cleaning detergent with water according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Note: If the detergent is strongly alkaline after mixing (PH 8.5 or higher), it must contain an inhibitor. Follow the cleaning solution manufacturer’s instructions regarding the use of the product. 4.7. HUMIDIFIERS Check and maintain any water treatment that may be appropriate. Clean any sediment from the drain tray and connections and also clean and repair any areas of corrosion. 4.8. DRAIN PAN The condensate drain pan and drain line must be checked to assure the condensate drains as designed. This inspection should occur a minimum of every six months or more often as dictated by operating experience. If evidence of standing water or condensate overflow exists, identify and remedy the cause immediately.
40
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. MAINTENANCE
4.9. LEGIONELLA CHECK At three monthly intervals take dip slide samples of cooling coil, exhaust heat recovery coil and humidifier condensate drip tray water and send for analysis. At three monthly intervals also take dip slide samples of evaporative humidifier / cooler drains / water reservoirs under the requirements of the legislation in relation to the Control of Bacteria in Water Systems. If results are positive disinfect all associated components of the air handling unit including all drain trays, wash down sections and condensate trap arrangements. 4.10. ELECTRIC HEATERS In correctly filtered systems, no maintenance is required other than periodic checking of the fasteners and electrical connections for security. If nuisance tripping of an electric heater occurs, the most likely cause is low air velocity over the heater elements. This may be due to dirty filters, too low a speed setting or user adjustment to dampers remote from the unit. Ensure that the thermal cut out switch is sound and operating correctly. 4.11. REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS All work on refrigeration systems should be carried out by an approved and qualified refrigeration service engineer.
CAUTION Refrigeration systems contain gas at high pressure. Due care should be taken when connecting or disconnecting any components or gauge sets. Do not use a naked flame if refrigerant gas is present in any appreciable quantity in the local area. Dirt should not be allowed to accumulate on the condenser coils or other parts in the condenser air circuit. Clean as often as necessary with a brush, vacuum cleaner attachment or other suitable means. Condenser fan motors are generally equipped with factory lubricated, sealed bearings and do not require any maintenance. A filter-drier is installed in the liquid line of every system to prevent damage from dirt and moisture. When replacing a filter-drier do not allow it to be exposed to the atmosphere for an extended period of time, as once it absorbs moisture from the atmosphere, it loses its effectiveness.
41
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. MAINTENANCE
4.11.1. Refrigeration Shut down Periods In the event of a shut down of the unit for more than three weeks we recommend the following actions: Shut down procedure
Pump down the compressor.
Shut the compressor service valves.
Isolate the compressor by its fuses, circuit breakers or local isolators.
Start-up procedure
Restore power to unit.
Open all service valves.
CAUTION! Where fitted, ensure compressor crankcase heaters are on for at least 24 hours prior to starting the compressor.
Switch the compressor on and check refrigeration circuit readings.
NOTE! Never remove a cap from an access port unless the valve is fully backseated with its valve stem in the maximum counter-clockwise position as the refrigerant charge will be lost. ALWAYS USE A REFRIGERATION VALVE WRENCH TO OPEN AND CLOSE SERVICE VALVES. 4.11.2. Compressor Motor Burnout (Clean-up Procedure) When a hermetic motor burns out, the stator winding decomposes forming carbon, water and acid, which contaminate the refrigerant systems. These contaminants must be removed from the system to prevent repeat motor failures. Determine the cause of the burnout and make any necessary corrections.
Check control panel for blown fuses, welded starter contacts, welded overload contacts or burned out heater elements.
Check compressor terminal plate for burned or damaged terminals and insulation, and shorted or grounded terminals.
Check wiring for loose power connections.
Check for high or low voltage.
Close compressor suction and discharge service valves and bleed refrigerant from compressor. Save remaining refrigerant in system. Remove the suction and discharge shut-off valve bolts and all other connections. Remove the damaged compressor and replace with a new compressor.
42
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. MAINTENANCE
On severe motor burnouts, be sure that the shut-off valves and suction or discharge lines are not contaminated. If they are, they should be thoroughly cleaned or replaced before being connected to the replacement compressor. Install a new liquid line filter-drier. Evacuate and dehydrate the replacement compressor and check to see that the oil is at the correct level. Place compressor in operation and, after a period of four hours, check the compressor oil for discoloration and/or acidity. If the oil shows signs of contamination, replace the oil charge and filter driers. Check the oil daily for discoloration and acidity. If the oil remains clean and acid-free, the system is clean. If the oil shows signs of contamination change both the oil and the filter-drier. Repeat this procedure until the system is clean. 4.11.3. PUMP DOWN When the unit is taken out form the factory or shut off in off season or during repair, perform pump down work that gathers all refrigerant and send to the condenser (or receiver tank). At this work, handle the valves of inlet and outlet with attention and perform it as the following.
PUMP DOWN PROCEDURE PROCEDURE
1. Adjust the low pressure switch not to operate
2. Operating the unit
INSTRUCTION ① Cut off the power supply ② Connect the alligator clips to the low pressure switch as the figure. Supply the power ① Remove the cap of stop valve of receiver
3. Close the stop valve of tank outlet. receiver tank outlet
② Turn the stop valve stem clockwise to close tightly.
4. Gather the refrigerant in checking the pressure of compound gauge
① Shut off the compressor when the pressure is down to 0 ~ 50 kPa.
REMARKS
43
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. MAINTENANCE
5. Close the inlet stop valve ① Close the inlet stop valve of receiver tank of receiver tank.
when the compressor stops.
① When the refrigerant in the lubrication oil 6. Observe the increase in evaporates, the pressure increases more pressure
of
the
low than 50 kPa in the compound gauge.
pressure compound gauge ② In case of halt in operation, if the for a moment.
pressure of the compound gauge is under
Check
if
there
is
the
refrigerant in the oil. Prevent air inflow
100 kPa, stop the pump down.
7. Gather the refrigerant again when the pressure is above 80kPa.
① close the inlet valve of the receiver tank. ② Repeat the processes 3∼5th. ③ Stop when the pressure increase is 20 ∼50 kPa.
Increase
in
pressure
should be within 20∼50 kPa.
① Close the outlet valve of receiver tank Indicates “UNDER PUMP 8. Finishing
with the cap.
DOWN” in front of the unit
② Cut off the power supply.
for safety.
44
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
5. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Check last maintenance report and intervening service reports. Pay particular attention to items mentioned in the latter.
WARNING Hazardous Service Procedures! The maintenance and troubleshooting procedures recommended in this section of the manualcould result in exposure to electrical, mechanical or other potential safety hazards. Always refer to the safety warnings provided throughout this manual concerning these procedures. When possible, disconnect all electrical power including remote disconnect and discharge all energy storing devices such as capacitors before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvertently energized. When necessary to work with live electrical components, have a qualified licensed electrician or other individual who has been trained in handling live electrical components perform these tasks. Failure to follow all of the recommended safety warnings provided, could result in death or serious injury.
WARNING Rotating Components! Disconnect all electric power, including remote disconnects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvertently energized. Secure drive sheaves to ensure rotor cannot freewheel. Failure to secure drive sheaves or disconnect power before servicing could result in death or serious injury.
5.1. Routine maintenance
Generally clean the unit. Maintain all surfaces as necessary treating any areas of corrosion.
Clean drain trays and repair any areas of corrosion.
Check all access doors for leakage and adjust locks if necessary. Replace any gasket materials if required, especially on filter modules.
45
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Assess the fan and motor bearings. Check for evidence of wear or overheating.
Check the air filter differential pressure. If the differential pressure is over than 350Pa, Clean or replace the pre & medium air filter. It makes refrigeration machine trouble.
5.2. After 48 hours of operation
Belts have acquired their permanent set. Readjust but do not over tighten.
5.3. Weekly
Observe unit weekly for any change in running condition and unusual noise.
5.4. Monthly
Clean or replace air filters if clogged or dirty; coat permanent filters with oil after cleaning; and, change bag filters when pressure drop is 250Pa.
Relubricate fan bearings if necessary.
Check all electrical connections and components for signs of overheating or arcing.
Check cleanliness of fin coil banks and heat exchangers. Clean as necessary with soft brush or vacuum.
Check fin coil banks and heat exchangers for signs of contamination. Disinfect as necessary.
Check fan belt tension and pulley/belt wear. Use tensioning tables.
Check drain trays for cleanliness. Wash with diluted disinfectant solution and rinse.
Clean unit casing and action any rust spots.
Where fitted, filter manometer gauges should be checked, topped up with manometer fluid and zeroed as necessary.
Check evaporating and condensing temperatures and suction and discharge pressures.
Check refrigerant charge level. If short of refrigerant check for leaks, repair and recharge.
Carry out routine leak test with suitable leak detector with special reference to all screwed joints and valves.
Check all pipe work for signs of chafing or damage.
Check compressor currents.
Check all capillary lines for signs of chafing or fatigue.
Check operation of safety pressure switches.
46
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
5.5. 6 Monthly
Check fan bearing grease line connections. Lines should be tight to the bearings.
Check bearing and motor bracket bolt torque and bearing setscrew torque.
Align fan and motor sheaves. Tighten sheave set screws to the proper torque.
Inspect and clean drain pans.
Tighten electrical connections.
Lubricate locks and hinges and adjust as required.
Check control damper blades for freedom of movement.
Clean and lubricate damper blade bearings.
Check operation of damper actuators and linkages through a complete operating cycle. Adjust as necessary.
5.6. Yearly
Inspect the unit casing for corrosion. If damage is found, clean and repaint the surface with a rust resistant primer.
Clean the fan wheels and fan shaft.
Inspect and clean drain pans.
Check damper linkages, set screws, and blade adjustment. Clean, but do not lubricate, the nylon damper rod bushings.
Clean damper operators.
Inspect electrical components and insulation.
Inspect wiring for damage.
Check all earth connections.
Tighten all electrical terminals within unit, motors, heaters, compressors etc.
Rotate the fan wheel and check for obstructions in the fan housing. The wheel should not rub on the fan housing. Adjust the center if necessary and tighten wheel set screws to the proper torque.
Lubricate motor bearings in accordance with motor manufacturer’s recommendations. This may only need to be done every 2 to 3 years.
Check condition of gasketing and insulation around unit, door and dampers.
Inspect coil and vacuum coil faces to remove dust.
Inspect for corrosion and treat with rust inhibitor prior to touching up with paint.
Examine flex connections for cracks or leaks. Repair or replace damaged material.
47
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd.
48
TROUBLE SHOOTING
6. TROUBLE SHOOTING The troubles occurring in operation is usually caused by a complex reason. Hence, when adjusting the operation or trouble examination, the related situation of the complex reason should be considered 6.1. GENERAL FAULTS Symptoms
Possible Causes
Checks & Corrections
Main or local isolation off
Check all isolators from mains to unit
Unit not operating
Unit not operating Power on
Fuse(s) failed
Check all fuses in mains Replace blown fuses after correcting fault
Unit not switched on
Switch on
External interlock fault
Investigate and correct
Notes
Check for loose wires
Do not link out without customers written consent Control MCB tripped Loose wire in control circuit
Re-set MCB after investigating and correcting fault Investigate and tighten wires
Fan motor overload tripped
Re-set after investigating power wiring and MCB. If it trips again, check motor and contactor
Disconnect motor from wiring to check winding
Motor runs but no volume
Belts broken/drive pulleys loose
Check drive belts and pulley security
Replace damaged belts
Water evident inside AHU casing
Insufficient depth of condensate trap
Check static differential pressure at component and rectify trap depth to suit
Ensure multiple drain traps are individually trapped. Drain traps must not be connected to each other.
Blocked filters affecting water seal in trap AHU performance may be above design creating high air velocity through cooling coil and moisture carry over
Change filters Re-check AHU performance and adjust as necessary
Check also for damper malfunction on air inlet Also ensure that the BMS control system, where fitted, has been set up and is operating correctly
Humidification system may be over humidifying resulting in excessive moisture
Investigate and if necessary re-commission the humidification system
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd.
49
TROUBLE SHOOTING
Motors constantly trip out and running at excessive current
System design over volume or pulleys incorrectly selected
Isolate unit and refer to Kiturami-Bumyang Limited for advice
6.2. REFRIGERATION SYSTEM FAULTS Symptoms
Possible Causes
Checks & Corrections
Notes
Compressor not operating
No power Internal klixon tripped Low pressure switch tripped Motor burn out
Fuses/Circuit breaker Loss of refrigerant Overload Too frequent cycling Loss of refrigerant Solenoid valve shut Low evaporator airflow Insulation check Replace compressor
Check for loose wires Disconnect compressor to check wiring
Noisy compressor
Loss of oil Liquid entering compressor Broken valves
Check for signs of leak Expansion valve stuck open Replace compressor
Low evaporating pressure
Low evaporator airflow Dirty evaporator Expansion valve fails to shut
Check and correct Clean Replace and re-set
Shortage of refrigerant Low head pressure
Leak on pipework or components Air on condenser coil too cold
High condensing pressure
Low condenser airflow Dirty condenser System over-charged Noncondensable gases in system
Condenser fan failed Clean Remove excess refrigerant Evacuate and re-charge system
Compressor short cycles
Shortage of refrigerant Blocked filter drier
Re-charge to design Replace
Low evaporating airflow
Check operation of fan Check air filters
Faulty expansion valve
Evaporating pressure too high
Broken or damaged compressor valves Expansion valve too far open Over-charged with refrigerant
Discard the excess refrigerant safely and in accordance with bylaws.
Replace and adjust superheat Replace compressor Readjust as necessary Reduce charge to correct level
Discard the excess refrigerant safely and in accordance with bylaws
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd. TROUBLE SHOOTING Compressor running hot
Broken suction or discharge valve Compressor ratio too high High suction temperature
Check and change as necessary Check setting of high and low pressure switches and check that all evaporator and condenser fans are operating properly Reduce suction temperature by TXV adjustment or provide desuperheating
6.3. PROBLEMS AND CAUSES ESPECIALLY IN CONDENSING PARTS(Compressor) PROBLEMS
PROBLEM CAUSES 1. Cut off of Control circuit fuse 2. Interlock relay open
3. Operate phase reversal protector 4. Improper DOCR setting ampere 5. Magnetic contactor failure Compressor does 6. Freezing prevention device cutoff not run 7. Improper thermistor temperature setting 8. Running of compressor protection device
REMEDY / CORRECTIVE AICTION 1. Check and replace 2. Check the chilled water pump and condenser fan motor 3. Correct the power supply wiring 4. Correct or replace 5. Replace 6. load at chilled water side 7. Correct 8. Unload on the evaporator side Charge the lubricant if the oil level is low 9. Repair
9. Motor failure 1. Low air flow of condenser. 1. Repair ·Condenser fan motor failure ·Condenser fan failure(but motor running) Sudden trip of the 2. Cleaning the cooling fins 2. Contaminated cooling fin of the compressor due to condenser high pressure 3. Expel the refrigerant 3. Refrigerant over charging 4. Open the valve 4. Discharge stop valve of the compressor closed 5. Purge the uncondensed gas 5. Air / Moisture in the refrigerant system. 1. Debris stuck in the strainer 2. Lack of the refrigerant 3. Leakage of the safety valve Sudden trip of the 4. Expansion valve freezing compressor due to low pressure. 5. Insufficient running of the expansion valve 6. No load on the evaporator
1. Clean 2. Additional charging after vacuum test 3. Repair or replace 4. Adjust the expansion valve, replace filter core 5. Adjust the temperature sensor or replace the valve 6. Loading
50
Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co., Ltd.
51
TROUBLE SHOOTING
The compressor does not stop automatically
1. Lack of the refrigerant 2. The solenoid valve not closed. 3. Improper temperature controller or control logic failure
High discharge pressure
1. Air/ uncondensed gas in the refrigerant 1. Purge the uncondensed gas system 2. Insufficient air flow of condenser 2. Check the condenser 3. Too much refrigerant 3. Refrigerant return 4. Contaminated fins of the condenser 4. Clean coil
Low discharge pressure
1. The liquid refrigerant inflows into the compressor (liquid compression) 2. A leak in the piping system of discharge part
1. Adjust the temperature sensor and replace if there is any leakage 2. Adjust or replace after a leak test
1. The expansion valve widely opened.
1. Check the temperature sensor position and adjust or replace. Adjust the opening of expansion valve 2. Reduce the load such as amount of cold wind or chilled water
High suction pressure
Low suction pressure
2. Over loaded
1. Clogging or debris stuck in the filter or drier 2. Lack of the refrigerant 3. Unable to adjust the expansion valve or a damaged temperature sensor 4. Expansion valve freezing or debris clogged
1. Charging the refrigerant after a leak test 2. Repair or replace 3. Adjust or replace after checking
1. Clean 2. Refrigerant charging 3. Adjust the opening size or replace damaged parts 4. Remove frosts or clean
1. Display “Under Repair” in front of the condensing unit to prevent an accident. 2. Pump down should be done before repair to prevent the refrigerant to be exposed to the air.
SARULLA GEOTHERMAL POWER PROJECT
2. SPLIT AIR CONDITIONERR (WALL TYPE, CEILING TYPE)
AR✴✴FSSSBWK AR✴✴JVFN✴✴ Series Series AR✴✴FSSSCUR Series
Penyejuk Udara Air Conditioner
Petunjuk danmanual Pemasangan userPenggunaan & installation
This manual is made with 100% recycled paper. Panduan ini dibuat dengan 100% kertas daur ulang.
imagine the possibilities Thank for atas purchasing this Samsung product. Terimayou kasih pembelian produk Samsung. To receive more complete service, please register your product at
www.samsung.com/register
SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 1
2/16/2015 10:28:31 AM
Fitur penyejuk udara baru Anda Pendinginan 2-langkah Fungsi pendinginan 2-langkah akan dengan cepat mendinginkan ruang untuk mencapai suhu yang diinginkan lalu akan menyesuaikan kecepatan kipas dan arah aliran udara secara otomatis untuk membantu Anda tetap nyaman dan menyegarkan.
Pendinginan yang cepat Jika Anda menginginkan udara yang kuat dan dingin, cukup pilih fungsi Fast (Cepat)! Itu akan membuat Anda mendapatkan udara terkuat!
Pendinginan yang nyaman Jika Anda menginginkan udara yang nyaman dan menyegarkan, fungsi Comfort (Nyaman) akan menyebarkan udara dingin langsung ke Anda, sehingga Anda dapat tetap nyaman.
Single User (Satu Pengguna) Gunakan fungsi Single User (Satu Pengguna) jika Anda sendirian di rumah. Fungsi Single User (Satu Pengguna) akan meminimalkan konsumsi energi dengan teknologi inverter dan mengurangi tagihan listrik Anda dengan menyesuaikan kapasitas operasi maksimum kompresor.
Filter yang Ringkas Tidak perlu melepas kisi-kisi sebelum memisahkan filter dari penyejuk udara! Karena itu, filter dapat dibersihkan dengan mudah, lebih sering! Pembersihan filter yang kerap akan mencegah debu masuk ke dalam produk atau tertimbun di filter.
Fungsi
(tidur nyenyak)
Fungsi (tidur nyenyak) akan memungkinkan Anda merasakan tidur di malam hari yang nyenyak dan lelap dengan menyesuaikan suhu, kecepatan kipas dan arah aliran udara.
Smart Install (Penginstalan Cerdas) Saat instalasi selesai, produk Anda akan memeriksa sendiri melalui operasi uji coba untuk memeriksa apakah telah diinstal dengan benar.
Instalasi yang Mudah Begitu mudah diinstal! Anda dapat dengan mudah menggantung produk di dinding dan menyambungkan pipa dan kabel dengan membuka penutupnya di bagian bawah produk. Kini Anda tidak perlu memiringkan produk untuk menyambung pipa dan kabel! Cara Membuang Produk Ini Dengan Benar (Limbah Peralatan Listrik & Elektronik) (Berlaku di negara-negara dengan sistem pengumpulan terpisah) Tanda ini pada produk, aksesori, atau literaturnya menunjukkan bahwa produk dan akseseori elektroniknya (mis. pengisi daya, headset, kabel USB) tidak boleh dibuang bersama limbah rumah tangga lainnya di akhir masa pakainya. Untuk mencegah kemungkinan bahaya pada lingkungan atau kesehatan manusia dari pembuangan limbah yang tidak terkontrol, pisahkan item ini dari jenis limbah lainnya dan daur ulang secara bertanggung jawab untuk mendorong penggunaan kembali sumber daya bahan secara berkelanjutan. Pengguna rumah tangga harus menghubungi pengecer tempat mereka membeli produk ini, atau dinas pemerintah setempat, untuk rincian tempat dan cara membawa item ini untuk didaur ulang secara ramah lingkungan. Pengguna bisnis harus menghubungi pemasok mereka dan memeriksa persyaratan dan ketentuan kontrak pembelian produk ini. Produk ini dan aksesori elektroniknya tidak boleh dicampur dengan limbah komersial lainnya untuk dibuang.
Indonesian-2 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 2
2/16/2015 10:28:32 AM
Daftar Isi Persiapan Tindakan pencegahan demi keselamatan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Periksa sebelum menggunakan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Fungsi dasar Memeriksa nama komponen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Memeriksa pengontrol jarak jauh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Fungsi dasar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Menyesuaikan arah aliran udara. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Pengaturan waktu Mengatur Timer Aktif/Mati . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Mode (tidur nyenyak) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Opsi Fungsi 2-Step cooling (Pendinginan 2 langkah). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Menggunakan fungsi Fast (Cepat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Menggunakan fungsi Comfort (Nyaman). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Menggunakan fungsi Single User (Satu Pengguna) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Menggunakan fungsi Quiet (Senyap). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Pengaturan Menggunakan fungsi Auto Clean (Pembersihan Otomatis) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Mengatur suara Bib . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Lain-lain Membersihkan penyejuk udara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Merawat penyejuk udara. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Pemecahan masalah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Instalasi Peringatan keselamatan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Memilih lokasi instalasi. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Aksesori. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Mengencangkan pelat instalasi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Membongkar/Merakit panel Penutup untuk instalasi unit dalam ruang . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Menyambungkan kabel rakitan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Menginstal dan menyambungkan pipa rakitan unit dalam ruang. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Evakuasi indoor unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Memotong atau memperpanjang pipa. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Menginstal dan menyambungkan selang penguras unit dalam ruang . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Mengubah arah selang penguras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Evakuasi pipa konektor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Melakukan uji kebocoran gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Mengencangkan unit dalam ruang di tempatnya. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Mengencangkan unit luar ruang di tempatnya . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Mode Smart Install (Penginstalan Cerdas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Operasi periksa dan uji coba terakhir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Prosedur pompa turun (saat melepas produk) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Cara menyambungkan kabel daya perpanjangan Anda. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Indonesian-3 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 3
2/16/2015 10:28:32 AM
Tindakan pencegahan demi keselamatan
Sebelum menggunakan AC baru, baca buku petunjuk ini dengan seksama untuk memastikan bahwa Anda tahu cara aman dan efisien mengoperasikan fitur yang luas dan fungsi alat baru Anda. Karena instruksi operasi berikut meliputi berbagai model, karakteristik AC anda mungkin berbeda sedikit dari yang dijelaskan dalam manual ini. Jika Anda memiliki pertanyaan, call center menghubungi Dealer Anda atau mencari bantuan dan informasi online di www.samsung.com. Simbol keselamatan yang penting dan pencegahannya:
PERINGATAN PERHATIAN
Bahaya atau praktek yang tidak aman yang dapat mengakibatkan cedera parah atau kematian. Bahaya atau praktek yang tidak aman yang dapat mengakibatkan cedera ringan atau kerusakan properti.
Ikuti Petunjuk. Matikan pasokan listrik Jangan dicoba. TIDAK membongkar. Pastikan mesin digrounding untuk mencegah sengatan listrik.
UNTUK INSTALASI
PERINGATAN
Hubungkan kabel daya ke stopkontak di dinding dengan spesifikasi sesuai kekuatan produk atau lebih tinggi dan menggunakan socket untuk alat ini saja. Selain itu, jangan menggunakan kabel sambungan. Memperpanjang kabel listrik dapat menyebabkan sengatan listrik atau kebakaran. Jangan menggunakan transformator listrik. Ini dapat menyebabkan sengatan listrik atau kebakaran. Jika kondisi tegangan /frekuensi arus pengenal berbeda, dapat menyebabkan kebakaran. Instalasi alat ini harus dilakukan oleh teknisi yang memenuhi syarat atau perusahaan jasa. Gagal melakukan demikian dapat berakibat sengatan listrik, api, ledakan, masalah dengan produk, atau cedera dan dapat juga membatalkan garansi pada produk yang diinstal. Instal Sakelar Isolasi di samping Penyejuk Udara (tapi bukan di panel Penyejuk Udara) dan pemutus sirkuit yang ditujukan untuk penyejuk udara. Kegagalan untuk melakukannya dapat menyebabkan sengatan listrik atau kebakaran. Perbaiki unit outdoor tegas sehingga bagian listrik dari unit outdoor tidak terkena. Indonesian-4 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 4
2/16/2015 10:28:32 AM
UNTUK INSTALASI
01 PENYIAPAN
Gagal melakukan demikian dapat berakibat sengatan listrik, api, ledakan, masalah dengan produk. Jangan memasang alat ini di dekat pemanas, bahan mudah terbakar. Jangan memasang alat ini di lokasi lembab, berminyak, atau berdebu , di lokasi yang terkena sinar matahari langsung dan air (air hujan). Jangan memasang alat ini di lokasi di mana gas dapat bocor. Hal ini dapat menyebabkan sengatan listrik atau kebakaran. Jangan pernah memasang unit outdoor di lokasi seperti pada dinding luar tinggi di mana itu bisa jatuh. Jika unit outdoor jatuh, mungkin mengakibatkan cedera, kematian atau kerusakan properti. Alat ini harus ground dengan benar. Jangan memasang ground ke pipa gas, pipa air plastik, atau saluran telepon. Kegagalan untuk melakukan hal tersebut dapat mengakibatkan sengatan listrik, api, dan kebakaran. Disarankan untuk menggunakan stop kontak yang terletak di bagian bawah (lantai).
PERHATIAN
Memasang mesin Anda pada tingkat dan lantai keras yang dapat menahan beratnya. Kegagalan untuk melakukannya dapat mengakibatkan getaran yang abnormal, kebisingan, atau masalahdengan produk. Memasang selang pembuangan dengan baik sehingga air dibuang dengan benar. Gagal melakukan demikian dapat berakibat melubernya air dan kerusakan properti. Hindari menambahkan buangan ke pipa limbah karena bau tidak sedap dapat timbul di masa mendatang. Saat memasang unit outdoor, pastikan dapat terhubung dengan selang pembuangan sehingga pembuangan dilakukan dengan benar. Air yang dihasilkan selama operasi pemanasan oleh unit outdoor dapat meluap dan mengakibatkan kerusakan harta benda. Secara khusus, di musim dingin, jika balok es jatuh, mungkin mengakibatkan cedera, kematian atau kerusakan properti.
UNTUK SUMBER LISTRIK
PERINGATAN
Apabila“circuit breaker”rusak, hubungi pusat servis terdekat. Jangan menarik atau membengkokkan kabel power. Jangan memutar atau mengikat kabel power, Jangan mengkaitkan kabel power dengan benda metalik, menaruh benda berat diatas kabel power, jangan memasukkan kabel power diantara Indonesian-5 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 5
2/16/2015 10:28:32 AM
Tindakan pencegahan demi keselamatan benda lainnya, atau memaksakan kabel power kedalam ruang diantara produk produk appliance lainnya. Hal ini dapat menyebabkan sengatan listrik atau kebakaran.
UNTUK SUMBER LISTRIK
PERHATIAN
Ketika tidak menggunakan pendingin udara untuk jangka waktu yang panjang atau pada saat ada guntur / badai petir, padamkan listrik pada pemutus sirkuit. Kegagalan untuk melakukannya dapat menyebabkan sengatan listrik atau kebakaran.
UNTUK DIGUNAKAN
PERINGATAN
Jika alat kebanjiran, silahkan hubungi pusat layanan terdekat. Kegagalan untuk melakukannya dapat menyebabkan sengatan listrik atau kebakaran. Jika produk appliance mengeluarkan bunyi aneh, bau terbakar atau asap, matikan pasokan listrik secepatnya dan hubungi pusat servis terdekat. Kegagalan untuk melakukannya dapat menyebabkan sengatan listrik atau kebakaran. Pada kasus kebocoran gas (seperti gas propana, gas LP, dll), ventilasikan ruangan secepatnya tanpa menyentuh kabel power. Jangan menyentuh appliance atau kabel power. Jangan gunakan kipas ventilasi. Sebuah percikan dapat menyebabkan ledakan atau kebakaran. Untuk menginstal ulang AC, silahkan hubungi pusat layanan terdekat. Kegagalan untuk melakukan hal ini dapat mengakibatkan masalah dengan produk, kebocoran air, sengatan listrik, atau kebakaran. Sebuah layanan pengiriman untuk produk tidak disediakan. Jika Anda menginstal ulang produk di lokasi lain, konstruksi tambahan beban dan biaya instalasi akan dikenakan. Terutama, ketika anda ingin menginstal produk di lokasi yang tidak biasa seperti di sebuah kawasan industri atau dekat pantai di mana ia terkena garam di udara, silahkan hubungi pusat layanan terdekat. Dilarang menyentuh “circuit breaker” dengan tangan basah. Hal ini dapat menyebabkan sengatan listrik. Jangan menghidupkan AC off dengan pemutus arus ketika sedang operasi. Mematikan AC dan kemudian menyalakannya kembali dengan “circuit breaker” dapat mengakibatkan percikan api, sengatan listrik, atau kebakaran. Indonesian-6 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 6
2/16/2015 10:28:32 AM
Jangan memasukkan jari atau benda asing ke stopkontak, jika penyejuk udara beroperasi. Berhati-hatilah khusus yang anak-anak tidak melukai diri sendiri dengan memasukkan jari mereka ke dalam produk. Jangan menyentuh pengarah aliran udara dengan tangan atau jari selama operasi pemanasan. Hal ini dapat menyebabkan sengatan listrik atau luka bakar. Jangan memasukkan jari atau benda asing ke dalam saluran udara masuk / outlet AC. Berhati-hatilah, khususnya anak-anak untuk tidak melukai diri sendiri dengan memasukkan jari mereka ke dalam unit. Jangan menarik AC dengan kekuatan yang berlebihan. Hal ini dapat mengakibatkan kebakaran, cedera, atau masalah dengan produk.
UNTUK DIGUNAKAN
01 PENYIAPAN
Setelah membongkar AC, menyimpan semua bahan kemasan baik dari jangkauan anak-anak, sebagai bahan kemasan dapat berbahaya bagi anak-anak. Jika seorang anak tempat tas di atas kepala, ia dapat menyebabkan mati lemas.
PERINGATAN
Jangan letakkan benda dekat unit luar yang memungkinkan anak-anak untuk naik ke mesin. Hal ini dapat mengakibatkan cedera serius pada anak-anak sendiri. Jangan gunakan pendingin udara untuk jangka waktu yang lama di lokasi berventilasi buruk atau orang lemah dekat. Karena ini mungkin berbahaya karena kekurangan oksigen, Buka jendela setidaknya satu jam sekali. Jika terdapat benda asing yang masuk kedalam appliance seperti misalnya air, harap langsung matikan pasokan listrik dan hubungi pusat servis terdekat. Kegagalan untuk melakukannya dapat menyebabkan sengatan listrik atau kebakaran. Jangan mencoba untuk memperbaiki, membongkar, atau memodi kasi alat sendiri. Jangan menggunakan sekering (seperti tembaga, kawat baja, dll) selain sekering standar. Kegagalan untuk melakukannya dapat menyebabkan sengatan listrik, kebakaran, masalah dengan produk, atau. Indonesian-7 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 7
2/16/2015 10:28:33 AM
Tindakan pencegahan demi keselamatan UNTUK DIGUNAKAN
PERHATIAN
Jangan letakkan benda atau perangkat di bawah unit indoor. Air yang menetes dari unit dalam ruang dapat berakibat api atau kerusakan properti. (peralatan listrik contoh). Periksa bahwa kerangka pemasangan unit outdoor tidak rusak minimal setahun sekali. Kegagalan untuk melakukan hal ini dapat mengakibatkan cedera, kematian atau kerusakan properti. Max saat ini diukur menurut standar IEC untuk keselamatan dan arus diukur berdasarkan standar ISO untuk efisiensi energi. Jangan berdiri di atas alat atau objek tempat (seperti cuci, lilin menyala, rokok dinyalakan, piring, bahan kimia, logam obyek, dll) pada alat. Hal ini dapat menyebabkan sengatan listrik, kebakaran, masalah dengan produk, atau cedera. Jangan mengoperasikan alat dengan tangan basah. Hal ini dapat menyebabkan sengatan listrik. Jangan menyemprot bahan volatile seperti insektisida ke permukaan alat. Selain itu berbahaya bagi manusia, juga dapat menyebabkan listrik, kebakaran shock atau masalah dengan produk. Jangan minum air dari AC. Air dapat membahayakan manusia. Jangan menerapkan dampak yang kuat untuk remote kontrol dan tidak membongkar remote kontrol. Jangan menyentuh pipa dihubungkan dengan produk. Hal ini dapat menyebabkan luka bakar atau cedera. Jangan gunakan pendingin udara untuk menjaga presisi peralatan, makanan, hewan, tumbuhan atau kosmetik, atau untuk lainnya tujuan yang tidak biasa. Hal ini dapat mengakibatkan kerusakan properti. Hindari langsung memperlihatkan manusia, hewan atau tanaman dari aliran udara dari pendingin udara untuk jangka waktu yang lama. Hal ini dapat mengakibatkan kerusakan pada manusia, hewan atau tanaman.
Indonesian-8 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 8
2/16/2015 10:28:33 AM
UNTUK MEMBERSIHKAN
01 PENYIAPAN
Alat ini tidak dimaksudkan untuk digunakan oleh orang (termasuk anakanak) dengan cacat fisik, indera atau kecakapan mental kemampuan, atau kurang pengalaman dan pengetahuan, kecuali jika mereka diberikan pengawasan atau pengarahan mengenai penggunaan alat oleh orang yang bertanggung jawab bagi keselamatan mereka. Anak kecil harus diawasi untuk memastikan mereka tidak bermain dengan alat ini.
PERINGATAN
Jangan membersihkan alat dengan menyemprotkan air langsung ke atasnya. Jangan gunakan bensin, thinner atau alkohol untuk membersihkan alat. Hal ini dapat mengakibatkan perubahan warna, deformasi, kerusakan, sengatan listrik atau kebakaran. Sebelum membersihkan atau melakukan proses perawatan, matikan pasokan listrik dan tunggu hingga kipás AC berhenti. Kegagalan untuk melakukannya dapat menyebabkan sengatan listrik atau kebakaran.
UNTUK MEMBERSIHKAN
PERINGATAN
Berhati-hatilah saat membersihkan permukaan penukar panas unit outdoor karena memiliki tepi tajam. Ini harus dilakukan oleh teknisi berkualifikasi harap hubungi petugas penginstal Anda atau pusat layanan. Jangan membersihkan bagian dalam AC sendiri. Untuk pembersihan di dalam alat, hubungi pusat layanan terdekat. Saat membersihkan saringan internal, mengacu pada deskripsi dalam 'Membersihkan AC' bagian. Kegagalan untuk melakukannya dapat mengakibatkan kerusakan, sengatan listrik atau kebakaran.
Indonesian-9 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 9
2/16/2015 10:28:33 AM
Periksa sebelum menggunakan Kisaran kerja
Tabel di bawah menunjukkan suhu dan kelembaban berkisar AC dapat dioperasikan dalam. Rujuk ke tabel untuk penggunaan yang efisien. Mode
SUHU RUANGAN
SUHU LUAR
KELEM BABAN
Pendinginan
16 ˚C~32 ˚C
16 ˚C~46 ˚C
Relative humidity 80% atau less
Dry
18 ˚C~32 ˚C
16 ˚C~46 ˚C
-
Jika AC beroperasi dalam mode pendinginan untuk jangka waktu yang panjang di wilayah kelembaban tinggi, embun dapat
terbentuk.
Memelihara AC Anda Proteksi internal melalui sistem kontrol unit Proteksi internal beroperasi jika kesalahan internal terjadi di AC.
TIPE
PENJELASAN
Terhadap udara dingin
Kipas bagian dalam akanberhenti untuk mencegah udara dingin sewaktu pompa panas (heat pump) sedang beroperasi.
Proses pemanasan (defrost) siklus
Kipas internal akan dimatikan untuk melawan udara dingin ketika heat pump bekerja. Bilah aliran udara vertikal akan ditutup selama siklus anti beku dan itu akan terbuka lagi selama operasi pemanasan setelah siklus anti beku.
Proteksi Kompresor
AC tidak langsung beroperasi untuk melindungi kompresor di unit outdoor setelah unit dinyalakan.
• J ika pompa panas yang beroperasi di modus Heat, Proses pemanasan (defrost) siklus ditekan untuk menghilangkan es dari unit outdoor yang mungkin telah disimpan pada suhu rendah. Kipas internal dimatikan secara otomatis dan restart hanya setelah siklus proses pemanasan (defrost) selesai.
Smart install (Penginstalan cerdas) Melalui fungsi Smart install (Penginstalan cerdas), teknisi penginstal dapat memeriksa apakah
instalasi dilakukan dengan benar.
Jika instalasi tidak dilakukan dengan benar, indikator kesalahan akan menyala di tampilan unit
dalam ruang. Karena itu pengguna akan tahu apakah instalasi dilakukan dengan benar atau tidak.
Indonesian-10 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 10
2/16/2015 10:28:34 AM
Memeriksa nama komponen AC Anda mungkin terlihat sedikit berbeda dari ilustrasi yang ditampilkan di atas tergantung pada model anda.
Bagian utama
Filter Udara
02 FUNGSI DASAR
Sensor Suhu Ruangan
Udara Masuk
Pengarah aliran udara (Ke atas dan ke bawah)
Pengarah aliran udara (Ke kiri dan ke kanan)
Tampilan
Indikator Operasi Indikator Timer/Auto clean Tombol Power (Daya) / Penerima pengendali jarak jauh
Indikator Single User (Satu Pengguna)
Indonesian-11 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 11
2/16/2015 10:28:35 AM
Memeriksa pengontrol jarak jauh • Arahkan remote control ke ara penerima sinyal di unit indoor. • Ketika Anda menekan tombol di remote control, Anda akan mendengar suara bib dari unit indoor dan indikator transmisi ( ) ditampilkan pada layar remote control.
Tombol pengendali jarak jauh
Ayunan udara vertikal
Mengaktifkan/Mematikan gerakan bilah aliran udara vertikal secara otomatis
Daya
Mode
Hidupkan/matikan AC
Temp (Suhu) + –
Fan (Kipas)
Menambah/Mengurangi suhu sebesar 1 ˚C.
Atur salah satu dari 5 mode pengoperasian
Mengatur kecepatan kipas
Single User (Satu Pengguna)
Options (Opsi)
Aktifkan/nonaktifkan fungsi Single User (Satu Pengguna) yang mengurangi penggunaan energi.
Memilih opsi selama operasi
Timer (Pengatur Waktu) Memilih opsi Timer
Settings (Pengaturan) Memilih pengaturan
SET
Arah < >
Mengatur/Membatalkan opsi atau pengaturan yang telah dipilih
Bergerak melewati menu Timer, Opsi, atau Pengaturan untuk melakukan pilihan
CATATAN
• Jika ingin membatalkan opsi atau pengaturan yang telah dilakukan, tekan lagi tombol Options (Opsi) atau Settings (Pengaturan), lalu tindakan yang terakhir dilakukan akan berkedip dan Anda dapat membatalkannya dengan mudah dengan menekan tombol SET ketika tindakan itu berkedip.
Indonesian-12 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 12
2/16/2015 10:28:36 AM
Memeriksa pengontrol jarak jauh Layar remote control Indikator transmisi Peringatan baterai rendah daya
Indikator pengaturan suhu/ waktu (untuk opsi Timer)
Indikator kecepatan kipas
indikator good'sleep
Indikator ayunan angin Vertikal
02 FUNGSI DASAR
Indikator mode operasi
Indikator opsi
Indikator pengaturan
HATI-HATI
• P Pastikan astikan remote control tidak terkena air. control tidak terkena air. • Fungsi berikut ditampilkan pada layar remote control tetapi tidak didukung pada model ini. - Heat mode /Virus Doctor(
) / d'light Cool / Usage / Filter Reset (Atur ulang Filter) / Display.
• S aat menonaktifkan dan mengaktifkan remote control, Timer, Options (Timer, Pilihan), dan Settings (Pengaturan) yang ditetapkan sebelum penonaktifan remote control akan dibatalkan. Namun, arah kipas tidak akan berubah.
Peringatan Baterai Rendah Daya
Memasang baterai
Ketika daya baterai hampir habis, ( ) ditampilkan pada layar remote control. Ketika ikon itu ditampilkan, gantilah baterainya. Remote control membutuhkan dua baterai 1,5 V AAA.
1. Tekan tuas seperti tanda panah di sisi belakang remote control dan tarik ke atas. 2. Pasang dua baterai AAA.
Menyimpan remote control
3. Pasang penutup dengan memasukkannya ke posisi semula.
Ketika remote control tidak digunakan dalam waktu lama, keluarkan baterai dari dalam remote control dan simpan.
CATATAN
Periksa dan cocokkan tanda “+” dan “-”. Pastikan Anda telah memasang baterai dengan posisi yang benar.
Anda akan mendengar suara klik ketika penutup terkunci dengan benar.
• S inyal mungkin tidak diterima dengan baik jika lampu neon seperti lampu neon inverter beroperasi di dalam ruang yang sama. • Jika produk listrik lain beroperasi dengan remote control, hubungi pusat pelanggan terdekat. Cara membuang baterai di dalam produk ini dengan benar
(Berlaku di negara-negara dengan sistem pengumpulan terpisah) Tanda ini pada baterai, buku petunjuk, atau kemasan menunjukkan bahwa baterai di dalam produk tidak boleh dibuang bersama limbah rumah tangga lainnya di akhir masa pakainya. Apabila ditandai, simbol kimia Hg, Cd atau Pb menunjukkan bahwa baterai mengandung merkuri, kadmium, atau timbal di atas tingkat referensi dalam Petunjuk EC 2006/66. Jika baterai tidak dibuang dengan benar, zat tersebut dapat membahayakan kesehatan manusia atau lingkungan. Untuk melindungi sumber daya alam dan mendorong penggunaan kembali bahan, pisahkan baterai dari jenis limbah lainnnya dan daur ulang melalui sistem pengembalian baterai gratis setempat Anda.
Indonesian-13 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 13
2/16/2015 10:28:37 AM
Fungsi dasar Pengoperasian dasar merupakan suatu mode pengoperasian yang dapat dipilih dengan menekan tombol Mode.
Auto (Otomatis) Pada mode Auto (Otomatis), AC akan secara otomatis mengatur suhu dan kecepatan kipas tergantung pada suhu ruangan.
Cool (Dingin) Pada mode Cool (Dingin), AC itu akan menyejukkan ruangan Anda. Anda dapat mengatur suhu dan kecepatan kipas untuk merasakan udara yang lebih dingin di tengah musim yang panas. • Apabila suhu luar ruangan lebih tinggi daripada suhu yang ditetapkan pada unit dalam-ruangan, mungkin diperlukan waktu untuk menurunkan suhu dalam ruangan ke tingkat yang diinginkan. • Mode Quiet (Senyap) membuat tenang noise pada saat mengoperasikan unit indoor dalam modus Cool.
Dry (Kering) AC pada mode Dry (Kering) bertindak sebagai dehumidifier (penghilang kelembapan) dengan menyerap uap air dari udara di dalam ruangan. Mode Dry (Kering) membuat udara terasa menyegarkan di tengah cuaca yang lembap. Untuk mengaktifkan mode Dry (Kering), aturlah suhu di remote control supaya lebih rendah daripada suhu di dalam ruangan.
Fan (Kipas) Mode Fan (Kipas) dapat dipilih untuk menyirkulasikan udara di dalam ruangan. Mode Fan (Kipas) bermanfaat untuk menyegarkan kembali udara yang sumpek di dalam ruangan.
Heat AC memanaskan udara sama baiknya dengan mendinginkan udara. Hangatkan ruangan anda dengan alat serbaguna ini di musim dingin. • Fan mungkin tidak beroperasi selama sekitar 3 ~ 5 menit di awal untuk mencegah ledakan dingin, pada saat AC dalam proses nyala. • Mode Quiet (Senyap) membuat kebisingan menjadi tenang pada saat mengoperasikan unit indoor dalam mode Heat. • Karena AC memanaskan ruangan dengan mengambil energi panas dari udara luar, kapasitas pemanasan dapat menurun ketika suhu di luar ruangan sangat rendah. Gunakan alat pemanas tambahan dalam kombinasi dengan penyejuk udara jika Anda merasa AC nya kurang panas.
CATATAN
• Hanya Pemanasan model memiliki model fungsi : AR✴✴JS✴✴ seri
Indonesian-14 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 14
2/16/2015 10:28:37 AM
Fungsi dasar untuk menghidupkan AC.
Tekan tombol
untuk mengatur mode pengoperasian.
02 FUNGSI DASAR
Tekan tombol
• Setiap kali Anda menekan tombol Mode, mode akan berubah dalam urutan Auto, Cool, Dry, Fan dan Heat.
Tekan tombol Auto (Otomatis)
Anda dapat menyesuaikan suhu yang ditetapkan dengan langkah sebesar 1 °C dalam rentang 16 °C~30 °C.
Cool (Dingin)
Anda dapat menyesuaikan suhu yang ditetapkan dengan langkah sebesar 1 °C dalam rentang 16 °C~30 °C.
Dry (Kering)
Anda dapat menyesuaikan suhu yang ditetapkan dengan langkah sebesar 1 °C dalam rentang 18 °C~30 °C.
Fan (Kipas)
Penyesuaian suhu tidak dapat dilakukan.
Heat (Panas)
Anda dapat mengatur suhu yang diinginkan oleh 1 °C dalam kisaran 16 °C~30 °C.
Tekan tombol
Auto (Otomatis) Cool (Dingin) Dry (Kering) Fan (Kipas) Heat (Panas)
CATATAN
untuk menyesuaikan suhu.
untuk mengatur kecepatan kipas yang diinginkan.
(Otomatis) (Otomatis),
(Rendah),
(Sedang),
(Tinggi),
(Turbo)
(Otomatis) (Rendah),
(Sedang),
(Otomatis),
(Rendah),
(Tinggi), (Sedang),
(Turbo) (Tinggi),
(Turbo)
• Mode Dry hanya tersedia pada mode pendinginan.
Indonesian-15 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 15
2/16/2015 10:28:38 AM
Menyesuaikan arah aliran udara Aliran udara vertikal Fungsi ini memungkinkan Anda mengatur arah aliran udara vertikal. Tekan tombol
untuk mengarahkan bilah aliran udara secara vertikal. ffUntuk menjaga arah aliran udara dengan arah yang konstan, tekan lagi tombol . Bilah aliran udara akan berhenti bergerak. ffJika Anda menyesuaikan bilah aliran udara vertikal secara manual, bilah mungkin tidak sepenuhnya menutup saat Anda menonaktifkan penyejuk udara. • M enyesuaikan arah aliran udara tidak tersedia dalam mode good'sleep (tidur nyenyak) saat sedang berada dalam mode cool (dingin). • Tapi, Anda dapat menyesuaikan arah aliran udara dalam mode good'sleep (tidur nyenyak) saat sedang berada di mode heat (panas).
Layar remote control
Aliran udara horizontal Patikan satu tuas pin pengarah yang menempel keluar dari pengarah aliran udara tidak rusak. pada posisi yang Anda inginkan.
• U ntuk menghindari risiko cedera diri, penyesuaian arah aliran udara horizontal harus di lakukan ketika unit telah di matikan sepenuhnya. Ada potensi risiko cedera diri ketika unit salah dalam penanganannya.
Indonesian-16 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 16
2/16/2015 10:28:39 AM
Mengatur Timer Aktif/Mati Mengatur Timer Aktif Ketika AC dalam keadaan mati;
Batal
ffTekan tombol Timer pilih (On) (Aktif) tekan tombol tekan tombol SET (ATUR). atur timer ke ffTekan tombol Daya ( ).
03 PENGATURAN WAKTU
1. Tekan tombol Timer untuk memilih (On) (Aktif). - Indikator (On) akan terus berkedip dan Anda dapat mengatur waktu. 2. Tekan tombol , untuk mengatur waktu. - Anda dapat mengatur waktu dalam satuan setengah jam mulai dari 30 menit (0,5 pada layar) ~ 3 jam dan satuan jam mulai dari 3~24 jam. - Waktu dapat diatur mulai dari 30 menit hingga maksimum 24 jam. 3. Tekan tombol SET untuk menyelesaikan pengaturan timer Aktif. - Indikator (On) dan waktu timer yang diatur akan ditampilkan pada layar remote control dan indikator Timer ( ) akan ditampilkan pada layar unit indoor. - Pengaturan timer On (Aktif) akan dibatalkan jika Anda tidak menekan tombol SET dalam waktu 10 detik setelah mengatur waktu. Karenanya, periksa indikator (On) di layar remote control dan indikator Timer ( ) pada layar unit indoor. atau
Layar remote control
Tersedia tambahan pilihan Pada mode On/Off timer (Sewaktu remote control sedang menyala) Anda dapat memilih dari Auto/Cool/Dry/Fan/Heat.
Anda dapat mengatur suhu dalam mode Auto/Cool/Dry/Heat.
Anda dapat menyesuaikan kecepatan kipas di Cool/Fan/Heat.
CATATAN
• Setelah pengaturan On Timer (Timer Aktif) selesai, status yang ditetapkan akan ditampilkan selama 3 detik, dan hanya indikator (On) (Aktif) yang akan tetap tampil pada remote control. • Jika Anda menekan tombol Daya pada unit indoor setelah mengatur timer Aktif dari remote control, indikator Timer di layar unit indoor akan menghilang dan timer Aktif akan dibatalkan. Walaupun timer Aktif dibatalkan, indikator (On) pada remote control akan tetap ditampilkan. • Ketika timer Aktif diatur ketika AC dalam keadaan mati, indikator Timer ( ) akan ditampilkan dan tetap aktif sampai timer Aktif dihidupkan.
Indonesian-17 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 17
2/16/2015 10:28:41 AM
Mengaktifkan/Menonaktifkan timer Mengatur timer Mati Ketika AC dalam keadaan hidup; 1. Tekan tombol Timer untuk memilih (Off) (Tidak Aktif). - Indikator (Off) akan terus berkedip dan Anda dapat mengatur waktu. 2. Tekan tombol , untuk mengatur waktu. - Anda dapat mengatur waktu dalam satuan setengah jam mulai dari 30 menit (0,5 pada layar) ~ 3 jam dan satuan jam mulai dari 3~24 jam. - Waktu dapat diatur mulai dari 30 menit hingga maksimum 24 jam. 3. Tekan tombol SET untuk menyelesaikan pengaturan timer Mati. - Indikator (Off) dan waktu timer yang diatur akan ditampilkan pada layar remote control dan indikator Timer ( ) akan ditampilkan pada layar unit indoor. - Pengaturan timer Off (Mati) akan dibatalkan jika Anda tidak menekan tombol SET dalam waktu 10 detik setelah mengatur waktu. Karenanya, periksa indikator (Off) di layar remote control dan indikator Timer ( ) pada layar unit indoor. Batal
ffTekan tombol Timer pilih (Off) (Tidak Aktif) tekan tombol atau atur timer ke tekan tombol SET (ATUR). ffTekan tombol Daya (
Layar remote control
CATATAN
).
• Timer Mati mungkin tidak berfungsi bergantung pada status On/Off unit indoor dan status On/Off di indikator pada layar remote control • Ketika timer Aktif dan fungsi diatur secara bersamaan, AC hanya akan menjalankan fungsi yang diatur belakangan. • Setelah mengatur timer, waktu yang ditentukan akan ditampilkan selama 3 detik sebelum menghilang • Apabila fungsi Timer digunakan pada mode pemanasan, AC akan bekerja sesuai mode sebelumnya. (AR✴✴JV✴✴ series)
Menggabungkan Timer Aktif dan Timer Mati Ketika AC dalam keadaan mati
Ketika AC dalam keadaan hidup
Ketika waktu yang diatur pada timer Aktif lebih singkat daripada timer Mati
Ketika waktu yang diatur pada timer Aktif lebih panjang daripada timer Mati
Contoh) timer Aktif: 3 jam, timer Mati: 5 jam Contoh) timer Aktif: 3 jam, timer Mati: 1 Jam - AC akan diaktifkan setelah 3 jam sejak saat Anda mengatur - AC akan dimatikan setelah 1 jam sejak saat Anda mengatur timer itu dan AC akan tetap menyala selama 2 jam lalu timer itu dan diaktikan setelah 2 jam sejak saat dimatikan. dimatikan secara otomatis.
• Waktu yang diatur untuk timer Aktif dan timer Mati harus berbeda. CATATAN
Indonesian-18 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 18
2/16/2015 10:28:42 AM
Mode
(tidur nyenyak)
Untuk tidur yang nyaman, AC akan beroperasi dalam 3 tahapan dalam urutan tahap Fall asleep (Tertidur) Sound sleep (Tidur pulas) Wake up (Bangun tidur). Ketika AC beroperasi dalam mode Cool (Dingin)/Heat (Panas).
- Pengaturan waktu default untuk mode (tidur nyenyak) adalah 8 jam. 3. Tekan tombol SET untuk menyelesaikan pengaturan mode (tidur nyenyak). - Indikator ( ) dan waktu yang diatur untuk mode (tidur nyenyak) akan ditampilkan pada layar remote control. - Indikator timer ( ) akan ditampilkan pada layar unit indoor. - Pengaturan mode akan dibatalkan jika Anda tidak menekan tombol SET dalam waktu 10 detik setelah mengatur waktu. Karenanya, periksa indikator ( ) di layar remote control dan indikator Timer ( ) pada layar unit indoor. Batal
ffTekan tombol Timer (Timer) pilih ( ) tekan tombol atur timer ke tekan tombol SET (ATUR).
03 PENGATURAN WAKTU
1. Tekan tombol Timer untuk memilih ( ) (good'sleep). - Indikator ( ) akan terus berkedip dan Anda dapat mengatur waktunya. 2. Tekan tombol , untuk mengatur waktu. - Anda dapat mengatur waktu dalam satuan setengah jam mulai dari 30 menit (0,5 pada layar) ~ 3 jam dan satuan jam mulai dari 3~12 jam. - Waktu dapat diatur mulai dari 30 menit hingga maksimum 12 jam.
atau
Layar remote control
Opsi tambahan tersedia pada mode Anda dapat menyesuaikan suhu yang ditetapkan dengan langkah sebesar 1 °C dalam rentang 16 °C~30 °C. Kecepatan kipas akan disesuaikan secara otomatis sesuai dengan mode . Mode pada saat operasi pemanasan sedang berjalan, anda Tetapi, apabila anda memilih dapat tetap dapat menyesuaikan kecepatan angin. Saat mode (tidur nyenyak) diaktifkan. Dalam mode Cool (Dingin): Arah aliran udara akan disesuaikan secara otomatis. Dalam mode Heat (Panas): Menyesuaikan arah aliran udara tersedia. Perubahan suhu dan kecepatan kipas pada mode
(tidur nyenyak)
• Fall asleep (Tertidur): Membantu Anda tidur dengan menurunkan suhu. • Sound sleep (Tidur pulas): Merelaksasikan tubuh Anda dan meningkatkan suhu badan Anda sedikit. • Wake up (Bangun tidur): Membangunkan Anda dari tidur nyenyak di tengah udara yang nyaman dan menyegarkan Anda.
CATATAN
• Suhu pengaturan yang disarankan adalah antara 25 °C ~ 27 °C untuk pendinginan dan 21 ˚C~23 ˚C untuk pemanasan. • Jika suhu diatur terlalu rendah, Anda dapat merasa kedinginan ketika tidur dan terkena flu. • Jam operasi optimal untuk mode adalah 8 jam. Karenanya, jika waktu yang diatur terlalu pendek atau terlalu panjang, Anda mungkin tidak merasa senyaman yang diharapkan. • Jika mode diatur lebih dari 5 jam, tahapan Wake up (Bangun tidur) akan dimulai ketika tersisa 1 jam di waktu pengoperasian dan AC akan dihentikan secara otomatis. • Ketika timer Aktif dan fungsi (tidur nyenyak) diatur secara bersamaan, AC hanya akan menjalankan fungsi yang diatur belakangan.
Indonesian-19 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 19
2/16/2015 10:28:44 AM
Fungsi 2-Step cooling (Pendinginan 2 langkah) Fungsi 2-Step Cooling (Pendinginan 2 Langkah) akan mengatur AC untuk menyejukkan ruangan secara cepat untuk mencapai suhu yang diatur ketika suhu dalam ruangan lebih tinggi daripada suhu yang diatur, lalu AC akan secara otomatis beroperasi pada mode Dry (Kering) ketika suhu dalam ruangan mencapai suhu yang diatur.
Ketika AC beroperasi dalam mode Cool (Dingin). 1. Tekan tombol Options (Opsi). 2. Tekan tombol , atau (Options)(Pilihan) hingga indikator (2-Step) (2 Langkah) mulai berkedip. 3. Tekan tombol SET untuk mengatur fungsi 2-Step Cooling (Pendinginan 2 Langkah). - (2-Step) (2 Langkah) indikator (2-Step) (2 Langkah) akan ditampilkan di layar remote control dan fungsi 2-Step Cooling (Pendinginan 2 Langkah) akan dijalankan. Batal
ffTekan tombol Options (Pilihan) tekan tombol , atau Options (Pilihan) untuk membuat indikator (2-Step) (2 Langkah) berkedip, lalu tekan tombol SET (ATUR).
Layar remote control
Indonesian-20 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 20
2/16/2015 10:28:44 AM
Menggunakan fungsi Fast (Cepat)
Anda dapat mengatur fungsi Fast (Cepat) untuk memberikan pendinginan/pemanasan cepat.
Ketika AC beroperasi dalam mode Cool (Dingin)/Heat (Panas).
Batal
CATATAN
04 OPSI
1. Tekan tombol Options (Opsi). 2. Tekan tombol , atau (Options) (Pilihan) hingga indikator (Fast) (Cepat) mulai berkedip. 3. Tekan tombol SET untuk mengatur fungsi Fast (Cepat). - (Fast) (Cepat) Indikator (Fast) (Cepat) akan ditampilkan pada layar remote control dan fungsi Fast (Cepat) akan dijalankan. ffTekan tombol Options (Pilihan) tekan tombol , atau Options (Pilihan) untuk membuat indikator (Fast) (Cepat) berkedip, lalu tekan tombol SET (ATUR). • Fungsi Fast hanya tersedia pada mode Cool (Dingin)/Heat (Panas). • Ayunan udara Vertikal dapat disesuaikan. • Suhu yang diatur dan kecepatan kipas tidak dapat disesuaikan. • Jika fungsi Fast (Cepat) dipilih ketika fungsi 2-Step Cooling (Pendinginan 2 Langkah)/Comfort (Nyaman)/Single user (Satu Pengguna)/Quiet (Hening)/ sedang aktif, fungsi terkait akan dibatalkan.
Layar remote control
Menggunakan fungsi Comfort (Nyaman) Anda dapat mengatur fungsi Comfort (Nyaman) untuk memberikan pendinginan/pemanasan ringan.
Ketika AC beroperasi dalam mode Cool (Dingin)/Heat (Panas). 1. Tekan tombol Options (Opsi). 2. Tekan tombol , atau (Options) (Pilihan) hingga indikator (Comfort) (Nyaman) mulai berkedip. 3. Tekan tombol SET untuk mengatur fungsi Comfort (Nyaman). - (Confort) (Nyaman) Indikator (Comfort) (Nyaman) akan ditampilkan pada layar remote control dan fungsi Comfort (Nyaman) akan dijalankan. Batal
CATATAN
Layar remote control
ffTekan tombol Options (Pilihan) tekan tombol , atau Options (Pilihan) untuk membuat indikator (Comfort) (Nyaman) berkedip, lalu tekan tombol SET (ATUR). • Fungsi Comfort (Nyaman) hanya tersedia pada mode Cool (Dingin)/ Heat (Panas). • Ayunan udara Vertikal dapat disesuaikan. • Suhu yang diatur dapat disesuaikan, tetapi kecepatan kipas tidak dapat disesuaikan. • Jika fungsi Comfort (Nyaman) dipilih ketika fungsi 2-Step Cooling (Pendinginan 2 Langkah)/ Fast (Cepat)/Single user (Satu Pengguna)/Quiet (Hening)/ sedang aktif, fungsi terkait akan dibatalkan.
Indonesian-21 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 21
2/16/2015 10:28:47 AM
Menggunakan fungsi Single user (Satu Pengguna) Fungsi ini akan mengurangi penggunaan energi ketika AC beroperasi dalam mode Cool (Dingin)/Heat (Panas).
Ketika AC beroperasi dalam mode Cool (Dingin)/Heat (Panas). 1. Tekan tombol Single user (Satu pengguna). - Indikator (Singel user) (Satu pengguna) akan ditampilkan di layar remote control. Kemudian, akan ditampilkan pada bagian indikator suhu yang diatur selama beberapa detik dan fungsi Single user (Satu Pengguna) and dimulai. - Ketika fungsi Single user (Satu Pengguna) dalam keadaan aktif, ayunan udara vertikal akan diaktifkan secara otomatis. - Jika suhu yang diatur saat ini lebih rendah dari 24 °C dalam mode Cool (Dingin), itu akan otomatis dinaikkan menjadi 24 °C. Batal
CATATAN
Layar remote control
ffTekan tombol Single User (Satu Pengguna) sekali lagi. • Fungsi Single user (Satu Pengguna) hanya tersedia pada mode Cool (Dingin)/Heat (Panas). • Jika fungsi Single user (Satu Pengguna) dipilih ketika fungsi 2-Step Cooling (Pendinginan 2 Langkah)/Fast (Cepat)/Comfort (Nyaman) /Quiet (Hening)/ sedang aktif, fungsi terkait akan dibatalkan. • Ayunan udara vertikal akan tetap aktif bahkan setelah fungsi Single user (Satu Pengguna) dibatalkan. • Pilih atau batalkan fungsi Single User (Satu Pengguna) dengan tombol Options (Pilihan). - Tekan tombol Options (Pilihan) tekan tombol , atau Options (Pillihan) untuk membuat indikator (Single user) (Satu pengguna) berkedip, lalu tekan tombol SET (ATUR).
Opsi tambahan tersedia pada fungsi Single user (Satu Pengguna) Anda dapat menyesuaikan suhu yang ditetapkan dengan langkah sebesar 1 °C dalam rentang 24 °C~30 °C untuk pendinginan dan 16 ˚C~30 ˚C untuk pemanasan.
(Otomatis),
(Rendah),
(Sedang),
(Tinggi),
(Turbo) dapat dipilih.
Ayunan udara Vertikal dapat dipilih.
Indonesian-22 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 22
2/16/2015 10:28:48 AM
Menggunakan fungsi Quiet (Hening)
Anda dapat mengurangi deru/suara yang dikeluarkan oleh unit indoor selama mode Cool (Dingin)/Heat (Panas).
Ketika AC beroperasi dalam mode Cool (Dingin)/Heat (Panas).
Batal
04 OPSI
1. Tekan tombol Options (Opsi). 2. Tekan tombol , atau (Options) (Pilihan) hingga indikator (Quiet) (Hening) mulai berkedip. 3. Tekan tombol SET untuk mengatur fungsi Quiet (Hening). - (Quiet) (Hening) Indikator (Quiet) (Hening) akan ditampilkan di layar remote control dan fungsi Quiet (Hening) akan dijalankan. ffTekan tombol Options (Pilihan) tekan tombol , atau Options (Pilihan) untuk membuat indikator (Quiet) (Hening) berkedip, lalu tekan tombol SET (ATUR).
Opsi tambahan tersedia pada fungsi Quiet (Hening)
Anda dapat menyesuaikan suhu yang ditetapkan dengan langkah sebesar 1 °C dalam rentang 16 °C~30 °C.
Kecepatan kipas diatur ke
Layar remote control
(Otomatis).
Ayunan udara Vertikal dapat dipilih.
CATATAN
• Fungsi Quiet (Hening) hanya tersedia pada mode Cool (Dingin)/Heat (Panas). • Jika fungsi Quiet (Hening) dipilih ketika fungsi 2-Step Cooling (Pendinginan 2 Langkah)/Fast (Cepat)/Comfort (Nyaman)/Single user (Satu Pengguna)/ sedang aktif, fungsi terkait akan dibatalkan.
Indonesian-23 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 23
2/16/2015 10:28:50 AM
Menggunakan fungsi Auto clean (Pembersihan otomatis) Fungsi Auto clean akan meminimalkan kelembapan di dalam unit indoor. Aktifkan fungsi ini untuk membantu memberi Anda udara bersih.
Ketika AC beroperasi; 1. Tekan tombol Settings (Pengaturan). 2. Tekan tombol , atau (Settings) (Pengaturan) hingga indikator (Clean) (Bersih) mulai berkedip. 3. Tekan tombol SET untuk mengatur fungsi Auto clean. - 3 detik setelah mengatur fungsi Auto clean (Pembersihan otomatis), indikator (Clean) (Bersih) di layar remote control akan menghilang dan indikator Timer ( ) akan mengaktifkan tampilan unit dalam ruangan. Fungsi Auto clean akan diaktifkan setelah AC berhenti beroperasi. - Durasi fungsi Auto clean dapat bervariasi bergantung pada mode operasi yang digunakan sebelumnya. Mode Auto(cool), Cool, Dry: 30 menit Mode Auto(heat), Heat, Fan: 15 meni Batal
Tampilan unit indoor CATATAN
ffTekan tombol Settings (Pengaturan) tekan tombol , atau Settings (Pengaturan) untuk membuat indikator (Clean) (Bersih) berkedip, lalu tekan tombol SET (ATUR). • Ketika mode operasi sudah diatur selama fungsi Auto clean diaktifkan, AC akan beroperasi pada mode operasi yang dipilih dan fungsi Auto clean akan diaktifkan kembali ketika operasi itu berhenti. • Selama fungsi auto clean (pembersihan otomatis), kipas dalam ruang akan terus berputar dan bilah aliran udara akan tetap terbuka untuk • Lampu mode auto Clean akan menyala
Mengatur suara Bib Suara bib dari unit indoor dapat dimatikan. 1. Tekan tombol Settings (Pengaturan). 2. Tekan tombol , atau (Settings) (Pengaturan) hingga indikator (Beep) (Bip) mulai berkedip. 3. Tekan tombol SET untuk mematikan suara bip. - 3 detik setelah mengatur fungsi Beep sound (Bunyi bip), indikator (Beep) (Bip) di layar remote control akan menghilang dan fungsi Beep sound (Suara bip) akan dijalankan.
Indonesian-24 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 24
2/16/2015 10:28:52 AM
Membersihkan penyejuk udara PERHATIAN
• Pastikan listrik mati dan tercabut dari sumber kontak listrik ketika membersihkan mesin pengatur suhu udara. 06 LAIN-LAIN
Membersihkan penyejuk udara
Bersihkan produk dengan kain lembab hangat.
Bersihkan debu yang menumpuk di celah produk dengan sikat lembut.
• H ubungi pusat layanan saat Anda membersihkan penukar panas pada indoor unit karena perlu dibongkar.
PERHATIAN
• Jangan bersihkan tampilan menggunakan deterjen alkalin. • Jangan gunakan asam sulfat, asam hidroklorida, pelarut organik (seperti thinner, minyak tanah dan aseton dsb.) untuk membersihkan permukaan produk atau memasang stiker di situ. Kesemuanya itu dapat merusak permukaan penyejuk udara.
Membersihkan penukar panas outdoor unit
Ketika debu terakumulasi pada penukar panas, dapat menurunkan kinerja pendingin. Oleh karena itu, bersihkan secara teratur.
Semprotkan air untuk membersihkan debu. • J ika sulit untuk membersihan penukar panas unit outdoor sendiri, kontak pusat layanan.
PERHATIAN
• Hati-hati dengan pinggiran yang tajam pada penukar panas unit outdoor.
Penukar panas (Ilustrasi ini mungkin berbeda sedikit tergantung pada model)
Indonesian-25 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 25
2/16/2015 10:28:52 AM
Membersihkan penyejuk udara Melepas filter Udara Ada lubang di sisi kanan bawah filter. Letakkan jari Anda ke dalam lubang itu agar dapat memegang filter dan pelan-pelan dorong ke atas untuk melepas pengait dari sisi bawah. Lalu, tarik ke bawah untuk melepas filter dari bodi utama.
Filter Udara
Membersihkan Filter Udara Filter udara berbasis busa yang dapat dicuci menjerat partikel besar dari udara. Filter dibersihkan dengan sebuah vakum atau dicuci dengan tangan. Lepas filter Udara dari bodi utama.
Bersihkan filter Udara dengan pembersih vakum atau sikat lembut. Jika debu terlalu tebal, bersihkan dengan air yang mengalir.
Pasang kembali filter Udara ke posisi awalnya.
Keringkan filter Udara di tempat berventilasi.
• B ersihkan filter Udara setiap 2 minggu. Periode pembersihan dapat berbeda tergantung kondisi penggunaan dan lingkungan. Di tempat yang berdebu, bersihkanlah sekali seminggu. • Jika filter Udara mengering di tempat yang terkungkung (atau lembap), bau tidak sedap dapat terbentuk. Jika ini yang terjadi, bersihkan ulang dan keringkan di tempat berventilasi baik.
Indonesian-26 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 26
2/16/2015 10:28:53 AM
Membersihkan penyejuk udara Merakit kembali filter Udara Air filter
06 LAIN-LAIN
1. Taruh filter di bagian body utama dan masukkan kait yang terdapat di bagian atas filter kedalam body utama. ➀
2. Terdapat satu kait di kedua sisi filter, tekan bagian atas filter udara secara perlahan dan masukkan kait ke bagian body utama. ➁
3. Tekan bagian bawah filter secara perlahan untuk memastikan sudah terkait dengan bagian body utama. ➂ ➃ ➄
Indonesian-27 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 27
2/16/2015 10:28:54 AM
Merawat penyejuk udara Jika AC tidak akan digunakan untuk jangka waktu yang agak lama, keringkan AC untuk menjaga dalam kondisi terbaik.
1. Keringkan AC secara menyeluruh dengan mengoperasikan mode kipás (Fan Mode) selama 3 sampai 4 jam and matikan pasokan listrik. Terdapat kemungkinan kerusakan internal apabila masih terdapat komponen yang lembap. 2. Sebelum menggunakan AC lagi, kering komponen bagian dalam AC lagi dengan menjalankan dalam modus Fan selama 3 sampai 4 jam. Hal ini membantu menghilangkan bau yang mungkin dihasilkan dari kelembaban. Pengecekan Berkala Lihat grifik berikut untuk menjaga AC dengan benar. Type
Setiap 2 Mingguw
Penjelasan Bersihkan Filter udara (1)
Indoor unit
Setiap 3 Bulan
Setiap 4 Bulan
Bersihkan Condensate dari tatakan drain (2)
Bersihkan penukar panas (2)
Bersihkan kipas silang (2)
Bersihkan condesnsate pada pipa buangan (2)
Ganti baterai remote kontrol (1)
Bersihkan penukar panas pada luar unit (2)
Outdoor unit
Setiap 1 Tahun
Bersihkan penukar panas pada bagian dalam unit (2)
Bersihkan komponen listrik dengan semprotan udara (2)
Pastikan bahwa semua komponen listrik sudah dikencangkan (2)
Bersihkan kipas (2)
Pastikan bahwa semua perakitan kipas sudah dikencangkan (2)
Bersihkan condensate pada tatakan drain (2)
: Tanda centang ini diperlukan untuk memeriksa unit / indoor outdoor secara berkala, berikut penjelasannya untuk memelihara AC dengan benar.
PERHATIAN
(1) Kegiatan yang dijelaskan harus dilakukan lebih sering jika area instalasi sangat berdebu. (2) Operasi ini harus selalu dilakukan oleh teknisi ahli. Untuk informasi lebih rinci, lihat bagian instalasi di manual.
Indonesian-28 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 28
2/16/2015 10:28:55 AM
Pemecahan masalah
AC tidak bekerja sama sekali.
• Periksa daya status dan kemudian mengoperasikan AC lagi. • Pasang atau nyalakan pemutus sirkuit dan kemudian operasikan AC lagi. • Pastikan Isolator diaktifkan • Periksa apakah Anda telah mengatur Off Timer. Mengoperasikan AC lagi dengan menekan tombol Power.
Pengaturan suhu tidak bekerja.
• Periksa apakah Anda telah memilih mode Fan /Fast mode. Dalam mode ini, suhu yang diinginkan di set ke auto dan Anda tidak dapat mengatur suhu.
Udara Dingin / hangat tidak keluar dari AC.
• Periksa apakah suhu disetel lebih tinggi (selama mode Cool) / rendah (selama mode Panas) dari suhu sekarang. Tekan Temp +atau- tombol pada remote kontrol untuk mengubah suhu yang disetel. • Periksa apakah saringan udara tersumbat oleh kotoran. Jika ada banyak debu di filter udara, pendingin (pemanasan) dapat menurunkan kinerja. Bersihkan lebih sering. • Periksa apakah unit luar ditutupi atau dipasang dekat rintangan. Ambil tutup dan jauhkan hambatan tersebut. • Periks a apakah AC beroperasi dalam mode Proses pemanasan (defrost). Ketika es terbentuk di musim din gin atau suhu luar terlalu rendah, AC beroperasi dalam mode Proses pemanasan (defrost) secara otomatis. Dalam mode Proses pemanasan (defrost), kipas berhenti dalam ruangan dan udara hangat tidak keluar. • Jika pintu atau jendela yang terbuka, dapat menyebabkan kinerja pendinginan buruk (pemanasan). Tutup pintu dan jendela. • Periksa apakah AC baru saja diaktifkan setelah menghentikan pendinginan atau pemanasan operasi. Dalam hal ini, hanya kipas akan berjalan untuk melindungi kompresor unit outdoor. • Periksa apakah panjang pipa terlalu panjang. Bila panjang pipa melebihi panjang pipa maksimum, pendinginan (pemanasan) dapat menurunkan kinerja.
06 LAIN-LAIN
Lihat tabel berikut jika AC beroperasi abnormally. Hal ini dapat menghemat waktu dan biaya yang tidak perlu. MASALAH SOLUSI
Mode. Pada mode ini, anda Pengaturan aliran • Cek apabila anda memilih tidak dapat mengatur arah aliran angin (Jika mode udara tidak bekerja. beroperasi pada mode pemanasan, anda dapat mengatur arah aliran angin”.
Indonesian-29 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 29
2/16/2015 10:28:55 AM
MASALAH
SOLUSI
Pengaturan • Periksa apakah Anda telah memilih mode Auto/Dry/Fast/ . In these mode, fan speed kecepatan fan yang kecepatan Fan tidak diinginkan di set ke auto dan Anda tidak dapat mengatur bekerja. kecepatan fan. Remote Kontrol tidak bekerja.
• Periksa apakah baterai Anda habis. • Pastikan bahwa tidak ada yang menghalangi sensor remote kontrol Anda. • Periksa bahwa ada pencahayaan aparat kuat di dekat AC. Kuat cahaya yang berasal dari lampu neon atau tanda-tanda neon dapat mengganggu gelombang listrik.
Fungsi Timer tidak bisa di set.
• Periksa apakah Anda menekan tombol SET pada remote kontrol setelah Anda mengatur waktu.
Indikator terus berkedip.
• Tekan tombol Power atau cabut steker listrik / matikan saklar daya tambahan. Jika indikator masih berkedip, hubungi pusat layanan.
Menyerap bau di ruangan selama beroperasi.
• Periksa apakah alat sedang bekerja di daerah berasap. Pertukaran udara atau mengoperasikan AC dalam mode Fan selama 1 ~ 2 jam. (Kami tidak menggunakan komponen bau di AC.) • Check the Drains (Periksa Buangan) telah menggantikan Perawatan Berkala.
Terdapat indikasi error.
• Sewaktu unit indoor menyala kedap kedip, hubungi pusat servis terdekat. Harap pastikan kode kesalahan disampaikan ke pusat layanan saat melakukan pemesanan servis melalui telepon.
Terjadi Kebisingan.
• Tergantung pada status penggunaan AC, kebisingan dapat didengar saat gerakan perubahan aliran refrigeran. Itu adalah normal.
Terdapat asap di unit outdoor.
• Mungkin bukan api tapi bisa uap yang dihasilkan oleh operasi defrost dari penukar panas unit outdoor pada saat mode Panas di musim dingin.
Air menetes dari sambungan pipa outdoor
• Air dapat dihasilkan karena perbedaan suhu. Itu adalah normal.
Indonesian-30 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 30
2/16/2015 10:28:55 AM
Peringatan keselamatan Hati-hati mengikuti tindakan yang tercantum di bawah ini karena hal ini sangat penting untuk menjamin keselamatan unit anda. • Selalu lepaskan AC dari sumber listrik sebelum melakukan perbaikan atau menyentuh komponen dalam unit. • Pastikan bahwa instalasi dan uji coba operasi yang dilakukan oleh teknisi ahli.
Informasi Umum fBacalah dengan cermat isi panduan ini sebelum memasang AC dan simpan manual di tempat yang aman agar dapat
menggunakannya sebagai referensi setelah pemasangan.
07 INSTALASI
• Pastikan bahwa AC tidak dipasang di daerah mudah diakses.
fUntuk keamanan maksimal, pemasang harus selalu hati-hati membaca peringatan berikut. fSimpan manual operasi dan pemasangan di lokasi yang aman dan jangan lupa untuk menyerahkannya kepada pemilik
baru jika AC sudah dijual atau dipindahkan.
fPanduan ini menjelaskan cara memasang unit indoor dengan sistem split dengan dua unit SAMSUNG. Produsen tidak
bertanggung jawab atas kerusakan yang timbul dari penggunaan unit-unit non compliant. Penggunaan jenis lain unit dengan sistem kontrol yang berbeda dapat merusak unit dan membatalkan garansi.
fPenyejuk udara sesuai dengan persyaratan dari Low Voltage Directive (72/23/EEC), EMC Directive (89/336/EEC) dan Instruksi
pada peralatan bertekanan (97/23/EEC).
fProdusen tidak bertanggung jawab atas kerusakan yang berasal dari perubahan yang tidak sah atau sambungan yang tidak
benar dari listrik dari ketentuan yang ditetapkan dalam table "batas Operasi", termasuk dalam manual, akan membatalkan garansi.
fAC harus digunakan hanya untuk aplikasi yang telah dirancang: unit indoor tidak cocok dipasang pada area yang
digunakan untuk pencucian.
fJangan gunakan unit jika rusak. Jika terjadi masalah, matikan unit dan lepaskan dari sumber listrik. fDalam rangka untuk mencegah kerusakan listrik, kebakaran atau cedera, selalu mematikan unit, menonaktifkan saklar
perlindungan dan kontak layanan SAMSUNG jika unit mengeluarkan asap, jika kabel listrik panas atau rusak atau jika unit ini sangat bising.
fSelalu ingat untuk memeriksa unit, sambungan listrik, tabung refrigeran dan proteksi secara teratur. Pekerjaan ini harus
dilakukan oleh teknisi ahli.
fUnit ini berisi bagian yang bergerak, yang harus selalu dijauhkan dari jangkauan anak-anak. fJangan mencoba untuk memperbaiki, memindahkan, mengubah atau memasang ulang unit. Jika dilakukan oleh personel
yang tidak sah, operasi ini mungkin menyebabkan kejutan listrik atau kebakaran.
fJangan letakkan wadah dengan cairan atau benda lainnya pada unit. fSemua bahan yang digunakan untuk pembuatan dan kemasan AC didaur ulang. fBahan pengepakan dan baterai bekas dari remote kontrol (opsional) harus dibuang sesuai dengan undang-undang. fPenyejuk udara berisi refrigerant yang harus dibuang sebagai sampah khusus. Pada akhir siklus hidupnya, AC harus dibuang
di tempat yang diijinkan atau dikembalikan ke pengecer sehingga dapat dibuang dengan benar dan aman.
Indonesian-31 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 31
2/16/2015 10:28:55 AM
Memasang Unit PENTING : Ketika memasang unit, selalu ingat untuk memasang tabung refrigeran terlebih dahulu, baru kemudian jalur listrik. Selalu lepaskan baris listrik sebelum tabung refrigerant. f Jika produk uang datang rusak, JANGAN DIPASANG dan segera laporkan kerusakan pada pengantar atau pengecer (jika pemasang atau teknisi yang berwenang telah mengambil unit dari pengecer.) f Setelah menyelesaikan pemasangan, lakukan tes fungsional dan memberikan petunjuk tentang cara mengoperasikan AC
kepada pengguna.
f Jangan gunakan AC dalam lingkungan dengan zat berbahaya atau dekat dengan peralatan yang gampang menghasilkan
api untuk menghindari terjadinya kebakaran, ledakan atau cedera.
f Untuk mencegah cedera ketika menyentuh kipas unit indoor, pasang unit indoor setidaknya 2,5 m di atas lantai.
Penyejuk udara harus digunakan hanya untuk aplikasi yang telah dirancang: unit indoor tidak cocok dipasang pada area yang digunakan untuk pencucian.
Unit kami harus dipasang sesuai dengan ruang yang ditunjukkan dalam manual instalasi untuk menjamin aksesibilitas baik dari kedua sisi atau kemampuan untuk melakukan pemeliharaan rutin dan perbaikan. Bagian unit harus dapat diakses dan dapat dibongkar dalam kondisi keselamatan yang lengkap baik untuk orang atau benda. Untuk alasan ini, di mana tidak ditunjukkan seperti yang ditunjukkan di Cara Pemasnagn, biaya yang diperlukan untuk memasang dan memperbaiki unit (dalam keselamatan, sebagaimana diwajibkan oleh peraturan yang berlaku yang berlaku) dengan sling, truk, perancah atau cara lain untuk mencapai tempat tinggi tidak termasuk dalam-garansi dan dibebankan kepada pembeli.
Jalur listrik, sekring atau pemutus sirkuit f Selalu pastikan bahwa catu daya sesuai dengan standarukeselamatan saat ini. Selalu memasang AC sesuai dengan standar
keselamatan lokal.
f Selalu pastikan koneksi grounding yang cocok tersedia.
Pastikan bahwa tegangan dan frekuensi power supply sesuai dengan spesifikasi dan bahwa daya terpassang cukup untuk memastikan pengoperasian setiap alat rumah tangga lain yang terhubung ke saluran listrik yang sama.
Selalu pastikan bahwa switch cut-off dan perlindungan sesuai kebutuhan.
Pastikan bahwa AC dihubungkan ke catu daya sesuai dengan petunjuk yang tersedia dalam diagram pengkabelan termasuk dalam manual.
Selalu pastikan bahwa sambungan listrik (kabel masuk, bagian lead perlindungan ...) sesuai dengan spesifikasi listrik dan dengan petunjuk yang diberikan didalam skema kabel. Selalu pastikan bahwa semua koneksi sesuai dengan standar yang berlaku untuk instalasi AC.
Memilih lokasi instalasi Indoor unit Untuk instalasi AC Wi-Fi, pilih unit indoor yang terletak paling dekat dengan router wireless. Pada kasus dimana sinyal WiFi melemah, Smart APP boleh untuk diskoneksi tergantung pada kekuatan sinyal WiFi. Dimana aliran udara tidak terhalang. Dimana udara dingin dapat didistribusikan ke seluruh ruangan. Pasang panjang pipa refrigeran dan perbedaan ketinggian kedua unit indoor dan outdoor seperti yang ditunjukkan Dalam diagram pemasangan. Dinding yang dapat menahan getaran dan cukup kuat untuk menahan berat produk. Tidak mendapat sinar matahari langsung. 1 m atau lebih jauh dari TV atau radio (untuk mencegah layar dari menjadi terdistorsi atau kebisingan dari yang dihasilkan). Sejauh mungkin dari lampu neon dan pijar (sehingga remote kontrol dapat dioperasikan dengan baik). Tempat di mana saringan udara bisa diganti dengan mudah. Jangan menempatkan tepat diatas peralatan elektonik lainnya, dimana apabila AC tidak diservis dapat menyebabkan kebocoran air dan merusak peralatan elektonik lainnya (misalnya komputer, TV, dll).
Indonesian-32 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 32
2/16/2015 10:28:55 AM
Memilih lokasi instalasi Unit Outdoor Tempat dimana tidak terkena angin kencang. Ventilasi yang baik dan tempat-tempat yang tidak berdebu. Jauh dari sinar matahari langsung dan hujan. f Tempat dimana tetangga tidak terganggu oleh suara operasi atau udara panas. Dinding padat atau mencegah getaran dan cukup kuat untuk menahan berat produk. Dimana tidak ada resiko kebocoran gas yang mudah terbakar. Ketika memasang unit di tempat yang tinggi pastikan untuk memperbaiki unit kaki. 3 m atau lebih jauh dari TV atau radio (untuk mencegah layar dari menjadi terdistorsi atau kebisingan dari yang dihasilkan). Pasang unit horizontal. Tempat dimana air pembuangan tidak menjadi masalah. Tempat yang tidak ada tanaman (khususnya tanaman merambat) dan di mana hewan kecil tidak dapat masuk. Unit Outdoor tidak seharusnya diletakkan di tempat dengan ketinggian melebihi 2.4 meter, atau terlalu dibawah, dengan alasan aksesibilitas servis dan OH&S.
07 INSTALASI
• Hindari tempat-tempat berikut untuk mencegah kerusakan unit - Dimana ada minyak mesin. - Lingkungan asin, seperti daerah pantai. - Apabila ada gas sulfida. - daerah lainnya dengan keadaan khusus.
100 mm atau lebih
Unit luar ruangan
125 mm atau lebih
Dinding luar Unit dalam ruangan
125 mm atau lebih
A Anda dapat memilih arah pe ngeringan (kiri atau kanan). Bungkus pipa refrigeran dan selang pembuangan dengan pad penyerap dan tape vinyl. Lihat halaman 50 untuk rincian lebih lanjut.
Potong penyekat untuk membuang air hujan
'L' m sebagai pipa panjang maksimum dan 3 m sebagai pipa panjang minimal (Ini akan mengurangi kebisingan dan getaran).
Buat U-trap (A) pada pipa (yang tersambung ke unit dalam ruangan) pada dinding luar, lalu potong bagian bawah penyekat (sekitar 10 mm) untuk mencegah air hujan masuk melalui penyekat. Namun, hati-hati agar tidak merusak pipa.
' H ' m maksimum total tinggi
' L ' m maksimum total panjang plpa
Model
Membuat setidaknya satu putaran: Ini akan mengurangi kebisingan dan getaran.
Pipe Length Pipe Height Minimum Maximum Maximum
✴✴10/13✴✴
3
15
7
✴✴18/24✴✴
3
30
15
Tampilan unit mungkin berbeda dari diagram tergantung pada model.
Indonesian-33 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 33
2/16/2015 10:28:56 AM
Persyaratan tempat untuk Unit Outdoor Saat memasang 1 unit outdoor Penjelasan Gambar Pandangan Atas
Pandangan Samping
Udara masuk. Udara keluar
Udara masuk.
Udara keluar.
,
Arah Aliran Udara.
(Unit : mm)
1500 atau lebih
Ketika 3 sisi unit outdoor yang diblokir oleh dindingl. 300 atau lebih
Bila arah udara adalah mengarah dinding.
300 atau lebih
Bila arah udara adalah sebaliknya dinding.
150 atau lebih
300 atau lebih
Bila dinding depan menghalangi dan sisi belakang outdoor unit.
300 atau lebih
1500 atau lebih
500 atau lebih
2000 atau lebih
Bagian atas dari unit outdoor dan lubang udara adalah sebaliknya dinding.
1500 atau lebih
Bagian atas dari unit outdoor dan lubang udara adalah menuju dinding.
600 atau lebih
Ketika memasang lebih dari 1 unit outdoor (Unit : mm) 300 atau lebih
Ketika 3 sisi unit outdoor yang diblokir oleh dinding. 1500 atau lebih
Bila arah udara adalah mengarah dinding.
300 atau lebih
600 atau lebih 600 atau lebih
600 atau lebih
Indonesian-34 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 34
2/16/2015 10:28:58 AM
Memilih lokasi instalasi (Unit : mm)
600 atau lebih
1500 atau 600 atau lebih lebih
3000 atau lebih
3000 atau lebih
500 atau lebih 500 atau lebih
Ketika sisi depan dan belakang unit outdoor ke dinding.
07 INSTALASI
600 atau lebih
Bila bagian atas unit outdoor dan lubang udara adalah sebaliknya dinding.
1500 atau 300 atau lebih lebih
Ketika dinding yang menghalangi depan dan sisi belakang outdoor unit.
300 atau lebih
300 atau lebih
200 atau lebih
• Jika instalasi dilakukan dalam ruang yang tidak tepat, unit dapat menghasilkan suara dan menyebabkan efek buruk pada produk. • Instalasi harus dilakukan di tingkat dan di tempat di mana getaran tidak akan menimbulkan efek apapun.
Aksesori
Aksesori berikut disertakan dengan AC : • Jumlah setiap aksesori ditunjukkan dalam tanda kurung.
Aksesoris dalam unit indoor Pemasangan Plate (1)
Pemasangan Plate (1)
Pemasangan Plate (1)
✴✴10✴✴
✴✴13/18✴✴
✴✴24✴✴
Remote kontrol (1)
Manual Penggunaan & Instalasi (1)
Pemegang Remote Kontrol (1)
M4 x 12 Paku datar (tapped screws) (2)
Sekrup Penutup
Baterai untuk Remote kontrol (2)
Aksesoris dalam unit outdoor Leg Karet (4)
Indonesian-35 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 35
2/16/2015 10:28:59 AM
• F lare Nuts melekat pada setiap ujung dari sebuah pipa evaporator atau tempat service. evaporator atau tempat service. • Pemasangan kawat kabel perakitan adalah opsional. Jika tidak diberikan, gunakan kabel standar. • Plug pembuangan air dan kaki karet hanya disertakan saat AC disediakan tanpa pipa perakitan seperti terlihat pada gambar di bawah.
Opsional Aksesoris Pipa sambungan terinsulasi,
Ø6.35 mm x 5 m (1)
Putty 100 g (1)
Pemasangan 4-Core (1) ✴✴10/13✴✴
Pipa sambungan terinsulasi,
Pipa sambungan terinsulasi,
Pipa sambungan terinsulasi,
Ø9.52 mm x 5 m (1) ✴✴10/13✴✴
Ø12.70 mm x 5 m (1) ✴✴18✴✴
Ø15.88 mm x 5 m (1) ✴✴24✴✴
Insulasi Tube busa PE T3 (1)
Selotip vinil (2)
Gantungan pipa Gantungan pipa Paku semen M4 x 24 Paku datar Pipa pembuangan air, panjang 2 m (1) (pipe clamps) A (3) (pipe clamps) B (3) (cement nails) (6) (tapped screws) (6)
Kabel listrik 3-Core (1) ✴✴18/24✴✴
Pemasangan 2-Core (1) ✴✴18/24✴✴
Pemasangan 3-Core (1) ✴✴18/24✴✴
Sumbat pengeringan (1)
• Jika aksesoris diberikan, itu akan berada dalam kotak aksesori.
Alat-alat yang dibutuhkan untuk instalasi Alat-alat Umum • Pompa Vakum (Pencegahan alir balik) • Kunci Torsi • Pemotong Pipa • Obeng • Kunci pas
• Gauge Manifold • Peluas lubang • Pembengkok Pipa • Pengebor • Kunci L
• Pencari Logam/Kayu • Water pass • Pita Ukur
Alat-alat untuk pengoperasian uji • Termometer
• Meteran Resistensi
• Elektroskop
Mengencangkan pelat instalasi
Anda dapat memilih arah selang pembuangan tergantung di mana Anda ingin menginstal unit indoor. Oleh karena itu sebelum memperbaiki piring instala si ke dinding atau bingkai jendela, Anda harus menentukan posisi dari lubang 65 mm melalui kabel, pipa dan selang lulus untuk menghubungkan unit indoor ke unit outdoor. Ketika menghadap dinding, pipa dan kabel dapat dihubungkan dari: Direction of pipe • Right (A) • Left (B) • Underside_right (C) B A • Rear_right atau left (D) D D C
• Anda dapat memasang pipa freon di sisi kiri/kanan/bawah/belakang unit dalam ruangan. • Jika arah pipa diubah dari kiri ke kanan, jangan tekuk pipa secara drastis, melainkan putar perlahan ke arah yang berlawanan seperti ditunjukkan pada gambar. Jika tidak, pipa dapat rusak selama proses tersebut berlangsung.
Indonesian-36 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 36
2/16/2015 10:29:01 AM
1. Lepas panel depan seperti dijelaskan pada halaman 38~39. 2. Lepas pelat Gantungan dari unit dalam ruang. (1) Longgarkan kedua sekrup yang memasang pelat Gantungan ke unit dalam ruang. (2) Dorong kait (di bagian bawah unit dalam ruang) ke atas untuk melepas pelat pemasangan dari kait yang menahannya. (3) Tarik pelat pemasangan untuk melepas sepenuhnya dari unit dalam ruang.
3. Tentukan posisi lubang saluran pipa dan selang seperti terlihat pada gambar dan lubang bor dengan diameter dalam dari 65 mm sehingga sedikit miring ke bawah.
B
C C
Model
A
B
C
D
10/13/18 24
36
60
65
36
33
110 110
33
C
C
D
A
D
A
D D
D
A A B B
D
Pipe hole (Ø65 mm)
Pipe hole (Ø65 mm)
C
07 INSTALASI
Sekrup Screw(M4x10)
B
C
(Unit : mm)
• P astikan untuk bor hanya satu lubang setelah memilih arah pipa
4. Memasang unit indoor. Jika Anda memasangang unit indoor di dinding (1) Memasang pelat pemasangan ke dinding memberikan beban pada berat unit indoor. • J ika Anda memasang pelat ke dinding beton menggunakan finher, pastikan bahwa jarak antara dinding dan pelat adalah kurang dari 20 mm.
Plastic Anchor < 20 mm
Wall
Jika Anda memasang unit indoor. (1) Tentukan posisi dari pojok kayu yang menempel pada bingkai jendela. (2) Pasang pjok kayu ke bingkai jendela memberikan beban pada berat unit indoor. (3) Pasang plat pemasangan ke tegak kayu menggunakan sekrup. Jika Anda mengencangkan unit dalam ruang di papan gipsum (1) Gunakan pencari logam/kayu untuk menemukan lokasi baut. (2) Pasang penggantung pelat di dua baut. • Cari tempat lainnya jika ada kurang dari dua baut, atau jarak antar baut berbeda dengan penggantung pelat. • Memasang plat pemasangan tanpa condong ke satu sisi. • P astikan bahwa dinding dapat menahan berat produk. Jika Anda menginstal produk di tempat di mana tidakcukup kuat untuk menahan berat produk, unit bisa jatuh dan menyebabkan cedera.
Memasang Baut Gantungan Gunakan 2 sekrup untuk memasang unit dalam ruang dengan pelat gantungan seperti ditampilkan pada gambar. Sekrup Screw(M4x10)
Indonesian-37 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 37
2/16/2015 10:29:03 AM
Membongkar/Merakit panel Penutup untuk instalasi unit dalam ruang Harap pindai kode QR ini untuk video terperinci mengenai instalasi unit dalam ruang. Untuk dapat memasang unit dalam ruang, Anda harus membongkar panel penutup terlebih dahulu. Harap ikuti petunjuk berikut untuk membongkar dan merakit panel penutup. Pengait (di panel penutup) bisa rusak jika Anda memberikan kekuatan yang berlebih saat Anda membongkar dan merakit panel penutup. Harap ikuti petunjuk berikut.
Melepas sekrup Panel penutup dirakit di bagian bawah unit dalam ruang (seperti yang ditunjukkan dalam ilustrasi) dan dikencangkan dengan sekrup. Lepas sekrup Penutup terlebih dahulu dan longgarkan sekrup sehingga Anda dapat membongkar panel penutup.
Sekrup Penutup
<Melepas sekrup Penutup>
Panel Penutup
<Melonggarkan sekrup>
Melepas panel Penutup (sebelum memasang unit dalam ruang) Pasang panel bawah ke bodi utama menggunakan kait samping, tengah, dan bawah seperti terlihat pada gambar. Buka dulu kunci kait samping, lalu buka kunci kait tengah dan bawah. Jumlah dan lokasi pengait mungkin berbeda tergantung kapasitas unit dalam ruang. (Lihat tabel) Periksa lokasi pengait sebelum melepas panel penutup. ffLokasi pengait di bagian tengah
Jumlah dan lokasi pengait
Bagian samping Kait tengah
Kait bawah
Kait tengah Kait bawah
Untuk lokasi kait spesifik dan kuantitas, silakan lihat untuk menutupi panel dengan menunjukkan panah berdasarkan barang fisik.
Indonesian-38 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 38
2/16/2015 10:29:17 AM
Membongkar/Merakit panel Penutup untuk instalasi unit dalam ruang ffMelepas pengait di samping
ffMelepas pengait di bagian tengah 07 INSTALASI
②
①
Peringatan (ringkih) - Pelan-pelan tekan kedua sisi panel penutup ke dalam (①) dan lepas pengait di kedua sisi (②).
Peringatan (ringkih) - Gunakan kedua tangan - Lepaskan masing-masing pengait dengan mendorongnya ke atas menurut sudut tertentu.
Merakit panel Penutup (setelah memasang unit dalam ruang) Untuk merakit panel Penutup, lakukan dengan urutan sebaliknya dari urutan pembongkaran. Gunakan kedua tangan untuk merakit dan berhati-hatilah agar tidak merusak pipa dan selang penguras. Kunci kait samping, tengah, dan bawah sesuai urutan ini.Kencangkan panel bawah dengan sekrup, lalu tutup lubang sekrup menggunakan penutupnya.
<Mengencangkan sekrup>
<Memasang sekrup Penutup>
Indonesian-39 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 39
2/16/2015 10:29:24 AM
Menyambungkan kabel rakitan Spesifikasi kabel Model
Power cable
Interconnection cable
Type GL
10/13
3G x 1.0 mm², H05VV-F
4G x 1.5 mm², H07RN-F
20 A
18/24
3G x 2.5 mm², H07RN-F
3G x 1.0 mm², H07RN-F 2 x 0.75 mm², H05RN-F
25 A
• H ubungkan kabel daya ke pemutus sirkuit bantu. Jika setiap kutub gagal untuk terhubung ke power supply, hal ini diakibatkan jarak kontak ≥ 3 mm. • Gunakan kabel pelindung (Kategori 5; kurang dari 50pF/m) untuk lokasi lingkungan yang berisik. • Kabel catu daya pada komponen peralatan untuk penggunaan luar ruangan tidak boleh lebih ringan daripada kabel fleksibel berlapis polikloroprena. (Penandaan kode IEC: 60227 IEC53/ CENELEC: H05VV-F, IEC: 60245 IEC57/CENELEC: H05RN-F, IEC: 60245 IEC66/CENELEC: H07RN-F)
Menghubungkan kabel Pekerjaan listrik. (1) Untuk pekerjaan listrik dan pembumian, ikuti ‘standar teknis pemasangan jaringan listrik’ dan ‘regulasi perkabelan’ pada Undang-undang Perusahaan Listrik. (2) Kencangkan blok terminal sekrup pada 1.2~1.8 N•m (12~18 kgf•cm). (3) Berhati-hatilah saat menyambung blok terminal dari unit dalam-ruangan.
Sebelum menyambung, pastikan bagian penyambung dari soket terminal menghadap ke atas.
Te rbalik
Soket terminal rusak
Tidak ada terminal cincin untuk membungkus kabel.
Tidak boleh ada jarak antara terminal dan sekrup ketika keduanya disambungkan. - Apabila ada jarak, dapat timbul bahaya kebakaran karena panas yang berlebihan yang muncul dari kontak listrik.
Soket terminal terbalik.
Sekrup tidak terpasang dengan benar, atau ada jarak antara sekrup dan terminal cincin.
• U ntuk kabel pada blok terminal, gunakan kabel dengan soket terminal cincin saja. Kabel biasa tanpa soket terminal cincin dapat menimbulkan bahaya kebakaran karena panas yang berlebihan yang muncul dari kontak listrik selama pekerjaan menangani kabel.
Indonesian-40 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 40
2/16/2015 10:29:25 AM
Menyambungkan kabel rakitan Bila Anda memasang AC, membuat koneksi refrigerant dan kemudian sambungan listrik. Hubungkan AC untuk sistem grounding sebelum melakukan sambungan listrik. Jika unit-dilepas, pertama putuskan kabel listrik, kemudian sambungan refrigerant.
1. Penyambungan kabel perakitan jika diperlukan. • T idak diperbolehkan untuk menyambungkan dua atau lebih kabel untuk memperpanjang jarak. Hal ini dapat menimbulkan api.
07 INSTALASI
Jika unit outdoor lebih dari 5 meter dari unit indoor, Anda harus memperpanjang kabel. Panjang maksimal kabel adalah 15(10/13) / 30(18/24) meters.
2 . Buka kisi depan. 3 . Lepaskan sekrup pengaman penutup konektor. 4 . Lewatkan kabel perakitan melalui bagian belakang unit indoor dan menghubungkan kabel perakitan ke terminal. (Lihat gambar dibawah ini sebagai referensi) • Setiap kawat dilabeli dengan jumlah terminal yang sesuai. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Hubungkan bagian ujung kabel melalui lubang 65mm yang terdapat didalam dinding. Tutup penutup konektor dengan mengencangkan sekrup dengan hati-hati. Tutup kisi-kisi depan. Lepaskan penutup papan terminal di samping unit outdoor. Sambungkan kabel ke terminal seperti yang terlihat pada gambar.
18/24
10/13 Indoor unit
1(L) 2(N) F1
Indoor unit
1(L) 2(N) F1
1(L) 2(N)
1(L) 2(N)
F1
L
N
F2
Indoor unit
F2
F1
F2
F2
Outdoor unit
F1
Outdoor unit
F2
Outdoor unit L
N
F1
F2
Wujud dari unit dapat berubah dari gambar diagram tergantung dari modelnya.
• Juga terminal sirkuler harus dicocokkan dengan ukuran sekrup di blok terminal. • Setelah menyambung kabel, pastikan angka terminal di unit dalam ruang/luar ruang cocok. • Harap pastikan kabel Daya & Komunikasi dipisah, tidak boleh dalam kabel yang sama. 10. Hubungkan konduktor grounding ke terminal grounding. 11. Tutup penutup papan terminal dengan mengencangkan sekrup dengan hati-hati. • H ubungkan kabel menurut kode warna, mengacu pada diagram pengkabelan. • Kabel listrik dan kabel interkoneksi harus dipilih sesuai dengan kation spesifik dihalaman 40.
Indonesian-41 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 41
2/16/2015 10:29:29 AM
Menginstal dan menyambungkan pipa rakitan unit dalam ruang Hubungkan unit indoor & outdoor dengan pipa tembaga yang tersedia, dengan memperhatikan unsur koneksi api (flare connections). Gunakan pipa dengan grade refrigerasi yang baik (insulated seamless refrigeration Grade pipe) yaitu jenis Cu DHP yang sesuai dengan ISO1337, tidak berkarat dan teroksidasi, dan sesuai untuk beroperasi pada tekanan operasi minimal 4200 kPA dan tekanan api minimal 20700 kPA. Pipa tembaga tipe sanitary tidak boleh dipergunakan dalam kondisi apapun. Ada 2 pipa refrigeran dengan diameter yang berbeda: • Yang kecil adalah untuk refrigeran cair • Yang besar adalah untuk refrigerant gas Sebuah pipa pendeksudah terdapat di AC. Anda mungkin butuh untuk memperpanjang pipa menggunakan pipa penghubung (opsional). Prosedur penyambungan untuk pipa refrigeran bervariasi sesuai dengan posisi keluar dari pipa ketika menghadap dinding: • Right(A) • Left(B) • Underside(C) • Rear
1. Potong bagian yang sesuai knock-out (A, B, C) pada bagian belakang ruangan unit kecuali jika Anda terhubung pipa langsung dari belakang. 2. Haluskan ujung bekas potongan. 3. Lepaskan tutup pipa dari pipa dan sambungkan ke pipa perakitan ke dan kemudian dengan kunci torsi, gunakan torsi berikut masing masing pipa. Kencangkan mur pertama dengan tangan Anda:
B
A C
Outer Diameter
N•m
Torque kgf•cm
ø6.35 mm
14~18
ø9.52 mm
34~42
140~180 350~430
ø12.70 mm
49~61
500~620
ø15.88 mm
68~82
690~830
• Jika anda ingin memperpendek atau memperpanjang pipa, lihat halaman 43~44. 4. Potong isolasi yang tersisa. 5. Jika perlu, tekuk pipa agar sesuai di bagian bawah unit indoor. Kemudian menariknya keluar melalui lubang yang sesuai. f
Pipa tidak boleh proyek dari bagian belakang unit indoor.
f
Radius pembengkokan harus 100 mm atau lebih.
6. Pass pipa melalui lubang di dinding. 7. Untuk rincian lebih lanjut tentang cara untuk terhubung ke unit outdoor dan membersihkan udara, lihat halaman 47~48. • P ipa akan diisolasi dan tetap secara permanen ke posisi setelah menyelesaikan instalasi dan uji kebocoran gas; lihat halaman 50 untuk rincian lebih lanjut. • K encangkan mur suar dengan kunci torsi sesuai dengan metode tertentu. Jika menencangkan mur terlalu kencang, flare bisa pecah dan menyebabkan kebocoran gas refrigeran. • SAMBUNGAN PIPA JANGAN DI TUTUP! Semua sambungan pipa refrigerant harus mudah diakses dan berguna
Indonesian-42 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 42
2/16/2015 10:29:31 AM
Evakuasi indoor unit Unit indoor ditiup dengan gas inert (nitrogen). Sebelum memasang unit, periksa apakah gas nitrogen mengalir keluar dari unit indoor. Jika satu hal ini tidak benar, UNIT JANGAN DIPASANG karena kebocoran mungkin berada di dalam unit indoor.
07 INSTALASI
1. Lepaskan tutup pada ujung setiap pipa. Keluarkan gas inert dari unit indoor. • U ntuk mencegah kotoran atau benda asing dari mendapatkan ke dalam pipa saat instalasi, jangan lepaskan cap sepenuhnya sampai Anda siap untuk menghubungkan pipa. • U dara yang tersisa dalam siklus pendingin, yang berisi air, dapat menyebabkan kerusakan pada kompresor. • Selalu hubungi pusat layanan atau agen pemasangan yang profesional untuk pemasangan produk.
Unscrew the caps
Pipes
Memotong atau memperpanjang pipa Panjang pipa dapat di: • Perpanjang sampai: lihat halaman 33 tabel • Dipotong sampai: lihat halaman 33 Jika Anda memerlukan pipa lebih dari 5 meter: • Anda harus menambahkan pendingin ke pipa, jika tidak, unit indoor dapat membeku. 1. Pastikan bahwa Anda memiliki semua peralatan yang diperlukan (pemotong pipa, alat untuk membesarkan lubang, alat pembakaran dan pemegang pipa). 2. Jika Anda ingin memperpendek pipa, memotongnya menggunakan pemotong pipa, memastikan bahwa tepi potongan tetap pada 90° dengan sisipipa (lihat di bawah contoh potongan pinggirnya benar dan salah). Pipe cutter
Oblique
Rough
Burr
Pipe
3. Untuk mencegah kebocoran gas, singkirkan sisa potongan menggunakan Reamer. • Pipa diarahkan ke bawah saat mengeluarkan gram untuk memastikan kotoran tidak masuk ke dalam pipa. 4. Letakkan flare sedikit ke dalam pipa dan lakukan flaringan. 90°± 2°
B
45° ± 2°
R 0.4~0.8
Pipe
Outer Diameter (D)
Depth (A)
ø6.35 mm
1.3 mm
Flaring Size (B) 8.7 - 9.1 mm
ø9.52 mm
1.8 mm
12.8 - 13.2 mm
ø12.70 mm
2.0 mm
16.2 - 16.6 mm
ø15.88 mm
2.2 mm
19.3 - 19.7 mm
Flare
Indonesian-43 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 43
2/16/2015 10:29:33 AM
Memotong atau memperpanjang pipa 5. Periksa apakah flaringan sudah benar (lihat contoh pipa tidak benar di bawah).
Correct
Inclined
Damaged Surface
Cracked
Uneven Thickness
6. Sejajarkan pipa untuk menghubungkan mereka dengan mudah. Kencangkan mur pertama dengan tangan Anda, dan kemudian dengan kunci momen,menerapkan torsi berikut: Flare nut
Indoor outlet pipe
Outer Diameter ø6.35 mm ø9.52 mm ø12.70 mm ø15.88 mm
Connecting pipe
Torque N•m 14~18 34~42 49~61 68~82
kgf•cm 140~180 350~430 500~620 690~830
• T orsi yang berlebihan dapat menyebabkan kebocoran gas. Sejajarkan pipa untuk menghubungkan mereka dengan mudah. Kencangkan mur pertama dengan tangan Anda, dan kemudian dengan kunci momen, menerapkan torsi berikut: Sambungan harus dapat diakses dan berguna. • Sistem penyangga dapat dilepas seperti yang ditunjukkan.
Sistem penyangga (dapat dilepas)
7. Rincian lebih lanjut tentang menghubungkan ke unit outdoor dan membersihkan lihat halaman 47~48. • K encangkan mur dengan kunci momen sesuai dengan metode tertentu. Jika flaring selesai-diperketat, flaring bisa pecah dan menyebabkan kebocoran gas refrigeran.
Menginstal dan menyambungkan selang penguras unit dalam ruang Saat memasang selang pembuangan untuk unit indoor, periksa apakah kondensasi pengeringan adalah cukup. Ketika melewati selang pembuangan melalui lubang 65-mm dibor di dinding, periksa hal sebagai berikut: Wall
Indoor unit Selang penguras Selang pembuangan harus TIDAK miring ke atas.
Ujung selang pembuangan harus TIDAK ditempatkan di bawah air.
Selang pembuangan tidak boleh menjadi bengkok.
Indonesian-44 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 44
2/16/2015 10:29:35 AM
Menginstal dan menyambungkan selang penguras unit dalam ruang
Simpanlah clearance minimal 5 cm antara akhir selang drain dan tanah.
Ditch Jangan menempatkan akhir selang saluran.
1) Sambungan yang benar
Selang pembuangan
07 INSTALASI
5cm less
Setelah instalasi pipa pembuangan (Selang penguras) selesai, tuangkan air ke papan pembuangan (drain pan) untuk check apakah pipa sudah kering.
2) Sambungan yang salah
Pipa
Selang pembuangan
Pipa
• Jangan ikatkan selang pembuangan ke pipa pemasangan yang dapat mengakibatkan kebocoran air. • Jika diameter selang sambungan lebih kecil dari selang pembuangan pada produk, air dapat bocor.
Pemasangan Pembuauangan 1. Jika perlu, hubungkan 2-meter selang perpanjangan ke selang pembuangan. 2. Jika menggunakan perpanjangan selang pembuangan, lindungi bagian dalam perpanjangan selang pembuangan dengan isolasi. 3. asang selang pembuangan ke lobang 1 dari 2 saluran selang, kemudian pasang ujung pembuangan dengan penjepit. • Jika Anda tidak menggunakan lubang pembuangan selang lainnya, tutup dengan sumbat karet 4. Saat memanjangkan Selang Penguras, tahan ujung Selang Penguras dan Selang Lubang selang penguras Perpanjangan, putar dan masukkan selang penguras ke selang Perpanjangan sepanjang 40~45 mm. Pastikan dua selang tersambung ketat, tidak boleh ada kebocoran air. 5. Sambungkan Selang Penguras setelah menggunakan Penyekat Busa untuk membungkus Selang Perpanjangan. lalu, gunakan isolasi Vinil untuk membungkus masing-masing sisi koneksi sepanjang 20 mm.
40~45 mm
Selang penguras
Selang penguras perpanjangan
Selang penguras
Selang penguras perpanjangan
20 mm 20 mm atau atau more more
Isolasi Vinil
Foam Insulation
Indonesian-45 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 45
2/16/2015 10:29:36 AM
Menginstal dan menyambungkan selang penguras unit dalam ruang 6. Lewatkan selang pembuangan di bawah pipa refrigeran, untuk menjaga selang pembuangan terikat. Shield 7. Lewatkan selang pembuangan melalui lubang di dinding. Periksa apakah itu miring ke bawah seperti terlihat pada gambar. 8. Check proses drainase berjalan dengan normal, dengan menggunakan Selang penguras Selang penguras perpanjangan metode drainase alami. • S elang akan tetap secara permanen ke posisi setelah menyelesaikan pemasangan dan uji kebocoran gas, lihat halaman 50 untuk rincian lebih lanjut. • P astikan arah terpasang selang pembuangan sudah benar. pemasangan yang tidak memadai dapat menyebabkan kebocoran kondensat air. • Jika selang pembuangan diarahkan di dalam ruangan, lindungi selang sehingga kondensasi menetes tidak merusak perabot atau lantai. • JANGAN PASANG KE ATAS SAMBUNGAN SELANG PEMBUANGAN! Selang pembuangan harus mudah diakses dan berfungsi.
Mengubah arah selang penguras Ubah arah hanya jika diperlukan. 1. Lepaskan tutup karet dengan tang penjepit itu. 2. Lepaskan selang pembuangan dengan menariknya dan berpaling ke kanan. 3. Masukkan selang pembuangan dengan menetapkan dengan sekrup ke dalam alur selang dan outlet tatakan pembuangan. Lubang sekrup Sekrup
Selang penguras
4. Pasang tutup karet dengan obeng dengan memutarnya ke kiri sampai menempel pas dengan akhir alur. Saluran keluar baki pembuangan Sumbat karet
5. Periksa kebocoran pada kedua sisi outlet drain. Tuang air dalam arah panah. Arah Pembuangan air
• P astikan unit indoor dalam posisi tegak lurus jika Anda menuangkan air untuk memeriksa kebocoran. Pastikan bahwa air tidak meluber ke bagian listrik.
Indonesian-46 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 46
2/16/2015 10:29:38 AM
Evakuasi pipa konektor Jangan melampiaskan R-410A ke atmosfer: merupakan gas rumah kaca fluorinated, yang tercakup dalam Protokol Kyoto, dengan Global Warming Potential (GWP) = 2088. Anda harus membersihkan udara di unit indoor dan dalam pipa. Jika udara tetap di pipa pendingin, hal itu mempengaruhi kompresor. Hal itu dapat menyebabkan penurunan kapasitas pendinginan dan kerusakan.
1. Hubungkan masing-masing pipa assembly sesuai pada unit outdoor dan mengencangkan mur.
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit Gas pipe side
2. Kencangkan mur suar pertama dengan tangan Anda, dan kemudian dengan kunci momen,menerapkan torsi berikut: • torsi yang berlebihan dapat menyebabkan kebocoran gas.
PERINGATAN
• M embuat sambungan listrik dan meninggalkan sistem ke "stand by mode". Jangan menghidupkan sistem! Hal ini diperlukan untuk operasi vakum yang lebih baik (posisi OPEN penuh Valve Ekspansi Elektronik - EEV -).
07 INSTALASI
• S aat memasang, pastikan tidak ada kebocoran. Ketika mengisi refrigerant,pertama grounding kompresor sebelum melepaskan sambungan pipa. Jika pipa refrigeran tidak terhubung dengan benar dan kompresor bekerja dengan katup servis terbuka, udara masuk ke pipa dan itu membuat tekanan dalam siklus refrigeran abnormal tinggi. Hal itu dapat menyebabkan ledakan dan cedera.
Liquid pipe side
Torque N•m kgf•cm 14~18 140~180 34~42 350~430 49~61 500~620 68~82 690~830
Outer Diameter ø6.35 mm ø9.52 mm ø12.70 mm ø15.88 mm
3. Sambungkan selang pengisian dari sisi tekanan rendah dari gauge manifold ke titik servis gas seperti terlihat pada gambar. 4. Buka katup sisi tekanan rendah dari jarum manifold berlawanan dengan arah berlawanan. 5. Bersihkan udara dalam pipa yang disambung dengan menggunakan pompa vakum selama sekitar 15 menit. f Pastikan bahwa tekanan menunjukkan -0.1MPa (-76cmHg) setelah sekitar 10 menit. Prosedur ini sangat penting untuk menghindari kebocoran gas. f Tutup katup dari sisi tekanan rendah searah jarum jam jarum manifold. f Matikan pompa vakum. f Periksa 2 menit jika ada perubahan tekanan. f Lepaskan selang dari sisi tekanan rendah gauge manifold. 6. Mengatur katup gas cair dan port layanan ke posisi terbuka.
Manifold gauge
Valve Gas service port
Liquid service port
Vacuum Pump (Backward flowing prevention)
Indonesian-47 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 47
2/16/2015 10:29:38 AM
Penambahan Refrigerant Penambahan Refrigerant sesuai tabel di bawah ini: Jika Anda menggunakan pipa yang lebih panjang dari 5 m, Refrigerant/Freon R-410A Grade A harus ditambahkan untuk setiap extra meter. Jika Anda menggunakan pipa yang lebih pendek dari 5 m, Waktu pengevakuasian normal.
Model
A
10/13
15
18/24
15
Lihat Manual Servis untuk rincian lebih lanjut. • U dara yang tersisa dalam siklus pendingin, yang berisi air, dapat menyebabkan kerusakan pada kompresor. • Selalu hubungi pusat layanan atau agen pemasangan yang profesional untuk pemasangan produk.
Evakuasi pipa konektor Pengisian refrigeran dalam kondisi cair dengan menggunakan pipa cair R-410A adalah jenis campuran refrigeran. Hal ini diperlukan untuk pengisian dalam kondisi cair. Saat pengisian refrigerant dari silinder refrigeran pada peralatan, ikuti petunjuk di bawah. 1. Sebelum pengisian, periksa apakah silinder memiliki siphon atau tidak. Ada dua cara untuk mengisi ulang refrigeran.
Silinder dengan siphon
Silinder tanpa menyedot
Siphon
f Mengisi refrigeran berdiri silinder tegak.
f Mengisi refrigeran memutar terbalik silinder bawah.
• J ika refrigeran R-410A dibebankan dengan gas, komposisi perubahan refrigeran diisi dan karakteristik peralatan bervariasi. • Selama operasi pengukuran kuantitas refrigeran ditambahkan menggunakan timbangan elektronik. Jika silinder tidak memiliki siphon, marah itu.
Indonesian-48 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 48
2/16/2015 10:29:39 AM
Melakukan uji kebocoran gas Pastikan untuk memeriksa kebocoran gas sebelum menyelesaikan proses instalasi (menghubungkan pipa perakitan dan selang antara indoor unit dan outdoor unit, isolasi kabel, selang dan pipa, dan memperbaiki unit indoor ke pelat pemasangan).
07 INSTALASI
A
D
C
B Uji komponen untuk unit luar ruang
Uji komponen untuk unit dalam ruang
Torsi pengencangan untuk tutup bodi (Lihat tabel)
Pemutar Inti pengisian
R-22: Diameter sekrup - 7/16-20UNF R-410A: Diameter sekrup - 1/2-20UNF
Sebelum memeriksa kebocoran, gunakan kunci torsi
untuk mengencangkan tutup katup servis. (Patuhi torsi pengencangan untuk setiap ukuran diameter, dan kencangkan tutup dengan kuat untuk mencegah kebocoran.) Untuk memeriksa kemungkinan kebocoran, masukkan gas pengisi ke dalam pipa yang tersambung ke unit dalam/luar ruang lalu periksa bagian sambungan unit dalam/luar ruang dengan busa sabun atau cairan untuk uji kebocoran.
Tutup bodi (N•m)
Tutup port pengisian (N•m)
ø 6.35 ø 9.52 ø12.70 ø15.88 ø19.05
20 ~ 25 20 ~ 25 25 ~ 30 30 ~ 35 35 ~ 40
10 ~ 12
Torsi pengencangan untuk tutup port pengisian (Lihat tabel) Untuk memeriksa kebocoran gas pada unit outdoor, Periksa katup A dan B menggunakan detektor kebocoran.
Torsi pengencangan
Diameter luar (mm)
( 1 N•m = 10 kgf•cm )
Untuk memeriksa kebocoran gas pada unit indoor, Periksa mur suar C dan D menggunakan detektor kebocoran Test kebocoran dengan nitrogen (sebelum katup dibuka) Dalam rangka untuk mendeteksi kebocoran refrigeran , sebelum melakukan vakum dan sirkulasi R-410A. Test Kebocoran (setelah katup pembukaan) Sebelum katup membuka, keluarkan semua nitrogen dari sistem dan lakukan vakum seperti pada halaman 47~48. Setelah membuka katup,periksa kebocoran menggunakan detektor kebocoran untuk refrigeran. Pump Down (sebelum melepaskan sambungan refrigeran untuk pemasangan unit, pemindahan atau pelepasan) Pump-down adalah operasi yang dimaksudkan untuk mengumpulkan semua sistem refrigerant dalam unit outdoor. Operasi ini harus dilakukan sebelum melepaskan tubing pendingin untuk menghindari kerugian efrigerant ke atmosfer. Mematikan katup cair dengan kunci Allen. Hidupkan sistem di dalam operasi kipas pendingin dengan kecepatan tinggi. (Compressor segera akan mulai, disediakan 3 menit berlalu sejak perhentian terakhir). Setelah 2 menit operasi, menutup katup hisap dengan kunci yang sama. Menghikan sistem off dan saklar listrick pasokan off. Putus tubing. Setelah pemutusan, melindungi katup dan berakhir tubing dari debu. Kompresor kerusakan mungkin terjadi jika berjalan pada tekanan hisap negatif.
Indonesian-49 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 49
2/16/2015 10:29:40 AM
Mengencangkan unit dalam ruang di tempatnya Lakukan pekerjaan berikut di tempat di mana uji kebocoran gas telah dilakukan sebelumnya.
Insulasi
Setelah anda memeriksa kebocoran gas dan tidak ada kebocoran pada sistem, Anda dapat menginsulasikan pipa, selang, kabel, dan menempatkan unit dalam pada plat instalasi. 1. Untuk mencegah masalah kondensasi, balut insulasi busa (seperti ditunjukkan gambar A) di komponen tanpa insulasi di ujung pipapipa.
Pipa
2. Gulung pipa, kabel perangkai, dan selang pembuangan dengan pita vinyl. 3. Letakkan gulungan tersebut (pipa, kabel perangkai, dan selang air) pada bagian bawah unit dalam dengan hati-hati sehingga tidakmenonjol dari belakang unit dalam. 4. Kaitkan unit dalam pada plat instalasi dan coba geser unit ke kanan dan kiri hingga terkunci pada tempatnya.
Plat instasi Pipa-pipa koneksi
Pita vinyl Kabel koneksi Selang air
• P astikan pipa tidak bisa bergerak saat unit dalam dipasang pada plat instalasi. 5. Balut sisa pipa dengan pita vinyl. 6. Pasang pipa di dinding menggunakan klem (opsional).
Mengencangkan unit luar ruang di tempatnya Unit luar harus dipasang pada tempat yang stabil dan kokoh untuk mencegah getaran dan kebisingan, terutama bila unit luar dipasang dekat dengan tetangga. Apabila harus dipasang di tempat yang banyak angin atau tinggi, unit luar harus dipasang apda penopang yang tepat (dinding atau lantai).
'Y' mm
'X' mm
Alas karet
1. Letakkan unit luar dengan arah aliran udara keluar seperti ditunjukkan oleh panah di bagian atas unit. 2. Pasang unit luar pada penopang yang tepat dengan menggunakan baut jangkar. 3. Apabila unit luar diletakkan di tempat dengan banyak angin, pasang plat pelindung di sekitarnya agar kipas dapat bekerja dengan baik.
Model 10 13 18 24
X 453 507 602 660
Y 254 292 310 340
• Amankan alas karet untuk menghindari timbulnya kebisingan dan getaran.
UNIT LUAR DIPASANG DI DINDING MENGGUNAKAN DUDUKAN • P astikan dinding dapat menopang berat dudukan dan unit luar; • Pasang dudukan sedekat mungkin dengan kolom; • Pasang grommet yang sesuai untuk mengurangi kebisingan dan sisa getaran yang diteruskan oleh unit luar pada dinding.
Dirancang untuk mengurangi getaran sisa dari unit luar ke dudukan. (tidak disertakan bersama produk)
Karet lunak dirancang untuk mengurangi getaran dari dudukan ke dinding. (tidak disert kan bersama produk)
Indonesian-50 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 50
2/16/2015 10:29:41 AM
Mode Smart Install (Penginstalan Cerdas) Model ini mendukung mode Smart Install (Penginstalan Cerdas) yang memeriksa status instalasi untuk menemukan apakah ada masalah terkait fungsi apa pun. Aktifkan mode Smart Install (Penginstalan Cerdas) setelah instalasi.
2. Saat penyejuk udara dalam status siaga, gunakan pengendali jarak jauh untuk memulai mode Smart Install (Penginstalan Cerdas). 1) Tekan tombol [SET], [Mode], [Power (Daya)] serentak selama 4 detik. ffMode Smart Install (Penginstalan Cerdas) dapat dioperasikan hanya dengan pengendali jarak jauh yang disediakan. ffRemote tidak dapat digunakan pada saat mode Smart Install.
07 INSTALASI
1. Periksa status instalasi penyejuk udara. 1) Periksa pasok daya, katup servis (apakah terbuka), kabel daya unit dalam ruang dan luar ruang dan jumlah bahan pendingin yang diperlukan untuk perpanjangan pipa. 2) Status indikator setelah daya teralirkan : status Standby (Siaga).
❋❋ Pengendali jarak jauh mungkin berbeda (gambar/fungsi) tergantung modelnya.
Indonesian-51 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 51
2/16/2015 10:29:42 AM
2) Mode Smart Install (Penginstalan Cerdas) sedang berlangsung • 88 (Tampilan 88) : Kemajuan akan ditampilkan dalam 0 ~ 99. • LED Display (Tampilan LED) : Indikator di tampilan unit dalam ruang akan berkedip berurutan lalu semua indikator akan berkedip. (Ini akan berulang.) TIPE
88 Display (Tampilan 88)
LED Display (Tampilan LED)
LED1 LED2 LED3
Indikator unit dalam ruang
❋❋ Tampilan mungkin berbeda tergantung modelnya. 3. Mode Smart Install (Penginstalan Cerdas) akan berakhir. 1) Mode Smart Install (Penginstalan Cerdas) akan butuh waktu sekitar 7~13 menit. (Waktu yang sebenarnya mungkin berbeda tergantung modelnya.) 2) Bila instalasi berhasil : Mode Smart Install (Penginstalan Cerdas) akan berakhir dengan suara berdering dan penyejuk udara akan berada dalam status siaga. (Pesan kesalahan tidak akan ditampilkan di indikator unit dalam ruang dan pengendali jarak jauh dan tombol di unit dalam ruang akan berfungsi normal.) 3) Bila instalasi tidak berhasil : Mode Smart Install (Penginstalan Cerdas) akan berakhir dan pesan kesalahan akan ditampilkan di tampilan unit dalam ruang. 1. Lakukan tindakan yang diperlukan saat terjadi kesalahan. - Baca manual servis untuk tindakan yang diperlukan untuk setiap kesalahan yang terjadi. 2. Gunakan produk setelah mengatasi kesalahan yang terjadi. Indikator kesalahan LED Display (Tampilan LED) Display (Tampilan [88])
LED 1
LED 2
LED 3 /
Kesalahan
Tindakan yang harus dilakukan oleh petugas penginstal
/ 1. Periksa kabel sambungan antara unit dalam dan luar Kesalahan komunikasi antara ruangan (apakah kabel daya dan kabel komunikasi unit dalam dan luar ruangan menyilang atau tidak). Kesalahan di sensor suhu dalam ruang
1. Periksa koneksi konektor
Kesalahan di penukar panas 1. Periksa koneksi konektor dalam ruang
,
Kesalahan di motor kipas dalam ruang
1. Periksa koneksi konektor 2. Buang benda asing (Periksa untuk penyebab yang menghambat motor) 1. Opsi atur ulang
Tampilan [88] dan semua kedipan lampu LED
Kesalahan EEPROM/Opsi
, 1. Periksa apakah katup servis terbuka sepenuhnya. Kesalahan karena aliran freon 2. Periksa apakah terdapat sumbatan pada pipa freon terhalang yang menghubungkan unit dalam dan luar ruangan. 3. Periksa apakah terjadi kebocoran freon.
Pola LED di atas akan ditampilkan bila terjadi kesalahan pada unit luar ruangan. Untuk rincian, periksa layar LED pada unit luar ruangan.
❋❋
: Off /
: Berkedip-kedip /
1. Periksa apakah freon tambahan dalam jumlah yang memadai telah diisi untuk pipa dengan panjang lebih Freon hampir habis dari 7,5 m. (Hanya untuk model inverter) 2. Periksa apakah terjadi kebocoran freon antara sambungan pipa dan katup.
: Aktif
Indonesian-52 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 52
2/16/2015 10:29:45 AM
Operasi periksa dan uji coba terakhir Untuk menyelesaikan instalasi, lakukan pemeriksaan berikut dan tes untuk memastikan bahwa AC beroperasi dengan benar.
1. Tekan tombol Power f
07 INSTALASI
Periksa berikut : • Kekuatan lokasi instalasi • kebenaran koneksi pipa untuk mendeteksi kebocoran gas • Sambungan kabel • Heat-tahan isolasi pipa • Pembuangan • Lakukan Grounding untuk sambungan konduktor • Operasi yang benar (ikuti langkah-langkah di bawah ini) dan peri ksa hal berikut:
Indikator lampu unit indoor. Pengarah aliran udara terbuka dan kipas bersiap untuk operasi.
2. Tekan tombol mode untuk memilih mode Cool atau Heat. f
Dalam mode Cool, gunakan Temp + atau - tombol untuk mengatur suhu pada 16 °C.
Dalam modus Heat, gunakan Temp + atau - tombol untuk mengatur suhu pada 30 °C.
• S ekitar 3~5 menit kemudian, outdoor unit akan mulai beroperasi dan udara diingin atau panas akan menyembur. • Setelah 12 menit kondisi stabil, periksa kondisi unit indoor. f
Mode Cool (cek Suhu masuk udara. unit indoor) - Suhu keluar udara: Dari 10 °C sampai 12 °C (delta T) Mode Heat (cek Suhu keluar udara. unit indoor) - Suhu masuk udara: Dari 11 °C sampai 14 °C (delta T)
Dalam Mode Heat, motor fan indoor dapat tetap mati untuk menghindari udara dingin ditiup ke tempat yang dikondisikan.
3. Tekan tombol Power Air Swing f
dan cek hal dibawah ini :
Pengarah aliran udara bekerja dengan baik.
4. Tekan tombol Power (Daya)
untuk menyetop operasi.
• K etika Anda telah menyelesaikan instalasi sukses, menyerahkan manual ini kepada pengguna untuk penyimpanan di praktis dan aman tempat.
Prosedur pompa turun (saat melepas produk) 1. Tekan tombol daya pada unit dalam /"indoor" selama 5 detik. Suara "beep" akan segera terdengar dan memberitahu bahwa produk siap untuk di jalankan. 2 . Kendurkan tudung katup pada sisi tekanan High (Tinggi) dan low (Rendah). 3 . Gunakan kunci inggris L untuk menutup katup pada sisi tekanan tinggi. 4 . Setelah sekitar 2 menit, tutup katup di bagian tekanan rendah. 5 . Hentikan pengoperasian AC dengan menekan tombol Power
pada unit indoor atau remote kontrol.
6 . Lepaskan pipa.
Indonesian-53 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 53
2/16/2015 10:29:46 AM
Cara menyambungkan kabel daya perpanjangan Anda Hal-hal yang perlu dipersiapkan (Tang pres dan isolasi tape harus dipersiapkan oleh teknisi yang memasang)
Alat Spec
Crimping pliers Selongsong penyambung (mm) MH-14
20xØ 7.0(HxOD)
Isolasi Tape
Selongsong kontraksi (mm)
Lebar 18 mm
50xØ 8.0(LxOD)
Bentuk 1. Seperti terlihat digambar, kupas lapisan kabel dari karet/kawat kabel power. - Kupas 20 mm pelapis kawat dari kabel yang sudah dipasang. • Setelah mengelupaskan pelapis kawat, kamu harus memasukan selongsong kontraksi
(Unit: mm) Kabel Power (disediakan kita)
20
20
20 60
120 180
Pelapis kawat kabel power 20
2. Masukan kedua ujung kawat dari kabel power kedalam selongsong penyambung. Selongsong penyambung 3. Dengan menggunakan Tang pres, tekan dua titik kemudian balikan dan tekan 2 titik lain di tempat yang sama. - Ukuran tang pres seharusnya 8.0. - Setelah ditekan, tarik ke dua sisi dari kawat untuk memastikan sambungannya sudah kuat.
Comp. dim.
Tekan 4 kali
5 mm
4. Bungkus sambungan tersebut dengan isolasi tape dua kali dan letakkan
Isolasi Tape
selongsong kontraksi di tengah-tengah isolasi tape. 5. Panaskan selongsong kontraksi untuk mengkontraksi sambungan tersebut.
40 mm Selongsong kontraksi
6. Setelah selongsong kontraksi selesai dikerjakan, bungkus sambungan tersebut dengan isolasi tape sampai selesai.
Isolasi Tape
• Pada saat kita menyambung kawat listrik, JANGAN menggunakan soket bulat - penyambungan kawat yang kurang baik akan menyebabkan kontak listrik atau kebakaran
Indonesian-54 SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 54
2/16/2015 10:29:47 AM
Specifikasi Model (No. Registrasi) Tipe
Unit dalam ruang
Model
No. Registrasi
AR10JVFNAWKNSE
I.15.SAMSUNG97.03704.1114
AR13JVFNAWKNSE
I.15.SAMSUNG97.03704.1114
AR18JVFNAWKNSE
I.15.SAMSUNG97.03704.1114
AR24JVFNAWKNSE
I.15.SAMSUNG97.03704.1114
AR10JVFNAWKXSE Unit luar ruang
AR13JVFNAWKXSE AR18JVFNAWKXSE
-
AR24JVFNAWKXSE
SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 55
2/16/2015 10:29:48 AM
QUESTIONS OR COMMENTS? COUNTRY
CALL
OR VISIT US ONLINE AT
INDONESIA
021-56997777 08001128888
www.samsung.com/id/support
MALAYSIA
1800-88-9999 603-77137477 (Overseas contact)
www.samsung.com/my/support
PHILIPPINES
1-800-10-7267864 [PLDT] 1-800-8-7267864 [Globe landline and Mobile] 02-4222111 [Other landline]
www.samsung.com/ph/support
SINGAPORE
1800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
www.samsung.com/sg/support
TAIWAN
0800-329999
www.samsung.com/tw/support
VIETNAM
1800 588 889
www.samsung.com/vn/support
MYANMAR
+95-01-2399-888
www.samsung.com/support
Importir: PT. Samsung Electronics Indonesia Jl. Jababeka Raya Blok F 29-33 Kawasan Industri Cikarang, Cikarang Bekasi 17530 DB68-05198A-01
SE_GOOD_A3050_IB&IM_IN_DB68-05198A-00_UX.indd 56
2/16/2015 10:29:48 AM
Features of your new air conditioner Cool Summer Offer On those hot sweltering summer days and long restless nights, there is no better escape from the heat than the cool comforts of home. Your new air conditioner brings an end to exhausting hot summer days and lets you rest. This summer, beat the heat with your own air conditioner.
Contents Safety precautions ......................................................................... 3 Checking before use ..................................................................... 7 Viewing the parts ........................................................................... 9 Cleaning and maintaining the air conditioner .............. 10 Troubleshooting .......................................................................... 13
Cost Efficient System Your new air conditioner not only provides maximum cooling power in the summer, but can also be an efficient heating method in the winter with the advanced “Heat pump” system. This technology is up to 300% more efficient than electrical heating, so you can further reduce its running cost. Now, meet year-round needs with one air conditioner.
Look for Everywhere The elegant and harmonious design gives priority to the aesthetics of your space and complements any of your existing interior decor. With its soft color and rounded-edge shape, the new air conditioner adds class to any room. Enjoy what your air conditioner offers both functionally and esthetically.
Compact and easy-to-use cassette type Designed to be installed into most types of suspended ceiling, the cassette type air conditioner is ideal for business and commercial accommodations. Fresh cool/warm air can be provided through the controllable 1, 2 or 4 sides of the unit. All functions of the air conditioner will be controlled easily via a remote control.
Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment) (Applicable in the countries with separate collection systems) This marking on the product, accessories or literature indicates that the product and its electronic accessories (e.g. charger, headset, USB cable) should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate these items from other types of waste and recycle them responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of where and how they can take these items for environmentally safe recycling. Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product and its electronic accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal.
2
Safety precautions Before using your new air conditioner, please read this manual thoroughly to ensure that you know how to safely and efficiently operate the extensive features and functions of your new appliance.
Important safety symbols and precautions:
WARNING
Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in severe personal injury or death.
CAUTION
Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in minor personal injury or property damage. Follow directions. Do NOT attempt. Make sure the machine is grounded to prevent electric shock. Unplug the power plug from the wall socket. Do NOT disassemble.
FOR INSTALLATION
WARNING
Use the power line with the power specifications of the product or higher and use the power line for this appliance only. In addition, do not use an extension line. Extending the power line may result in electric shock or fire. Do not use an electric transformer. It may result in electric shock or fire. If the voltage/frequency/rated current condition is different, it may cause fire. The installation of this appliance must be performed by a qualified technician or service company. Failing to do so may result in electric shock, fire, explosion, problems with the product, or injury. Install a switch and circuit breaker dedicated to the air conditioner. Failing to do so may result in electric shock or fire. Fix the outdoor unit firmly so that the electric part of the outdoor unit is not exposed. Failing to do so may result in electric shock or fire. Do not install this appliance near a heater, inflammable material. Do not install this appliance in a humid, oily or dusty location, in a location exposed to direct sunlight and water (rain drops). Do not install this appliance in a location where gas may leak. This may result in electric shock or fire. Never install the outdoor unit in a location such as on a high external wall where it could fall. If the outdoor unit falls, it may result in injury, death or property damage. This appliance must be properly grounded. Do not ground the appliance to a gas pipe, plastic water pipe, or telephone line. Failure to do so may result in electric shock, fire, an explosion, or other problems with the product. Never plug the power cord into a socket that is not grounded correctly and make sure that it is in accordance with local and national codes.
3
ENGLISH
Because the following operating instructions cover various models, the characteristics of your air conditioner may differ slightly from those described in this manual. If you have any questions, call your nearest contact center or find help and information online at www.samsung.com.
Safety precautions FOR INSTALLATION
CAUTION
Install your appliance on a level and hard floor that can support its weight. Failing to do so may result in abnormal vibrations, noise, or problems with the product. Install the draining hose properly so that water is drained correctly. Failing to do so may result in water overflowing and property damage. When installing the outdoor unit, make sure to connect the draining hose so that draining is performed correctly. The water generated during the heating operation by the outdoor unit may overflow and result in property damage. In particular, in winter, if a block of ice falls, it may result in injury, death or property damage.
FOR POWER SUPPLY
WARNING
When the circuit breaker is damaged, contact your nearest service center. Do not pull or excessively bend the power line. Do not twist or tie the power line. Do not hook the power line over a metal object, place a heavy object on the power line, insert the power line between objects, or push the power line into the space behind the appliance. This may result in electric shock or fire.
FOR POWER SUPPLY
CAUTION
When not using the air conditioner for a long period of time or during a thunder/lightning storm, cut the power at the circuit breaker. Failing to do so may result in electric shock or fire.
FOR USING
WARNING
If the appliance is flooded, please contact your nearest service center. Failing to do so may result in electric shock or fire. If the appliance generates a strange noise, a burning smell or smoke, unplug the power plug immediately and contact your nearest service center. Failing to do so may result in electric shock or fire. In the event of a gas leak (such as propane gas, LP gas, etc.), ventilate immediately without touching the power line. Do not touch the appliance or power line. Do not use a ventilating fan. A spark may result in an explosion or fire. To reinstall the air conditioner, please contact your nearest service center. Failing to do so may result in problems with the product, water leakage, electric shock, or fire. A delivery service for the product is not provided. If you reinstall the product in another location, additional construction expenses and an installation fee will be charged. Especially, when you wish to install the product in an unusual location such as in an industrial area or near the seaside where it is exposed to the salt in the air, please contact your nearest service center.
4
FOR USING
WARNING ENGLISH
Do not touch the circuit breaker with wet hands. This may result in electric shock. Do not strike or pull the air conditioner with excessive force. This may result in fire, injury, or problems with the product. Do not place an object near the outdoor unit that allows children to climb onto the machine. This may result in children seriously injuring themselves. Do not turn the air conditioner off with the circuit breaker while it is operating. Turning the air conditioner off and then on again with the circuit breaker may cause a spark and result in electric shock or fire. After unpacking the air conditioner, keep all packaging materials well out of the reach of children, as packaging materials can be dangerous to children. If a child places a bag over its head, it may result in suffocation. Do not insert your fingers or foreign substances into the outlet when the air conditioner is operating or the front panel is closing. Take special care that children do not injure themselves by inserting their fingers into the product. Do not touch the front panel with your hands or fingers during the heating operation. This may result in electric shock or burns. Do not insert your fingers or foreign substances into the air inlet/outlet of the air conditioner. Take special care that children do not injure themselves by inserting their fingers into the product. Do not use this air conditioner for long periods of time in badly ventilated locations or near infirm people. Since this may be dangerous due to a lack of oxygen, open a window at least once an hour. If any foreign substance such as water has entered the appliance, cut the power by unplugging the power plug and turning the circuit breaker off and then contact your nearest service center. Failing to do so may result in electric shock or fire. Do not attempt to repair, disassemble, or modify the appliance yourself. Do not use any fuse (such as cooper, steel wire, etc.)other than the standard fuse. Failing to do so may result in electric shock, fire, problems with the product, or injury.
FOR USING
CAUTION
Do not place objects or devices under the indoor unit. Water dripping from the indoor unit may result in fire or property damage. Check that the installation frame of the outdoor unit is not broken at least once a year. Failing to do so may result in injury, death or property damage. Max current is measured according to IEC standard for safety and current is measured according to ISO standard for energy efficiency.
5
Safety precautions FOR USING
CAUTION
Do not stand on top of the appliance or place objects (such as laundry, lighted candles, lighted cigarettes, dishes, chemicals, metal objects, etc.) on the appliance. This may result in electric shock, fire, problems with the product, or injury. Do not operate the appliance with wet hands. This may result in electric shock. Do not spray volatile material such as insecticide onto the surface of the appliance. As well as being harmful to humans, it may also result in electric shock, fire or problems with the product. Do not drink the water from the air conditioner. The water may be harmful to humans. Do not apply a strong impact to the remote controller and do not disassemble the remote controller. Do not touch the pipes connected with the product. This may result in burns or injury. Do not use this air conditioner to preserve precision equipment, food, animals, plants or cosmetics, or for any other unusual purposes. This may result in property damage. Avoid directly exposing humans, animals or plants from the air flow from the air conditioner for long periods of time. This may result in harm to humans, animals or plants. This appliance is not intended for use by persons (including children) with reduced physical, sensory or mental capabilities, or lack of experience and knowledge, unless they have been given supervision or instruction concerning use of the appliance by a person responsible for their safety. Children should be supervised to ensure that they do not play with the appliance.
FOR CLEANING
WARNING
Do not clean the appliance by spraying water directly onto it. Do not use benzene, thinner or alcohol to clean the appliance. This may result in discoloration, deformation, damage, electric shock or fire. Before cleaning or performing maintenance, unplug the air conditioner from the wall socket and wait until the fan stops. Failing to do so may result in electric shock or fire.
FOR CLEANING
CAUTION
Take care when cleaning the surface of the heat exchanger of the outdoor unit since it has sharp edges. To avoid cutting your fingers, wear thick cotton gloves when cleaning it. Do not clean the inside of the air conditioner by yourself. For cleaning inside the appliance, contact your nearest service center. When cleaning the internal filter, refer to the descriptions in the ‘Cleaning and maintaining the air conditioner’ section. Failure to do may result in damage, electric shock or fire.
6
Checking before use Operation ranges
NOTE
MODE
OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE
INDOOR TEMPERATURE
COOLING
-15°C/5°F to 50°C/122°F
18°C/64°F to 32°C/90°F
HEATING
-20°C/-4°F to 24°C/75°F
27°C/81°F or less
DRYING
-15°C/5°F to 43°C/109°F
18°C/64°F to 32°C/90°F
ENGLISH
The table below indicates the temperature and humidity ranges the air conditioner can be operated within. Refer to the table for efficient use. INDOOR HUMIDITY
80% or less
• T he standardized temperature for heating is 7˚C/45˚F. If the outdoor temperature drops to 0˚C/32˚F or below, the heating capacity can be reduced depending on the temperature condition. If the cooling operation is used at over 32˚C/90˚F (indoor temperature), it does not cool at its full capacity. • The use of the air conditioner at a relative humidity above the expected one (80%) may cause the formation of condensate and the leakage of water drops on the floor.
Maintaining your air conditioner Internal protections via the unit control system This internal protection operates if an internal fault occurs in the air conditioner.
Type
NOTE
Description
Against cold air
The internal fan will be off to against cold air when the heat pump is heating.
De-ice cycle (Defrost cycle)
The internal fan will be off to against cold air when the heat pump is heating.
Anti-protection of internal battery
The compressor will be off to protect internal battery when the air conditioner operates in Cool mode.
Protect compressor
The air conditioner does not start operating immediately to protect the compressor of the outdoor unit after it has been started.
• I f the heat pump is operating in Heat mode, De-ice cycle is actuated to remove frost from an outdoor unit that may have deposited at low temperatures. The internal fan is switched off automatically and restarted only after the de-ice cycle is completed.
7
Checking before use AA Tips on using air conditioner Here are some tips that you would follow when using your air conditioner.
8
TOPIC
RECOMMENDATION
Cooling
• If current outside temperatures are much higher than the selected indoor temperature, it may take time to bring the inner temperature to the desired coolness. • Avoid drastically turning down the temperature. Energy is wasted and the room does not cool faster.
Heating
• Since the air conditioner heats the room by taking heat energy from outdoor air, the heating capacity may decrease when outdoor temperatures are extremely low. If you feel the air conditioner insufficiently heats, using an additional heating appliance in combination with the air conditioner is recommended.
Frost & De-ice
• When the air conditioner runs in Heat mode, due to temperature difference between the unit and the outside air, frost will form. If this happens: - The air conditioner stops heating. - The air conditioner will operate automatically in De-ice mode for 10 minutes. - The steam produced on the outdoor unit in De-ice mode is safe. No intervention is required; after about 10 minutes, the air conditioner operates again normally. The unit will not operate when it starts to de-ice.
Fan
• Fan may not operate for about 3~5 minutes at the beginning to prevent any cold blasts while the air conditioner is warming up.
High indoor/outdoor temperatures
• If both indoor and outdoor temperatures are high and the air conditioner is running in Heat mode, the outdoor unit’s fan and compressor may stop at times. This is normal; wait until the air conditioner turns on again.
Power failure
• If a power failure occurs during the operation of the air conditioner, the operating immediately stops and unit will be off. When power returns, the air conditioner will run automatically.
Protection mechanism
• If the air conditioner has just been turned on after operation stops or being plugged in, cool/ warm air does not come out for 3 minutes to protect the compressor of the outdoor unit.
Automatic air flow blade control
• If the air conditioner is operating in abnormal conditions (such as operating the air conditioner with windows open or when small capacity indoor unit is installed and operating in a room that is too large) indoor can become very humid when the angle of the air flow blade is small and performance of the product may decrease. When indoor humidity increases, indoor unit will automatically detect it and open the air flow blade in wider angle to make sure that performance of the product is stable.
Viewing the parts AA Main parts ENGLISH
Air flow blade
Air intake Air filter (under the grille)
Display
Indicator
Remote control sensor Filter reset indicator Timer indicator Removing frost indicator On/Off operation indicator
NOTE
• Y our air conditioner and display may look slightly different from the illustration shown above depending on your model.
9
Cleaning and maintaining the air conditioner AA Cleaning the exterior Wipe the surface of the unit with a slightly wet or dry cloth when needed. Wipe off dirt of odd-shaped area by using a soft brush.
CAUTION
10
• D o not use Benzene or Thinner. They may damage the surface of the air conditioner and can create a risk of fire.
Cleaning air filter and grille Detach the front grille.
Open the blades on the left and right side of the
Remove the safety clip first and then remove the
Samsung logo. Press both of the levers and pull the grille downward. Two safety clips are mounted to the front grille to prevent it from dropping.
hinge. Pull the green switch on the hinge part down and then press and pull the hinge part to remove the grille. (There are two hinges on the grille and you must apply this step on both of them to remove the grille.)
If you want to clean the filter only, you do not have to detach the grille. Follow step 4 and 5
Clean the grille and Air filter with a vacuum cleaner or soft brush. If dust is too heavy, then rinse it with running water and dry it in a ventilated area. For best conditions, repeat every two weeks. If the Air filter dries in a confined (or humid) area, odors
may generate. If it occurs, re-clean and dry it in a well-ventilated area.
Pull out the Air filter.
Insert the Air filter back in its original position.
Attach the front grille.
You will hear a click sound when the Air filter is
Reverse the above steps to attach the front grille.
properly placed.
NOTE
• The illustration shown above may differ from yours depending on your model. • After cleaning the filter, press the Filter Reset button on the remote control for 2 seconds to reset the filter schedule. Filter sign indicator will be on for cleaning time. • If the angle on the air flow blades has been changed by user due to opening the front grille for installation or maintenance, you must turn off the circuit breaker and turn it on again before using the air conditioner. Otherwise, angles of the each angle can be different or some of the blade may not close when the product is off.
11
ENGLISH
Open the front grille.
Cleaning and maintaining the air conditioner AA If the air conditioner will not be used for an extended period of time, dry the air conditioner to maintain it in best condition. Dry the air conditioner thoroughly by operating in Fan mode for 3 to 4 hours and disconnect the power plug.
There may be internal damage if moisture is left in components.
Before using the air conditioner again, dry the inner components of the air conditioner again by running in Fan mode for 3 to
4 hours. This helps remove odors which may have generated from dampness.
Periodical checks Refer to the following chart to maintain the air conditioner properly. Type
Description Clean the air filter (1)
Indoor unit
Monthly
Every 4 months
Once a year
Clean the condensate drain pan (2)
Thoroughly clean the heat exchanger (2)
Clean the condensate drain pipe (2)
Replace the remote control batteries (1) Clean the heat exchanger on the outside of the unit (2)
Outdoor unit
Clean the heat exchanger on the inside of the unit (2)
Clean the electric components with jets of air (2)
Verify that all the electric components are firmly tightened (2)
Clean the fan (2)
Verify that all the fan assembly is firmly tightened (2)
Clean the condensate drain pan (2)
: This check mark requires checking the indoor/outdoor unit periodically, following to the description to maintain the air conditioner properly.
NOTE
12
(1) The described operations should be performed more frequently if the area of installation is very dusty. (2) These operations must always be performed by qualified personnel. For more detailed information, see the installation part in the manual.
Troubleshooting AA Refer to the following chart if the air conditioner operates abnormally. This may save time and unnecessary expenses. SOLUTION
The air conditioner does not operate immediately after it has been restarted.
• B ecause of the protective mechanism, the appliance does not start operating immediately to keep the unit from overloading. The air conditioner will start in 3 minutes.
The air conditioner does not work at all.
• C heck that the power plug is properly connected. Insert the power plug into the wall socket correctly. • Check if the circuit breaker is switched off. • Check if there is a power failure. • Check your fuse. Make sure it is not blown out.
The temperature does not change.
• C heck if you selected Fan mode. Press the Mode button on the remote control to select another mode.
The cool (warm) air does not come out of the air conditioner.
• C heck if the set temperature is higher (lower) than the current temperature. Press the Temperature button on the remote control to change the set temperature. Press the Temperature button to decrease or increase the temperature. • Check if the air filter is blocked by dirt. Clean the air filter every two weeks. • Check if the air conditioner has just been turned on. If so, wait 3 minutes. Cool air does not come out to protect the compressor of the outdoor unit. • Check if the air conditioner is installed in a place with a direct exposure to sunlight. Hang curtains on windows to boost cooling efficiency. • Check if the cover or any obstacle is not near the outdoor unit. • Check if the refrigerant pipe is too long. • Check if the air conditioner is only available in Cool mode. • Check if the remote control is only available for cooling model.
The fan speed does not change.
• C heck if you selected Auto or Dry mode. The air conditioner automatically adjusts the fan speed to Auto in Auto/Dry mode.
Timer function does not set.
• Check if you press the Power button on the remote control after you have set the time.
Odors permeate in the room during operation.
• C heck if the appliance is running in a smoky area or if there is a smell entering from outside. Operate the air conditioner in Fan mode or open the windows to air out the room.
The air conditioner makes a bubbling sound.
• A bubbling sound may be heard when the refrigerant is circulating through the compressor. Let the air conditioner operate in a selected mode. • When you press the Power button on the remote control, noise may be heard from the drain pump inside the air conditioner.
Water is dripping from the air flow blades.
• C heck if the air conditioner has been cooling for an extended period of time with the air flow blades pointed downwards. Condensation may generate due to the difference in temperature.
Remote control is not working.
• • • •
The air conditioner does not turn on or off with the wired remote control.
• Check if you set the wired remote control for group control.
The wired remote control does not operate.
• C heck if TEST indicator is displayed on the wired remote control. If so, turn off the unit and switch off the circuit breaker. Call your nearest contact center.
The indicators of the digital display flashes.
• P ress the Power button on the remote control to turn the unit off and switch the circuit breaker off. Then, switch it on again.
Check if your batteries are depleted. Make sure batteries are correctly installed. Make sure nothing is blocking your remote control sensor. Check that there are strong lighting apparatus near the air conditioner. Strong light which comes from fluorescent bulbs or neon signs may interrupt the electric waves.
13
ENGLISH
PROBLEM
QUESTIONS OR COMMENTS? COUNTRY
CALL
OR VISIT US ONLINE AT
RUSSIA
8-800-555-55-55
www.samsung.com/ru/support
BELARUS
810-800-500-55-500
www.samsung.com/support
GEORGIA
0-800-555-555
www.samsung.com/support
ARMENIA
0-800-05-555
www.samsung.com/support
AZERBAIJAN
0-88-555-55-55
www.samsung.com/support
KAZAKHSTAN
8-10-800-500-55-500 (GSM: 7799, VIP care 7700)
www.samsung.com/support
UZBEKISTAN
8-10-800-500-55-500
www.samsung.com/support
KYRGYZSTAN
8-10-800-500-55-500
www.samsung.com/kz_ru/support
TADJIKISTAN
8-10-800-500-55-500
www.samsung.com/support
MONGOLIA
7-495-363-17-00
www.samsung.com/support
UKRAINE
0-800-502-000
www.samsung.com/ua/support (Ukrainian) www.samsung.com/ua_ru/support (Russian)
MOLDOVA
0-800-614-40
www.samsung.com/support
SPAIN
0034902172678 [HHP] 0034902167267
www.samsung.com/es/support
SOUTH AFRICA
0860 SAMSUNG (726 7864)
www.samsung.com/support
4 Way Cassette Type
Air Conditioner user manual
This manual is made with 100% recycled paper.
imagine the possibilities Thank you for purchasing this Samsung product.
DB98-32152A-03
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 32
2013-10-21 오전 9:19:18
Wired Remote Control MWR-WE10
Air Conditioner user manual
imagine the possibilities Thank you for purchasing this Samsung product.
EN ES FR IT PT DE EL NL PL HU RU AR DB98-32810A(8)
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 33
2013-10-21 오전 9:19:18
Contents Preparation
Safety Precautions ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4 Part Names ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 6
Air Conditioner
Basic Operation of Air Conditioner ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 10 Air Swing ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 12 Indoor Temperature Checking Function ................................................................................................................................................................................ 12 Quiet/Sleep Operation .................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 13 Humidifying Operation ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 14 Blade Selection .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 14 Motion Detect Sensor ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 15 Outdoor Air Intake ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 15 Auto Cleaning Function .................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 16 S-Plasma Ion ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 16 CO2/Power Consumption Check ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 17
2
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 2
2013-10-21 오전 9:18:41
Ventilator(ERV)
ENGLISH
Basic Operation of Ventilator(ERV) ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 18 Energy Saving Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 20 Clean Up ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 20 S-Plasma Ion ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 21 External Interconnection Control .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 21 Exhaust Hood Interconnection Control .................................................................................................................................................................................. 21
Advanced Instruction
Weekly Schedule Setting ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 22 Setting Holidays during the Weekly Schedule .................................................................................................................................................................... 25 Canceling a Weekly Schedule ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 26 Initializing a Weekly Schedule ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 27
Setting Additional User Functions
How to Set the Additional User Functions ............................................................................................................................................................................ 28
3
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 3
2013-10-21 오전 9:18:41
PREPARATION
Safety Precautions This content is intended to protect the user’s safety and prevent property damage. Please read it carefully for correct use of the product.
WARNING
Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in severe personal injury or death.
CAUTION
Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in minor personal injury or property damage. Follow directions.
Unplug the power plug from the wall socket.
Do NOT attempt.
Do NOT disassemble.
Make sure the machine is grounded to prevent electric shock.
FOR INSTALLATION
WARNING
The installation of this appliance must be performed by a qualified technician or service company. Failing to do so may result in electric shock, fire, explosion, problems with the product, or injury. You must connect the product with rated power upon installation. Failing to do so may result in problems with the product, electric shock, or fire. Do not install this appliance near a heater, inflammable material. Do not install this appliance in a humid, oily or dusty location, in a location exposed to direct sunlight and water (rain drops). Do not install this appliance in a location where gas may leak. This may result in electric shock or fire.
FOR INSTALLATION
CAUTION
Install the product on a hard and even place that can support its weight. If the place cannot support its weight, the product may fall down and it may cause product damage.
FOR POWER SUPPLY
WARNING
Do not bend or pull the power cord excessively. Do not twist or tie up the power cord. This may result in electric shock or fire.
4
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 4
2013-10-21 오전 9:18:42
FOR OPERATION
WARNING ENGLISH
If the appliance generates a strange noise, a burning smell or smoke, stop the operation immediately and contact your nearest service center. Failing to do so may result in electric shock or fire. To reinstall the air conditioner, please contact your nearest service center. Failing to do so may result in problems with the product, water leakage, electric shock, or fire. A delivery service for the product is not provided. If you reinstall the product in another location, additional construction expenses and an installation fee will be charged. If the malfunction diagnosis indicator appears or malfunctions, then stop operation immediately. If you detect any burning smells from the product or it malfunctions, then immediately turn off the air conditioner/ Ventilator(ERV) and power, and then contact the service center. Continuing to use the device in this state can cause electrical shock, fire, or damage to the product. If the E8 36 indicator appears, then it means that it is time to contact the service center for periodic inspection. Neglecting these periodic inspections can result in malfunctions (only applicable to GHP model). Do not attempt to repair, disassemble, or modify the appliance yourself. Failing to do so may result in electric shock, fire, problems with the product, or injury.
FOR OPERATION
CAUTION
Do not allow water to enter the product. This may result in fire or electric shock. Do not operate the appliance with wet hands. This may result in electric shock. Do not spray volatile material such as insecticide onto the surface of the appliance. As well as being harmful to humans, it may also result in electric shock, fire or problems with the product. Do not apply a strong impact to the remote controller and do not disassemble the remote controller. Do not use this product for other purposes. This product is designed to only be used as a system air conditioner. Do not press the buttons with any sharp objects. This may result in electrical shock or part damage.
FOR CLEANING
WARNING
Do not clean the appliance by spraying water directly onto it. Do not use benzene, thinner, alcohol or acetone to clean the appliance. This may result in discoloration, deformation, damage, electric shock or fire.
5
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 5
2013-10-21 오전 9:18:42
Part Names Display ④
⑤ ⑨⑩
⑪
⑫⑬
⑭
① ②
⑮
③
⑯ ⑰ ⑱
⑥ ⑦
⑧
⑳ ⑲
LED Indicator
(Green : Normal / Red : Need to be checked)
Operation On/Off button Temperature Setting Button
• Without opening the cover of your Wired Remote Controller, you can turn the air-conditioner power On/Off or set the desired temperature.
6
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 6
2013-10-21 오전 9:18:42
Classification
Schedule related information
Ventilator (ERV) related information
Commom function related information
Function
①
Displays Air conditioner operation
②
Displays Quiet/Sleep operation
③
Displays Indoor temperature/Set temperature
④
Displays discharge temperature control
⑤
Displays CO2 /power consumption
⑥
Displays AC fan speed
⑦
Displays Blade selection
⑧
Displays Air swing(Up/Dn)
⑨
Weekly schedule/Holiday setting displays
⑩
Displays Current day() or scheduled day(_)
⑪
Displays Schedule number
⑫
Displays Scheduled device selection
⑬
Displays Current time/summer time/scheduled time
⑭
Displays Ventilator(ERV) operation
⑮
Displays Clean up
⑯
Displays Ventilator(ERV) fan speed
⑰
Displays Invalid operation /Filter cleaning (filter cleaning period)
⑱
Displays Dust box cleaning alert/check/partial locking/full locking
⑲
Displays Motion detect sensor/Exhaust hood/External interconnection control/Auto clean/ Humidifying/Energy saving/Outdoor air supply intake/ Centralized control
⑳
Displays S-Plasma Ion
Displays Indoor CO2 density
Displays Indoor humidity
Displays remaining time of the auto stop time/ERV delay time - Solid : Hour unit, Blinking : Minute unit Displays Demand Response Mode during a Demand Response Event : , , (NS HHXEG/XSA)
ENGLISH
Air Conditioner Related Information
Indication
7
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 7
2013-10-21 오전 9:18:45
Part Names Buttons
⑫ ⑨ ⑧ ① ②
⑱ ⑬ ⑮ ⑳
③ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦
④ ⑪ ⑩ ⑯⑲ ⑭ Classification
Button
① ②
Mode button
Air Conditioner ④ Related Information ⑤
Function Operation On/Off button
③
⑰
Turns the air conditioner power On/Off Selects the desired air conditioner operation
Temperature setting Sets the desired temperature button Fan speed button
Changes the air conditioner’s fan speed
Air Swing button
Changes the air flow direction to move upward or downward
⑥
Temp. button
⑦
Quiet/Sleep button
⑧
Humidity button
Checks the indoor temperature Selects Quiet or Sleep operation for the air conditioner Turns the MINI AHU indoor unit humidifying function On/Off
8
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 8
2013-10-21 오전 9:18:46
Classification ⑨
Motion detect sensor Selects when no one is detected in an indoor area, when the air conditioner button needs to be turned off automatically, when the AWAY operation is set; Outdoor air intake
Select the MINI AHU indoor unit Outdoor intake function
Schedule Button
Select the schedule setting function
⑬
User Set Button
Select the detailed setting function
Navigational buttons Move between items or change the item value
⑮
Set button
Save your new settings
⑯
ESC button
Return to general mode from schedule and detailed setting screens
⑰
Delete button
⑱
Auto Clean button
Use the auto cleaning function for your air conditioner
⑲
CO2/[kWh] button
Display the amount of CO2 and the power consumption
⑳
Filter Reset button
Turn off the filter cleaning displays (filter using time reset)
Ventilator (ERV) Related Buttons
Selects a blade for individual control
⑫
⑭
Special Function Displays
Function Blade button
ENGLISH
Air Conditioner ⑩ Related Information ⑪
Button
Cancel the schedule setting
S-Plasma Ion button Choose the S-Plasma Ion function
Operation On/Off button
Mode button
Fan speed button
E.Saver button
Clean up button
Turn the Ventilator(ERV) On/Off Select the desired operation for the Ventilator(ERV) Change the fan speed for your Ventilator(ERV) Begin Energy Saving Operation Select air purification through the in/out load controls
• After cleaning the filter, please press the Filter Reset button. The lamp will turn off, and it will be turned on again upon the next cleaning period. lamp will turn • If you press a functional button not supported by the indoor unit, then the on. • If the temperature display setting is set to indoor temperature and you press the Temp. button, the lamp display will appear. (When you install the Wired Remote Controller, the setting is available.) • If you press the On/Off button when your Ventilator(ERV) is connected to a Wired Remote Controller, then the air conditioner and the Ventilator(ERV) might operate or stop at the same time or only the air conditioner might operate or stop. The factory setting is set to simultaneous operation/stop. (When you install the Wired Remote Controller, the setting is available.) • Although the air conditioner and the Ventilator(ERV) are set to simultaneous operation/stop, you can individually control the air conditioner and the Ventilator(ERV) by using another controller (e.g. wireless remote controller, central controller, S-net mini) except for a Wired Remote Controller.
9
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 9
2013-10-21 오전 9:18:48
AIR CONDITIONER
Basic Operation of Air Conditioner Basic operations can be selected after pressing the Mode button.
Auto This function allows you to automatically adjust the temperature and the fan speed to maximize your comfort. • When the indoor temperature is very high, the device will produce a strong, cold wind. When the temperature cools down, then weaker wind will be produced.
Cool This is a frequently used operation that allows you to adjust the fan speed, temperature, and wind direction the way you like. • If you select heating operation during cooling operation, then the cooling operation is canceled.
Dry This operation effectively removes all excess humidity so that you can feel refreshed during rainy days.
Fan This operation produces wind, just like a powerful fan, so that you can enjoy a refreshing breeze.
Heat This function produces warm wind so that you can use it in the fall or winter. • Immediately after starting the heating operation, the air conditioner system may stop producing any wind at all for a while to avoid generating any cold wind. • Defrost indicator (Defrost) - If you start removing frost from the outdoor unit during heating operation, the indicator will turn on. When defrosting is over, the indicator will turn off. (When the frost is being removed, the indoor unit does not generate any breeze.) • If you stop the air conditioner after the heating operation, the air conditioner will produce some wind to discharge all the heat from the indoor unit. • If you select the cooling operation during heating operation, then the heating operation is canceled.
10
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 10
2013-10-21 오전 9:18:48
ENGLISH
Press the
button to begin operating the air conditioner.
Press the
button to select the desired operation.
Press the
button to select a fan speed. Auto Cool Dry
(Auto) (Low) ,
(Medium),
(High),
(Auto)
Fan
(Low) ,
(Medium),
(High)
Heat
(Low) ,
(Medium),
(High),
Press the
(Auto)
(Auto)
button to set the desired temperature. Auto
You can adjust the desired temperature by 1°C(1°F) within a range of 18°C~30°C(65°F~86°F).
Cool Dry Fan Heat
You can adjust the desired temperature by 1°C(1°F) within a range of 18°C~30°C(65°F~86°F). You can adjust the desired temperature by 1°C(1°F) within a range of 18°C~30°C(65°F~86°F). You can’t change the desired temperature. You can adjust the desired temperature by 1°C(1°F) within a range of 16°C~30°C(61°F~86°F).
11
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 11
2013-10-21 오전 9:18:50
Air Swing This function allows you to shift the air flow direction up and down.
Press the Air Swing
button to tilt the blade up and down.
Press the Air Swing button one more time to set the air flow direction, when the blade reaches the desired position. The up/down tilting of the blade will stop in place.
• With the duct type indoor unit, the air flow direction cannot be adjusted. If you press the Air Swing button, the lamp will appear.
Indoor Temperature Checking Function This function allows you to check the current indoor temperature.
Press the Indoor Temp. button to check the current indoor temperature.
The current indoor temperature will be displayed.
3 seconds after displaying the indoor temperature, the set temperature will appear.
• Indoor unit temperature will be indicated by 0.5°C(1°F) units. • Depending on the installation location of your Wired Remote Controller, the current indoor temperature can be different. • If the temperature display setting is set to indoor temperature and you press the Temp. button, then the lamp will appear.
12
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 12
2013-10-21 오전 9:18:52
Quiet / Sleep Operation Quiet operation reduces noise of the operation and with sleeping operation you can have the air conditioner turn off automatically after six hours without stopping the operation in the middle of the night.
Press the Quiet/Sleep button to select the desired operation. ENGLISH
If the air conditioner has both quiet and sleep operation function. Auto
Quiet
Cancel is repeated.
Cool
Quiet
Sleep
Dry
Quiet
Cancel is repeated.
Fan
Restricted lamp will appear.
Heat
Quiet
Sleep
Quiet/Sleep
Quiet/Sleep
Cancel is repeated.
Cancel is repeated.
If the air conditioner has quiet operation function only. Auto
Quiet
Cancel is repeated.
Cool
Quiet
Cancel is repeated.
Dry
Quiet
Cancel is repeated.
Fan
Restricted lamp will appear.
Heat
Quiet
Cancel is repeated.
If the air conditioner has sleep operation function only. Auto
Restricted lamp will appear.
Cool
Sleep
Dry
Restricted lamp will appear.
Fan
Restricted lamp will appear.
Heat
Sleep
Cancel is repeated.
Cancel is repeated.
• If the air conditioner does not support the quiet and sleep will appear when you press Quiet/Sleep operation, button.
13
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 13
2013-10-21 오전 9:18:53
Humidifying Operation This function allows you to use the humidifying operation of MINI AHU indoor unit when the Wired Remote Controller is connected to MINI AHU indoor unit. Increase the moisture of dry indoor air and adjust the indoor humidity for a more refreshing indoor environment.
While the air conditioner is on, press the Humidity button to begin the humidifying operation. will be displayed and the humidifying operation will start.
Cancel
Press the Humidity button one more time.
• If the indoor unit is turned off or it does not support humidifying operation, and you have pressed the Humidity button, then the lamp will be displayed.
Blade Selection Select only the desired blade to set Air Swing function.
When the air conditioner is on 1. Press the Blade button to select a blade to set the wind direction. f
Each time you press the button, it will toggle between → → → → .
f
The number corresponding to the selected blade will blink.
2. Press the Air Swing
button to select the up/down direction of the selected blade.
• Depending on the individual setting, a different blade could be selected. • If the indoor unit is off or the blade selection function is not supported, and you have pressed the Blade button, then the lamp will be displayed.
14
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 14
2013-10-21 오전 9:18:54
Motion Detect Sensor Automatically turn off the power when there is nobody in the room.
Press the MDS button to use the motion detection function.
operation. Cancel
will be displayed and the motion detection function will begin
ENGLISH
Press the MDS button one more time.
When the wired remote controller is connected with a duct
will be displayed and AWAY operation will operate.
• If an indoor unit does not support MDS or AWAY operation, but you press the MDS button, the lamp will be displayed.
Outdoor Air Intake When a Wired Remote Controller is connected to the MINI AHU indoor unit, you can use Air Intake function for the MINI AHU indoor unit.
When the air conditioner is on, press the OA Intake button to select the outdoor air intake function.
Cancel
will be displayed and the function will begin operation. Press the OA Intake button one more time.
• If the indoor unit is off or the outdoor air intake function is not supported, and you have pressed the OA Intake button, then the lamp will appear.
15
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 15
2013-10-21 오전 9:18:56
Auto Cleaning Function This function will automatically clean the filter equipped inside the air conditioner.
Press the Auto Clean button to select the auto cleaning function.
Cancel
will be displayed and the auto cleaning function will start. Press the Auto Clean button one more time.
• If the indoor unit does not support the auto cleaning function, and you have pressed the Auto Clean button, then the lamp will appear. • When the auto clean function is operating arbitrarily according to the indoor unit operation, will be displayed.
S-Plasma Ion Eliminate all the viruses, fungi, and even active oxygen in your indoor air.
When the air conditioner is on, press the S-Plasma Ion
Cancel
button to select the S-Plasma Ion function.
will be displayed and the S-Plasma Ion function is activated. Press the S-Plasma Ion
button one more time.
• If the indoor unit is turned off or the S-Plasma Ion is not supported, and you have pressed the S-Plasma Ion button, then the lamp will appear. • This button may not operate in an Ventilator(ERV), but it will be displayed if the S-Plasma Ion is installed for operation in an Ventilator(ERV).
16
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 16
2013-10-21 오전 9:18:58
CO2/Power Consumption Check Displays the amount of CO2 generated to produce the power required for air conditioner operation and the amount of power consumption.
When the air conditioner is on Press the [CO2/kWh] button twice.
[Press the [CO2/kWh] button three times.
The amount of generated The power consumption is The desired temperature is displayed. displayed. CO2 is displayed.
ENGLISH
Press the [CO2/kWh] button once.
Press the [CO2/kWh] button once. • If you don't press any button for 10 seconds, the desired temperature will be displayed. • If the indoor unit is turned off or the CO2[kg]/[kWh] display is not supported, and you have pressed the CO2/[kWh] button, then the lamp will appear. Press the [CO2/kWh] button twice.
17
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 17
2013-10-21 오전 9:18:59
VENTILATOR (ERV)
Basic Operation of Ventilator(ERV) Basic operations can be selected by pressing the Mode button.
Heat-EX Energy loss is minimized by recovering energy exhausted when indoor heating or cooling.
Quiet Reduce the noise generated from Ventilator(ERV) operation.
Outing This function allows you to operate the Ventilator(ERV) while you are away from home. • If the operational status is changed by another controller, the Outing Operation is canceled.
By-Pass This activates the intake of external air so that it comes indoors.
Auto This can be automatically adjusted depending on the degree of pollution in your indoor air.
Purifier This cleans and purifies your air. • You can use this function after connecting the Ventilator(ERV) to the IAQ.
Heat-EX/Purifier This can simultaneously operate the Heat-ex mode with purifier mode.
By-Pass/Purifier This function can clean the air through an intake of fresh external air. Intake fresh air will be purified at the same time when this function is used.
Auto/Purifier This function can automatically perform Ventilator(ERV) and cleaning at the same time.
18
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 18
2013-10-21 오전 9:18:59
ENGLISH
Press the
button to begin the Ventilator(ERV) operation.
Press the
button to select the desired operation.
• The following operation can only take place if all the options for your Ventilator(ERV) are selected. (When you install the Wired Remote Controller, the setting is available.)
Press the
button to change the fan speed.
Heat-EX Quiet Outing
(High) ▷
(Turbo) ▷
(Low)
Can’t change the fan speed. (Low)
By-Pass
(High) ▷
(Turbo) ▷
(Low)
Auto
(High) ▷
(Turbo) ▷
(Low) (Auto) ▷
Purifier
(High) ▷
(Turbo) ▷
Heat-EX/Purifier
(High) ▷
(Turbo) ▷
(Low)
By-Pass/Purifier
(High) ▷
(Turbo) ▷
(Low)
Auto/Purifier
(High) ▷
(Turbo) ▷
(Low)
※ After installing a CO2 sensor in your Ventilator(ERV), you can select from (Auto)▹ (Low). (Exception : Quiet Operation, Outing Operation)
(Low)
(High) ▹
(Turbo)▹
19
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 19
2013-10-21 오전 9:19:03
Energy Saving Operation Reduce your power consumption and save money on your electric bill.
Press the E.Saver button to select Power Saving Operation. When the ventilator (ERV) and the air conditioner is connected together
This function compares the outdoor and indoor temperatures, and then automatically selects Heat-EX operation or By-Pass operation.
When the ventilator (ERV) is installed individually (Setting On/Off alternating operation)
The ventilator (ERV) will turn On and Off in Quiet (Low) mode every 30 minutes.
When the ventilator (ERV) is installed individually (Setting outdoor air cooling operation for different temperature setting)
Temperature can be adjusted with Temperature setting button.
Either Heat-EX or By-Pass mode will be selected and operate depending on the set temperature.
Cancel
Press the E.Saver button one more time. • Energy Saving Operation may not activate when central control, external control, or a exhaust hood is used. • When the Air conditioner is connected individually, Energy Saving Operation is not available.
Clean Up Prevent odor and dust from getting in to the area where you are by making the airflow input bigger than the airflow output.
When the ventilator(ERV) is on, press the Clean Up button to select the clean up function.
Cancel
is displayed and the clean up function is activated. Press the Clean Up button one more time.
• If the ventilator(ERV) is on or the clean up function is not supported, and you have pressed the Clean Up button, then the lamp will appear.
20
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 20
2013-10-21 오전 9:19:04
S-Plasma Ion Using the Virus Doctor function, you can remove virus, fungi, and even active oxygen.
If the S-Plasma Ion function is installed in your ventilator(ERV) or indoor unit, then will be displayed and the S-Plasma Ion function will begin operation. ENGLISH
External Interconnection Control
When connecting an ventilator(ERV) to the indoor unit of the air conditioner, you can turn your ventilator(ERV) on or off depending on whether the indoor unit’s on or off.
Even during the external controls, you can use your remote controller to control ventilator(ERV).
Exhaust Hood Interconnection Control
When the ventilator(ERV) or MINI AHU indoor operates in another mode, it will be indicated if the Exhaust hood interconnection is achieved. If you change operation during Exhaust hood interconnection, the newly selected operation will appear on the screen.
You cannot control the Exhaust hood with your remote controller.
21
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 21
2013-10-21 오전 9:19:05
ADVANCED INSTRUCTION
Weekly Schedule Setting You can select a day and time to start and stop operation. 1. Press the Schedule button. (weekly) will be displayed. At that time, press the [∧]/[∨] buttons to select ‘weekly’ from the option of ‘weekly’ and ‘holiday’.
f
2. Press the [＞] button and select the 'Day' for your schedule. You can press the [∧]/[∨] buttons to select a scheduled day (Sun~Sat).
f
• You can select many days for multiple schedules. In this case, you should directly move to “Schedule Device” selection without selecting a schedule number. 3. Until your reservation number is displayed, press the [＞] button to select a “Schedule Number.” f Press the [∧]/[∨] buttons to select a Schedule Number (1~6). f If no schedule is chosen, then the edge of the box for the schedule number and the schedule number will blink. • If the schedule is already set , then the square boxes surrounding the schedule number will blink. If you want to change it, then select a schedule number. 4. Press the [＞] button and select 'Schedule Device.' Press the [∧]/[∨] buttons repeatedly to select a device setting from among Air Conditioner + Ventilator(ERV), Air Conditioner, or Ventilator(ERV). f You can only select a Schedule Device that is connected. f
Refer to the table below for the setting order according to the option of schedule device. Classification Air-conditioner + Ventilator(ERV) Air-conditioner Ventilator(ERV)
Setting order 5 6 ... 15 5 6 ... 11 14 15 5 ... 8 12 ... 15
5. After pressing the [＞] button, select 'AM/PM.' Press the [∧]/[∨] buttons to select AM or PM for the time.
f
22
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 22
2013-10-21 오전 9:19:07
6. After pressing the [＞] button, select the 'Hour.' f Press the [∧]/[∨] button to select the hour setting for the time. ENGLISH
7. After pressing the [＞] button, select the 'Minute.' f Press the [∧]/[∨] button to select the minute setting for the time.
8. After pressing the [＞] button, select the “On/Off” schedule. f Press the [∧]/[∨] buttons repeatedly to select either On or Off. f If you select ’Off’, follow 14 15.
9. After pressing the [＞] button, select the Air Conditioner Related Operation Mode. You can only use this for air conditioner on-operation scheduling. f Press the [∧]/[∨] buttons repeatedly to select from (Auto)(Cool) (Dry)(Fan)(Heat) operation. Depending on the option setting, automatic or heating operation sometimes cannot be selected. (When you install the Wired Remote Controller, the setting is available.) f
10. Press the [＞] button and select the desired temperature. f You can only use this for air conditioner on-operation scheduling. f Press the [∧]/[∨] buttons repeatedly to set the temperature by 1°C(1°F). If fan operation is selected, you can’t set the desired temperature.
23
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 23
2013-10-21 오전 9:19:09
Weekly Schedule Setting 11. After pressing the [＞] button, select a fan speed. f You can only use this for air conditioner on-operation scheduling or when the operational mode is in Cool/Fan/Heat. f Press the [∧]/[∨] buttons repeatedly to toggle the fan speed in order of (Low )(Medium)(High)(Auto). If Auto operation or Dry operation is selected, then you can’t set the fan speed. 12. After pressing the [＞] button, select the ventilator(ERV) related operation mode. f You can only use this for Heat-Ex on-operation scheduling. f Press the [∧]/[∨] button, select the ERV related operation mode: (Heat EX)(Quiet)(Outing)(Bypass)(Auto)(Purifier) (Heat-Ex / Purifier)(By-Pass / Purifier)(Auto / Purifier) 13. After pressing the [＞] button, select a fan speed for ventilator(ERV). You can only use this for Heat-Ex on-operation scheduling. f Press the [∧]/[∨] buttons repeatedly to set the fan speed, in order of (High)(Turbo)(Medium). f
14. Press the Set button to complete the weekly schedules. f '_' is displayed for the selected day, and it will be saved in three seconds. [e.g. when Monday is reserved ( ) ] f If you need to make additional schedules, start again from the weekly and holiday screen. 15. Press the Esc button to exit to By-Pass mode. • If you want to cancel your weekly schedules while you are setting them, then press the Esc button. • If “centralize control” is set, then you can still set a weekly schedule, but it won’t be actually executed.
24
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 24
2013-10-21 오전 9:19:10
Setting Holidays during the Weekly Schedule You can select holidays during the weekly schedule. If you set the holiday, the set weekly schedule function will not operate. 1. Press schedule button. (schedule) will be displayed, press [∧]/[∨] button to select ‘Holiday’ from the option of ‘weekly’ and ‘holiday’.
ENGLISH
f
2. Press [＞] button and select the ‘Day’ for the holiday during the weekly schedule. f
You can select the holidays (Sun~Sat) by pressing [∧]/[∨] button. • You can select several days for multiple settings.
3. Press Set button to complete the holiday of weekly schedule setting.
4. Press the Esc button to exit to By-Pass mode. • If you want to cancel your holiday of weekly schedule while you are setting them, press the ESC button. • You can set the holidays only with the dates with weekly indicator '_'. • The weekly indicator '_' of the dates set as holidays will disappear on the display.
25
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 25
2013-10-21 오전 9:19:12
Canceling a Weekly Schedule You can cancel your weekly schedule. 1. Press the Schedule button. f
(Schedule) is displayed and (Weekly) will blink.
2. After pressing the [＞] button, select 'Day' to cancel. f
You can press the [∧]/[∨] button to select a scheduled day.
3. After pressing the [＞] button, select a 'schedule number' to cancel. f
Press the [∧]/[∨] button to select a schedule number (1~6).
4. Press Delete button to cancel the weekly schedule setting you made.
5. Press Set button to save the cancellation of your weekly schedule.
6. Press the Esc button to exit to general mode.
26
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 26
2013-10-21 오전 9:19:13
Initializing a Weekly Schedule You can initialize all the weekly schedules set in your Wired Remote Controller. 1. Press the Delete button for five seconds. f
All the weekly schedule settings will be erased. ENGLISH
• You can’t restore your old settings after deleting the weekly schedule by pressing the Delete button, so be careful when you use this function.
27
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 27
2013-10-21 오전 9:19:14
SETTING ADDITIONAL USER FUNCTIONS
How to Set the Additional User Functions SEG Used Main menu Sub-menu
12 34
56
When entering the smart tuning mode, auto fan speed will be displayed (Main menu 8).
1. If you want to set the detailed settings, press the User Set button. f
You will enter the User Set mode, and the [Main Menu] will be displayed.
2. Refer to the Wired Remote Controller’s User Set list on the next page to select the desired menu. Using the [∧]/[∨] buttons, select a main menu number and press the [＞] button to enter the sub-menu setting screen. f Using the [∧]/[∨] buttons, select a sub-menu number and press the [＞] button to enter the data setting screen. f Once you have entered the setting screen, the current setting will be displayed. f Refer to the chart for data setting. f Using the [∧]/[∨] buttons, change the settings and press the [＞] button to move to the next setting. f Press the Set button to save the setting and exit to the sub-menu setting screen. f Press the Esc button to exit to general mode. f
• While setting the data, you can use the [＞]/[＜] buttons to set the range of SEG used. • While configuring the setting, press the Esc button to exit to the sub-menu setting screen without saving the setting.
28
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 28
2013-10-21 오전 9:19:14
2
1 2 1 2
5
3 4 5
6
7 8 0
SEG Used
Default
Range
Unit
Auto stop time setting/checking 1,2 Lower Limit 1,2 Upper Limit 3,4 All locking 1 Lock of Operation 2 On/Off button Lock of operation 3 selection button Lock of temperature Lock of partial button 4 setting button Lock of fan speed 5 button Lock of schedule 6 setting button Current Temperature Setting (Year, Month, Date) 1,2/3,4/5,6 Day/AM/ Current Time Setting (Day, Hour, Minute) PM/1,2/3,4 Use of summer time 1 Summer Time Use and (Y/N) Setting Methods Summer Time 2 Application Method Summer time use (Weekly) 1,2/4 Start (? Month, ? th Sunday) Summer time use (Weekly) 1,2/4 End (? Month, ? th Sunday)
0 16(61) 30(86) 0
0~12 hours 16~30°C (61~86°F) 18~30°C (65~86°F) 0-Unlock, 1-Lock
1 hour 1°C(1°F) 1°C(1°F) -
0
0-Unlock, 1-Lock
-
0
0-Unlock, 1-Lock
-
0
0-Unlock, 1-Lock
-
0
0-Unlock, 1-Lock
-
Temp limits [°C(°F)]
3
4
Functions
Summer time use (Daily) Start (? Month, ? th Sunday) Summer time use (Daily) End (? Month, ? th Sunday) Backlight Time Setting/Checking Use of LED(Green) (Y/N) Use of LED (Red) (Y/N) Ventilator (ERV) delay Ventilator(ERV) Delay time setting/checking Application (Y/N) [When using Ventilator Delay Time (ERV) interlocking control] Smart tuning Reset to user mode defaults (except the current time)
0
0-Unlock, 1-Lock
-
10/01/01 Friday/ PM/12/00
00~99/1~12/1~31
YY,MM,DD Day, hour, minute
Sun~Sat/AM~PM/0~12/0~59
0
0-No use, 1-Use
-
0
0- Weekly,1- Daily
-
03/F 10/F
1~12th month/ 1~4,F (last week)th week 1~12 month/ 1~4,F (last week)th week
ENGLISH
Main Sub Menu menu 1
-
1,2/3,4
03/22
Jan~Dec/1~31st day
1,2/3,4
09/22
Jan~Dec/1~31st day
1,2 3 4
5 1 1
0~30 sec 0-No use, 1-Use 0-No use, 1-Use
Month, date Month, date 1 sec -
1
0
0-No use, 1-Use
-
3,4
30
30~60 minutes
1 minute
1,2
0
-2~+2
1
1
0
0-No use, 1-Reset
-
• ‘NONE’ will be displayed if the indoor unit does not support the function. In some cases, the setting may not possible or it may be not applied though it is set on the unit. • Summer time: Practice of temporarily advancing clocks during the summertime.
29
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 29
2013-10-21 오전 9:19:14
How to Set the Additional User Functions Current Time Setting (Example) 1. Press the User Set button. f
(Main Menu) will be displayed, and you can press the [∧]/[∨] buttons to select No. 4, which will set the current time.
2. Press the [＞] button to select 'Year, Month, Date' in the [Sub-menu]. f
Press the [∧]/[∨] buttons to select No. 1. You can modify the year/month/ date setting.
3. Press the [＞] button to select the 'Year'. f
Press the [∧]/[∨] buttons to select the year ('00~'99).
4. Press the [＞] button to select the 'Month'. f
Press the [∧]/[∨] buttons to select month(01~12).
5. Press the [＞] button to select the 'Date'. f
Press the [∧]/[∨] buttons to select date(01~31).
6. Press the Set button to complete your setting of 'Year, Month, Date'. f
The setting changes will be applied and you can exit to the sub-menu.
30
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 30
2013-10-21 오전 9:19:16
f
Press the [∧]/[∨] buttons to select no. 2. You can set the 'day, AM/PM, hour, minute'.
ENGLISH
7. In the sub-menu, select 'day, AM/PM, hour, minute'.
8. Press the [＞] button to select the 'Day'. f
Press the [∧]/[∨] buttons to select day (Sun~Sat).
9. Press the [＞] button to select 'AM or PM'. f
Press the [∧]/[∨] buttons to toggle between AM and PM.
10. Press the [＞] button to select the 'Hour'. f
Press the [∧]/[∨] buttons to select the hour (01~12).
11. Press the [＞] button to select the 'Minute'. f f Press the [∧]/[∨] buttons to select minute (00~59).
12. By pressing the Set button, you can complete modifying the setting for the current time. f f
The setting changes are applied and you can exit to general mode.
13. Press the Esc button to exit to general mode.
31
MWR-WE10_유선리모콘_EN_IB_32810A(8).indd 31
2013-10-21 오전 9:19:17
SARULLA GEOTHERMAL POWER PROJECT
3. AIR FILTER UNIT
Installation, Operation & Maintenance Instructions
PureAir Filtration Side Access Housing (SAH)
Pure Air Filtration, LLC 6050 Peachtree Pkwy, Suite 240-187 Norcross, GA 30092 U.S.A. Telephone: +1 (678-935-1431)
LIST OF FIGURES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 PRE-INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
TITLE
1.1 SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
1
COMMERCIAL
1.2 RECEIVING INSTRUCTIONS
2
INDUSTRIAL
1.3 INSPECTION 1.4 STORAGE 1.5 FOUNDATIONS AND CLEARANCES
2.0 BASIC DESIGN OF THE SAH
3.0 INSTALLATION 3.1 POSITIONING THE UNIT 3.2 MODULES 3.3 PARTICULATE FILTERS 3.4 POST-START INSPECTION/CHECK
4.0 MAINTENANCE 4.1 REPLACEMENT PARTS AND MATERIALS 4.2 MEDIA REPLACEMENT
5.0 SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS
6.0 ADSORBENT STAIN REMOVAL
7.0 WARRANTY INFORMATION
8.0 TROUBLE SHOOTING
9.0 SAMPLING RECORD
2
FIGURE
SAH SCHEMATIC SAH SCHEMATIC
1.0 PRE-INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
1.1 SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS •
•
•
Read this Service Manual carefully. Be thoroughly familiar with the controls and the proper use of the equipment. This manual should be retained with the unit because it contains the information necessary for proper maintenance. There is a pocket envelope provided for this purpose. Attach it permanently to the unit. Keep all nuts, bolts, and screws tight to be sure the equipment is in safe working condition.
CAUTION: •
Installer should be a trained, experienced service person.
•
Check the assembly and component weights to be sure that the rigging equipment can handle them safely.
•
Be sure that the unit is balanced well in the transporting device.
•
Always conduct a thorough check when the installation is complete.
1.2 RECEIVING INSTRUCTIONS Systems are normally shipped assembled and with motors mounted. All units are attached securely to skids. It is recommended that units be left on their skids for protection and ease of handling while transporting. Straps, rigging, slings, or hooks attached to the skits may be used, with proper care. The units are well protected with triple wall board and are secured with metal bands. Forklifts may be used under the skits, but exercise caution to prevent damage.
Upon receiving systems from PureAir, note any shipping damage, obvious or hidden, to your carrier and on your Bill of Lading. All problems should be handled between the customer and carrier. •
If the unit is to be stored before use, see Section 1.4 in this manual.
•
If the unit is to be installed immediately, be sure to check Section 3.0 in this manual.
•
To uncrate unit, cut metal bands and remove packaging.
•
For positioning and special handling, see Section 3.1 in this manual.
1.3 INSPECTION The condition of the unit upon its arrival is critical to its proper operation. Prior to start-up, inspect the unit carefully, according to the check list below. Correct any inadequacies before startup to prevent possible damage or inefficiency. Note, should there be any questions concerning the unit, refer to the numbers found on the unit identification plate, when contacting the PureAir representative. PRE-OPERATION CHECK LIST YES
NO
CONDITION
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
1. Configuration and material are as specified on the sales order form. 2. Measurements fit submittal requirements 3. Parts are all present including modules, particulate filters, media, and gage units. 4. Modules, prefilter, and final filter all fit properly
3
___
___
___
___
___
___
5. Latches hold securely and gaskets seal properly 6. Labels and serial numbers are present 7. Airflow direction is consistent with installation requirements (check labels attached to unit)
Note: Checking specific points is also imperative after the unit is started up. See section 3.4 in this manual for check list. 1.4 STORAGE The unit should be protected from the elements during storage, especially when storage time is extensive. While indoor storage is considered best, outdoor storage can be adequate when precautions are taken: OUTDOOR STORAGE PRECAUTIONS •
• • •
Cover the equipment with a tarp. Intake and discharge openings must be well covered. (Use of black plastic as a cover may cause excessive condensation and rusting.) If there is the possibility of moisture collection, allow for proper drainage. Do not place heavy equipment on top of the unit. Store PureAir media in a dry place with less than 95% relative humidity.
concrete base is best suited to the system. Concrete allows less chance for vibration than metal structures. CLEARANCE All units should be easily accessible for the required periodic maintenance. Do not block return and discharge grilles. Sufficient minimum clearances can be recommended by the local PureAir representative. 2.0 BASIC DESIGN OF THE SAH UNIT The SAH has particulate and gaseous contamination control capabilities. The unit is designed for ceiling mounting into existing ductwork. The commercial SAH unit steel with extruded aluminum track. Hinges are zinc-placed steel with brass pins. The lift and turn latches are die-cast zinc with aluminum screws. Doors are sealed with urethane foam and the unit is supported by heavy 11 gauge Uchannels which provide rigidity during shipping and installation as well as firm support for long service life. See Figure 1. Figure 1: Commercial SAH (See Number Key On Next Page)
1.5 FOUNDATION AND CLEARANCES FOUNDATIONS Some units may require new or reinforced foundations, due to their weight. Always be sure to check that the existing foundation is adequate for the unit to be installed. Units to be used indoors require particular attention to strength of foundation. In some instances, a
4
The industrial SAH unit is constructed of galvanized steel Standard equipment on this model would include a cross-broken top pan, stainless steel hinges and pins, and an industrial grade lift and turn latch with a stainless steel sealed shaft. Doors are sealed with
urethane foam and the unit is supported by heavy 11 gauge U-channel which provide rigidity during shipping and installation. See Figure 2. Figure 2: Industrial SAH (See Number Key On This Page)
contaminant gases are destroyed by the process of adsorption, absorption and oxidation in this stage. 3. FINAL FILTER- before leaving the unit, the air moves through a final filter. The final filter removes remaining contaminants, such as media dust and airborne contaminants. The options for final filters are: a high efficiency (90%) rigid-type, final filter. a medium efficiency (30%) pleated particulate filter with high surface area and good service life.
The SAH includes one or more of the following sequential components: 1. PREFILTER- as the air enters the unit it passes through a particulate filter. The prefilter collects atmospheric dust and larger particles, thereby preventing clogging of the perforated surfaces and pellet pores in the next stage of the unit. Prefilter options are: : A low efficiency (20%) particulate filter which features include a self-sealing progressive density non-woven synthetic media. : A medium efficiency (30%) pleated particulate filter with high surface area and good service life. Special Prefilters: Special high efficiency particulate filters can be specified in prefilter section of the unit. Contact the factory or your PureAir® representative for available options. 2. PureAir modeules - The air then passes through PM12, PP12, PM18 and/or PP-18, Matrix modules, containing media manufactured by PureAir. The
a high efficiency (90%) rigid-type particulate filter with self-supportive rigid cartridges. an ultra-high efficiency (99%) particulate filter housed in a wooden frame with aluminum separators. Special Final Filters: Contact your PureAir representative for pricing and sizing information. 3.0 INSTALLATION After the entire pre-operative inspection is finished (Section 1.3), complete the following sequence for installation by referring to the instructions in Section 3.1 below: 1. Remove the unit from the skid and position it in the designated operation location. 2. Fill and install the modules. See Module Filling and Media Replacement Service Guide. 3. Install the particulate filter. See section 3.3.
5
4. Start the unit. See section 3.4. 3.4 POST-START INSPECTION/CHECK 5. Perform post-start inspection check. 3.1 POSITIONING THE UNIT Review Section 1.5 in this manual for foundation and clearance instructions. The standard unit can simply be lifted from its skid and “walked” or transported by lift to its predesignated operation location (if in close proximity to the skid), according to facility safety requirements.
Before initial start-up of system, contact your local PureAir representative. Their name and phone number are attached to your system. YES
NO
CONDITION
___
___
___
___
___
___
1. Joints, seals, and gaskets do not leak. 2. Modules are completely full of media and fit properly. 3. Particulate filters have been installed.
3.2 MODULES Proper filling, installation, and maintenance of the chemical filtration media is critical to the unit’s efficient operation. The modules are designed specifically for media manufactured by PureAir and allow the media to perform to its maximum efficiency, through proper shape and bed depth. 3.3 PARTICULATE FILTERS Proper selection and installation of particulate filters for use in PureAir unit will require replacement during the normal lifetime of the equipment. Replacement items may be ordered from your local PureAir representative or from PureAir Filtration, Inc. PREFILTER: Install this filter by sliding it along the track so that airflow moves through the coarse white side first. Slide the 1” header into the provided track. Install this filter by sliding it along the track until it is completely housed within the unit. Install this filter by sliding it along the track until it is completely housed within the unit.
6
4.0 MAINTENANCE 4.1 REPLACEMENT PARTS AND MATERIALS While PureAir products are built with durability, some parts of the PureAir unit will require replacemend during the normal lifetime of the equipment. Replacement items may be ordered from your local PureAir representative or from Pure Air Filtration. Consumables: In order to maintain proper performance levels, particulate filters and PureAir media must be replaced periodically, as they have a finite life (See Sampling Procedure Service Guide.) Modules: While not considered to be a consumable item, these units are subject to physical damage in handling. Particulate Filters: To ensure proper efficiency of your system change particulate filters often. Dirty filters will inhibit proper functioning of the unit.
4.2 MEDIA REPLACEMENT If analysis reveals that it is time to replace the media, order the appropriate pounds of media required per module used in the unit. This serial number represents the components of your SAH system. 5.0 SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS
Avoid exposing the PureAir media to water or precipitation, as this dissolves permanganate content. Storage of media should be in a dry place with less than 95% relative humidity. Exposure of permanganated solution to the skin causes brown staining which is temporary and not harmful. This staining can be removed by washing in a diluted solution of water and sodium bisulfite.
DISPOSAL
EYE CONTACT
PureAir media is a non-toxic, nonflammable substance. Filtration of contaminants through PureAir media causes molecular changes to occur, and the resulting product is usually not harmful to the environment. Although special precautions are generally not required when disposing of spent media, government regulations may require specific disposal procedures if the resulting product could be harmful to the environment. Large quantities of PureAir media should not be disposed of in dumpster-like equipment because the weight of the media could cause difficulties in handling the dumpster.
If dust is exposed to the eyes or delicate membrane, flush thoroughly with water and seek treatment by a physician. Follow normal procedures for exposure to abrasive dust.
Independent laboratory analysis for Environmental Protection Agency toxicity characteristics may be required if the contaminants eliminated from your environment include heavy metals and pesticides. INHALATION A well-ventilated work area is suggested for changing the PureAir media, as dusting occurs in fresh media due to handling abrasion. Workers should avoid direct inhalation of considerable PureAir dust, as it induces squeezing. In closed, unventilated spaces, dust masks such as the 3-M No. 8500 are suggested. WATER
6.0 ADSORBENT STAIN REMOVAL The following stain removal procedure is stated here as information only, and neither PureAir , any of its subsidiaries, nor any agent or employee of PureAir make any warranty or other representation regarding the efficacy or safety of this procedure. The stain removal could cause further damage to the garment or to the item from which one may attempt to remove the stain. If the dust from PureAir 4 or 8 chemisorbant media comes in contact with organic material, there are two possible stain problems: 1. Manganese dioxide (MnO2) which is insoluble, characterized by a medium brown color, and is found in expended PureAir 4 o& r 8 media, can usually be removed by normal washing. 2. New (unused) PureAir media contains potassium permanganate (KmnO4) which is a strong oxidant and will react with and discolor any organic material with which it comes in contact. These stains, which will be brownish black in color, may be removed using a solution of sodium bisulfite in water,
7
after the garment has been removed from the person. However, if the fiber has been damaged by the permanganate, removal of the stain may make the damage more apparent. CAUTION: This procedure should start with a very weak solution, gradually increasing the strength until the stain is removed. Use of too strong a solution could conceivably cause additional fabric damage. NOTE: Sodium bisulfite gives of sulfur dioxide (SO2) gas; therefore, it must be used in a well-ventilated area.
7.0 WARRANTY INFORMATION PureAir Filtration warrants hardware equipment manufactured by PureAir to be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for one (1) year from shipment date. PureAir's obligation under this warranty shall be limited to replacing any parts
8
therof which shall be demonstrated to have been defective. THIS WARRANTY IS EXPRESSLY IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. PureAir MAKES NO WARRANTIES AS TO MERCHANTABILITY OR AS TO THE FITNESS OF THE MERCHANDISE FOR ANY PARTICULAR USE AND SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOSS OR DAMAGE, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, ARISING FROM THE USE OF SUCH MERCHANDISE OR FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. No person, firm or corporation is authorized to assume for PureAir any other liability in connection with the sale of these goods. Equipment, parts and material manufactured by others and incorporated in PUREAIR equipment are warranted by PureAir ONLY TO THE EXTENT OF THE ORIGINAL MANUFACTURERS LIABILITY TO PureAir.
8.0 TROUBLE SHOOTING SYMPTOM Particulate filters
Airflow too low
PROBLEM Heavily soiled particulate filters
CHECKS/REMEDY Were loaded modules relatively clean and dust-free when installed? Was a sacrifice final filter used during the first few minutes of operation and then replaced by the specified filters?
Dust blowing out discharge louver
Final filter not in place
Insert appropriate final filter
9.0 SAMPLE RECORD
Sampling Record/Schedule
9
Electric Grey/ ASA 70
9810-7042
TCI product 9810-7042 is a gloss grey TGIC polyester. 9000 Series TGIC Polyester Systems have a broad formulating range and can meet many decorative and functional requirements for gloss, physical properties, chemical resistance, color, and weatherability. Products in this series can be used in thick film applications. Typical uses include: aluminum extrusions, playground equipment, agricultural equipment, and machinery.
Product Characteristics: Specific Gravity
1.66 +/- 0.05
Theoretical Coverage
117 ft2/lb/mil
Optimum Storage
<80°F, <50% RH
Particle Distribution
+44 microns (325 mesh): 28-34%
Cure Schedule (Metal Temperature)
12 minutes @ 400°F 16 minutes @ 375°F 25 minutes @ 350°F
Film Thickness
2.0-4.0 mils
Gloss (60°)
ASTM D523-89
80-89%
Pencil Hardness
ASTM D3363-00
H-2H
Adhesion
ASTM D3359-02
5B
Flexibility
ASTM D522-93a
1/8 in
Direct Impact
ASTM D2794-93
160 in/lbs @ 2.0 mils
Reverse Impact
ASTM D2794-93
160 in/lbs @ 2.0 mils
Salt Spray
ASTM B117-97
1000 hrs. rating A=8, B=10
Notes: Powder shelf life can vary with different formulations. Store product in a cool, dry, well ventilated area away from heat, ignition sources, and direct sunlight. Do not expose product to damp conditions. Testing was performed on Bonderite® 1000, Parcolene®60 panels. The highest quality powder coating finish results from proper substrate surface preparation, appropriate pretreatment, effective rinse stages, proper powder coating application and sufficient temperature and dwell to ensure the powder coating is cured. Performance characteristics may be affected by operations exhibiting parameters different from the parameters utilized to generate this data, therefore we strongly recommend testing be performed utilizing substrate surface preparation, pretreatment, rinse, powder coating application and cure representative of ones operation to determine whether this product meets the desired requirements. Bonderite® and Parcolene® are registered trademarks of Henkel Surface Technologies.
SARULLA GEOTHERMAL POWER PROJECT
4. VENTILATION FAN
Installation Operation and Maintenance Manual
Centrifugal Airfoil DIDW, SISW Multi Blade DIDW, SISW Roof Ventilation Duct In-Line Wall Fan
1
Index 1
INTRODUCTION AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS.......................................................................... 4
2
PREPARATION FOR USE AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS ...................................... 4
2.1 FOUNDATION INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................... 5 2.2 DUCT INSTALLATIONS. (CENTRIFUGAL AND INDUSTRIAL PROCESS FAN) ............. 5 2.3 UNIT START-UP ......................................................................................................................................... 8 2.3.1 PRE-OPERATIONAL CONDITIONS AND SETUP................................................................ 8 2.3.2 ADDITIONAL STEPS FOR INITIAL START-UP .................................................................... 8 2.3.3 VIBRATION ........................................................................................................................................... 9 2.3.4 INSTALLATION CHECKOUT ...................................................................................................... 11
3
GENERAL THEORY OF OPERATION ............................................................................................. 13 3.1 TYPE OF FANS ......................................................................................................................................... 13
4
OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS............................................................................................................ 16 4.1 TROUBLE-SHOOTING........................................................................................................................... 16
5
MAINTERNANCE INSTRUCTIONS. ................................................................................................ 18
5.1
MOTORS ..................................................................................................................................................... 18
5.2 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE OPERATION ............................................................................ 18 5.3 BEARING LUBRICATION ..................................................................................................................... 19 5.4 BEARING INSTALLATION................................................................................................................... 21
2
5.5 V-BELT DRIVES ........................................................................................................................................ 24 5.6 STORAGE .................................................................................................................................................... 25
6
PART LIST ................................................................................................................................................... 26 6.1 CENTRIFUGAL FAN (FLOOR MOUNTED) .................................................................................. 26 6.2 CENTRIFUGAL FAN (ROOF MOUNTED) ..................................................................................... 27 6.3 CENTRIFUGAL FAN (DUCT IN LINE) ............................................................................................ 28 6.4 PROPELLER FAN (WALL MOUNTED) ........................................................................................... 29 6.5 AXIAL FAN (ROOF MOUNTED) ...................................................................................................... 30
7
MAINTENANCE LOG ............................................................................................................................ 31
3
1
INTRODUCTION AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS. Only qualified personnel should install this fan. Personnel should have clear understanding of these instructions and be aware of general safety precautions. Improper installation can result in electric shock, possible injury occurred by contacting moving parts as well as other potential hazards. Other considerations may be required if strong winds or seismic activity is present. If more information is needed, please contact a licensed professional engineer before moving forward.
2
PREPARATION FOR USE AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS This pamphlet contains not only general recommendations but also specific requirements that are applicable to the individual installation. Such requirements are outlined in federal, state and local safety code. It is necessary that users comply with these safety codes and installation instructions strictly before using. Details are as follows: • The rotation of the wheel is critical. It must be free to rotate without striking or rubbing any stationary objects. • Motor must be securely and adequately grounded. • Do not allow the power cable to kink or come in contact with oil, grease, hot surfaces or chemicals. Replace cord immediately if damaged. • Verify that the power source is compatible with the equipment. • While the fan is running, never open access doors. • The maximum operating temperature or speed for which this fan is designed must not be exceeded. Adjustments to fan speed significantly affects motor load. If the fan RPM is changed, the motor current should be checked to make sure it is not exceeding the motor nameplate amps. DANGER Always disconnect power on or near a fan before working. Lock the disconnect switch or breaker of fan to prevent accidental power up. CAUTION When servicing the fan, motor may be hot enough to cause pain or injury. Motor should cool enough before servicing. CAUTION Precaution should be taken in explosive atmospheres.
4
2.1
FOUNDATION INSTALLATION
Good installation depends on a proper foundation. Foundations should be level, rigid, and of sufficient mass for the equipment. Concrete is preferable. Its mass should be more than four times the fan weight at least. Adequately place brass steel platforms in all directions. The minimum natural frequency of any part must be at least 50% higher than the fan running speed. Locate shims on the fan support points before tightening foundation bolts. Do not distort or twist the equipment. Duct connections should be smooth and straight. Elbows and other transitions should be located at least five wheel diameters from fan inlet and outlet (see AMCA Publication 21 for further details). Flexible connections should be used at inlet and discharge. The fan should never support or restrain any duct weight or force. 2.2
DUCT INSTALLATIONS. (CENTRIFUGAL AND INDUSTRIAL PROCESS FAN)
Installations with inlet or discharge configurations that deviate from this standard may result in reduced fan performance. Restricted or unstable flow at the fan inlet can cause prerotation of incoming air or uneven loading of the fan wheel yielding large system losses and increased sound levels. Free discharge or turbulent flow in the discharge ductwork will also result in system effect losses. Refer to the following diagrams for the most efficient installation conditions. DUCT INLET INSTALLATIONS Inlet Duct Turns – In case that installation of a duct turn or elbow is too close from the fan inlet, it makes fan performance low because air is loaded unevenly into the fan wheel. To achieve high fan performance, the length between the fan inlet and turn or elbow should be at least three fan wheel diameters
. [Figure 2.1] Example of Inlet Duct Turns Inlet Spin - Inlet spin is one of factor that causes reduced fan performance. The change in fan performance is a function of the intensity of spin and not easily defined. The best solution is
5
proper duct design and airflow patterns. Turning vanes can reduce the effects of inlet spin.
[Figure 2.2] Example of Inlet Spin
Ducted Outlet Installations Discharge Duct Turns - Duct turns located near the fan discharge should always be in the direction of the fan rotation. Fan performance is reduced when duct turns are made immediately off the fan discharge. To achieve cataloged fan performance there should be at least three equivalent duct diameters of straight ductwork between the fan discharge and any duct turns.
[Figure 2.3] Example of Discharge Duct Turns
6
Non-Ducted Installations Inlet Clearance - Installation of a fan with an open inlet too close to a wall or bulkhead will cause reduced fan performance. It is desirable to have one fan wheel diameter between parallel fan units and a minimum of three-fourths of a wheel diameter between the fan inlet and the wall.
[Figure 2.4] Example of Single Fan Installation
[Figure 2.5] Example of Parallel Fan Installation Free Discharge - Free or abrupt discharge into a plenum results in low fan performance.
[Figure 2.6] Example of Free Discharge
7
2.3
UNIT START-UP 2.3.1
PRE-OPERATIONAL CONDITIONS AND SETUP
1.
Disconnect and lock-out all power switches to fan. See warning below.
2.
Check all fasteners, set screws and locking collars on the fan, bearings, drive, motor base and accessories for tightness.
3.
Rotate the fan wheel by hand and assure that all parts are not worn out.
4.
Check for bearing alignment and lubrication.
5.
Check for coupling alignment (Arr. 8 only).
6.
Check the V-belt drive for proper alignment and tension.
7.
Check all guarding (if supplied) for being securely attached and not interfering with rotating parts.
8.
Check operation of variable inlet vanes or discharge dampers (if supplied) for freedom of movement.
9.
Check all electrical connections for proper attachment.
10. Check housing and ductwork, if accessible, for obstructions and foreign material that may damage the fan wheel.
DANGER Disconnect and secure to the “Off” position all electrical power to the fan prior to inspection or servicing. Failure to comply with this safety precaution would result in serious injury or death.
2.3.2 1.
ADDITIONAL STEPS FOR INITIAL START-UP Check for proper wheel rotation by momentarily energizing the fan. Rotation is always determined by viewing the wheel from the drive side and should correspond to the rotation decal affixed to the unit. One of the most frequently encountered problems with centrifugal fans is motors which are wired to run in the wrong direction. This is especially true with 3-phase installations where the motor will run in either direction, depending on how it has been wired. To reverse rotation of a 3-phase motor, interchange any two of the three electrical leads. Single phase motors can be reversed by changing internal connections as described on the motor label or wiring diagram.
8
[Figure 2.7] Rotation of Fan (Clockwise) 2.
If the fan has inlet vanes, they should be partially closed to reduce power requirements. This is especially important if the fan is designed for a high temperature application and is being started at room temperature.
3.
Fans with multi-speed motors should be checked on low speed during initial start-up.
4.
Check for unusual noise, vibration or overheating of bearings. Refer to the “Troubleshooting” section of this manual if a problem develops.
5.
Grease may be forced out of the bearing seals during initial start-up. This is a normal self-purging feature of this type of bearing.
2.3.3
VIBRATION
Excessive vibration is the most frequent problem experienced during initial start-up.
Common Sources of Vibration 1. Wheel Unbalance 2. Drive Pulley Misalignment 3. Incorrect Belt Tension 4. Bearing / Coupling Misalignment 5. Mechanical Looseness 6. Faulty Belts 7. Drive Component Unbalance 8. Poor Inlet/Outlet Conditions 9. Foundation Stiffness Left unchecked, excessive vibration can cause a multitude of problems, including structural and/or component failure. Many of these conditions can be discovered by careful observation. Refer to the troubleshooting section of this manual for corrective actions. 9
If observation cannot locate the source of vibration, a qualified technician using vibration analysis equipment should be consulted. If the problem is wheel unbalance, in-place balancing can be done providing there is access to the fan wheel. Any correction weights added to the wheel should be welded to either the wheel back (single-plane balance) or to the wheel back and wheel cone (two-plane balance). Kiturami Bumyang Air Conditioning Co.,Ltd performs a vibration test on all centrifugal fans before shipping. Three vibration readings are taken on each bearing in the horizontal, vertical, and axial directions. The allowable maximum vibration for belt drive units is 0.15 in/sec. peak (0.08 in/sec. direct drive) velocity filter-in for rigid mount and 0.20 in/sec. peak velocity filter-in for flexible mount at the fan RPM per AMCA Standard 204. These vibration signatures are a permanent record of how the fan left the factory and are available after request. Generally, fan vibration and noise are transmitted to other parts of the building by the ductwork. To eliminate this undesirable effect, the use of heavy canvas connectors is recommended.
10
2.3.4
INSTALLATION CHECKOUT
Problem
Cause Wheel rubbing (inlet)
Adjust wheel and/or inlet cone. Tighten wheel hub or bearing collars on shaft.
V-belt drive
Tighten Sheaves on motor/fan shaft. Adjust belt tension. Align sheaves properly (see V-Belt Drives section). Replace worn belts or sheaves.
Bearings
Replace defective bearing(s). Lubricate bearings. Tighten collars and fasteners.
Wheel unbalance
Clean all dirt off wheel. Check wheel balance, rebalance in place if necessary.
Excessive Noise
Fan Low CFM
Duct system Fan
High CFM
Duct system
Fan Doesn’t Operate
Overheated Shaft Bearing
Excessive Vibration
Check wheel for correct rotation. Increase fan speed.* Check air-flow of inlet/outlet duct line. Compare real static pressure with Design pressure. Check wheel for correct rotation. Increase fan speed.* Check air-flow of inlet/outlet duct line. Compare real static pressure with Design pressure.
Duct system has more or less restriction than anticipated
Change obstructions in system. Use correction factor to adjust for temperature/altitude. Resize ductwork. Clean filters/coils. Change fan speed.*
Dirty filters
Filters need to be cleaned or replaced. To remove the existing filters, open the top hood panel(s). The filters can now be removed by lifting them vertically and out of their racking. Be sure to carefully note the quantity and size of the filters being removed as some units utilize multiple filters sizes. After the filters have been cleaned, or new filters are ready to be installed, place the filters back into the racks in the reverse order of which they were removed. When all filters are in place, close and secure the top roof panels.
Fan
Check rotation of wheel. Reduce fan speed.
Duct system
Resize ductwork. Check proper operation of face and bypass dampers. Check filters and access doors.
Electrical supply
Check fuses/circuit breakers. Check for switches turned off or disconnected. Check for correct supply voltage.
Static Pressure Wrong
High Horsepower
Corrective Action
Drive
Check for broken belts. Tighten loose pulleys.
Motor
Assure motor is correct horsepower and not tripping overload protector.
Lubrication
Check for excessive or insufficient grease in the bearings.
Mechanical
Replace damaged bearing. Relieve excessive belt tension. Align bearings. Check for bent shaft.
Belts
Adjust tightness of belts. Replacement belts should be a matched set.
System unbalance
Check alignment of shaft, motor and pulleys. Check wheel balance, rebalance if necessary.
Coupling misalignment
Check alignment between coupling, motor and fan shafts. Any adjustments should be made per coupling manufacturer’s instructions. Shim only under motor.
[Table 2.1] Check List for Installation
11
* Always check motor amps and compare to nameplate rating. Excessive fan speed may overload the motor and result in motor failure. Do not exceed the maximum cataloged RPM of the fan. NOTE: Always provide the unit model and serial numbers when requesting parts or service information.
12
3
GENERAL THEORY OF OPERATION 3.1
TYPE OF FANS Adapted with permission from 1996 ASHRAE Systems and Equipment Handbook (SI) TYPE
DESIGN
DESCRIPTION • Highest efficiency of all centrifugal fan designs.
Impeller Design
• Ten to 16 blades of airfoil contour curved away from direction of rotation. Deep blades allow for efficient expansion within blade passages
AIRFOIL
• Air leaves impeller at velocity less than tip speed. • For given duty, has highest speed of centrifugal fan designs Housing Design
• Scroll-type design for efficient conversion of velocity pressure to static pressure. • Maximum efficiency requires close clearance and alignment between wheel and inlet • Efficiency only slightly less than airfoil fan.
BACKWARDCURVED
BACKWARDINCLINED
• Ten to 16 single-thickness blades curved or inclined away from direction of rotation • Efficient for same reasons as airfoil fan.
Housing Design
Impeller Design
• Uses same housing configuration as airfoil design.
• Higher pressure characteristics than airfoil,backwardcurved, and backward-inclined fans. • Curve may have a break to left of peak pressure and fan should not be operated in this area.
RADIAL
CENTRIFUGAL FANS
Impeller Design
• Power rises continually to free delivery. Housing Design
• Scroll. Usually narrowest of all centrifugal designs. • Because wheel design is less efficient, housing dimensions are not as critical as for airfoil and backward-inclined fans.
13
FORWARD- CURVED
Impeller Design
• Flatter pressure curve and lower efficiency than the airfoil, backward-curved, and backward-inclined. • Do not rate fan in the pressure curve dip to the left of peak pressure. • Power rises continually toward free delivery. Motor Selection must take this into account.
Housing Design
• Scroll similar to and often identical to other centrifugal fan designs. • Fit between wheel and inlet not as critical as for airfoil and backward-inclined fans.
Impeller Design
• Low efficiency. • Limited to low-pressure applications. • Usually low cost impellers have two or more blades of
PROPELLER
single thickness attached to relatively small hub. • Primary energy transfer by velocity pressure. Housing Design
• Simple circular ring, orifice plate, or venturi. • Optimum design is close to blade tips and forms
Impeller Design
• Somewhat more efficient and capable of developing more useful static pressure than propeller fan.
TUBEAXIAL
• Usually has 4 to 8 blades with airfoil or single thickness cross section. • Hub usually less than transfer by velocity pressure. Housing Design
Impeller Design VANEAXIAL
AXIAL FANS
smooth airfoil into wheel.
• Cylindrical tube with close clearance to blade tips.
• Good blade design gives medium- to high-pressure capability at good efficiency. • Most efficient of these fans have airfoil blades. • Blades may have fixed, adjustable, or controllable pitch. • Hub is usually greater than half fan tip diameter.
14
Housing Design
• Cylindrical tube with close clearance to blade tips. • Guide vanes upstream or downstream from impeller increase pressure capability and efficiency.
Impeller Design
• Performance similar to backward-curved fan except capacity and pressure are lower.
CENTRIFUGAL
TUBULAR
• Lower efficiency than backward-curved fan. • Performance curve may have a dip to the left of peak pressure. Housing Design
• Cylindrical tube similar to vane axial fan, except clearance to wheel is not as close. • Air discharges radially from wheel and turns 90° to flow through guide vanes.
• Provides positive exhaust ventilation, which is an -CENTRIFUGAL-
POWER ROOF VENTILATORS
• Low-pressure exhaust systems such as general factory, kitchen, warehouse, and some commercial installations. advantage over gravity-type exhaust units. • Centrifugal units are slightly quieter than axial units.
Housing Design
• Normal housing not used, since air discharges from impeller in full circle. • Usually does not include configuration to recover velocity pressure component.
Impeller Design
• Low-pressure exhaust systems such as general factory, kitchen, warehouse, and some commercial installations. • Provides positive exhaust ventilation, which is an advantage over gravity-type exhaust units.
-AXIAL-
POWER ROOF VENTILATORS
SPECIAL DESIGN
Impeller Design
Housing Design
• Essentially a propeller fan mounted in a supporting structure • Hood protects fan from weather and acts as safety guard. • Air discharges from annular space at bottom of weather hood. [Table 3.1] Type of Fan 15
4
OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS 4.1
TROUBLE-SHOOTING
Problem
Cause
Corrective Action
Wheel rubbing (inlet)
Adjust wheel and/or inlet cone. Tighten wheel hub or bearing collars on shaft.
V-belt drive
Align sheaves properly (see V-Belt Drives section).
Excessive Noise
Tighten Sheaves on motor/fan shaft. Adjust belt tension. Replace worn belts or sheaves.
Bearings
Replace defective bearing(s). Lubricate bearings. Tighten collars and fasteners.
Wheel unbalance
Clean all dirt off wheel. Check wheel balance, rebalance in place if necessary.
Low Air Volume High Air Volume
Fan
Check wheel for correct rotation. Increase fan speed.*
Duct system
Check “DUCT INSTALLATIONS.” SECTION.
Fan
Decrease fan speed.
Duct system
Resize ductwork. Access door, filters, grilles not installed.
Dirty filters
Filters need to be cleaned or replaced. To remove the existing filters, open the top hood panel(s). The filters can now be removed by lifting them vertically and out of their racking. Be sure to carefully note the quantity
Static
and size of the filters being removed as some LSF units
Pressure
utilize multiple filters sizes. After the filters have been
Wrong
cleaned, or new filters are ready to be installed, place the filters back into the racks in the reverse order of which they were removed. When all filters are in place, close and secure the top roof panels.
High Horsepower
Fan
Check rotation of wheel. Reduce fan speed.
Duct system
Resize ductwork. Check proper operation of face and bypass dampers. Check filters and access doors.
Electrical supply Fan Doesn’t Operate
Check fuses/circuit breakers. Check for switches turned off or disconnected. Check for correct supply voltage.
Drive
Check for broken belts. Tighten loose pulleys.
Motor
Assure motor is correct horsepower and not tripping overload protector.
Overheated Shaft
Lubrication
Check for excessive or insufficient grease in the bearings.
Bearing 16
Mechanical
Replace damaged bearing. Relieve excessive belt tension. Align bearings. Check for bent shaft.
Belts
Adjust tightness of belts. Replacement belts should be a matched set.
System unbalance
Check
alignment
of
shaft,
motor
and
pulleys.
Adjustable pitch pulleys with motors over 15 hp are
Excessive
especially prone to unbalance. Check wheel balance,
Vibration
rebalance if necessary. Coupling misalignment
Check alignment between coupling, motor and fan shafts. Any adjustments should be made per coupling manufacturer’s instructions. Shim only under motor. [Table 4.1] Trouble-shooting of Fan
*Always check motor amps and compare to nameplate rating. Excessive fan speed may overload the motor and result in motor failure. Do not exceed the maximum cataloged RPM of the fan. NOTE: Always provide the unit model and serial numbers when requesting parts or service information.
17
5
MAINTERNANCE INSTRUCTIONS. Once the unit has been put into operation, a routine maintenance schedule should be set up to accomplish the following: 1. Lubrication of bearings and motor (see below). 2. Variable inlet vanes should be checked for freedom of operation and wear. 3. Wheel, housing, bolts and set screws on the entire fan should be checked for tightness. 4. Any dirt accumulation on the wheel or in the housing should be removed to prevent unbalance and possible damage. 5. Isolation bases should be checked for freedom of movement and the bolts for tightness. Springs should be checked for breaks and fatigue. Rubber isolators should be checked for deterioration. 6. Inspect fan impeller and housing looking for fatigue, corrosion, or wear. When performing any service to the fan, disconnect the electrical supply and secure fan impeller. 5.1
MOTORS
Motor maintenance is generally limited to cleaning and lubrication. Cleaning should be limited to exterior surfaces only. Removing dust and grease build up on the motor housing assists proper motor cooling. Never wash-down motor with high pressure spray. Many fractional motors are permanently lubricated for life and require no further lubrication. Motors supplied with grease fittings should be greased in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. CAUTION When operating conditions of the fan are to be changed (speed, pressure, temperature, etc.), consult with us - Kiturami Bumyang Co.,Ltd - to determine if the unit can operate safely at the new conditions. 5.2
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE OPERATION
CAUTION For operation with Variable Frequency Drive (VFD), always check motor amps when adjusting the operating frequency. Motor may be sized for the original selected operating speed under 60 Hz. Bypassing the VFD or increasing the speed from this original selection, even if less than 60 Hz, may cause motor overload or failure. Consult factory with fan serial number 18
before increasing the upper limiting frequency. Always check the fan rpm when adjusting the operating frequency. Do not exceed maximum class fan rpm of the wheel as stated on the unit identification nameplate. 5.3
BEARING LUBRICATION
The bearings for fans are carefully selected to match the maximum load and operating conditions of the specific class, arrangement, and fan size. The instructions provided in this manual and those provided by the bearing manufacturer, will minimize any bearing problems. Bearings are the most critical moving part of the fan, therefore special care is required when mounting them on the unit and maintaining them. Refer to the following chart and the manufacturer instructions for grease types and intervals for various operating conditions. Never mix greases made with different bases. This will cause a breakdown of the grease and possible failure of the bearing.
Recommended Bearing Lubrication ScheduleRelubrication Schedule in Months* Bearing Bore (Dia. mm) Fan 35 51 71 81 up to RPM ~50 ~70 ~80 ~90 91 To 300 12 12 10 10 8 600 12 12 10 10 8 900 12 10 10 9 7 1200 12 10 10 9 6 1500 12 9 9 8 6 1800 10 9 9 7 6 2100 10 8 8 6 5 2400 10 8 8 6 2600 8 7 7 5 2900 8 6 6 3200 7 5 3500 6 Number of shots**
8
10
13
15
18
[Table 5.1] Recommended Bearing Lubrication Schedule in Month related Fan PRM * Lubrication interval is based on 12 hour day operation and maximum 70℃ housing temperature. For 24 hour per day operation, the interval should be cut in half. ** Lubricant should be added with the shaft rotating and until clean grease is seen purging from the bearing. The lubrication interval may be modified based on the condition of the purged grease. If bearing is not visible to observe purged grease, lubricate with number of shots indicated for bore size.
19
• For conditions including high temperatures, moisture, dirt or excessive vibration, consult the factory for a specific lubrication interval for your application. • Lubricant should be a high quality lithium complex grease conforming to NLGI Grade 2. Factory recommends Shell Gadus S2 V100 or Mobilux EP-2. • The use of synthetic lubricants will increase lubrication intervals by approximately two times. • Storage periods of three months or longer require monthly rotation of the shaft and purging grease prior to storage and start-up.
20
5.4
BEARING INSTALLATION
[Figure 5.1] Bearing parts Diagram
Bearing and plummer blocks are highly precision parts so they must be handled very carefully to maintain their degree of precision. It should always be cleaned without any impact and any rusts.
[Figure 5.2]
[Figure 5.3]
[Figure 5.4]
1. Prepare tools for assembly, a jig, a measuring instrument, grease and a wiper. Dust or impurities should be removed from all tools. (Figure 5.2) 21
2. Check whether a shaft is bent or scratched and check the processing dimension. (Figure 5.3) 3. Clean the inner part of Plummer Block. (Figure 5.4) 4. Remove the burr of shaft seal contact part and bearing contact part, clean it and apply a little grease. 5. Check whether the surface to be mounted is flat. The Plummer Block should be well contacted. 6. Place the lower part of Plummer Block on the floor and fix the base bolts. Do not fix them tightly.
[Figure 5.5]
[Figure 5.6]
[Figure 5.7]
7. Place the bearing, adapter and each part on top of the shaft. Relative locations of parts are shown on “Figure 5.5” 8. Insert the bearing tightly to the adapter sleeve and tighten the nuts. When tightening the nuts, use a hook spanner as shown on '(Figure 5.7)' and when using a hammer to tighten them, be careful so that metallic fragments do not get into the bearing. 9. Fill the grease inside the bearing. Fill the grease in the lower part of Plummer Block.
[Figure 5.8]
[Figure 5.9]
10. Place each part that is temporarily assembled to the shaft onto the lower body of Plummer Block.
22
11. Cover the upper body part and connect the upper and lower parts with bolts as soon as possible so that foreign substances do not get in after the safe placement. (Figure 5.8) 12. Fasten the base bolts tightly. (Figure 5.9) 13. Carefully rotate the shaft and perform a running test with load if there is no abnormality.
23
5.5
V-BELT DRIVES
V-belt drives must be checked on a regular basis for wear, tension, alignment and dirt accumulation. Premature or frequent belt failures can be caused by improper belt tension, (either too loose or too tight) or misaligned sheaves. Abnormally high belt tension or drive misalignment will cause excessive bearing loads and may result in failure of the fan and/or motor bearings. Conversely, loose belts will cause squealing on start-up, excessive belt flutter, slippage, and overheated sheaves. Either excessively loose or tight belts may cause fan vibration. When replacing V-belts on multiple groove drives all belts should be changed to provide uniform drive loading. Do not pry belts on or off the sheave. Loosen belt tension until belts can be removed by simply lifting the belts off the sheaves. After replacing belts, insure that slack in each belt is on the same side of the drive. Belt dressing should never be used.
[Figure 5.10] Example of V-belt
Do not install new belts on worn sheaves. If the sheaves have grooves worn in them, they must be replaced before new belts are installed. The proper tension for operating a V-belt drive is the lowest tension at which the belts will not slip at peak load conditions. For more information about measuring belt tension, refer to KRB Product Application Guide as figure5.11. V-Belt guide Measuring Belt Tension. Check belt tension before start up and after the first 24 hours of operation. The belt tension should also be checked periodically thereafter.
24
[Figure 5.10] V-belt Applicable Guide
CAUTION Do not over-tighten belts. Excessive belt tension can lead to premature belt and/or bearing failure. 5.6
STORAGE
If the installation of the fan is delayed, please store it in a safe and dry place. Fans, especially fan & motor bearings, must be protected from moisture and vibration. Protect all machined surfaces such as shafts, couplings, and bushings. Rotate the wheel several revolutions every two weeks, stopping the wheel in a position other than its initial position. Keep the bearings fully greased by filling monthly with a grease compatible to that originally supplied. Energize fan motor once every three months. Store belts flat to keep them from warping & stretching. Fans are protected against damage during shipment. If the unit cannot be installed and operated immediately, precautions need to be taken to prevent deterioration of the unit during storage. Improper storage which results in damage to the fan will void the warranty. The user assumes responsibility of the fan and accessories while in storage. The manufacturer will not be responsible for damage during storage. These suggestions are provided solely as a convenience to the user.
25
6
PART LIST 6.1
CENTRIFUGAL FAN (FLOOR MOUNTED)
[Figure 6.1] Part List of Centrifugal Fan (Floor Mounted)
26
6.2
CENTRIFUGAL FAN (ROOF MOUNTED)
[Figure 6.2] Part List of Centrifugal Fan (Roof Mounted)
27
6.3
CENTRIFUGAL FAN (DUCT IN LINE)
[Figure 6.3] Part List of Centrifugal Fan (Duct in line)
28
6.4
PROPELLER FAN (WALL MOUNTED)
[Figure 6.4] Part List of Propeller Fan (Wall Mounted)
29
6.5
AXIAL FAN (ROOF MOUNTED)
[Figure 6.5] Part List of Axial Fan (Roof Mounted)
30
7
MAINTENANCE LOG date
/
/
Product No.
Problem
date
/
Note.
/
Product No.
Problem
date
/
Note.
/
Product No.
Problem
date
/
Note.
/
Product No.
Problem
Note.
31
date
/
/
Product No.
Problem
date
/
Note.
/
Product No.
Problem
date
/
Note.
/
Product No.
Problem
date
/
Note.
/
Product No.
Problem
Note.
32
WARRANTY Kiturami Bumyang Air conditioning Co., Ltd(KRB) warrants this equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from the shipment date. Any units or parts which prove to be defective during the warranty period will be replaced at our option when returned to our factory, transportation prepaid. Motors are warranted by the motor manufacturer for a period of one year. Should motors furnished by KRB prove defective during this period, they should be returned to the nearest authorized motor service station. KRB will not be responsible for any removal or installation costs. As a result of our commitment to continuous improvement, KRB reserves the right to change specifications without notice.
KITURAMI BUMYANG AIRCONDITIONING CO.,LTD. http://www.bac.co.kr Tel : +82 - 1600-900 Office Factory
1094, Hwagok 6-dong, Gangseo-gu, Seoul, Korea 1,
Dongsan-ri,
Chungcheongnam-do, Korea
34
Tangjeong-myeon,
Asan-si,
SARULLA GEOTHERMAL POWER PROJECT
5. ELECTRIC WATER HEATER
GB Description of water heater (see fig. 6) Capacity 10-30 L 1) Switch / Lamp cover 2) Front cover 3) Control knob 4) Inlet 5) Outlet
Capacity 50-100 L 1) Pilot light 2) Cover 3) Thermometer 4) Control knob
Technical data For technical characteristics of the appliance, please refer to the information provided on the data plate (label located near the water inlet and outlet pipes). MODEL NOMINAL WEIGHT
kg
10
15
30
50
80
100
6,7
7,5
13,0
16
21,5
25
This appliance conforms to the provisions of the EMC 89/336/CEE regulation for electromagnetic compatibility.
Warning Local regulations may provide restrictions for installation in bathrooms. Installation is at the expense of the purchaser. The construction company is not liable for damage caused by incorrect installation or failure to comply with the instructions indicated in this owner’s manual. Above all: 1) The electrical system must comply with the specifications in the relevant paragraph. 2) The safety valve supplied with the appliance must not be tampered with or replaced. 3) The installation must be carried out by qualified electrician.
Installation instructions The appliance must be installed as close as possible to the point where it is to be used to avoid heat dispersion along the piping. To facilitate maintenance operations, leave a space of 50 cm for access to the electrical parts. The wall attachment hooks must support a weight three times that of the water heater filled with water. The use of 10 mm diameter hooks is suggested. For capacity 10-30 L The range of the water-heaters includes models prepared for being fitted over or under the pont of use (wash-basin, sink). The models to be fitted under the point of use called “under sink”). Fasten the supporting bracket provided to the wall using screws and raw plugs of suitable dimensions for the type of wall. Hook the water heater to the bracket and pull it downwards to make sure it has been fastened correctly. Water connection
Connect the water heater’s inlet and outlet with pipes or fittings that are resistant to the working pressure as well as to the temperature of the hot 7
GB water that can usually reach and exceed 80° C. We therefore advise against the use of materiales that do not resist such high temperatures. Screw a “T” piece union to the water inlet pipe with the blue collar. On one side of the “T” piece union, screw a tap for emptying the appliance that can only be opened with the use of a tool (B fig. 1). On the other side of the “T” piece union screw the safety valve supplied (A fig. 1). This should be connected to the cold water network via a flexible pipe. In the case that the emptying tap should be opened, also attach a waste pipe to exit (C fig. 1). When fixing the safety valve, do not force in excessively and do not tamper with the same. The safety valve is set at about the value shown in the technical lable*. Slight dripping is normal during heating; for this very reason, we recommend you connect this drain, leaving it always open, to a drain pipe installed inclined continuosly downwards and place without condensation. If the mains pressure is very close to the valve rating, install a pressure reducing unit as far as possible from the appliance. If installing mixer units (tap fittings or shower), clear the piping from all impurities which might damage the same. “Open outlet” connection
For this type of installation it is needed to utilise suitable watertaps and carry out the connection as shown in the scheme fig. 1A. With this solution the water-heater can operate at any network pressure. The safety valve is not to be fitted.
Electrical connection
For capacity 10-30 L The feeding cable (type H 05 VV - F 3x1 diameter 8,5 mm) is to be inserted in the proper hole F fig. 3 situated in the back of the apparatus and slide it until it reaches the housing slot V fig. 5 near the thermostat. To disconnect the unit from the network use a bipolar switch conform to CEI-EN standards (contact opening at least 3 mm, better if equipped with fuses). The feeding cable is then connected to the clamps (M fig. 5). Tha appliance must be earthed and the earth cable (which must be yellowgreen and longer than that of the phases) is fixed to the terminal (T fig. 5) marked by the simbol . Before starting it working, make sure that the network tension is in compliance with the rated values of the appliance. Please notice in fig. 2C the wiring diagram of the appliance. For capacity 50-100 L The feeding cable (type HO5 V V - F 3x1.5 diameter 8,5 mm) is to be inserted in the proper housing slot near the thermostat. Depending on the model, the electric connection must be made directly to the terminals on the terminal board (Fig. 2A) or on the thermostat (Fig. 2B). To disconnect the unit from the network use a bipolar switch conform to CEI-EN standards (contact opening at least 3 mm, better if equipped with fuses). The appliance must be earthed and the earth cable (which must be yellowgreen and longer than that of the phases) is fixed to the terminal marked by the symbol . Before starting it working, make sure that the network tension is in compliance with the rated values of the appliance. Please notice in fig. 2C the wiring diagram of the appliance. If the appliance has no power supply cable, it can be connected to the mains with a rigid tube or a fixed cable.
*For Singapore models the safety valve is set at about 0,65 MPa. 8
GB Starting and testing
Before supplying the electrical power, fill the heater with water from the mains by opening the main tap of the home plant the hot water tap until there is no more air in the heater. Check for water leaks, including the flange and tighten slightly if necessary. In case of models with self locking flange make sure that the position of the flange is centred; eventually tighten with moderation the nut located at the center of the flange bracket. Press the switch to supply power to the appliance. For models which are not fitted with a switch, provide electrical power by turning the control knob according the symbols.
Adjusting the operating temperature
In models without the temperature regulation knob, the thermostat is set to maximum position; if you wish to decrease the temperature to save consumption, unplug the appliance from the mains, remove the cover and turn the thermostat knob carefully with a screwdriver in the sense indicated by the adjustment referencies + / - marked on the knob.
Maintenance instructions All repairs and maintenance work must be carried out by qualified electrician. Before calling your Technical Servicing Centre, check that the fault is not due to lack of water or power failure. Replacing parts
Disconnect the appliance from the electrical mains. Remove the cover to work on the electrical parts. To work on the thermostat remove it from the housing and disconnect it from the mains. To work on the heating element, and the anode, first empty the appliance by closing the mains tap and allow the water to flow from inside the same throught the supply pipe after having opened the emptying tap and opening the hot water tap. In the case of the models with self-locking flange, remove the nut, then the flange fixing bracket and push the flange outwards from the inside and remove it with a semi-circular movement. In the case of the other models, remove the 5 bolts and then the flange. The heating element and anode are coupled to the flange. When remounting remember to replace the flange gasket, the thermostat and the heating element into their original positions. When removing the above, we recommend replacing the flange gasket.
Periodical maintenance
To ensure the best performance from this appliance, descale the heating element once every two years. If you prefer not to use special descaling acids for this operation, simply crumble away the lime deposit without damaging the heating element. Replace the magnesium anode every two years. To do so, dismount the heating element and unscrew the anod from the support bracket.
Bipolar safety reactivation
If the water overheats, a thermal switch complying with CEI-EN regulations, interrupts the electrical circuit on both supply phases to the heating element. In this case call your Technical Servicing Centre to reactivate it.
Safety valve
In those models equipped with a safety valve with a lever, the latter can be used, by lifting it up, to: - empty out the appliance, if necessary, - check on a regular basis (every month) that the valve is operating correctly. 9
GB How to drain water out
Before removing the valve, it is important to check that the water heater has been switched off long enough for the water inside to cool down. Flush the valve with water to remove any deposit of salts. The valve can be removed and reattached by use of a wrench. PLEASE DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE WATER HEATER ON YOUR OWN. WE RECOMMEND ONLY TRAINED SERVICE TECHNICIAN/PLUMBER FOR THE TASK.
Useful information
If no hot water is supplied from the taps, check that the water and electrical connections comply to the specifications as indicated and dismount the thermostat to check the phase continuity between the terminals and the relevant fastons.If there is no continuity, probably the two-pole safety switch has been activated (see paragraph on periodic maintenance). If the appliance is heating water but the LED does not light up, the LED may be faulty. For the water heater’s galvanic protection system to function properly. The permanent hardness of the water should not be less then 12° F. During the normal functioning of the appliance, the connections could become hot.
Use instructions (user) Starting the appliance
Press the two-pole switch to switch ON the appliance, or just supply the electrical power to the appliance. The LED remains ON during heating. For models which are not fitted with a switch, provide electrical power by turning the control knob according the symbols.
Adjusting the operating temperature
In models with the temperature regulation knob, the water temperature may be adjusted by rotating the external knob connected to the thermostat. Rotate the knob according to the marking on the control panel to increase or decrease the setting temperature.
Anti-freeze function The data and specifications indicated are not binding and the Producer reserves the right to carry out any modifications that may be required without prior notice or replacement. WARNING! For those nations that have taken on European norm EN 1487:2000, the pressure safety device provided with the product does not comply with national norms. According to the norm, the device must have a maximum pressure of 0.7MPa (7 bar) and have at least: a cut-off valve, a non-return valve, a control mechanism for the nonreturn valve, a safety valve and a water pressure shut-off device. This product confirms to EU Directive 2002/96/EC. The symbol of the crossed waste paper basket on the appliance indicates that at the end of its working life the product should be disposed of separately from normal domestic household rubbish, it must be disposed of at a waste disposal centre with dedicated facilities for electric and electronic appliances or returned to the retailer when a new replacement product is purchased. The user is responsible for the disposal of the product at the end of its life at an appropriate waste disposal centre. The waste disposal centre (using special treatment and recycling processes effectively dismantles and disposes of the appliance) helps to protect the environment by recycling the material from which the product is made. For further information about waste disposal systems visit your local waste disposal centre or the retailer from which the product was purchased. 10
Related Documents
Section 3 Bop Chap.09 Hvac System (new).pdf
October 2019 59
Chap09
July 2020 2
Chap09
November 2019 5
Solutions Chap09
November 2019 1
Bop
May 2020 42
Bop
November 2019 46More Documents from ""
Section 3 Bop Chap.09 Hvac System (new).pdf
October 2019 59
Aporte 1.docx
December 2019 0